BR112014024259B1 - COMPENSATION FIXABLE TO AN ANUS OF A FIXING INSTRUMENT AND CLAMPING ASSEMBLY FOR USE WITH A FIXING INSTRUMENT - Google Patents

Abstract

tissue thickness compensator comprising tissue ingrowth features in various embodiments, a compensator may be attachable to an anvil of a fixation instrument. the compensator may comprise a support layer configured to be attached to the anvil and a frame attached to the support layer. in at least one embodiment, the frame may comprise a plurality of frame layers comprised of a biocompatible material and a plurality of cavities, wherein the layers and cavities may define a matrix favorable to tissue and cell ingrowth.

Description

BACKGROUND

[0001] The present invention relates to surgical instruments and, in various embodiments, to surgical cutting and stapling instruments and staple cartridges thereof that are designed to cut and staple tissue.

SUMMARY

[0002] The following is a non-exhaustive list of embodiments of the present invention that are or can be claimed. 1. Compensator attachable to an anvil of a clamping instrument, wherein the anvil includes a forming surface, and the compensator comprising:

[0003] a support portion configured to be attached to the anvil.

[0004] a frame fixed to the support layer, the frame comprising:

[0005] a plurality of frame layers comprised of a biocompatible material; and

[0006] a plurality of cavities, the layers and cavities defining a matrix favorable to the ingrowth of tissue and cells. 2. Compensator according to embodiment 1, wherein each frame layer is comprised of a web of fibers. 3. Compensator according to embodiment 1 or embodiment 2, wherein the plurality of frame layers comprise a first layer and a second layer, the first layer comprising a first fiber pattern and the second layer comprising a second pattern. of fibers, and the first fiber pattern is different from the second fiber pattern. 4. A compensator according to any of the foregoing embodiments, wherein the plurality of frame layers comprise a first layer and a second layer, the first layer comprising fibers oriented in a first direction, the second layer comprising fibers oriented in a first direction. a second direction, and the first direction being oblique to the second direction. 5. A buffer according to any of the foregoing embodiments, further comprising a drug contained in the plurality of frame layers. 6. Compensator according to any of the foregoing embodiments, wherein the plurality of frame layers comprise a first layer and a second layer, wherein the first layer is comprised of a first material and the second layer is comprised of a second material, and the first material being different from the second material. 7. A buffer according to any of the foregoing embodiments, wherein the plurality of frame layers comprise a first layer and a second layer, wherein a first drug is absorbed in the first layer and a second drug is absorbed in the second layer, and being that the first drug is different from the second drug. 8. Compensator according to any of the foregoing embodiments, wherein the frame comprises an external surface, and each cavity comprises an opening in the external surface. 9. Compensator attachable to an anvil of a clamping instrument, wherein the anvil includes a forming surface, and the compensator comprising:

[0007] a fixing layer configured to be fixed to the anvil;

[0008] a structural matrix fixed to the fixing layer, the structural matrix comprising:

[0009] a plurality of matrix layers comprised of a biocompatible material; and

[00010] a plurality of wells, the matrix layers and wells defining a structural support favorable to tissue and cell ingrowth. 10. Compensator according to embodiment 9, wherein each matrix layer is comprised of a web of fibers. 11. Compensator according to embodiment 9 or embodiment 10, wherein the plurality of matrix layers comprise a first layer and a second layer, the first layer comprising a first fiber pattern and the second layer comprising a second pattern. of fibers, and the first fiber pattern is different from the second fiber pattern. 12. Compensator of any of embodiments 9 to 11, wherein the plurality of matrix layers comprises a first layer and a second layer, the first layer comprising fibers oriented in a first direction, the second layer comprising fibers oriented in a direction. a second direction, and the first direction being oblique to the second direction. 13. The buffer of any one of embodiments 9 to 12, further comprising a drug contained in the plurality of matrix layers. 14. Compensator of any of embodiments 9 to 13, wherein the plurality of matrix layers comprises a first layer and a second layer, wherein the first layer is comprised of a first material and the second layer is comprised of a second material, and the first material being different from the second material. 15. The buffer of any of embodiments 9 to 14, wherein the plurality of matrix layers comprises a first layer and a second layer, wherein a first drug is absorbed in the first layer and a second drug is absorbed in the second layer, and being that the first drug is different from the second drug. 16. Compensator of any one of embodiments 9 to 15, wherein the structural matrix comprises an outer surface, and each cavity comprises an opening in the outer surface. 17. Stapling kit for use with a clamping instrument, characterized in that the stapling kit comprises:

[00011] an anvil comprising a forming surface;

[00012] a compensator comprising:

[00013] a support layer attached to the anvil;

[00014] a frame fixed to the support layer, the frame comprising:

[00015] a plurality of frame layers comprising a biocompatible material;

[00016] a drug impregnated in the framework layers; and

[00017] a plurality of cavities, the layers and cavities defining a matrix favorable to the ingrowth of tissue and cells.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[00018] The features and advantages of this invention, and the manner of achieving them, will become more apparent and the invention itself will be better understood by reference to the following description of embodiments of the invention, obtained in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, being that:

[00019] Figure 1 is a cross-sectional view of a surgical instrument modality;

[00020] Figure 1A is a perspective view of an embodiment of an implantable staple cartridge;

[00021] Figures 1B to 1E illustrate portions of an end actuator that grips and staples tissue with an implantable staple cartridge;

[00022] Figure 2 is a partial cross-sectional side view of another end actuator coupled to a portion of a surgical instrument with the end actuator supporting a surgical staple cartridge and with its anvil in an open position;

[00023] Figure 3 is another side view in partial cross-section of the end actuator of Figure 2 in a closed position;

[00024] Figure 4 is another side view in partial cross-section of the end actuator of Figures 2 and 3 as the knife bar begins to advance through the end actuator;

[00025] Figure 5 is another side view in partial cross-section of the end actuator of Figures 2 to 4 with the knife bar partially advanced therethrough;

[00026] Figure 6 is a perspective view of an alternative staple cartridge embodiment installed in a surgical stapling and cutting device;

[00027] Figure 7 is a top view of the surgical staple cartridge and an elongated channel of the device shown in Figure 6;

[00028] Figure 8 is a top view of another embodiment of surgical staple cartridge installed in an elongated channel of an end actuator;

[00029] Figure 9 is a bottom view of an anvil;

[00030] Figure 10 is a partial perspective view of a plurality of staples forming a portion of a row of staples;

[00031] Figure 11 is another partial perspective view of the staple line of Figure 10 with the staples thereof after being formed by contacting the anvil of the surgical cutting and stapling device;

[00032] Figure 12 is a partial perspective view of alternative staples forming a portion of another row of staples;

[00033] Figure 13 is a partial perspective view of alternative staples forming a portion of another row of staples;

[00034] Figure 14 is a partial perspective view of alternative staples forming a portion of another staple line embodiment;

[00035] Figure 15 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator that supports a staple cartridge;

[00036] Figure 16 is a cross-sectional view of the elongated channel portion of the end actuator of Figure 15 after the implantable staple cartridge body portion and the staples have been removed therefrom;

[00037] Figure 17 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator supporting another staple cartridge;

[00038] Figures 18A to 18D show a diagram of the deformation of a surgical staple positioned in the body of a retractable staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment;

[00039] Figure 19A is a diagram illustrating a staple positioned in the body of a collapsible staple cartridge;

[00040] Figure 19B is a diagram illustrating the collapsible staple cartridge body of Figure 19A being deformed by an anvil;

[00041] Figure 19C is a diagram illustrating the collapsible staple cartridge body of Figure 19A being further deformed by the anvil;

[00042] Figure 19D is a diagram illustrating the staple of Figure 19A in a fully formed configuration and the collapsible staple cartridge of Figure 19A in a fully deformed condition;

[00043] Figure 20 is a diagram depicting a staple positioned against a surface of the staple cartridge holder and illustrating the potential relative movement between the staple and the surface;

[00044] Figure 21 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge holder surface comprising a slot, or recess, configured to stabilize the staple base of Figure 20;

[00045] Figure 22 is a cross-sectional view of a clamp comprising an overmolded crown and a slot, or recess, configured to receive a portion of the crown according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[00046] Figure 23 is a top view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment comprising staples inserted into the body of the retractable staple cartridge;

[00047] Figure 24 is an elevation view of the staple cartridge of Figure 23;

[00048] Figure 25 is an elevational view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment that comprises a protective layer around staples positioned in the body of a retractable staple cartridge;

[00049] Figure 26 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 25 taken along line 26-26 in Figure 25;

[00050] Figure 27 is an elevational view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment comprising staples extending at least partially out of the body of a retractable staple cartridge and a protective layer around the body. the staple cartridge;

[00051] Figure 28 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 27 along line 28-28 in Figure 27;

[00052] Figure 29 is a partial, detached view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment comprising staples at least partially inserted into a retractable staple cartridge body, the staples being at least partially positioned in a void space the staple cavity in the staple cartridge body;

[00053] Figure 30 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 29 along line 30-30 in Figure 29;

[00054] Figure 31 is a partially broken away view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment;

[00055] Figure 32 is a partially broken away view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment comprising staples at least partially inserted into a retractable staple cartridge body and an alignment die connecting and aligning the staples to one another. in relation to others;

[00056] Figure 33 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 32 along line 33-33 in Figure 32;

[00057] Figure 34 is a partial cutaway view of an inner layer of a compressible staple cartridge body;

[00058] Figure 35 is a diagram illustrating the inner layer of Figure 34 compressed between a transfer plate and a backing plate;

[00059] Figure 36 is a diagram illustrating staples being inserted into the compressed inner layer of Figure 35;

[00060] Figure 37 is a diagram of the backing plate of Figure 35 being removed from the inner layer;

[00061] Figure 38 is a diagram of a subassembly comprising the inner layer of Figure 34 and the staples of Figure 36 being inserted into an outer layer;

[00062] Figure 39 is a diagram illustrating the outer layer of Figure 38 being sealed to form a sealed staple cartridge;

[00063] Figure 40 is a cross-sectional view of the sealed staple cartridge of Figure 39;

[00064] Figure 41 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge and a staple cartridge channel according to at least one embodiment;

[00065] Figure 42 is a diagram illustrating a portion of the staple cartridge of Figure 41 in a deformed state;

[00066] Figure 43 is an elevation view of an end actuator of a surgical stapler comprising an anvil in an open position and a staple cartridge positioned in a staple cartridge channel;

[00067] Figure 44 is an elevation view of the end actuator of Figure 43 illustrating the anvil in a closed position and the staple cartridge compressed between the anvil and the staple cartridge groove;

[00068] Figure 45 is an elevation view of the end actuator of Figure 43 illustrating the staple cartridge of Figure 43 positioned in the staple cartridge groove in an alternate manner;

[00069] Figure 46 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapler comprising a compressible staple cartridge positioned in a staple cartridge groove and a piece of reinforcing material attached to an anvil;

[00070] Figure 47 is a cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 46 illustrating the anvil in a closed position;

[00071] Figure 48 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end actuator of a surgical stapler comprising a staple cartridge comprising a water impermeable layer;

[00072] Figure 49 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end actuator of a surgical stapler;

[00073] Figure 50 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end actuator of a surgical stapler comprising a stepped anvil and a staple cartridge comprising a stepped cartridge body;

[00074] Figure 51 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end actuator of a surgical stapler;

[00075] Figure 52 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end actuator of a surgical stapler comprising inclined tissue cutting surfaces;

[00076] Figure 53 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end actuator of a surgical stapler comprising inclined tissue cutting surfaces;

[00077] Figure 54 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of a surgical stapler end actuator comprising a support insert configured to support a staple cartridge;

[00078] Figure 55 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end actuator of a surgical stapler comprising a staple cartridge comprising a plurality of compressible layers;

[00079] Figure 56 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end actuator of a surgical stapler comprising a staple cartridge comprising a stepped compressible cartridge body;

[00080] Figure 57 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end actuator of a surgical stapler comprising a staple cartridge comprising a stepped compressible cartridge body;

[00081] Figure 58 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end actuator of a surgical stapler comprising a staple cartridge comprising a curved tissue-contacting surface;

[00082] Figure 59 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end actuator of a surgical stapler comprising a staple cartridge having an inclined tissue-contacting surface;

[00083] Figure 60 is a cross-sectional view of a compressible staple cartridge comprising staples and at least one drug stored therein;

[00084] Figure 61 is a diagram illustrating the compressible staple cartridge of Figure 60 after being compressed and the staples contained therein are deformed;

[00085] Figure 62 is a cutaway view of a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment;

[00086] Figure 63 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 62.

[00087] Figure 64 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge deployed according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[00088] Figure 65 is a cross-sectional view of the deployed staple cartridge of Figure 64;

[00089] Figure 66 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a staple cartridge comprising deformable elements extending from an outer layer of the staple cartridge;

[00090] Figure 67 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a staple cartridge comprising an outer layer of the staple cartridge being mounted to an inner layer;

[00091] Figure 68 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of a staple cartridge comprising a plurality of staples, a compressible layer and a layer of bandages;

[00092] Figure 69 is a perspective view of the bandage layer of Figure 68;

[00093] Figure 70 is a perspective view of a bandage separated from the bandage layer of Figure 68 and a staple aligned with a groove in the bandage;

[00094] Figure 71 is a perspective view of two connected bandages of the bandage layer of Figure 68;

[00095] Figure 72 is a perspective view of a bandage support frame of the bandage layer of Figure 68 being removed from the separate bandages;

[00096] Figure 73 is an exploded perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a compressible staple cartridge comprising staples therein and a system for driving the staples against an anvil;

[00097] Figure 73A is a partial cutaway view of an alternative embodiment of the staple cartridge of Figure 73;

[00098] Figure 74 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 73.

[00099] Figure 75 is an elevation view of a slider configured to traverse the staple cartridge of Figure 73 and move the staples toward the anvil;

[000100] Figure 76 is a diagram of a clamp driver that can be lifted towards the anvil by the slider of Figure 75;

[000101] Figure 77 is an exploded view of a staple cartridge, according to at least one alternative embodiment, comprising staples positioned on staple drivers;

[000102] Figure 78 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 77 positioned in a staple cartridge groove;

[000103] Figure 79 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 77 illustrating an anvil moved to a closed position and staples contained in the staple cartridge deformed by the anvil;

[000104] Figure 80 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 77 illustrating the staples moved upward toward the anvil;

[000105] Figure 81 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a staple cartridge comprising belts connecting the flexible sides of the staple cartridge;

[000106] Figure 82 is a perspective view of a slider and set of cutting elements;

[000107] Figure 83 is a diagram of the slider and cutting element assembly of Figure 82 being used to lift the staples from the staple cartridge of Figure 77;

[000108] Figure 84 is a diagram illustrating a slider configured to engage and lift clamps toward an anvil and a locking system configured to selectively allow the slider to move distally;

[000109] Figures 85A to 85C illustrate the advancement of a staple being inserted into a crown of staples;

[000110] Figure 86 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a support compartment or retainer;

[000111] Figure 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of a compressible staple cartridge according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000112] Figure 88 is a diagram illustrating the staple cartridge of Figure 87 in an deployed condition;

[000113] Figure 89 is a partial cutaway view of a compressible staple cartridge according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000114] Figure 90 is a partial cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 89;

[000115] Figure 91 is a diagram illustrating the staple cartridge of Figure 89 in an deployed condition;

[000116] Figure 92 is a partial cross-sectional view of a collapsible staple cartridge according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000117] Figure 93 is a partial cutaway view of a retractable staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment comprising a plurality of retractable elements;

[000118] Figure 94 is a perspective view of a retractable element of Figure 93 in a non-retractable state;

[000119] Figure 95 is a perspective view of the retractable element of Figure 94 in a retractable state;

[000120] Figure 96A is a partial cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a gripper, a staple cartridge groove in position opposite the jaw, and a staple cartridge positioned in the cartridge groove. of clamps, the gripper comprising a retaining die attached thereto;

[000121] Figure 96B is a partial cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 96A illustrating the jaw being moved towards the staple cartridge groove, with the staple cartridge being compressed by the anvil and retaining die, and a staple that extends at least partially through the fabric intermediate the retention die and staple cartridge;

[000122] Figure 96C is a partial cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 96A illustrating the jaw in an end position and the retaining die engaged with the clamp of Figure 96B;

[000123] Figure 96D is a partial cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 96A illustrating the clamp and staple cartridge groove being spaced away from the deployed staple cartridge and retaining die;

[000124] Figure 97 is a perspective view of a retaining aperture of a retaining die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising a plurality of retaining members configured to engage a leg of the fastener extending through the aperture. ;

[000125] Figure 98 is a perspective view of a retaining aperture of a retaining die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising six retaining elements;

[000126] Figure 99 is a perspective view of a retaining aperture of a retaining die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising eight retaining elements;

[000127] Figure 100 is a perspective view of a retaining aperture of a retaining die in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment comprising a plurality of retaining members configured to engage a fastener leg extending through the aperture. ;

[000128] Figure 101 is a perspective view of a retaining aperture of a retaining die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising six retaining elements;

[000129] Figure 102 is a perspective view of a retaining aperture of a retaining die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising eight retaining elements;

[000130] Figure 103 is a perspective view of a retaining aperture of a retaining die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising a plurality of retaining elements that have been stamped from a sheet of metal;

[000131] Figure 104 is a perspective view of a holding aperture of a holding die according to at least one alternative embodiment comprising a plurality of apertures extending around the perimeter of the holding apertures;

[000132] Figure 105 is a top view of a retention aperture of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000133] Figure 106 is a top view of a retention aperture of a retention die according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000134] Figure 107 is a top view of a retaining aperture of a retaining die according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000135] Figure 108 is a top view of a retaining aperture of a retaining die according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000136] Figure 109 is a top view of a retaining aperture of a retaining die according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000137] Figure 110 is a top view of a retaining aperture of a retaining die comprising a retaining tab extending into the retaining aperture according to at least one embodiment;

[000138] Figure 111 is a top view of a retaining aperture of a retaining die comprising a retaining tab extending into the retaining aperture according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000139] Figure 112 is a perspective view of a fastening system comprising a plurality of clamps, a retention die engaged with the clamps and an alignment die configured to align the clamps;

[000140] Figure 113 is a perspective view of the retention matrix of Figure 112;

[000141] Figure 114 is a perspective view of the alignment matrix of Figure 112;

[000142] Figure 115 is a partial top view of the retaining die of Figure 112 engaged with the clamps of Figure 112;

[000143] Figure 116 is a partial bottom view of the retaining die of Figure 112 engaged with the clamps of Figure 112;

[000144] Figure 117 is a partial elevation view of the fastening system of Figure 112;

[000145] Figure 118 is a partial perspective view of the fastening system of Figure 112;

[000146] Figure 119 is a partial cross-sectional view of the retaining die of Figure 112 engaged with the clamps of Figure 112;

[000147] Figure 120 is a partial cross-sectional view of the fastening system of Figure 112;

[000148] Figure 121 is a perspective view of the fastening system of Figure 112 which further comprises protective caps mounted on the legs of the clamps;

[000149] Figure 122 is a bottom perspective view of the arrangement of the fastening system of Figure 121;

[000150] Figure 123 is a partial perspective view of the arrangement of the fastening system of Figure 121;

[000151] Figure 124 is a partial cross-sectional view of the arrangement of the fastening system of Figure 121;

[000152] Figure 125 is an elevational view of an end actuator according to at least one embodiment comprising a jaw in an open position, a retaining die and a plurality of protective caps positioned on the jaw, and a cartridge of staples positioned in a staple cartridge channel;

[000153] Figure 126 is an elevation view of the end actuator of Figure 125 in a closed position;

[000154] Figure 127 is an elevation view of the end actuator of Figure 125 in a firing position;

[000155] Figure 128 is an elevation view of the retaining die and protective caps of Figure 125 mounted on the staple cartridge of Figure 125;

[000156] Figure 129 is a detail view of the arrangement of Figure 128;

[000157] Figure 130 is an elevation view of the end actuator of Figure 125 illustrating the gripper in an open position with thinner fabric positioned between the retention die and the staple cartridge;

[000158] Figure 131 is an elevation view of the end actuator of Figure 125 illustrating the gripper in a closed position against the thinner tissue of Figure 130;

[000159] Figure 132 is an elevation view of the end actuator of Figure 125 illustrating the gripper in a firing position to capture the thinner tissue of Figure 130 between the retention die and the staple cartridge;

[000160] Figure 133 is an elevation view of the retaining die and protective caps of Figure 125 mounted on the staple cartridge of Figure 125 with the thin tissue of Figure 130 positioned therebetween;

[000161] Figure 134 is a detail view of the arrangement of Figure 133;

[000162] Figure 135 is a cross-sectional view of a protective cap positioned over the tip of a clamp leg according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000163] Figure 136 is a perspective view of a plurality of protective caps inserted into a sheet of material;

[000164] Figure 137 is a perspective view of a gripper comprising a plurality of recesses configured to receive a plurality of protective caps;

[000165] Figure 138 is a detail view of a portion of a gripper comprising a blade covering protective caps positioned on the grip of Figure 137;

[000166] Figure 139 is a cross-sectional view of a protective cap positioned over an end of a clamp leg according to at least one alternative embodiment, the protective cap comprising an inner forming surface;

[000167] Figure 140 is another cross-sectional view of the protective cap of Figure 139 illustrating the clamp leg being deformed against the forming surface;

[000168] Figure 141 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a retention matrix comprising a plurality of connected matrix elements;

[000169] Figure 142 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a retention matrix comprising a plurality of connected matrix elements;

[000170] Figure 143 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a retention matrix comprising a plurality of connected matrix elements;

[000171] Figure 144 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a set of retention matrices comprising a plurality of connected matrix elements;

[000172] Figure 145 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a retention matrix comprising a plurality of connected matrix elements;

[000173] Figure 146 is a partial exploded view of a gripper comprising a retaining die that includes a compressible cap;

[000174] Figure 147 is a detail view of the retention matrix of Figure 146;

[000175] Figure 148 is a partial cross-sectional view of an attachment system comprising a retention matrix that includes a compressible layer and a plurality of cells encapsulating one or more drugs;

[000176] Figure 149 is a diagram illustrating clamp legs that pierce the cells of Figure 148 as they are engaged with the retention die;

[000177] Figure 150 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fastening system comprising a retention matrix that includes a compressible layer;

[000178] Figure 151 is an elevational view of a fastener cartridge insert assembly comprising a housing, a first fastener cartridge and a second fastener cartridge;

[000179] Figure 152 is an elevation view of an end actuator of a surgical stapler comprising a first jaw and a second jaw, the second jaw being illustrated in an open configuration;

[000180] Figure 153 is an elevation view of the end actuator of Figure 152 illustrating the second jaw in a closed configuration and the fastener cartridge insert assembly of Figure 151 being used to load the first jaw with the first cartridge and the second gripper with the second cartridge;

[000181] Figure 154 is an elevation view of the loaded end actuator of Figure 153 illustrating the cartridge insert assembly removed from the end actuator, the second jaw in an open configuration once more, and the fabric in an intermediate position between the first claw and the second claw;

[000182] Figure 155 is an elevation view of the loaded end actuator of Figure 154 in a firing configuration;

[000183] Figure 156 is an elevation view of the first cartridge and second cartridge in an deployed condition;

[000184] Figure 157 is an elevation view of the end actuator of Figure 152 illustrating a portion of the first cartridge still engaged with the first jaw in accordance with at least one embodiment;

[000185] Figure 158 is an elevational view of an alternative embodiment of a fastener cartridge insert assembly comprising a housing, a first fastener cartridge and a second fastener cartridge;

[000186] Figure 159 is an elevation view of the fastener cartridge insert assembly of Figure 158 being used to load a first jaw of an end actuator with the first cartridge and a second jaw with the second cartridge;

[000187] Figure 160 is a cross-sectional view of the loaded end actuator of Figure 159;

[000188] Figure 161 is a perspective view of a surgical stapler comprising a lower jaw and an upper jaw according to at least one illustrated embodiment with portions of the surgical stapler removed;

[000189] Figure 162 is a perspective view of the surgical stapler of Figure 161 with the upper jaw removed;

[000190] Figure 163 is a perspective view of a sliding anvil system of the upper gripper of the surgical stapler of Figure 161 comprising a first sliding anvil and a second sliding anvil;

[000191] Figure 164 is an end view of the sliding anvil system of Figure 163;

[000192] Figure 165 is a top view of the sliding anvil system of Figure 163;

[000193] Figure 166 is a diagram illustrating the sliding anvil system of Figure 163 in a non-triggered condition;

[000194] Figure 167 is a diagram illustrating the first sliding anvil of the sliding anvil system of Figure 163 in a non-firing position and clamps positioned on the lower jaw in a non-installed position;

[000195] Figure 168 is a diagram illustrating the clamps on the lower jaw in an installed configuration and the first sliding anvil of Figure 167 being pulled proximally to deform a first group of legs of the clamps;

[000196] Figure 169 is a diagram illustrating the first group of staples of Figure 168 fully deformed;

[000197] Figure 170 is a diagram illustrating the second sliding anvil of the sliding anvil system of Figure 163 being pushed distally to deform a second set of legs of the clamps;

[000198] Figure 171 is a partial perspective view of an anvil comprising a plurality of forming pockets in at least one embodiment;

[000199] Figure 172 is an end cross-sectional view of the anvil of Figure 171;

[000200] Figure 173 is a diagram illustrating a first step in manufacturing the forming pockets of Figure 171;

[000201] Figure 174 is a diagram illustrating a second step in manufacturing the forming pockets of Figure 171;

[000202] Figure 175 is a top view of the arrangement of the anvil forming pockets of Figure 171;

[000203] Figure 176 is a diagram illustrating a first step of a manufacturing process to produce an anvil;

[000204] Figure 177 is a diagram illustrating a second step in the manufacturing process of Figure 176;

[000205] Figure 178 is a diagram illustrating a third step in the manufacturing process of Figure 176.

[000206] Figure 179 is a front left perspective view of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument with a handle portion that includes a link-actuated automatic retraction mechanism and a ratchet-actuated manual retraction mechanism;

[000207] Figure 180 is a rear right perspective view of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 179 with a portion of the elongated shaft cut out and the right half of the cable compartment housing removed to expose a self-moving retract mechanism end of firing and a manual firing retraction mechanism;

[000208] Figure 181 is an exploded view in right rear perspective of the handle portion and an elongated shaft of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 179;

[000209] Figure 182 is a rear right perspective view of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 31 with the right half of the housing and the outer portions of the implemented portion removed to expose the closing and firing mechanisms in an initial state;

[000210] Figure 183 is a right side elevational view of the partially disassembled surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 182;

[000211] Figure 184 is a rear right perspective view of the partially disassembled surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 182 with a closed and secured closing mechanism and the side latch firing mechanism completing a first stroke and with a locking mechanism. manual retraction removed to expose a distal connection of the attached rack that triggers automatic retraction of the trigger mechanism;

[000212] Figure 185 is a rear right perspective view of the partially disassembled surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 183 with the side latch trigger mechanism disengaged and the distal connection approaching automatic retraction;

[000213] Figure 186 is a left side elevation view of the partially disassembled surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 183 in an initial state of the open end actuator mechanism and engaged anti-return;

[000214] Figure 187 is a detail view from the left side of the right half of the housing and an anti-return release lever of the cable portion of Figure 186;

[000215] Figure 188 is a left side elevational detail view of the disassembled surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 179 with the closing trigger attached, the trigger trigger making a final stroke and the distal connection positioned to trigger automatic retraction;

[000216] Figure 189 is a left side elevational detail of the disassembled surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 188 immediately after the distal connection has been activated and the anti-return release lever is locked forward, allowing the connected rack to retract;

[000217] Figure 190 is a disassembled right perspective view of the intermediate and rear gears and the manual retraction lever and ratchet pawl of a manual retraction mechanism of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 179;

[000218] Figure 191 is a right perspective view of the manual retract mechanism of Figure 190 with the manual retract lever partially cut away to expose a smaller diameter ratchet gear in the rear gear that engages the ratchet pawl;

[000219] Figure 192 is a left side elevational view partially disassembled of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 179 with the anti-return mechanism engaged with a fully fired connected rack that is disconnected from a tension/compression spring combination before activating the manual retraction lever of Figure 190;

[000220] Figure 193 is a partially disassembled left side elevation view of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 192 with hidden portions of the anti-return release lever, rear gear, and hand-firing release lever shown in dashed line;

[000221] Figure 194 is a partially disassembled left side elevation view of the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 193 after the activation of the manual trigger release lever has manually retracted the connecting rack;

[000222] Figure 195 is a partially disassembled left elevation view of the surgical cutting and stapling instrument of Figure 194 with the attached rack omitted, representing the manual trigger release lever disengaging the anti-return mechanism;

[000223] Figure 196 is a left side detail view of an alternate anti-return release lever and cable compartment for the surgical stapling and cutting instrument of Figure 179;

[000224] Figure 197 is a disassembled view in left perspective of the alternate anti-return release lever, rear gear shaft and self-retracting eccentric wheel of Figure 196;

[000225] Figure 198 is a right side elevational view of the alternative anti-return release mechanism of Figure 196 with the rack attached in a retracted position and the anti-return release lever located proximally with the anti-return plate engaged with the stem fastener discharge;

[000226] Figure 198A is a right side elevational detail view of the rear gear, self-retracting eccentric wheel and most distal connection of Figure 198;

[000227] Figure 199 is a right side elevational view of the anti-return release mechanism of Figure 198 after a first firing stroke;

[000228] Figure 199A is a right side elevational detail view of the rear gear, the self-retracting eccentric wheel and the second connection of Figure 199;

[000229] Figure 200 is a right side elevational view of the anti-return release mechanism of Figure 199 after a second firing stroke;

[000230] Figure 200A is a right side elevational detail view of the rear gear, the self-retracting eccentric wheel and the third connection of Figure 200;

[000231] Figure 201 is a right side elevational detail view of the anti-return release mechanism of Figure 200 after a third and final stroke;

[000232] Figure 201A is a right side elevational detail view of the rear gear, self-retracting eccentric wheel and fourth most proximal connection of Figure 201;

[000233] Figure 202 is a right side elevational view of the automatic release mechanism of Figure 201 after an additional firing stroke causes the automatic retract cam wheel to slide distally and lock the anti-return release lever, disengaging the non-return mechanism;

[000234] Figure 203 is a front left perspective view of an open staple application assembly with a right half portion of a replaceable staple cartridge included in a staple chute;

[000235] Figure 204 is an exploded perspective view of the staple application assembly of Figure 203 with a complete replaceable staple cartridge and a non-hinging shank configuration;

[000236] Figure 205 is a perspective view of a two-piece firing and cutting bar ("E-beam") of the clamping assembly of Figure 203;

[000237] Figure 206 is a perspective view of a gable body slider of a staple cartridge of a staple application assembly;

[000238] Figure 207 is a left side elevational view taken in longitudinal cross-section along a centerline 207-207 of the clamping structure of Figure 203;

[000239] Figure 208 is a perspective view of the open stapling structure of Figure 203 without the replaceable staple cartridge, a portion of the staple groove near an intermediate pin of the firing bar and cut into two pieces, and without a distal portion of a staple channel;

[000240] Figure 209 is a front elevational view taken in cross-section along line 209-209 of the staple application assembly of Figure 203 depicting the internal staple drivers of the staple cartridge and portions of the firing and cutting bar in two pieces;

[000241] Figure 210 is a left side elevational view taken generally along the longitudinal axis of line 207-207 of a closed clamping assembly of Figure 203 to include central contact points between the gable glider and two-piece knife, but also shifted sideways to show staples and staple drivers inside the staple cartridge;

[000242] Figure 211 is a left side elevational detail view of the staple application assembly of Figure 210 with the two-piece knife slightly more retracted than typical for staple cartridge replacement;

[000243] Figure 212 is a left side elevational detail view of the staple application assembly of Figure 211 with the two-piece knife starting to fire, corresponding to the configuration shown in Figure 210;

[000244] Figure 213 is a left side elevational cross-sectional view of the closed clamping assembly of Figure 210 after the two-piece firing bar has fired in distal position;

[000245] Figure 214 is a left side cross-sectional view in elevation of the closed staple application assembly of Figure 213 after staple cartridge unloading and knife retraction into two pieces;

[000246] Figure 215 is a left side elevational cross-sectional detail view of the clamping assembly of Figure 214 with the two-piece knife dropped into a locking position;

[000247] Figure 216 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator for use with a surgical stapling instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment of the invention;

[000248] Figure 217 is a partially exploded view of the staple cartridge of Figure 216;

[000249] Figure 218 is a fully exploded view of the staple cartridge of Figure 216;

[000250] Figure 219 is another exploded view of the staple cartridge of Figure 216 without a warp covering the fabric thickness compensator;

[000251] Figure 220 is a perspective view of a cartridge body, or support portion, of the staple cartridge of Figure 216;

[000252] Figure 221 is a top perspective view of a movable slider within the staple cartridge of Figure 216 for positioning staple cartridge staples;

[000253] Figure 222 is a bottom perspective view of the slider of Figure 221;

[000254] Figure 223 is an elevation view of the slider of Figure 221;

[000255] Figure 224 is a top perspective view of a driver configured to support one or more staples and to be lifted up by the slider of Figure 221 to eject the staples from the staple cartridge;

[000256] Figure 225 is a bottom perspective view of the actuator of Figure 224;

[000257] Figure 226 is a housing configured to at least partially surround a compressible tissue thickness compensator of a staple cartridge;

[000258] Figure 227 is a partial cutaway view of a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible fabric thickness compensator illustrated with staples being moved from a non-fired position to a fired position during a first sequence;

[000259] Figure 228 is an elevation view of the staple cartridge of Figure 227;

[000260] Figure 229 is a detailed elevational view of the staple cartridge of Figure 227;

[000261] Figure 230 is a cross-sectional end view of the staple cartridge of Figure 227;

[000262] Figure 231 is a bottom view of the staple cartridge of Figure 227;

[000263] Figure 232 is a detailed bottom view of the staple cartridge of Figure 227;

[000264] Figure 233 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of an anvil in a closed position and a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator illustrated with staples being moved from an unfired to a non-fired position. a position triggered during a first sequence;

[000265] Figure 234 is another cross-sectional view of the anvil and staple cartridge of Figure 233 illustrating the anvil in an open position after the firing sequence has been completed;

[000266] Figure 235 is a partial detail view of the staple cartridge of Figure 233 illustrating the staples in an unfired position;

[000267] Figure 236 is an elevational cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible fabric thickness compensator illustrating the staples in an unfired position;

[000268] Figure 237 is a detail view of the staple cartridge of Figure 236;

[000269] Figure 238 is an elevational view of an anvil in an open position and a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator illustrating the staples in an unfired position;

[000270] Figure 239 is an elevational view of an anvil in a closed position and a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator illustrating the staples in an unfired position and tissue captured between the anvil and fabric thickness compensator;

[000271] Figure 240 is a detail view of the anvil and staple cartridge of Figure 239;

[000272] Figure 241 is an elevational view of an anvil in a closed position and a staple cartridge comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator illustrating the staples in an unfired position illustrating thicker tissue positioned between the anvil and the staple cartridge;

[000273] Figure 242 is a detail view of the anvil and staple cartridge of Figure 241;

[000274] Figure 243 is an elevational view of the anvil and staple cartridge of Figure 241 illustrating tissue having different thicknesses positioned between the anvil and staple cartridge;

[000275] Figure 244 is a detail view of the anvil and staple cartridge of Figure 241, as shown in Figure 243;

[000276] Figure 245 is a diagram illustrating a fabric thickness compensator that is compensating for different fabric thicknesses captured within different staples;

[000277] Figure 246 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator applying compressive pressure to one or more vessels that have been transected by a row of staples;

[000278] Figure 247 is a diagram illustrating a circumstance in which one or more clamps were improperly formed.

[000279] Figure 248 is a diagram illustrating a fabric thickness compensator that could compensate for improperly formed staples;

[000280] Figure 249 is a diagram illustrating a fabric thickness compensator positioned in a region of fabric cut by multiple rows of staples;

[000281] Figure 250 is a diagram illustrating tissue captured within a staple;

[000282] Figure 251 is a diagram illustrating fabric and a fabric thickness compensator captured within a staple;

[000283] Figure 252 is a diagram illustrating tissue captured within a staple;

[000284] Figure 253 is a diagram illustrating thick tissue and a tissue thickness compensator captured within a staple;

[000285] Figure 254 is a diagram illustrating thin tissue and a tissue thickness compensator captured within a staple;

[000286] Figure 255 is a diagram illustrating fabric having an intermediate thickness and a fabric thickness compensator captured within a staple;

[000287] Figure 256 is a diagram illustrating fabric having another intermediate thickness and a fabric thickness compensator captured within a staple;

[000288] Figure 257 is a diagram illustrating thick tissue and a tissue thickness compensator captured within a staple;

[000289] Figure 258 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument illustrating a firing bar and a staple firing slider in a retracted and unfired position;

[000290] Figure 259 is another partial cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 258 illustrating the trigger bar and staple trigger slider in a partially advanced position;

[000291] Figure 260 is a cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 258 illustrating the firing bar in a fully advanced or fired position;

[000292] Figure 261 is a cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 258 illustrating the firing bar in a retracted position after being fired and the staple firing slider left in its fully fired position;

[000293] Figure 262 is a detail view of the firing bar in the retracted position of Figure 261;

[000294] Figure 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument that includes a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator and staples at least partially positioned therein;

[000295] Figure 264 is another partial cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 263 illustrating the staples at least partially moved and/or rotated relative to an anvil positioned opposite the staple cartridge;

[000296] Figure 265 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000297] Figure 266 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end actuator according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000298] Figure 267 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end actuator according to another alternative embodiment;

[000299] Figure 268 is a perspective view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000300] Figure 269 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 268 illustrated in a flexed condition;

[000301] Figure 270 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 269 in a released condition;

[000302] Figure 271 is a perspective view of an end actuator comprising a fabric thickness compensating sock;

[000303] Figure 272 is a rear view of the fabric thickness compensating stocking in Figure 271;

[000304] Figure 273 is a perspective view of an end actuator comprising a plurality of tracks extending from a support portion and a fabric thickness compensator having a longitudinal cavity defined therein;

[000305] Figure 274 is a perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 273;

[000306] Figure 275 is a perspective view of an end actuator comprising a plurality of teeth extending from a support portion and a fabric thickness compensator engaged therewith;

[000307] Figure 276 is a perspective view of an anvil comprising a pocket arrangement according to at least one embodiment;

[000308] Figure 277 is a partial detail view of the anvil of Figure 276;

[000309] Figure 278 is a partial longitudinal cross-sectional view of the anvil of Figure 276;

[000310] Figure 279 is a cross-sectional view of the anvil of Figure 276;

[000311] Figure 280 is an elevational view of a fired staple comprising a substantially B-shaped configuration;

[000312] Figure 281 is an elevation view of a fired clamp comprising an inwardly deformed leg and an outwardly deformed leg;

[000313] Figure 282 is an elevational view of a fired clamp comprising both outwardly formed legs;

[000314] Figure 283 is a partial perspective view of a support portion of a staple cartridge comprising removable and/or displaceable staple leg guides;

[000315] Figure 284 is a partial cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 283 illustrating staples being installed from the staple cartridge;

[000316] Figure 285 is a detail view of the cross-sectional view of Figure 284 after the staple cartridge has been fired;

[000317] Figure 286 is an exploded view of a staple cartridge that includes a fabric thickness compensator comprising voids defined therein;

[000318] Figure 287 is a diagram illustrating the tissue thickness compensator of Figure 286 implanted against tissue;

[000319] Figure 288 is another diagram illustrating the tissue thickness compensator of Figure 286 implanted against tissue;

[000320] Figure 289 is a perspective cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising lateral retention elements extending from a support portion thereof, configured to hold a fabric thickness compensator in position;

[000321] Figure 290 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 289 being used to staple tissue;

[000322] Figure 291 is another cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 289 illustrating the support portion being spaced away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator;

[000323] Figure 292 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a staple cartridge comprising side retaining elements configured to secure a fabric thickness compensator to a support portion;

[000324] Figure 293 is a cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 292 being used to staple tissue;

[000325] Figure 294 is another cross-sectional view of the staple cartridge of Figure 292 illustrating the support portion being spaced away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator;

[000326] Figure 295 is a cross-sectional detail view of a retainer attaching a fabric thickness compensator to a support portion of a staple cartridge in accordance with at least one embodiment;

[000327] Figure 296 is a partial cutaway view of a staple cartridge comprising staple drivers having different heights according to at least one embodiment;

[000328] Figure 296A is a diagram illustrating the staple drivers of Figure 296 and staples having different unfired heights being supported thereon;

[000329] Figure 297 is a diagram illustrating a fabric thickness compensator comprising a different thickness, staple drivers having different heights, and staples having different unformed heights;

[000330] Figure 298 is a diagram illustrating the staples and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 297 implanted in a tissue;

[000331] Figure 299 is a partial cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a fabric thickness compensator comprising a different thickness according to at least one embodiment;

[000332] Figure 300 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument in an open configuration;

[000333] Figure 301 is a cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 300 illustrated in a partially fired configuration;

[000334] Figure 302 is a cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 300 illustrated in a reopened configuration;

[000335] Figure 303 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument comprising staple drivers having different heights and a contoured platform surface, according to at least one embodiment;

[000336] Figure 304 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument comprising staple drivers having different heights and a stepped platform surface according to at least one embodiment;

[000337] Figure 305 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge being loaded into an effector of a surgical stapling instrument using a staple cartridge applicator;

[000338] Figure 306 is a bottom perspective view of the staple cartridge applicator of Figure 305;

[000339] Figure 307 is a side view of the staple cartridge applicator of Figure 305 mounted to a staple cartridge;

[000340] Figure 308 is a cross-sectional view of the assembly of Figure 307;

[000341] Figure 309 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge applicator structure further including an upper fabric thickness compensator positioned on the top surface of the staple cartridge applicator according to at least one embodiment;

[000342] Figure 310 is an exploded view of the upper fabric thickness compensator and staple cartridge applicator of Figure 309;

[000343] Figure 310A is an exploded view of a staple cartridge applicator structure comprising a pulling member configured to remove an upper fabric thickness compensator adhered to the staple cartridge applicator;

[000344] Figure 311 is a partial exploded view of a staple cartridge applicator structure according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000345] Figure 312 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge applicator structure comprising an upper fabric thickness compensator that includes a plurality of retaining elements extending therefrom and a staple cartridge comprising a bottom fabric thickness compensator;

[000346] Figure 313 is an elevation view of the staple cartridge applicator structure of Figure 312 positioned within a staple cartridge channel and an anvil being closed over the staple cartridge applicator structure;

[000347] Figure 314 is an elevational view of the anvil of Figure 313 in a reopened position and the staple cartridge applicator of Figure 312 being removed from the end actuator;

[000348] Figure 314A is a cross-sectional view of the fabric positioned between the upper fabric thickness compensator and the lower fabric thickness compensator of Figure 312;

[000349] Figure 314B is a cross-sectional view illustrating the upper fabric thickness compensator and the lower fabric thickness compensator stapled to the fabric and cut by a cutting element;

[000350] Figure 315 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator being inserted into an anvil according to at least one embodiment;

[000351] Figure 316 is a cross-sectional view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 315;

[000352] Figure 317 is an exploded view of a tissue thickness compensator and anvil according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000353] Figure 318 is a perspective view of the staple cartridge applicator structure comprising an upper fabric thickness compensator configured to be attached to an anvil in accordance with at least one embodiment;

[000354] Figure 319 is an elevation view of the staple cartridge applicator frame of Figure 318 positioned within a staple cartridge groove and an anvil being moved toward the upper fabric thickness compensator;

[000355] Figure 320 illustrates the staple cartridge applicator of Figure 318 being removed from the end actuator after the upper fabric thickness compensator has been engaged with the anvil;

[000356] Figure 321 is an end cross-sectional view of the anvil being moved toward the upper fabric thickness compensator of Figure 318;

[000357] Figure 322 is an end cross-sectional view of the anvil engaged with the upper fabric thickness compensator;

[000358] Figure 323 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge that includes a segmentable tissue thickness compensator attached to a staple cartridge support portion by means of a plurality of fasteners;

[000359] Figure 324 is a cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 323 illustrating a firing member in a partially fired position;

[000360] Figure 325 is a cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 323 illustrating the support portion being moved away from the partially deployed tissue thickness compensator;

[000361] Figure 326 is a partial perspective view of the support portion of Figure 323;

[000362] Figure 327 is a perspective view of a staple-dispensing slider according to at least one embodiment;

[000363] Figure 328 is an elevation view of the slider of Figure 327;

[000364] Figure 329 is a perspective view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge that includes a tissue thickness compensator and a plurality of staple guides positioned on the tissue thickness compensator;

[000365] Figure 330 is a partial cross-sectional view of the fabric thickness compensator and staple guides of Figure 329 in an unfired configuration;

[000366] Figure 331 is a partial cross-sectional view of the fabric thickness compensator and staple guides of Figure 329 in a fired configuration;

[000367] Figure 332 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a fabric thickness compensator and a support portion according to at least one embodiment;

[000368] Figure 333 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fabric thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position;

[000369] Figure 334 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fabric thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

[000370] Figure 335 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fabric thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

[000371] Figure 336 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fabric thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

[000372] Figure 337 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fabric thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

[000373] Figure 338 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fabric thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

[000374] Figure 339 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fabric thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

[000375] Figure 340 is a detail view of a region surrounding a tip of the staple of Figure 339;

[000376] Figure 341 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fabric thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

[000377] Figure 342 is a detail view of a region surrounding a tip of the staple of Figure 341;

[000378] Figure 343 is a partial cross-sectional view of a fabric thickness compensator, a staple guide layer, and a staple in a non-fired position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

[000379] Figure 344 is a perspective view of a staple guide layer and a plurality of staples in an unfired position according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000380] Figure 345 is an end view of a tissue thickness compensator configured for use with a circular surgical stapler;

[000381] Figure 346 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator and circular surgical stapler of Figure 345;

[000382] Figure 347 is an end view of a tissue thickness compensator configured for use with a circular surgical stapler in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

[000383] Figure 348 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator and circular surgical stapler of Figure 347;

[000384] Figure 349 is an end view of a tissue thickness compensator configured for use with a circular surgical stapler;

[000385] Figure 350 is an end view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 349 in a partially expanded configuration;

[000386] Figure 351 is an elevational view of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge according to at least one embodiment;

[000387] Figure 352 is an end view of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 351 positioned relative to tissue;

[000388] Figure 353 is an end view of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 351 further comprising a tissue thickness compensator positioned between the staple cartridge and tissue;

[000389] Figure 354 is a partial perspective view of staples implanted into tissue from the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 351 without a tissue thickness compensator;

[000390] Figure 355 is a partial perspective view of staples implanted in tissue from the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 351 with a tissue thickness compensator;

[000391] Figure 356 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end actuator of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 351 comprising an anvil plate in a first position;

[000392] Figure 357 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end actuator of the surgical stapling instrument of Figure 351 illustrating the anvil plate of Figure 356 in a second position;

[000393] Figure 358 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge that includes a gap adjustment element;

[000394] Figure 359 is a perspective view illustrating a triggering member cutting through the span adjustment element of Figure 358 at the end of the triggering member's triggering stroke;

[000395] Figure 360 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge that includes a flexible tip;

[000396] Figure 361 is a cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 360 illustrating the tip in a flexed configuration;

[000397] Figure 362 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge that includes a sliding portion;

[000398] Figure 363 is a cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 362 illustrating the sliding portion slid in distal position;

[000399] Figure 364 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a support portion comprising an inclined platform surface and a tissue thickness compensator comprising a different thickness;

[000400] Figure 365 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument comprising a support portion comprising an inclined platform surface and a tissue thickness compensator comprising a uniform thickness;

[000401] Figure 366 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge comprising a fabric thickness compensator having a different thickness;

[000402] Figure 367 is an end view of the staple cartridge of Figure 366;

[000403] Figure 368 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator comprising longitudinal layers;

[000404] Figure 369 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator comprising a plurality of layers according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000405] Figure 370 is a perspective view of a disposable loading unit comprising retaining members configured to releasably secure a fabric thickness compensator thereto;

[000406] Figure 371 is a perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator that includes retaining members configured to releasably secure the fabric thickness compensator to a disposable loading unit;

[000407] Figure 372 is a perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 371 attached to a disposable loading unit;

[000408] Figure 373 is an end view of the disposable charging unit of Figure 372;

[000409] Figure 374 is a perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator that includes retaining members configured to releasably secure the fabric thickness compensator to a disposable loading unit;

[000410] Figure 375 is a perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 374 attached to a disposable loading unit;

[000411] Figure 376 is an end view of the disposable charging unit of Figure 375;

[000412] Figure 377 is a perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator that includes a retaining member configured to releasably secure the fabric thickness compensator to a disposable loading unit;

[000413] Figure 378 is a perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 377 attached to a disposable loading unit;

[000414] Figure 379 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator applicator positioned within an effector of a disposable loading unit;

[000415] Figure 380 is a top perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator applicator of Figure 379;

[000416] Figure 381 is a bottom perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator applicator of Figure 379;

[000417] Figure 382 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator applicator positioned within an effector of a disposable loading unit according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000418] Figure 383 is a top perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator applicator of Figure 382;

[000419] Figure 384 is a bottom perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator applicator of Figure 382;

[000420] Figure 385 is an elevation view of a disposable loading unit that includes a pivoting jaw configured to support a staple cartridge;

[000421] Figure 386 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator attached to a staple cartridge support portion in accordance with at least one embodiment;

[000422] Figure 387 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator attached to a staple cartridge support portion in accordance with at least one embodiment;

[000423] Figure 388 is a cross-sectional view of a staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator attached to a staple cartridge support portion in accordance with at least one embodiment;

[000424] Figure 389 is a perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 387;

[000425] Figure 390 is an exploded view of a retainer assembly including a retainer and two fabric thickness compensators in accordance with at least one embodiment;

[000426] Figure 391 is a perspective view of the retainer assembly shown in Figure 390;

[000427] Figure 392 is a perspective view of an anvil with which the retainer assembly of Figure 390 may be used;

[000428] Figure 393 is an illustration depicting the retainer assembly shown in Figure 390 being inserted into an end actuator of a surgical stapler that includes an anvil and staple cartridge;

[000429] Figure 394 is a side view of the retainer assembly shown in Figure 390 engaged with the staple cartridge of Figure 393;

[000430] Figure 395 is a side view of the retainer assembly shown in Figure 390 engaged with the staple cartridge and anvil of Figure 393 illustrating the anvil in a closed position;

[000431] Figure 396 is a side view of the retainer assembly of Figure 390 being removed from the end actuator of Figure 393;

[000432] Figure 397 is a perspective view of a retainer;

[000433] Figure 398 is a side view of the retainer of Figure 397 with tissue thickness compensators attached to the base and top surfaces thereof illustrating one of the tissue thickness compensators engaged with a staple cartridge on a surgical stapler comprising an anvil;

[000434] Figure 399 is a side view illustrating the anvil of Figure 398 in a closed position;

[000435] Figure 400 is an exploded perspective view of a retainer and a fabric thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000436] Figure 401 is an exploded perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Figure 400 and an anvil of a surgical stapler;

[000437] Figure 402 is an exploded top perspective view of a retainer and fabric thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000438] Figure 403 is an exploded bottom perspective view of the retainer and fabric thickness compensator of Figure 402;

[000439] Figure 404 is a top perspective view of the retainer and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 402 engaged with a surgical stapler;

[000440] Figure 405 is a bottom perspective view of the retainer and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 402 engaged with the surgical stapler of Figure 404;

[000441] Figure 406 is a side view of the retainer and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 402 engaged with the surgical stapler of Figure 404;

[000442] Figure 407 is a bottom perspective view of the retainer and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 402 illustrating the tissue thickness compensator attached to the anvil of the surgical stapler of Figure 404;

[000443] Figure 408 is a top perspective view of the retainer and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 402 illustrating the tissue thickness compensator attached to the anvil of Figure 407;

[000444] Figure 409 is a side view of the tissue thickness compensator of Figure 402 attached to the anvil of Figure 407;

[000445] Figure 410 is a cross-sectional view of the retainer and tissue thickness compensator of Figures 402 and 403 attached to a staple cartridge and the channel of a surgical stapler;

[000446] Figure 411 is a cross-sectional view of the retainer and tissue thickness compensator of Figures 402 and 403 attached to the staple cartridge and surgical stapler channel of Figure 410 illustrating a surgical stapler anvil engaged with the compensator fabric thickness;

[000447] Figure 412 is a cross-sectional view of the tissue thickness compensator of Figure 402 attached to the anvil of the surgical stapler and being moved away from the retainer;

[000448] Figure 413 is a side cross-sectional view of a retainer assembly comprising a retainer, fabric thickness compensators mounted on the first and second surfaces of the retainer, and connectors through holes in the retainer in accordance with at least one modality;

[000449] Figure 414 is a perspective view of the retainer assembly of Figure 413 illustrated with a portion of a fabric thickness compensator removed for purposes of illustration;

[000450] Figure 415 is a side view of the retainer assembly of Figure 413 engaged with a surgical stapler comprising an anvil illustrated in an open position;

[000451] Figure 416 is a side view of the retainer assembly of Figure 413 and the anvil of Figure 415 illustrated in a closed position;

[000452] Figure 417 is a side view of the retainer assembly of Figure 413 illustrating the retainer being removed from the retainer assembly fabric thickness compensators;

[000453] Figure 418 is a side view of the retainer removed from the fabric thickness compensators of Figure 413;

[000454] Figure 419 is a perspective view of a retainer configured to engage an anvil of a surgical stapler according to at least one embodiment;

[000455] Figure 420 is a top view of the retainer of Figure 419;

[000456] Figure 421 is a side view of the retainer of Figure 419;

[000457] Figure 422 is a bottom view of the retainer of Figure 419;

[000458] Figure 423 illustrates a retainer assembly comprising the retainer of Figure 419 and a tissue thickness compensator being attached to a staple cartridge for a surgical stapler;

[000459] Figure 424 illustrates the retainer assembly and staple cartridge of Figure 423 that engages an anvil of an end actuator of a surgical stapler;

[000460] Figure 425 illustrates the retainer assembly and staple cartridge of Figure 423 that engages the anvil of the end actuator of the surgical stapler of Figure 424;

[000461] Figure 426 illustrates the retainer assembly and staple cartridge of Figure 423 engaged with the anvil of the surgical stapler of Figure 424;

[000462] Figure 427 illustrates the retainer assembly and staple cartridge of Figure 423 engaged with the anvil of the surgical stapler of Figure 424 and the anvil being moved into a closed position;

[000463] Figure 428 illustrates the anvil of the surgical stapler of Figure 424 in an open position with the tissue thickness compensator attached thereto and the retainer engaged with the staple cartridge channel of the surgical stapler;

[000464] Figure 429 illustrates the retainer of Figure 423 engaged with the staple cartridge channel of the surgical stapler of Figure 424 and the anvil in an open position;

[000465] Figure 430 is a cross-sectional view of a retainer including a tissue thickness compensator comprising protuberances or wings configured to engage an anvil of a surgical stapler;

[000466] Figure 431 is a cross-sectional view of a retainer including a tissue thickness compensator comprising a socket configured to engage an anvil of a surgical stapler;

[000467] Figure 432 is a perspective view of a retainer that includes two plates connected by a hinge according to at least one embodiment;

[000468] Figure 433 is a side view of the retainer of Figure 432;

[000469] Figure 434 is a rear perspective view of an embodiment of an insertion tool configured for use with the retainer of Figure 432;

[000470] Figure 435 is a top perspective view of the insertion tool of Figure 434;

[000471] Figure 436 is a rear perspective view of the insertion tool of Figure 434 with a portion of the insertion tool removed for illustrative purposes;

[000472] Figure 437 is a side view of the insertion tool of Figure 434 with a portion of the insertion tool removed for illustrative purposes;

[000473] Figure 438 is a top view of the insertion tool of Figure 434;

[000474] Figure 439 is a perspective view of a retainer assembly comprising the retainer of Figure 432, a tissue thickness compensator positioned on the retainer, a staple cartridge positioned on the retainer, and the insertion tool of Figure 434 engaged the retainer, wherein a portion of the insertion tool is removed for illustrative purposes;

[000475] Figure 440 is a side view of a retainer assembly comprising the retainer of Figure 432, a tissue thickness compensator positioned on the retainer, and the insertion tool of Figure 434 engaged with the retainer, wherein a portion of the tool insert is removed for illustrative purposes;

[000476] Figure 441 illustrates the retainer assembly of Figure 439 being inserted into a surgical instrument comprising an anvil and a staple cartridge channel, wherein a portion of the insertion tool is removed for purposes of illustration;

[000477] Figure 442 illustrates the retainer assembly of Figure 439 being inserted into a surgical instrument comprising an anvil and a staple cartridge channel, wherein a portion of the insertion tool is removed for purposes of illustration;

[000478] Figure 443 illustrates the insertion tool of Figure 434 being moved relative to the retainer to engage the staple cartridge to the staple cartridge channel and to engage the tissue thickness compensator to the anvil, wherein a portion of the tool insert is removed for illustration purposes;

[000479] Figure 444 illustrates the insertion tool of Figure 434 being moved relative to the retainer to disengage the retainer from the tissue thickness compensator and staple cartridge, wherein a portion of the insertion tool is removed for illustration purposes ;

[000480] Figure 445 is a cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to an anvil of a surgical stapling instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000481] Figure 446 is a diagram illustrating deformed staples that at least partially capture the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 445 therein;

[000482] Figure 447 is a cross-sectional view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument including a staple cartridge comprising a first tissue thickness compensator and an anvil comprising a second tissue thickness compensator. fabric according to at least one embodiment;

[000483] Figure 448 is a cross-sectional view of the end actuator of Figure 447 illustrating staple cartridge staples moved from a non-fired position to a fired position;

[000484] Figure 449 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to an anvil of an end actuator, wherein the tissue thickness compensator comprises a plurality of capsules according to at least one embodiment;

[000485] Figure 449A is a partial perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 449;

[000486] Figure 450 is a cross-sectional view of staples being moved from a non-fired position to a fired position to pierce the caps of the tissue thickness compensator of Figure 449;

[000487] Figure 451 is an exploded view of an anvil and a tissue thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000488] Figure 452 is a cross-sectional view of an anvil comprising a plurality of staple forming pockets and a fabric thickness compensator comprising a plurality of capsules aligned with forming pockets in accordance with at least one embodiment ;

[000489] Figure 453 is a detailed view of the fabric thickness compensator caps of Figure 452;

[000490] Figure 454 is a diagram illustrating the anvil and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 452 positioned with respect to tissue that is to be stapled by staples of a staple cartridge positioned on the opposite side of the tissue;

[000491] Figure 455 is a diagram illustrating the anvil of Figure 452 moved towards the staple cartridge of Figure 454 and staples partially fired from the staple cartridge;

[000492] Figure 456 is a diagram illustrating the staples of Figure 455 in a fully fired configuration and the tissue thickness compensator caps of Figure 452 in a ruptured state;

[000493] Figure 457 is a diagram illustrating a clamp of Figure 455 in an erroneously triggered condition;

[000494] Figure 458 is a diagram illustrating the staples of Figure 455 in a fully fired configuration and the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 452 in an at least partially transected condition;

[000495] Figure 459 is a cross-sectional perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a fabric thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000496] Figure 460 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a tissue thickness compensator comprising a plurality of capsules aligned with a cutting element of a surgical stapling instrument;

[000497] Figure 461 is a detailed view of the capsules of Figure 460;

[000498] Figure 462 is a cross-sectional view of the tissue thickness compensator of Figure 460 comprising a plurality of capsules aligned with a knife slit of an anvil of a surgical stapling instrument;

[000499] Figures 463 and 464 illustrate an alternative embodiment of a tissue thickness compensator being attached to an anvil;

[000500] Figure 465 is an exploded cross-sectional view of an anvil and a compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000501] Figure 466 illustrates the compensator of Figure 465 attached to the anvil;

[000502] Figure 467 is a partial perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator and a cutting element that incises the fabric thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000503] Figure 468 is a partial cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of a fabric thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000504] Figure 469 is a partial cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of a fabric thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000505] Figure 470 is an illustration depicting a fabric thickness compensator comprising a plurality of irregular and/or asymmetric cavities in accordance with various embodiments;

[000506] Figure 471 is a partial cutaway view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to an anvil of a surgical stapling instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000507] Figure 472 is a perspective view of a jointless extruded housing, or outer tube, of a fabric thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000508] Figure 473 is a perspective view of another jointless extruded housing, or outer tube, of a fabric thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000509] Figure 474 is a perspective view of oxidized regenerated cellulose fibers;

[000510] Figure 475 is a perspective view of oxidized regenerated cellulose fibers that are shorter than the fibers of Figure 474;

[000511] Figure 476 is a diagram illustrating the fibers of Figure 474 being woven into a strand using the fibers of Figure 475;

[000512] Figure 477 represents the cord of Figure 476 being softened and at least partially cut;

[000513] Figure 478 represents a gripper inserted through a compartment, or outer tube, of a fabric thickness compensator and positioned to grip the cord of Figure 476;

[000514] Figure 479 illustrates the claw of Figure 478 being removed from the compartment and the cord of Figure 476 being crossed by the compartment;

[000515] Figure 480 illustrates the compartment and cord of Figure 479 being segmented;

[000516] Figure 481 illustrates the ends of the housing being welded and/or heat sealed;

[000517] Figure 482 illustrates a process for creating a fabric thickness compensator without side seams;

[000518] Figure 483 illustrates an anvil of a surgical stapling instrument and a plurality of compensators selectively attachable to the anvil, wherein each of the compensators comprises an array of capillary channels;

[000519] Figure 484 is a plan view of a compensator configured to be fixed to an anvil;

[000520] Figure 485 is a detailed view of a portion of the compensator of Figure 484;

[000521] Figure 486 is a perspective view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument;

[000522] Figure 487 is another perspective view of the end actuator of Figure 486 illustrating a fluid being placed in a fabric thickness compensator of the end actuator;

[000523] Figure 488 is another perspective view of the end actuator of Figure 488 illustrating a compensator attached to an end actuator anvil;

[000524] Figure 489 is a detailed view of an arrangement of capillary channels in the compensator of Figure 488;

[000525] Figure 490 is an exploded view of a compensator comprising a plurality of layers according to at least one embodiment;

[000526] Figure 491 is an exploded view of a compensator and anvil of a surgical stapling instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000527] Figure 492 is a partial cross-sectional view of the compensator and anvil of Figure 491;

[000528] Figure 493 is an exploded view of a compensator comprising a cell ingrowth matrix according to at least one embodiment;

[000529] Figure 494 is a perspective view of the compensator of Figure 493;

[000530] Figure 495 is a perspective view of a fibrous layer of material for a compensator;

[000531] Figure 496 is a perspective view of a plurality of fibrous layers stacked on top of one another according to at least one embodiment;

[000532] Figure 497 is a perspective view of another plurality of fibrous layers stacked on top of one another according to at least one embodiment;

[000533] Figure 498 is a perspective view of a fibrous layer of material for a compensator;

[000534] Figure 499 is a perspective view of a plurality of fibrous layers stacked one on top of the other, wherein the fibers are arranged in different directions according to at least one embodiment;

[000535] Figure 500 is a perspective view of another plurality of fibrous layers stacked on top of one another according to at least one embodiment;

[000536] Figure 501 is a perspective view of an end actuator insert and an end actuator of a surgical instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000537] Figure 502 is an elevation view of a tissue thickness compensator positioned on an end actuator of a surgical instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000538] Figure 503 is an elevation view of a tissue thickness compensator positioned on the end actuator of the surgical instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000539] Figure 504 is a perspective view of a sleeve positioned on an anvil for the end actuator of the surgical instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000540] Figure 505 is a plan view of the pinned portion of the sleeve of Figure 504;

[000541] Figure 506 is an elevation view of the pinned portion of the sleeve of Figure 504;

[000542] Figure 507 is an end view of the pinned portion of the sleeve of Figure 504;

[000543] Figure 508 is a perspective view of the pinned portion of the sleeve of Figure 504;

[000544] Figure 509 is a plan view of a fabric compensator of a sleeve according to at least one embodiment;

[000545] Figure 510 is a perspective view of the fabric compensator of Figure 509;

[000546] Figure 511 is an elevation view of the fabric compensator of Figure 509;

[000547] Figure 512 is a plan view of a fabric compensator of a sleeve according to at least one embodiment;

[000548] Figure 513 is a perspective view of the fabric compensator of Figure 512;

[000549] Figure 514 is an elevation view of the fabric compensator of Figure 512;

[000550] Figure 515 is a perspective view of a tip of the sleeve of Figure 504;

[000551] Figure 516 is another perspective view of the tip of Figure 515;

[000552] Figure 517 is a top plan view of the tip of Figure 515 representing the internal geometry in ghost lines;

[000553] Figure 518 is an elevation view of the tip of Figure 515 representing the internal geometry in ghost lines;

[000554] Figure 519 is another perspective view of the sleeve of Figure 504 positioned on the anvil;

[000555] Figure 520 is a plan view of the sleeve of Figure 504 positioned on the anvil;

[000556] Figure 521 is an elevation view of the sleeve of Figure 504 positioned on the anvil;

[000557] Figure 522 is a plan view of the sleeve of Figure 504 positioned on the anvil representing a translational firing bar shown in phantom lines;

[000558] Figure 523 is an elevational view of the sleeve of Figure 504 positioned on the anvil representing a translational firing bar shown in phantom lines;

[000559] Figure 524 is a plan view of the sleeve of Figure 504 positioned on the anvil representing the release of the sleeve tip;

[000560] Figure 525 is an elevation view of the sleeve of Figure 504 positioned on the anvil representing the release of the sleeve tip;

[000561] Figure 526 is a plan view of the sleeve of Figure 504 positioned on the anvil representing the firing bar in phantom lines and the release of the sleeve tip;

[000562] Figure 527 is an elevation view of the sleeve of Figure 504 positioned on the anvil representing the firing bar in phantom lines and the release of the sleeve tip;

[000563] Figure 528 is a partial perspective view of the sleeve, anvil and firing bar of Figure 526;

[000564] Figure 529 is another partial perspective view of the sleeve, anvil and firing bar of Figure 526;

[000565] Figure 530 is a cross-sectional view in elevation of the sleeve and anvil of Figure 504;

[000566] Figure 531 is an elevational cross-sectional view of the anvil of Figure 504 depicting the release of the fabric compensator from the sleeve;

[000567] Figure 532 is a plan view of an end actuator insert according to at least one embodiment;

[000568] Figure 533 is an elevation view of the end actuator insert of Figure 532;

[000569] Figure 534 is a perspective view of the end actuator insert of Figure 534;

[000570] Figure 535 is a partial perspective view of the end actuator insert of Figure 532 depicting the engagement of the end actuator insert with the end actuator anvil of a surgical instrument;

[000571] Figure 536 is a partial perspective view of the end actuator insert of Figure 532 depicting the engagement of the end actuator insert with the end actuator staple cartridge of a surgical instrument;

[000572] Figure 537 is an elevation view of the end actuator insert of Figure 532 depicting the engagement of the end actuator insert with the end actuator of a surgical instrument;

[000573] Figure 538 is an elevation view of the end actuator insert of Figure 532 positioned in the end actuator of a surgical instrument;

[000574] Figure 539 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator positioned on the end actuator of a surgical instrument according to at least one illustrated embodiment with a portion of the tissue thickness compensator cut away;

[000575] Figure 540 is a perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 539 attached to the end actuator anvil by means of static loading;

[000576] Figure 541 is a perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 539 attached to the end actuator anvil by means of suction elements;

[000577] Figure 542 is a perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 539 attached to the end actuator anvil by hook and loop fasteners;

[000578] Figure 543 is a partial perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 539 attached to the end actuator anvil by means of a strap;

[000579] Figure 544 is a partial perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Figure 539 attached to the end actuator anvil by means of a snap on the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator;

[000580] Figure 545 is a perspective partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to the anvil of the end actuator of a surgical instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000581] Figure 546 is an elevational cross-sectional view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 545;

[000582] Figure 547 is another elevational cross-sectional view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 545;

[000583] Figure 548 is an elevational cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to the anvil of the end actuator of a surgical instrument representing a closure in a closed position according to at least one embodiment;

[000584] Figure 549 is an elevational cross-sectional view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 548 depicting the closure in the open position;

[000585] Figure 550 is an elevational cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to the anvil of the end actuator of a surgical instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000586] Figure 551 is an elevational cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to the anvil of the end actuator of a surgical instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000587] Figure 552 is an elevational cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to the anvil of the end actuator of a surgical instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000588] Figure 553 is an elevational cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to the anvil of the end actuator of the surgical instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000589] Figure 554 is an exploded view in perspective cross-section of a tissue thickness compensator attached to an anvil of a surgical instrument end actuator according to at least one embodiment;

[000590] Figure 555 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Figure 554 depicting the movement of the tissue thickness compensator towards the anvil;

[000591] Figure 556 is an elevational cross-sectional view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 554 engaged with the anvil;

[000592] Figure 557 is a perspective cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to the anvil of the end actuator of a surgical instrument according to at least one embodiment;

[000593] Figure 558 is an exploded perspective cross-section view of the tissue thickness compensator and anvil of Figure 557;

[000594] Figure 559 is an elevational view of a fabric thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000595] Figure 560 is a perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 559;

[000596] Figure 561 is another perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 559;

[000597] Figure 562 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Figure 559 depicting the movement of the tissue thickness compensator towards the end actuator anvil of a surgical instrument;

[000598] Figure 563 is a cross-sectional plan view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 559 positioned on the anvil;

[000599] Figure 564 is a perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator of Figure 559 positioned on the anvil;

[000600] Figure 565 is a perspective view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 559 positioned on the anvil illustrating a cutting element separating the fabric thickness compensator;

[000601] Figure 566 is a cross-sectional elevation view of an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument comprising an anvil and a loadable layer according to at least one embodiment;

[000602] Figure 567 is a bottom view of the anvil and loadable layer of Figure 566;

[000603] Figure 568 is an exploded view of the anvil and loadable layer of Figure 566 and a fabric thickness compensator releasably attachable to the loadable layer;

[000604] Figure 569 is a perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000605] Figure 570 is a plan view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 569;

[000606] Figure 569A is a perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000607] Figure 570A is a plan view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 569A;

[000608] Figure 571 is a perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000609] Figure 572 is a plan view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 571;

[000610] Figure 573 is a perspective view of a fabric thickness compensator according to at least one embodiment;

[000611] Figure 574 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to an anvil according to at least one embodiment;

[000612] Figure 575 is a cross-sectional view of the anvil and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 574;

[000613] Figure 576 is a cross-sectional view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 574;

[000614] Figure 577 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to an anvil according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000615] Figure 578 is a cross-sectional view of the anvil and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 577;

[000616] Figure 579 is a cross-sectional view of the fabric thickness compensator of Figure 577 in an open configuration;

[000617] Figure 580 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to an anvil according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000618] Figure 581 is a cross-sectional view of the anvil and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 580;

[000619] Figure 582 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to an anvil according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000620] Figure 583 is a cross-sectional view of the anvil and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 582;

[000621] Figure 584 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to an anvil according to at least one alternative embodiment;

[000622] Figure 585 is a cross-sectional view of the anvil and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 584;

[000623] Figure 586 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to an anvil according to at least one alternative embodiment; and

[000624] Figure 587 is a cross-sectional view of the anvil and tissue thickness compensator of Figure 586.

[000625] Matching reference characters indicate matching parts in all the various views. The exemplifications described herein illustrate certain embodiments of the invention, in one form, and such exemplifications are not to be considered as limiting the scope of the invention in any way.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

[000626] The applicant of the present application also retains the rights to the US patent applications identified below which are each incorporated herein by reference in their respective entireties:

[000627] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,311 entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH RECONFIGURABLE SHAFT SEGMENTS (Attorney's Document No. END6734USNP/100058);

[000628] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,340 entitled SURGICAL STAPLE CARTRIDGES SUPPORTING NON-LINEARLY ARRANGED STAPLES AND SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH COMMON STAPLE-FORMING POCKETS (Attorney's Document No. END6735USNP/100059);

[000629] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,327 entitled JAW CLOSURE ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS (Attorney's Document No. END6736USNP/100060);

[000630] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,351, entitled SURGICAL CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENTS WITH SEPARATE AND DISTINCT FASTENER DEPLOYMENT AND TISSUE CUTTING SYSTEMS (Attorney's Document No. END6839 USNP/100524);

[000631] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,338 entitled IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE HAVING A NON-UNIFORM ARRANGEMENT (Attorney's Document No. END6840USNP/100525);

[000632] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,369 entitled IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE COMPRISING A SUPPORT RETAINER (Attorney's Document No. END6841USNP/100526);

[000633] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,312 entitled IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE COMPRISING MULTIPLE LAYERS (Attorney's Document No. END6842USNP/100527);

[000634] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,377 entitled SELECTIVELY ORIENTABLE IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE (Attorney Document No. END6843USNP/100528);

[000635] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,339 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH COMPACT ARTICULATION CONTROL ARRANGEMENT (Attorney's Document No. END6847USNP/100532);

[000636] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,360 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH A VARIABLE STAPLE FORMING SYSTEM (Attorney Document No. END6848 USNP/100533);

[000637] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,322 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH INTERCHANGEABLE STAPLE CARTRIDGE ARRANGEMENTS (Attorney Document No. END6849USNP/100534);

[000638] US patent application serial number 12/894,350, entitled SURGICAL STAPLE CARTRIDGES WITH DETACHABLE SUPPORT STRUCTURES AND SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH SYSTEMS FOR PREVENTING ACTUATION MOTIONS WHEN A CARTRIDGE IS NOT PRESENT (attorney's document number END6855USNP/100540) ;

[000639] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,383 entitled IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE COMPRISING BIOABSORBABLE LAYERS (Attorney Document No. END6856USNP/100541);

[000640] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,389 entitled COMPRESSIBLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE (Attorney's Document No. END6857USNP/100542);

[000641] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,345 entitled FASTENERS SUPPORTED BY A FASTENER CARTRIDGE SUPPORT (Attorney's Document No. END6858USNP/100543);

[000642] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,306 entitled COLLAPSIBLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE (Attorney's Document No. END6859USNP/100544);

[000643] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,318 entitled FASTENER SYSTEM COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF CONNECTED RETENTION MATRIX ELEMENTS (Attorney's Document No. END6860USNP/100546);

[000644] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,330 entitled FASTENER SYSTEM COMPRISING A RETENTION MATRIX AND AN ALIGNMENT MATRIX (Attorney Document No. END6861 USNP/100547);

[000645] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,361 entitled FASTENER SYSTEM COMPRISING A RETENTION MATRIX (Attorney's Document No. END6862USNP/100548);

[000646] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,367 entitled FASTENING INSTRUMENT FOR DEPLOYING A FASTENER SYSTEM COMPRISING A RETENTION MATRIX (Attorney's Document No. END6863USNP/100549);

[000647] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,388 entitled FASTENER SYSTEM COMPRISING A RETENTION MATRIX AND A COVER (Attorney's Document No. END6864USNP/100550);

[000648] US Patent Application Serial No. 12/894,376 entitled FASTENER SYSTEM COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF FASTENER CARTRIDGES (Attorney Document No. END6865USNP/100551);

[000649] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,865 entitled SURGICAL STAPLER ANVIL COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF FORMING POCKETS (Attorney Document No. END6735USCIP1/100059CIP1);

[000650] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,936 entitled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR FOR A SURGICAL STAPLER (Attorney's Document No. END6736USCIP1/100060CIP1);

[000651] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,954 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING A VARIABLE THICKNESS COMPRESSIBLE PORTION (Attorney Document No. END 6840USCIP1/100525CIP1);

[000652] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,856 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING STAPLES POSITIONED WITHIN A COMPRESSIBLE PORTION THEREOF (Attorney's Document No. END6841USCIP1/100526CIP1);

[000653] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,928 entitled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING DETACHABLE PORTIONS (Attorney Document No. END6842USCIP1/100527CIP1);

[000654] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,891 entitled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR FOR A SURGICAL STAPLER COMPRISING AN ADJUSTABLE ANVIL (Attorney's Document No. END6843USCIP1/100528CIP1);

[000655] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,948 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING AN ADJUSTABLE DISTAL PORTION (Attorney's Document No. END6847USCIP1/100532CIP1);

[000656] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,907 entitled COMPRESSIBLE STAPLE CARTRIDGE ASSEMBLY (Attorney's Document No. END6848USCIP1/100533CIP1);

[000657] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,861 entitled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING PORTIONS HAVING DIFFERENT PROPERTIES (Attorney Document No. END6849USCIP1/100534CIP1);

[000658] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,869 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE LOADING ASSEMBLY (Attorney's Document No. END6855USCIP1/100540CIP1);

[000659] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,917 entitled COMPRESSIBLE STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING ALIGNMENT MEMBERS (Attorney Document No. END6856USCIP1/100541CIP1);

[000660] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,873 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING A RELEASABLE PORTION (Attorney's Document No. END6857USCIP1/100542CIP1);

[000661] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,938 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING COMPRESSIBLE DISTORTION RESISTANT COMPONENTS (Attorney Document No. END 6858USCIP1/100543CIP1);

[000662] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/097,924 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE COMPRISING A TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR (Attorney's Document No. END6859USCIP1/100544CIP1);

[000663] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/242,029 entitled SURGICAL STAPLER WITH FLOATING ANVIL (Attorney's Document No. END6841USCIP2/100526CIP2);

[000664] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/242,066 entitled CURVED END EFFECTOR FOR A STAPLING INSTRUMENT (Attorney Document No. END6841USCIP3/100526CIP3);

[000665] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/242,086 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE INCLUDING COLLAPSIBLE DECK (Attorney's Document No. END7020USNP/110374);

[000666] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/241,912 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE INCLUDING COLLAPSIBLE DECK ARRANGEMENT (Attorney's Document No. END7019USNP/110375);

[000667] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/241,922 entitled SURGICAL STAPLER WITH STATIONARY STAPLE DRIVERS (Attorney's Document No. END7013USNP/110377);

[000668] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/241,637 entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH TRIGGER ASSEMBLY FOR GENERATING MULTIPLE ACTUATION MOTIONS (Attorney Document No. END6888USNP3/110378); and

[000669] US Patent Application Serial No. 13/241,629 entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH SELECTIVELY ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTOR (Attorney Document No. END6888 USNP2/110379).

[000670] The Applicant of the present application also owns the US patent applications identified below which were filed on the same date as the present application and which are each incorporated herein by reference in their entirety, respectively:

[000671] US application serial no., entitled TIS SUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF CAPSULES, (attorney's document no. END6864USCIP1/100550CIP1);

[000672] US application serial no., entitled TIS SUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF LAYERS, (attorney's document no. END6864USCIP2/100550CIP2);

[000673] US application serial no., entitled EX PANDABLE TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR, (attorney's document no. END6843USCIP2/100528CIP2).

[000674] US Application Serial No., entitled TIS SUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING A RESERVOIR (Attorney Document No. END6843USCIP3/100528CIP3);

[000675] US application serial no., entitled RE TAINER ASSEMBLY INCLUDING A TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR, (attorney's document no. END6843USCIP4/100528CIP4);

[000676] US Application Serial No., entitled TIS SUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING AT LEAST ONE MEDICAMENT, (Attorney's Document No. END6843USCIP5/100528CIP5);

[000677] US application serial no., entitled TIS SUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING CONTROLLED RELEASE AND EXPANSION, (attorney's document no. END6843USCIP6/100528CIP6);

[000678] US Application Serial No., entitled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING FIBERS TO PRODUCE A RESILIENT LOAD, (Attorney Document No. END6843USCIP7/100528CIP7);

[000679] US Application Serial No., entitled TIS SUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING STRUCTURE TO PRODUCE A RESILIENT LOAD, (Attorney Document No. END6843USCIP8/100528CIP8);

[000680] US application serial no., entitled TIS SUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING RESILIENT MEMBERS, (attorney's document no. END6843USCIP9/100528CIP9);

[000681] US application serial no., entitled ME THODS FOR FORMING TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR AR-RANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL STAPLERS, (attorney's document no. END6843USCIP10/100528CP10);

[000682] US Application Serial No., entitled TIS SUE THICKNESS COMPENSATORS, (Attorney Document No. END6843USCIP11/100528CP11);

[000683] US Application Serial No., entitled LAYE RED TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR, (Attorney's Document No. END6843USCIP12/100528CP12);

[000684] US Application Serial No., entitled TIS SUE THICKNESS COMPENSATORS FOR CIRCULAR SURGICAL STAPLERS, (Attorney's Document No. END6843USCIP13/100528CP13);

[000685] US application serial no., entitled TIS SUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING CAPSULES DEFINING A LOW PRESSURE ENVIRONMENT, (attorney's document no. END7100USNP/110601);

[000686] US application serial no., entitled TIS SUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISED OF A PLURALITY OF MATERIALS, (attorney's document no. END7101USNP/ 110602);

[000687] US application serial no., entitled MO VABLE MEMBER FOR USE WITH A TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR, (attorney's document no. END7107USNP/ 110603);

[000688] US application serial number, entitled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF MEDICAMENTS, (attorney's document number END7102USNP/ 110604);

[000689] US application serial no., entitled TIS SUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR AND METHOD FOR MAKING THE SAME, (attorney's document no. END7103USNP/110605);

[000690] US Patent Application Serial No., entitled TISSUE THICKNESS COMPENSATOR COMPRISING CHANNELS, (Attorney Document No. END7104USNP/110606); and

[000691] US application serial no., entitled DEVI CES AND METHODS FOR ATTACHING TISSUE THICKNESS COM-PENSATING MATERIALS TO SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS, (attorney's document no. END7106USNP/110608).

[000692] Certain exemplary embodiments will now be described to provide a general understanding of the principles of structure, function, fabrication and use of the devices and methods of the present invention presented. One or more examples of these embodiments are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. Those skilled in the art will understand that the devices and methods specifically described herein and illustrated in the accompanying drawings are exemplary, non-limiting embodiments. Features illustrated or described in conjunction with one exemplary embodiment may be combined with features of other embodiments. Such modifications and variations are included within the scope of the present invention.

[000693] Any of the methods disclosed or claimed herein for manufacturing, forming or otherwise producing an article or product, may be used to manufacture, form or otherwise produce all or part of the article or product in question, and provided that such method is used to manufacture, form or otherwise produce part of the article or product in question, the remainder of the article or product may be produced in any way, including by means of the use of any of the other methods disclosed and claimed herein for manufacturing, forming or otherwise producing the article or product, and the various parts so produced may be combined in any way. Similarly, any article or product disclosed or claimed herein may exist alone or in combination with, or as an integral part of, any other article or product disclosed in that form with which it is compatible. In this way, the particular features, structures or characteristics illustrated or described in conjunction with an article, product or method may be combined, in whole or in part, with the features, structures or characteristics of one or more other compatible articles, products or methods. , without limitation. Such modifications and variations are included within the scope of the present invention.

[000694] Where it is disclosed herein, with reference to a particular figure or otherwise, that a certain embodiment of the invention or a certain article, product or method may comprise certain structures, features or features, it will be understood by the reader that this means that those structures, characteristics or features may be incorporated into the article, product or method in question in any compatible combination. In particular, such disclosure of numerous ideal structures, features or features shall be understood to also reveal all such structures, features or features in combination, except in the case of structures, features or features which are revealed as alternatives to one another. Where such structures, features or resources are revealed as alternatives to one another, it must be understood that this reveals these alternatives as being replacements for another.

[000695] The terms "proximal" and "distal" are used in the present invention with reference to a clinician's manipulation of the handle portion of the surgical instrument. The term "proximal" refers to the portion closest to the clinician, and the term "distal" refers to the portion located furthest from the clinician. It will also be understood that, for the sake of convenience and clarity, spatial terms such as "vertical", "horizontal", "upwards" and "downwards" may be used in the present invention in connection with the drawings. However, surgical instruments can be used in many orientations and positions, and these terms are not intended to be limiting and/or absolute.

[000696] Various exemplary devices and methods are provided for performing laparoscopic and minimally invasive surgical procedures. However, the reader will readily understand that the various methods and devices disclosed in the present invention can be used in numerous surgical procedures and applications, including in connection with open surgical procedures. As the present detailed description proceeds, the reader will further appreciate that the various instruments disclosed in the present invention can be inserted into a body in any manner, such as through a natural orifice, through an incision or perforation hole formed in tissue. , etc. The working portions or end actuator portions of instruments may be inserted directly into the patient's body or may be inserted through an access device which has a working channel through which the end actuator and elongated stem of an instrument surgery can be advanced.

[000697] Turning to drawings where numbers indicate similar components across the various views, Figure 1 shows a surgical instrument 10 that is capable of performing several unique benefits. Surgical stapling instrument 10 is designed to handle and/or actuate end actuators 12 of various shapes and sizes that are operatively attached to the instrument. In Figures 1 to 1E, for example, the end actuator 12 includes an elongate channel 14 which forms a lower jaw 13 of the end actuator 12. The elongate channel 14 is configured to support an "implantable" clamp cartridge 30 and also support movably an anvil 20 which acts as an upper grip 15 of the end actuator 12.

[000698] The elongated channel 14 can be manufactured from, for example, stainless steel, titanium, etc. series 300 & 400, 17-4 & 17-7 and be formed with spaced side walls 16. The anvil 20 can be manufactured, for example, from stainless steel series 300 & 400, 17-4, 17-7, titanium , etc., & and have a lower staple-forming surface generally identified as 22 which has a plurality of staple-forming pockets 23 formed therein. See Figures 1B to 1E. In addition, the anvil 20 has a bifurcated ramp assembly 24 that protrudes proximally from the anvil. An anvil pin 26 projects from each side of the ramp assembly 24 to be received in a corresponding slot or opening 18 in the side walls 16 of the elongate channel 14 to facilitate its movable or pivoting attachment thereto.

[000699] Various forms of implantable staple cartridges may be employed with the surgical instruments disclosed herein. Specific staple cartridge configurations and constructions will be discussed in more detail below. However, in Figure 1A, an implantable staple cartridge 30 is shown. The staple cartridge 30 has a body portion 31 consisting of a compressible hemostatic material, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose ("ORC") or a bioabsorbable foam on which rows of unformed metal staples are supported 32. To prevent the staple from being affected and the hemostatic material being activated during the insertion and placement process, the entire cartridge can be coated or wrapped in a biodegradable film 38 , as a polydioxanone film sold under the trademark PDS®, or with a film of polyglycerol sebacate (PGS) or other biodegradable films formed from PGA (polyglycolic acid, marketed under the trademark Vicryl), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglecapron 25, sold under the tradename Monocryl) or a compound of PGA, PCL, PLA, PDS that will be It was waterproof until it broke. The body 31 of the staple cartridge 30 is sized to be removably supported in the elongated groove 14 as shown, so that each staple 32 therein aligns with the corresponding staple forming pockets 23 on the anvil when the anvil 20 is actuated to form contact with the staple cartridge 30.

[000700] In use, after the end actuator 12 is positioned adjacent to the target tissue, the end actuator 12 is manipulated to capture or clamp the target tissue between a top face 36 of the staple cartridge 30 and the surface of Staple forming 22 of anvil 20. Staples 32 are formed by moving anvil 20 in a path that is substantially parallel to elongated groove 14 to bring out staple forming surface 22 and, more particularly, staple forming pockets 23 in substantially simultaneous contact with the top face 36 of the staple cartridge 30. As the anvil 20 continues to move in the staple cartridge 30, the legs 34 of the staples 32 contact a corresponding staple forming the pocket 23 in the anvil 20 which serves to fold the legs of the clamps 34 over each other to form the clamps 32 in a "B-shape". Further movement of anvil 20 towards elongated groove 14 will further compress and form clamps 32 to a desired final formed height "FF".

[000701] The staple formation process described above is generally represented in Figures 1B to 1E. For example, Figure 1B illustrates the end actuator 12 with the target tissue "T" between the anvil 20 and the top face 36 of the implantable staple cartridge 30. Figure 1C illustrates the initial clamping position of the anvil 20 in which the anvil 20 was closed over the target tissue "T" to secure the target tissue "T" between the anvil 20 and the top face 36 of the staple cartridge 30. Figure 1D illustrates the initial staple formation where the anvil 20 has begun to compress the staple cartridge 30 so that the legs 34 of the staples 32 are beginning to be formed by the staple forming pockets 23 in the anvil 20. Figure 1E illustrates the staple 32 in its final state formed through the fabric- "T" target with anvil 20 removed for clarity. After the clips 32 are formed and secured to the target tissue "T", the surgeon moves the anvil 20 to the open position to allow the cartridge body 31 and clips 32 to remain attached to the target tissue while the end actuator 12 is taken from the patient. The end actuator 12 forms all the clamps simultaneously as the two jaws 13, 15 are pressed. The remaining "crumpled" body materials 31 act as a hemostatic material (the ORC) and staple line reinforcement (PGA, PDS, or any of the other film compositions mentioned above 38). Furthermore, as the staples 32 never need to leave the cartridge body 31 during formation, the probability of defective formation of the staples 32 during this process is minimized. For use in the present invention, the term "implantable" means that, in addition to the clips, the cartridge body materials that support the clips will also remain in the patient and may eventually be absorbed into the patient's body. Such implantable staple cartridges are distinguishable from previous cartridge arrangements which remain positioned within the end actuator in its entirety after they have been fired.

[000702] In various implementations, the end actuator 12 is configured to be coupled to an elongate stem assembly 40 which projects from a cable assembly 100. The end actuator 12 (when closed) and the elongate stem assembly 40 may have similar cross-sectional shapes and be sized to pass operatively through a trocar tube or working channel in another form of access instrument. For use in the present invention, the term "operationally pass" means that the end actuator and at least a portion of the elongate rod assembly can be introduced through or passed through the opening of the channel or tube and can be manipulated therein as required. necessary to complete the surgical stapling procedure. When in a closed position, jaws 13 and 15 of end actuator 12 can provide the end actuator with a superficially circular cross-sectional shape that facilitates its passage through a circular passage/opening. However, the end actuators of the present invention, as well as the elongated stem assemblies, could conceivably be provided with other shapes in cross section which could otherwise pass through passages and access openings which are non-circular shapes in cross section. In this way, an overall size of a closed-end actuator cross-section will be related to the size of the passage or opening through which it is intended to pass. Thus, an end actuator for example can be called a "5mm end actuator", meaning it can operatively pass through an opening that is at least approximately 5 mm in diameter.

[000703] The elongated stem assembly 40 may have an outside diameter that is substantially equal to the outside diameter of the end actuator 12 when in a closed position. For example, a 5mm end actuator can be coupled to an elongated rod assembly 40 whose cross-sectional diameter is 5mm. However, as the present detailed description progresses, it will become apparent that the present invention can be effectively used in connection with different sizes of end actuators. For example, a 10mm end actuator can be attached to an elongated rod that has a cross diameter of 5mm. Conversely, for applications where a 10mm or greater opening or access passage is provided, the elongated rod assembly 40 may have a 10mm (or greater) transverse diameter, but may also be capable of actuating an actuator. 5mm or 10mm end. Accordingly, the outer stem 40 may have an outer diameter that is the same as or different from the outer diameter of a closed-end actuator 12 attached thereto.

[000704] As shown, the elongated rod assembly 40 extends distally from the handle assembly 100 in a generally straight line to define a longitudinal axis A-A. For example, the elongate rod assembly 40 may have a length of approximately 229 to 406 mm (9 to 16 inches). However, the elongate stem assembly 40 may be supplied in other lengths or may contain unions or be otherwise configured to facilitate articulation of the end actuator 12 with respect to other portions of the stem or cable assembly as will be discussed in more detail. below. The elongate rod assembly 40 includes a back member 50 that extends from the handle assembly 100 to the end actuator 12. The proximal end of the elongate channel 14 of the end actuator 12 has a pair of detent swivel pins 17. protruding therefrom, which are sized to be received within corresponding swivel pin openings or cradles 52 which are provided at a distal end of the back element 50 to allow the end actuator 12 to be removably coupled to the assembly of elongated shank 40. Back element 50 may be manufactured from, for example, 6061 or 7075 aluminum, stainless steel, titanium, and the like.

[000705] The cable assembly 100 comprises a pistol grip housing which can be manufactured in two or more pieces for assembly purposes. For example, the cable assembly 100, as shown, comprises a right-hand housing element 102 and a left-hand housing element (not shown) that are molded or otherwise manufactured from a polymer or plastic material and are designed to fit together. to fit in. These housing elements may be secured together by snapping means, dowels and sockets molded or otherwise formed within the elements and/or by means of adhesive, screws, etc. Back element 50 has a proximal end 54 which has a flange 56 formed thereon. The flange 56 is configured to be pivotally supported in a groove 106 formed by paired ribs 108 that project inwardly from each of the housing elements 102, 104. Such an arrangement facilitates the attachment of the back element 50 to the assembly. cable assembly 100 and further allows the back element 50 to be rotated relative to the cable assembly 100 about the longitudinal axis A-A in a 360° trajectory.

[000706] As can be seen in Figure 1, the back element 50 passes through and is supported by a mounting pad 60 which is pivotally secured to the cable assembly 100. The mounting pad 60 has a proximal flange 62 and a distal flange 64 defining a rotational groove 65 that is configured to rotatably receive a nose portion 101 of the cable assembly 100. Such an arrangement allows the mounting pad 60 to pivot about the longitudinal axis A-A with respect to the cable assembly 100. handle 100. The back element 50 is non-rotatably pinned to the mounting pad 60 by a back pin 66. In addition, a rotary knob 70 is secured to the mounting pad 60. For example, the rotary knob 70 has a hollow mounting flange portion 72 which is sized to receive a mounting pad portion 60 therein. The knob 70 can be made of, for example, glass or carbon filled nylon, polycarbonate, Ultem®, etc., and is secured to the mounting pad 60 by the back stud 66 as well. In addition, an inwardly projecting retaining flange 74 is formed over the mounting flange portion 72 and is configured to extend into a radial groove 68 formed in the mounting pad 60. In this way, the surgeon can rotating the back element 50 (and the end actuator 12 attached thereto) about the longitudinal axis A-A in a 360° trajectory by holding the knob 70 and rotating it with respect to the cable assembly 100.

[000707] The anvil 20 is held in an open position by an anvil spring 21 and/or other limiting arrangement. The anvil 20 is selectively movable from the open position to various closed or clamping and firing positions by a firing system, generally designated as 109. The firing system 109 includes a "firing member" 110 comprising a hollow tube of trigger 110. The hollow trigger tube 110 is axially movable over the back element 50 and thereby forms the outer portion of the elongate rod assembly 40. The trigger tube 110 may be manufactured from a polymer or other suitable material and have a proximal end which is attached to a firing yoke 114 of the firing system 109. For example, the firing yoke 114 may be overmolded to the proximal end of the firing tube 110. However, other fastener arrangements may be employed. .

[000708] As can be seen in Figure 1, the firing fork 114 is pivotally supported on a support collar 120 which is configured to move axially on the cable assembly 100. The support collar 120 has a pair of laterally extending fins which are sized to be slidably received in fin slots formed in the right and left housing elements. In that way, the support collar 120 can slide axially in the cable compartment 100 and still allow the firing fork 114 and the firing tube 110 to rotate with respect thereto about the longitudinal axis A-A. In accordance with the invention, a longitudinal slot is provided through the firing tube 110 to allow the dorsum pin 66 to extend therethrough into the dorsum element 50 while facilitating axial displacement of the firing tube 110 over the back element 50.

[000709] The firing system 109 further comprises a firing actuator 130 which serves to control the axial displacement of the firing tube 110 on the back element 50. See Figure 1. Such axial movement in the distal direction of the firing tube 110 in firing interaction with anvil 20 is referred to in this document as "firing motion". As can be seen in Figure 1, the trigger 130 is movably or pivotally coupled to the cable assembly 100 by means of a pivot pin 132. A torsion spring 135 is employed to move the trigger 130 away from the trigger portion. pistol grip 107 of handle assembly 100 to a non-actuated or initial "open" position. As can be seen in Figure 1, the trigger driver 130 has an upper portion 134 that is movably (pinned) attached to trigger links 136 that are movably attached (pinned) to the support collar 120. Accordingly, movement of the trigger 130 from the home position (Figure 1) toward an end position adjacent to the pistol grip portion 107 of the handle assembly 100 will cause the trigger fork 114 and the trigger tube 110 to collapse. move in the distal "DD" direction. Movement of the trigger 130 in the opposite direction to the pistol grip portion 107 of the handle assembly 100 (under the action of the torsion spring 135) will cause the trigger hook 114 and the trigger tube 110 to move in the same direction. proximal direction "PD" over the back element 50.

[000710] The present invention can be employed with different sizes and configurations of implantable staple cartridges. For example, the surgical instrument 10, when used in conjunction with a first trigger adapter 140, can be used with a 5 mm end actuator 12 that has a length of approximately 20 mm (or other lengths) that supports an implantable staple cartridge 30. This size end actuator may be particularly well suited, for example, to complete dissection and relatively fine vascular transactions. However, as will be discussed in more detail below, the surgical instrument 10 can also be employed, for example, in conjunction with other sizes of end actuators and staple cartridges by replacing the first firing adapter 140 with a second firing adapter. . As a further alternative, the elongate stem assembly 40 may be configured to be attached to only one end actuator shape or size.

[000711] A method of detachably coupling the end actuator 12 to the back element 50 will be explained below. The coupling process is initiated by inserting the swivel retaining pins 17 in the elongated channel 14 into the swivel pin cradles 52 in the back element 50. Thereafter, the surgeon advances the triggering trigger 130 towards the handle of the gun 107 of housing assembly 100 to distally advance firing tube 110 and first firing adapter 140 over a proximal end portion 47 of elongate channel 14 to thereby retain trunnions 17 in their respective cradles 52. first firing adapter 140 over swivel pins 17 is referred to in this document as the "coupled position". The present invention may also have an end actuator lock assembly to lock the trigger actuator 130 in position after an end actuator 12 has been attached to the back element 50.

[000712] More specifically, one embodiment of the end actuator locking assembly 160 includes a retaining pin 162 that is movably supported on the upper portion 134 of the trigger actuator 130. As discussed earlier, the trigger tube trigger 110 should initially be advanced distally to the engaged position where the first trigger adapter 140 retains the rotating retaining pins 17 of the end actuator 12 in the rotating pin cradles 52 on the dorsum member 50. The surgeon advances the trigger adapter 140 distally to the engaged position by pulling the trigger trigger 130 from the home position to the pistol grip direction 107. As the trigger trigger 130 is initially actuated, the detent pin 162 is moved distally until the tube trigger 110 has advanced the first trigger adapter 140 to the engaged position, at which point the retaining pin 162 is forced into a latch cavity 164 formed in it. carcass ment. Optionally, when detent pin 162 enters latch cavity 164, pin 162 may produce a latching or other sound, as well as providing a tactile indication to the surgeon that end actuator 12 has "locked" into the element. 50. In addition, the surgeon cannot inadvertently continue to actuate the trigger 130 to begin forming the clamps 32 on the end actuator 12 without intentionally forcing the retaining pin 162 out of the latch cavity 164. Similarly, if the surgeon releases the trigger 130 when it is in the engaged position, it will be held in that position by the retaining pin 162 to prevent the trigger trigger 130 from returning to the initial position and thereby releasing the end actuator. 12 of the back element 50.

[000713] The present invention may also include a trigger lock button 137 that is pivotally secured to the cable assembly 100. In one form, the trigger lock button 137 has a lock 138 formed over a distal end thereof which is oriented to engage the firing yoke 114 when the firing release button is in a first latched position. As can be seen in Figure 1, the lock spring 139 serves to force the firing system lock button 137 into the first locked position. In various circumstances, the latch 138 serves to engage the firing fork 114 at a point where the position of the firing fork 114 on the back element 50 corresponds to a point at which the first firing adapter 140 is about to advance distally towards up on the nip ramp 28 over the anvil 20. One skilled in the art will understand that as the first trigger adapter 140 advances axially up the nip ramp 28, the anvil 20 will move in a path such that its portion of staple forming surface 22 will be substantially parallel to the top face 36 of staple cartridge 30.

[000714] After the end actuator 12 is coupled to the back element 50, the staple forming process is initiated by first pressing the firing system lock button 137 to allow the firing fork 114 to be moved additionally in a distal position on the dorsum element 50 and, finally, compressing the anvil 20 into the staple cartridge 30. After pressing the trigger lock button 137, the surgeon continues to actuate the trigger 130 in the pistol grip direction 107, thereby driving the first staple collar 140 upwards on the corresponding staple forming chute 29 to force the anvil 20 into forming contact with the staples 32 in the staple cartridge 30. trigger system lock 137 prevents accidental formation of staples 32 until the surgeon is ready to begin this process. In this embodiment, the surgeon must press the trigger lock button 137 before the trigger trigger 130 can be further actuated to begin the staple formation process.

[000715] The surgical instrument 10 can be used exclusively as a tissue stapling device if desired. However, the present invention may also include a fabric cutting system, generically designated 170. In at least one form, the fabric cutting system 170 comprises a knife element 172 that can be selectively advanced from an adjacent non-actuated position. to the proximal end of the end actuator 12 to a position actuated by actuation of a knife advance driver 200. The knife element 172 is movably supported on the back element 50 and is secured or otherwise projects from there. knife shank 180. Knife member 172 may be manufactured from, for example, 420 or 440 stainless steel with a hardness greater than 38HRC (Rockwell Hardness C scale) and have a fabric cutting edge 176 formed on the distal end 174 thereof and configured to extend slidably through a slot in the anvil 20 and a centrally arranged slot 33 in the staple cartridge 30 for cutting through tissue that is clamped in the abutment. end stopper 12. Knife shank 180 extends through back element 50 and has a proximal end portion that actionably interfaces with a knife drive that is operatively attached to knife advance driver 200. The driver The knife advance 200 is attached to the pivot pin 132 so that it can be pivoted or otherwise actuated without actuating the trigger driver 130. In accordance with the invention, a first knife gear 192 is also attached to the pin. pivot 132 so that the actuation of the knife advance driver 200 also pivots the first knife gear 192. A trigger return spring 202 is secured between the first knife gear 192 and the cable housing 100 to force the driver knife feed 200 to an initial or non-actuated position.

[000716] The knife drive also includes a second knife gear 194 which is pivotally supported on a second gear spindle and in mesh with the first knife gear 192. The second knife gear 194 is in engagement meshed with a third knife gear 196 which is supported on a third gear spindle. Also supported on the third gear spindle 195 is a fourth knife gear 198. The fourth knife gear 198 is adapted to drively engage a series of annular gear teeth or rings on a proximal end of the knife shank 180. Des In this form, such an arrangement allows the fourth knife gear 198 to axially drive the knife shank 180 in the distal "DD" or proximal "PD" direction and further allows the firing shaft 180 to rotate about the longitudinal axis. A-A with respect to the fourth knife gear 198. Accordingly, the surgeon can axially advance the firing rod 180 and ultimately the knife element 172 in a distal position by pulling the knife advance driver 200 in the gripping direction of the knife. pistol 107 of cable assembly 100.

[000717] The present invention further includes a knife lock system 210 that prevents advancement of knife element 172 unless firing trigger 130 has been pulled to the fully fired position. This feature will therefore prevent activation of the knife advance system 170 unless they have first been fired or formed into the fabric. As can be seen in Figure 1, various implementations of the knife blocking system 210 comprise a knife blocking bar 211 that is pivotally supported on the pistol grip portion 107 of the handle assembly 100. The knife blocking bar 211 has a trigger end 212 which is adapted to be engaged by trigger trigger 130 when trigger trigger 130 is in the full trigger position. In addition, the knife lock bar 211 has a retaining hook 214 at its other end which is adapted to fixedly engage a lock rod 216 over the first cutting gear 192. A knife lock spring 218 is employed to force the knife lock bar 211 to a "locked" position in which the retaining hook 214 is retained in engagement with the locking rod 216 to thereby prevent actuation of the knife advance driver 200 unless the trigger 130 is in full trigger position.

[000718] After the staples are "fired" (formed) in the target tissue, the surgeon can press the trigger release button 167 so that the trigger trigger 130 returns to the initial position under traction of the torsion spring 135 which in turn causes the anvil 20 to be forced into an open position under the action of the spring 21. When in the open position, the surgeon can withdraw the end actuator 12 leaving the implantable staple cartridge 30 and clamps 32 in place. In applications where the end actuator is inserted through a passage, working channel, etc., the surgeon returns the anvil 20 to the closed position activating the trigger trigger 130 to allow the end actuator 12 to be removed. through the passage or working channel. If, however, the surgeon wishes to cut the target tissue after firing the staples, the surgeon must activate the knife advance driver 200 in the manner described above to drive the knife bar 172 through the target tissue to the end. of the end actuator. Thereafter, the surgeon may release the knife advance driver 200 to allow the trigger return spring 202 to cause the trigger drive to return the knife bar 172 to the home (non-actuated) position. After the knife bar 172 is returned to the starting position, the surgeon may open the jaws of the end actuator 13, 15 to release the implantable cartridge 30 in the patient and then withdraw the end actuator 12 from the patient. In this way, surgical instruments facilitate the use of small cartridges of implantable staples that can be inserted through relatively small working channels and passageways, while at the same time providing the surgeon with the option of firing the staples without cutting the tissue or, if desired, also cut the fabric after firing the staples.

[000719] Several unique and innovative embodiments of the present invention employ a compressible staple cartridge that supports staples in a substantially stationary position for anvil contact formation. The anvil is directed into the unformed staples where, for example, the degree of formation of the staple depends on how far the anvil is directed into the staples. Such an arrangement provides the surgeon with the ability to adjust the amount of forming or triggering pressure applied to the staples and thereby altering the final formed height of the staples. In the present invention, surgical stapling arrangements may employ staple drive elements that can lift the staples toward the anvil. This is described in more detail below.

[000720] Optionally, with respect to the above, the amount of trigger movement that is applied to the movable anvil depends on the degree of triggering of the trigger. For example, if the surgeon wishes to obtain only partially formed staples, then the firing trigger is pressed only partially inwards in the pistol grip direction 107. To obtain more staple formation, the surgeon simply presses the firing trigger further, the which results in the anvil being driven further into forming contact with the clamps. As used herein, the term "contact forming" means that the staple forming surface or staple forming pockets contact the ends of the legs of the staples and begin to form or flex the legs into a formed position. The degree of cleat formation refers to the amount of bending suffered by the legs of the cleats and finally refers to the cleat formation height as mentioned above. Those of ordinary skill in the art will further understand that, because the anvil 20 moves in a substantially parallel relationship with the staple cartridge as firing motions are applied thereto, the staples are formed substantially simultaneously. with substantially equal formed heights.

[000721] Figures 2 and 3 illustrate a 12" reciprocating end actuator that is similar to the 12' end actuator described above, with the exception of the following differences which are configured to accommodate a 172' knife bar. Knife bar 172' is coupled to or projects from a knife shank 180 and is otherwise operated in the manner described above with respect to knife bar 172. However, in that embodiment, knife bar 172' is long enough to span the entire length of the 12” end actuator and therefore a separate distal knife element is not employed on the 12” end actuator. Knife bar 172' has an upper cross member 173' and a lower cross member 175' formed thereon. Upper cross member 173' is oriented to slide across a corresponding elongated slot 250 in anvil 20" and lower cross member 175' is oriented to cross elongate slot 252 in elongate channel 14" of end actuator 12". A release slot (not shown) is also provided in the anvil 20" so that when the knife bar 172' is driven into an end position with the thin end actuator 12", the upper cross member 173' drops out. through the corresponding slot to allow the anvil 20” to move to the open position to disengage from the clamp and cut the tissue. Anvil 20" may otherwise be identical to anvil 20 described above and elongated groove 14" may otherwise be identical to elongate groove 14 described above.

[000722] In these embodiments, the anvil 20” is forced into a fully open position (Figure 2) by a spring or other opening arrangement (not shown). The anvil 20" is moved between the open and fully tightened positions by axial displacement of the firing adapter 150 in the manner described above. When the trigger adapter 150 is advanced to the fully tightened position (Figure 3), the surgeon can then advance the knife bar 172" distally, in the manner described above. If the surgeon wishes to use the end actuator as a gripping device to manipulate tissue, the trigger adapter can be moved proximally to allow the anvil 20” to move away from the elongated channel 14”, as shown in Figure 4 in dashed lines. In this embodiment, when knife bar 172" moves distally, upper cross member 173' and lower cross member 175' pull the anvil 20" and elongated groove 14" together to obtain the desired staple formation when the 172” knife bar is advanced distally through the 12” end actuator. See Figure 5. Thus, in this embodiment, staple formation occurs simultaneously with tissue cutting, but staples can be formed sequentially as knife bar 172” is driven distally.

[000723] The unique and innovative features of the various surgical staple cartridges and surgical instruments of the present invention allow the staples in these cartridges to be arranged in one or more rows of linear or non-linear staples. A plurality of such rows of staples may be provided on each side of an elongate slot which is centrally arranged in the staple cartridge to receive the fabric cutting element therethrough. In one arrangement, for example, staples in one row may be substantially parallel to staples in adjacent rows of staples, but offset therefrom. As a further alternative, one or more rows of staples may be non-linear in nature. That is, the base of at least one staple in a row of staples may extend along an axis that is substantially transverse to the bases of other staples in the same row of staples. For example, as will be discussed in more detail below, alternatively the rows of staples on either side of the elongated slit may have a zigzag appearance. These non-linear staple arrangements can achieve better tissue fixation results with fewer staples than the various linear staple arrangements employed in earlier staple cartridges.

[000724] Figure 6 illustrates the use of a surgical staple cartridge embodiment 900 in an end actuator embodiment 612'. As can be seen in Figures 6 and 7, one embodiment of surgical staple cartridge 900 has a cartridge body 902 that has a centrally arranged elongated slot 904 extending through a proximal end 903 to an area adjacent the distal end 905. The elongated slot 904 is configured to allow a knife body to move axially therethrough during a fabric cutting operation in the manner described above. The 902 cartridge body consists of a compressible hemostatic material, e.g. Oxidized Regenerated Cellulose ("ORC") or a bioabsorbable foam made from, e.g. PGA (polyglycolic acid, sold under the trade name Vicryl), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polyatic acid), PDS, (polydioxanone), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglecaprone 25, sold under the tradename Monocryl) or a compound of PGA, PCL, PLA and PDS in which rows 920, 930 of unformed staples 922 are supported. However, cartridge body 902 may be manufactured from other materials that serve to support unformed staples 922 in a desired orientation so that staples can be compressed as anvil 910' is brought into contact with them. . The 900 Staple Cartridge is implantable and is left attached to the stapled tissue after the stapling procedure is complete. To prevent the 922 clamps from being affected and the hemostatic material being activated during the insertion and placement process, the entire 900 cartridge can be coated or wrapped in a 906 biodegradable film such as a polydioxanone film, sold under the trademark PDS®, or with a polyglycerol sebacate (PGS) film or other biodegradable films made from, for example, PGA (polyglycolic acid, marketed under the tradename Vicryl), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglecapron 25, sold under the tradename Monocryl), or a compound of PGA, PCL, PLA, PDS that would be impermeable until ruptured. The cartridge body 902 of the staple cartridge 900 is sized to be removably supported in the elongated groove of the end actuator 612'.

[000725] In Figures 6, 10 and 11, the surgical staple cartridge 900 operatively supports a first row 920 of staples 922 on one side 907 of the elongated slot 904 and a second row 930 of staples 922 on the other side 909 of the slot elongated 904. Clamps 922 may be manufactured from a metallic material such as titanium, titanium alloys (eg titanium 6AI-4V, titanium 3al-2.5V), stainless steel, etc., and have a 924 clamp base and two upright clamp legs 926 projecting from the base. Each staple leg 926 may have a tissue piercing point 928 formed therein. In the first row 920 of staples 922, base 924 of at least one staple 922 overlaps base of another staple 922. Preferably, staple base 924 of each staple 922 overlaps staple bases 924 of two staples 922, with the exception of the base 924 of the last staple 922 at each end of the first row of staples 920. See Figure 10. Thus, the first row of staples 920 has a substantially non-linear shape. More particularly, when viewed from above, the first row of staples 920 has a substantial zigzag appearance.

[000726] As can be seen in Figure 9, the anvil 90 has two sequential longitudinal staple forming pockets 912, each of which has a substantial zigzag shape that corresponds to the shape of the first row 920 of staples 922 so that, when the anvil 910 is brought into forming contact with the staples 922, the legs 926 thereof are formed as shown in Figure 11. In this way, the distal leg of one staple shares the same pocket as the proximal leg of the next staple longitudinally. Such an arrangement allows for a denser pocket pattern, even to a point where the staples themselves interact (eg, they are folded over each other). In previous staple pocket arrangements, in general, there should be between 0.13 and 0.38 mm (between 0.005 and 0.015 inch) of metal/space between one set of pockets and the next. This embodiment of the present invention, however, has a 0 to 0.5 mm (0 to 0.02 inch) interference/overlap spacing arrangement (essentially -0.5 mm (-0.020")) because a clamp fits with the next clamp, for example. Such arrangements allow 15-30% more staples in the same space. In addition, once the staples are interlocked, there is less need for multiple side rows of staples. The above arrangements commonly employ three rows on either side of the tissue cut line to avoid having an open path through which blood can pass. Interlocking clamp lines are less likely to leave trajectories through which blood can pass. Another distinct advantage provided by the various interlocking clip arrangements of the present invention relates to improved "breaking force" which is the amount of force required to break and open a row of clips.

[000727] Another arrangement of staple forming pockets may comprise a common staple forming pocket. For use in the present invention, the term "common staple forming pocket" means that one forming pocket can form all staples in a single row of staples, unlike previous anvil designs where a separate forming pocket is provided. for each leg of each clamp to be formed.

[000728] Figure 12 illustrates yet another embodiment of clip 922' in which base 924' has an offset portion 929 to facilitate tighter overlap of bases 924'. As indicated above, the staple cartridge 900 has a second row 930 of staples 922 supported on a second lateral side 909 of the elongate slot 904. The second row 930 of staples 922 is substantially identical to the first row 920 of staples 922. In this way, the anvil 910 has a second common staple-forming pocket 912 that corresponds to the second row of staples 930 for forming contact therewith. Alternatively, however, the second row 930 of staples 922 may be different from the first row 920 of staples in format and, perhaps, number of staples.

[000729] Figure 8 illustrates a surgical staple cartridge 900' that is substantially identical to the staple cartridge 900 described above, with the exception of rows 920', 930' of staples 922 supported therein. For example, in this embodiment, the line 920' of staples 922 is arranged relative to each other so that a base axis S-S of at least one base of staple 924 is substantially transverse to the base axis S-S of the base of steel staple 924. at least one other adjacent staple 922. This predetermined pattern of staples, when viewed from above, comprises a substantial zigzag arrangement. In Figure 13, respective bases 924 of staples 922 may additionally have a base support member 927 overmolded thereon, as shown. The base support member 927 can be manufactured from, for example, non-absorbable plastic such as polyether ether ketone "PEEK", or absorbable plastic, for example, polyglycolic acid "PGA", polylactic acid "PLA" or "PLLA". , polydioxanone "PDS", PCL (polycaprolactone), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglecaprone 25, sold under the tradename Monocryl) or various mixtures of PGS, PDS, PLA, PGA and PCL compounds. The base support elements 927 facilitate interlocking between the clamps without causing the clamps themselves to overlap. In this way, such arrangements could form clamps with "B" or inverted "W" shapes without the overlapping of the legs of the clamps. However, the crowns are connected by the base support elements so that they act as overlapping clamps. Such arrangements allow the combination pockets to have two discrete trajectories for each leg.

[000730] Figure 14 employs a row of clips 920" wherein the legs 926 of adjacent clips 922 are coupled together by a coupler portion 929 molded or otherwise secured thereto. Each coupler portion 929 may be manufactured from, for example, polyether ether ketone "PEEK" or absorbable plastic such as, for example, polyglycolic acid "PGA", polylactic acid "PLA" or "PLLA", polydioxanone "PDS", PCL (polycaprolactone), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglecaprone 25, sold under the tradename Monocryl) or various mixtures of PGS, PDS, PLA, PGA and PCL compounds. Such a row of 920” staples has a substantial zigzag appearance when viewed from above. While the various embodiments of surgical staple cartridges 900, 900' have been explained with reference to use with the end actuator 612', it should be understood that staple cartridges 900, 900' can be effectively employed with the various other end actuators and surgical instruments described earlier herein, with suitable staple forming pocket arrangements being provided on the anvils of these instruments to achieve the desired amount of staple formation with movement of the anvils into forming contact with the staples.

[000731] Figures 15 and 16 illustrate another embodiment of surgical staple cartridge 940 supported in an elongated channel 14 of a surgical instrument 10. Surgical staple cartridge 940 includes a cartridge body 942 that has an elongated slot disposed centrally 944 extending at least partially through it. The elongated slot 944 is configured to allow a knife body of the surgical instrument 10 to move axially therethrough during a tissue cutting operation in the manner described above. The cartridge body 942 consists of a compressible hemostatic material, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose ("ORC") or a bioabsorbable foam of the types described above or below, on which lines 946, 948, 950, 952 of unformed staples 922. To prevent the staples 922 from being affected and the hemostatic material being activated during the insertion and placement process, the entire cartridge 940 may be coated or wrapped in a biodegradable film 954 such as a polydioxanone film, sold under trademark PDS®, or with a film of polyglycerol sebacate (PGS) or other biodegradable films made from, for example, PGA (polyglycolic acid, marketed under the trademark Vicryl), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglecaprone 25, sold under the trade name Monocryl), or a compound of PGA, PCL, PLA, PDS that would be impermeable until broken down.

[000732] In Figure 15, the cartridge 940 additionally includes a cartridge support member 960 which is coupled to the cartridge body 942. The cartridge support member 960 may be manufactured from a rigid material, for example titanium, stainless steel, aluminum, any alloy of the aforementioned materials, etc., and may be partially incorporated into the cartridge body 942. The cartridge support member 960 may be held in place by, for example, a film 954. Alternatively, when limited binding is desired, sporadic use of cyanoacylate could be made to "glue" the two components together. As a further alternative, cartridge body 942 may be heated and "welded" or "fused" to cartridge support member 960. Cartridge support member 960 forms at least a portion of the bottom surface of cartridge body 942 to fit into elongated channel 14. Cartridge support member 960 has one or more snap-in features 962 projecting therefrom to releasably couple cartridge support member 960 to elongate channel 14. Other forms of engagement Snap-fit features/fastener arrangements may be employed to releasably couple the cartridge support member 960 to the elongated groove 14.

[000733] Cartridge support member 960 has a series of support ridges 964, 966, 968, 970, 972, 974, 976 formed thereon to provide some lateral support to bases 924 of staples 922 in rows of staples 946 , 948, 950, 952, as shown in Figure 15. In this way, the support bridges are substantially coextensive with the clamp lines. Figure 17 illustrates an alternate embodiment of staple cartridge 940' that is substantially identical to cartridge 940, except for the inclusion of portions of upright fins 978, 979, 980, 981, 982, 983 that project from of the support ridges 964, 966, 968, 970, 972, 976, respectively, to provide additional lateral support for the clamps 922. The fin portions may be formed integrally with the cartridge support member 960 and have a height that is approx. ^ or less of the height of the cartridge. For example, any upright features that support the foam cannot extend above the foam's maximum compression height. Thus, if the cartridge is designed, for example, to be compressed to 1/3 of its original height when fired, the fins would be anywhere from 66% of the uncompressed height to 10% of the uncompressed height.

[000734] In use, after the staples 922 are formed by contacting the anvil 20 in the manner described above, the anvil 20 is opened and the end actuator 12 is pulled away from the stapled tissue. As the end actuator 12 is moved away from the stapled fabric, the cartridge body 942 remains attached to the stapled fabric and is then separated from the cartridge support member 960 which remains coupled to the elongated channel 14. The cartridge support member 960 it is provided with a color that differs from the color of the material comprising the cartridge body 942, as well as the color of the elongated channel 14. Such an arrangement provides the surgeon with an easily recognizable indication that there are no staple cartridges present in the end actuator. This way, the surgeon will not inadvertently attempt to reinsert/use the end actuator without first installing a new staple cartridge inside. To do so, the surgeon simply disconnects the snap-fit features of the cartridge support member 960 from the elongated channel 14 to allow the cartridge support member 960 of a new staple cartridge 940 to be placed therein. While staple cartridges 940 and 940' have been explained with reference to surgical instrument 10, it should be understood that these cartridges can be used effectively with many of the other surgical instruments disclosed herein without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. .

[000735] According to the invention, a staple cartridge may comprise a cartridge body and a plurality of staples stored in the cartridge body. In use, the staple cartridge can be introduced into a surgical site and positioned on one side of the tissue being treated. In addition, the staple forming anvil can be positioned on the opposite side of the fabric. The anvil may be carried by a first jaw and the staple cartridge may be carried by a second jaw, whereby the first jaw and/or the second jaw may be moved towards each other. After the staple cartridge and anvil are positioned relative to the tissue, the staples can be ejected from the staple cartridge body so that the staples can pierce the tissue and contact the staple forming anvil. After the staples are applied from the staple cartridge body, the staple cartridge body can then be removed from the surgical site. The staple cartridge, or at least a portion of a staple cartridge, can be deployed with the staples. For example, as described in more detail below, a staple cartridge may comprise a cartridge body that can be compressed, crushed and/or flattened by the anvil when the anvil is moved from an open position to a closed position. When the cartridge body is compressed, crushed and/or flattened, the clamps positioned in the cartridge body can be deformed by the anvil. Alternatively, the jaw supporting the staple cartridge can be moved towards the anvil to a closed position. In either case, the clips can be deformed while still at least partially positioned in the cartridge body. In some cases, staples may not be ejected from the staple cartridge, while in other cases, staples may be ejected from the staple cartridge along with a portion of the cartridge body.

[000736] Now referring to Figures 18A to 18D, a compressible staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 1000, for example, may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 1010 and, in addition, a plurality of positioned staples 1020 in the body of the compressible cartridge 1010, although only one clip 1020 is shown in Figures 18A to 18D. Figure 18A illustrates the staple cartridge 1000 supported by a staple cartridge holder, or staple cartridge channel, 1030, with the staple cartridge 1000 being illustrated in an uncompressed condition. In such an uncompressed condition, the anvil 1040 may or may not be in contact with the tissue T. In use, the anvil 1040 can be moved from an open position in contact with the tissue T, as illustrated in Figure 18B, and position the tissue T against the cartridge body 1010. Although the anvil 1040 can position the tissue T against a tissue contacting surface 1019 of the staple cartridge body 1010, again with reference to Figure 18B, the staple cartridge body 1010 can be subjected to little or no compressive force or pressure at such a point and the clamps 1020 may remain in an unformed or unfired condition. As illustrated in Figures 18A and 18B, the staple cartridge body 1010 may comprise one or more layers, and the staple legs 1021 of the staples 1020 may extend upwardly through these layers. The cartridge body 1010 may comprise a first layer 1011, a second layer 1012, a third layer 1013, with the second layer 1012 being disposed in an intermediate position between the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013, and a fourth layer 1014, wherein the third layer 1013 may be disposed in an intermediate position between the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014. The bases 1022 of the clips 1020 may be positioned in recesses 1015 in the fourth layer 1014 and the legs of the clips 1021 may be extending upwards from bases 1022 and through fourth layer 1014, third layer 1013 and second layer 1012, for example. Optionally, each deformable leg 1021 may comprise a point, such as the sharp point 1023, for example, which can be positioned on the second layer 1012, for example, when the staple cartridge 1000 is in an uncompressed condition. For example, prongs 1023 may not extend into and/or through first layer 1011, prongs 1023 may not protrude through tissue-contacting surface 1019 when staple cartridge 1000 is in a poor condition. not compressed. The sharp points 1023 may be positioned on the third layer 1013, and/or any other suitable layer, when the staple cartridge is in an uncompressed condition. Alternatively, the body of a staple cartridge can have any suitable number of layers such as less than four layers or more than four layers, for example.

[000737] Optionally, as described in more detail below, the first layer 1011 can be comprised of a reinforcing material and/or plastic material, such as polydioxanone (PDS) and/or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example, and the second layer 1012 may be comprised of a bioabsorbable foam material and/or a compressible hemostatic material, such as oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example. Optionally, one or more of the first layer 1011, the second layer 1012, the third layer 1013 and the fourth layer 1014 may hold the staples 1020 in the staple cartridge body 1010 and further maintain the staples 1020 in alignment with each other. the others. The third layer 1013 may be comprised of a reinforcing material, or a reasonably incompressible or inelastic material, which may be configured to maintain the clamp legs 1021 of the clamps 1020 in a position relative to one another. In addition, second layer 1012 and fourth layer 1014, which are positioned on opposite sides of third layer 1013, may stabilize, or reduce the movement of staples 1020 although second layer 1012 and fourth layer 1014 may be comprised of a material of compressible or elastic foam. The ends 1023 of the legs of the staples 1021 may be, at least partially, incorporated into the first layer 1011. For example, the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 may be configured to cooperatively and firmly hold the legs of the staples 1021 in position. . First layer 1011 and third layer 1013 may each comprise a sheet of bioabsorbable plastic, such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), available under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), poly -hydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecapron 25 (PGCL), available under the tradename Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and/or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and/or PCL, for example, and the second layer 1012 and fourth layer 1014 may each be comprised of at least one hemostatic material or agent.

[000738] While the first layer 1011 may be compressible, the second layer 1012 may be substantially more compressible than the first layer 1011. For example, the second layer 1012 may be about twice as compressible, about three times as compressible, about four times as compressible, about five times as compressible, and/or about ten times as compressible, for example, as the first layer 1011. Said another way, the second layer 1012 can compress about twice , about three times, about four times, about five times, and/or about ten times more than the first layer 1011, for a given applied force. The second layer 1012 may be about twice as compressible and about ten times as compressible, for example, as the first layer 1011. The second layer 1012 may comprise a plurality of air voids defined therein, the The amount and/or size of the air voids in the second layer 1012 can be controlled to provide a desired compressibility of the second layer 1012. Similar to the above embodiment, while the third layer 1013 may be compressible, the fourth layer 1014 may be substantially more compressible than third layer 1013. For example, fourth layer 1014 can be about twice as compressible, about three times as compressible, about four times as compressible, about five times as compressible, and/or about ten times as compressible, for example, as the third layer 1013. Put another way, the fourth layer 1014 can compress about twice, about three times s, about four times, about five times, and/or about ten times more than the third layer 1013, for a given applied force. The fourth layer 1014 may be about twice as compressible and about ten times as compressible, for example, as the third layer 1013. The fourth layer 1014 may comprise a plurality of air voids defined therein, the The amount and/or size of the air voids in the fourth layer 1014 can be controlled to provide a desired compressibility of the fourth layer 1014. In various circumstances, the compressibility of a cartridge body, or cartridge body layer, can be expressed in terms of a compression ratio, that is, a distance over which a layer is compressed for a given amount of force. For example, a layer that has a high compression ratio will compress a greater distance for a given amount of compression force applied to the layer compared to a layer that has a lower compression ratio. That said, the second layer 1012 may have a higher compression ratio than the first layer 1011, and similarly, the fourth layer 1014 may have a higher compression ratio than the third layer 1013. The second layer 1012 and fourth layer 1014 may be comprised of the same material and may comprise the same compression ratio. The second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 may be comprised of materials that have different compression ratios. Similarly, the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 may be comprised of the same material and may comprise the same compression ratio. First layer 1011 and third layer 1013 may be comprised of materials having different compression ratios.

[000739] As the anvil 1040 is moved toward its closed position, the anvil 1040 can contact the tissue T and apply a compressive force to the tissue T and staple cartridge 1000, as illustrated in Figure 18C . In such circumstances, the anvil 1040 may force the top surface, or the tissue-contacting surface 1019, of the cartridge body 1010 downwards towards the staple cartridge holder 1030. The staple cartridge holder 1030 may comprise a cartridge supporting surface 1031 which can be configured to support the staple cartridge 1000 as the staple cartridge 1000 is compressed between the cartridge supporting surface 1031 and the tissue contacting surface 1041 of the anvil 1040. to the pressure applied by the anvil 1040, the cartridge body 1010 can be compressed and the anvil 1040 can contact the clamps 1020. More particularly, the compression of the cartridge body 1010 and the downward movement of the tissue contact surface 1019 can cause the ends 1023 of the legs of the staples 1021 to pierce the first layer 1011 of the cartridge body 1010, pierce the fabric T, and enter the forming pockets 1042 in the bigo 1040. As the cartridge body 1010 is further compressed by the anvil 1040, the prongs 1023 may contact the walls defining the forming pockets 1042 and, as a result, the legs 1021 may be deformed or bent inwardly, for example, as illustrated in Figure 18C. As the legs of the staples 1021 are deformed, as also illustrated in Figure 18C, the bases 1022 of the staples 1020 may contact or be supported by the staple cartridge holder 1030. Optionally, as described in more detail below, the staple cartridge holder 1030 may comprise a plurality of support features, such as grooves, slots or staple holder recesses 1032, for example, which may be configured to support the staples 1020, or at least the bases 1022 of the staples 1020 , as the clamps 1020 are deformed. As also illustrated in Figure 18C, the cavities 1015 in the fourth layer 1014 may flatten as a result of the compressive force applied to the staple cartridge body 1010. In addition to the cavities 1015, the staple cartridge body 1010 may additionally comprise one or more voids, such as voids 1016, for example, which may or may not comprise a portion of a clip positioned therein, which may be configured to allow the cartridge body 1010 to be flattened. Cavities 1015 and/or voids 1016 may be configured to flatten so that the walls defining the cavities and/or walls are deflected downwardly and contact the platform surface of the cartridge 1031 and/or contact a layer of the cartridge body 1010 positioned under the cavities and/or voids.

[000740] Comparing Figure 18B and Figure 18C, it is evident that the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 were substantially compressed by the compressive pressure applied by the anvil 1040. It can also be seen that the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 were also compressed. As the anvil 1040 is moved to its closed position, the anvil 1040 may continue to further compress the cartridge body 1010 by forcing the tissue-contacting surface 1019 down toward the staple cartridge holder 1030. cartridge body 1010 is further compressed, anvil 1040 can deform clamps 1020 into their fully formed shape, as illustrated in Figure 18D. Referring to Figure 18D, the legs 1021 of each staple 1020 may be deformed downwardly toward the base 1022 of each staple 1020 to capture at least a portion of the T fabric, of the first layer 1011, of the second layer 1012, of the third layer. 1013, and fourth layer 1014 between deformable legs 1021 and base 1022. Comparing Figures 18C and 18D, it is further evident that second layer 1012 and fourth layer 1014 were substantially further compressed by the compressive pressure applied by the anvil 1040. It can also be seen after comparing Figures 18C and 18D that the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 were also further compressed. After the staples 1020 are completely, or at least sufficiently, formed, the anvil 1040 can be lifted away from the tissue T and the staple cartridge holder 1030 can be removed from, and/or detached from, the staple cartridge 1000. shown in Figure 18D, and as a result of the foregoing, cartridge body 1010 may be implanted with staples 1020. In various circumstances, implanted cartridge body 1010 may support tissue along the row of staples. In some circumstances, a hemostatic agent and/or any other suitable therapeutic drug contained in the body of the implanted cartridge 1010 can treat tissue over time. A hemostatic agent, as mentioned above, can reduce the bleeding of stapled and/or cut tissue while a binding agent or tissue adhesive can provide strength to the tissue over time. The 1010 implanted cartridge body can consist of materials such as ORC (oxidized regenerated cellulose), protein matrix, polyglycolic acid (PGA), available under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), poly- hydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), available under the tradename Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and/or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and/or PCL, for example. In certain circumstances, the cartridge body 1010 may comprise an antibiotic and/or antimicrobial material, such as colloidal silver and/or triclosan, for example, which may reduce the possibility of infection at the surgical site.

[000741] The 1010 cartridge body layers can be connected to each other. Second layer 1012 can be adhered to first layer 1011, third layer 1013 can be adhered to second layer 1012 and fourth layer 1014 can be adhered to third layer 1013 using at least one adhesive such as fibrin and/or hydrogel of protein, for example. Although this is not illustrated, the layers of the cartridge body 1010 can be connected together by mechanical interlocking feature. For example, the first layer 1011 and the second layer 1012 may each comprise corresponding interlocking features, such as a tongue and groove arrangement and/or a mortise joint arrangement, for example. Similarly, second layer 1012 and third layer 1013 may each comprise corresponding interlocking features, while third layer 1013 and fourth layer 1014 may each comprise corresponding interlocking features. Although not illustrated, staple cartridge 1000 may comprise one or more rivets, for example, which may extend through one or more layers of cartridge body 1010. For example, each rivet may comprise a first end, or head. , positioned adjacent the first layer 1011 and a second head positioned adjacent the fourth layer 1014 which may be mounted on or formed by a second end of the rivet. Due to the compressible nature of the cartridge body 1010, the rivets may compress the cartridge body 1010 so that the rivet heads can be recessed relative to the fabric contacting surface 1019 and/or the bottom surface 1018 of the cartridge body. 1010 cartridge, for example. For example, rivets may consist of a bioabsorbable material such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), available under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), available under the tradename Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and/or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and/or PCL, for example. The layers of the cartridge body 1010 may not be connected to each other, apart from clips 1020 contained therein. For example, frictional engagement between the legs of the clamps 1021 and the cartridge body 1010, for example, can hold the layers of the cartridge body 1010 together, and after the clamps are formed, the layers can be captured in the clamps 1020. At least a portion of the legs of the clamps 1021 may comprise a roughened surface or a rough coating which can increase the frictional forces between the clamps 1020 and the cartridge body 1010.

[000742] As described above, a surgical instrument may comprise a first jaw that includes the staple cartridge holder 1030 and a second jaw that includes the anvil 1040. Optionally, as described in more detail below, the staple cartridge 1000 may comprising one or more retaining features that can be configured to engage the staple cartridge holder 1030 and, as a result, releasably retain the staple cartridge 1000 in the staple cartridge holder 1030. The staple cartridge 1000 is clampable to the staple cartridge holder 1030 by at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and/or protein hydrogel, for example. In use, in at least one circumstance, specifically in laparoscopic and/or endoscopic surgery, the second jaw can be moved to a closed position opposite the first jaw, for example, so that the first and second jaws can be inserted through a trocar in a surgical site. For example, the trocar may define an opening, or cannula, of approximately 5 mm, through which the first and second jaws can be inserted. The second jaw can be moved into a partially closed position intermediate between the open position and the closed position which can allow the first and second jaws to be inserted through the trocar without deforming the staples 1020 contained in the staple cartridge body 1010. For example, the anvil 1040 may not apply a compressive force to the staple cartridge body 1010 when the second jaw is in its partially closed intermediate position while the anvil 1040 may compress the staple cartridge body 1010 when the second jaw is in its partially closed intermediate position. Although the anvil 1040 may compress the staple cartridge body 1010 when in such an intermediate position, the anvil 1040 may not sufficiently compress the staple cartridge body 1010 such that the anvil 1040 contacts the staples 1020 and/or or so that staples 1020 are deformed by anvil 1040. After the first and second jaws are inserted through the trocar into the surgical site, the second jaw can be opened again and the anvil 1040 and staple cartridge 1000 can be be positioned relative to the target tissue as described above.

[000743] Now referring to Figures 19A to 19D, an end actuator of a surgical stapler may comprise an implantable staple cartridge 1100 placed in an intermediate position between an anvil 1140 and a staple cartridge holder 1130. similar to the above embodiment, the anvil 1140 may comprise a tissue-contacting surface 1141, the staple cartridge 1100 may comprise a tissue-contacting surface 1119, and the staple cartridge holder 1130 may comprise a platform surface 1131 which can be configured to support the staple cartridge 1100. Referring to Figure 19A, the anvil 1140 can be used to position the fabric T against the tissue contacting surface 1119 of the staple cartridge 1100 without deforming the staple cartridge 1100 and, when the anvil 1140 is in such a position, the tissue contacting surface 1141 may be positioned a distance 1101a from the platform surface of the staple cartridge 1131 and tissue contacting surface 1119 can be positioned a distance 1102a from the platform surface of staple cartridge 1131. Thereafter, as the anvil 1140 is moved towards the staple cartridge holder 1130, Now referring to Figure 19B , the anvil 1140 can force the top surface, or the tissue contacting surface 1119, of the staple cartridge 1100 down and compress the first layer 1111 and the second layer 1112 of the cartridge body 1110 As layers 1111 and 1112 are compressed, again referring to Figure 19B, second layer 1112 can be crushed and legs 1121 of staples 1120 can pierce first layer 1111 and enter fabric T. For example, staples 1120 can be at least partially positioned in the staple cavities, or voids, 1115 in the second layer 1112, and when the second layer 1112 is compressed, the staple cavities 1115 can flatten and, as As a result, allowing the second layer 1112 to be flattened around the staples 1120. The second layer 1112 may comprise cover portions 1116 that can extend over the staple cavities 1115 and enclose, or at least partially enclose, the staple cavities 1115 Figure 19B illustrates cover portions 1116 being crushed down into staple cavities 1115. Second layer 1112 may comprise one or more weakened portions which may facilitate flattening of second layer 1112. Optionally, such weakened portions may comprise markings, perforations and/or thin cross-sections, for example, that can facilitate a controlled flattening of the cartridge body 1110. The first layer 1111 can comprise one or more weakened portions that can facilitate penetration of the legs of the staples 1121 through the first layer. 1111. Optionally, these weakened portions may comprise markings, perforations and/or thin cross sections, for example, which may be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the legs of the clamps 1121.

[000744] When the anvil 1140 is in a partially closed unfired position, again with reference to Figure 19A, the anvil 1140 can be positioned a distance 1101a from the deck surface of the cartridge 1131 so that a gap is defined in that region. This gap can be filled by the staple cartridge 1100, which has a height of the staple cartridge 1102a, and the fabric T. As the anvil 1140 is moved downward to compress the staple cartridge 1100, again with reference to Figure 19B , the distance between the tissue-contacting surface 1141 and the cartridge platform surface 1131 may be defined by a distance 1101b which is shorter than the distance 1101a. In various circumstances, the gap between the tissue-contacting surface 1141 of the anvil 1140 and the platform surface of the cartridge 1131, defined by the distance 1101b, may be greater than the original, undeformed height of the staple cartridge 1102a. As the anvil 1140 is moved closer to the platform surface of the cartridge 1131, now referring to Figure 19C, the second layer 1112 can continue to be flattened and the distance between the legs of the clamps 1121 and the forming pockets 1142 can decrease. Similarly, the distance between the tissue-contacting surface 1141 and the platform surface of the cartridge 1131 may decrease to a distance 1101c which may be greater than, equal to, or less than the original, undeformed height of the cartridge 1102a. . Referring now to Figure 19D, the anvil 1140 can be moved to a final firing position in which the clamps 1120 have been fully formed, or at least formed to a desired height. In this position, the tissue contacting surface 1141 of the anvil 1140 may be a distance 1101d from the platform surface of the cartridge 1131, with the distance 1101d being shorter than the original, undeformed height of the cartridge 1102a. As also illustrated in Figure 19D, clamp cavities 1115 may be completely, or at least substantially, flattened, and clamps 1120 may be completely, or at least substantially, surrounded by second flattened layer 1112. In various circumstances, anvil 1140 may be completely, or at least substantially, surrounded by flattened second layer 1112. thereafter be moved away from the staple cartridge 1100. After the anvil 1140 is disengaged from the staple cartridge 1100, the cartridge body 1110 can at least partially re-expand at various locations, i.e., intermediate locations of adjacent staples 1120 , for example. The crushed cartridge body 1110 may not resiliently re-expand. Formed staples 1120 and, additionally, cartridge body staples 1110 placed in an adjacent intermediate position 1120 can apply pressure, or compressive forces, to the tissue T, which can provide various therapeutic benefits.

[000745] As discussed earlier, again with reference to Figure 19A, each clip 1120 may comprise clip legs 1121 extending therefrom. While staples 1120 are shown as comprising two staple legs 1121, multiple staples may be used which may comprise one staple leg or, alternatively, more than two staple legs, such as three staple legs or four staple legs, for example . As illustrated in Figure 19A, each clip leg 1121 can be incorporated into the second layer 1112 of the cartridge body 1110 so that the clips 1120 are secured to the second layer 1112. The clips 1120 may be inserted into the clip cavities 1115 in the cartridge body. cartridge 1110 so that the prongs 1123 of the legs of the clamps 1121 enter the cavities 1115 before the bases 1122. After the prongs 1123 are inserted into the cavities 1115, the prongs 1123 can be pressed against the cover portions 1116 and cut the second layer 1112. Clips 1120 may be seated deep enough in second layer 1112 so that clips 1120 do not move, or at least substantially move, relative to second layer 1112. Clips 1120 may be seated deep enough in the second layer 1112 so that the bases 1122 are positioned or incorporated into the staple cavities 1115. Alternatively, the bases 1122 may not be positioned 19A, bases 1122 may extend below the bottom surface 1118 of cartridge body 1110. Bases 1122 may rest on, or may be positioned directly against, the cartridge platform surface 1130. Cartridge platform surface 1130 may comprise support features extending therefrom and/or defined therein whereby, for example, bases 1122 of clamps 1120 may be positioned in and be supported by one or more support grooves, slots or recesses 1132, for example in the staple cartridge holder 1130, as described in more detail below.

[000746] In addition to the above, now referring to Figure 20, the bases 1122 of the staples 1120 may be positioned directly against the platform surface 1131 of the staple cartridge holder 1130. Optionally, including embodiments where the bases of the staples 1122 comprise circular or arcuate bottom surfaces 1124, for example, staple bases 1122 can move or slide along the platform surface of staple cartridge 1131. Such sliding can occur when anvil 1140 is pressed against leg tips 1123 of the staples 1121 during the staple forming process. As described above and now with reference to Figure 21, the staple cartridge holder 1130 may comprise one or more support slots 1132 which may be configured to eliminate, or at least reduce, relative movement between the staple bases 1122 and the cartridge platform surface 1131. For example, each support slot 1132 may be defined by a surface contour that corresponds, or at least substantially corresponds, to the contour of the bottom surface of the clip positioned therein. For example, the bottom surface 1124 of the base 1122 shown in Figure 21 may comprise a circular, or at least substantially circular, surface, and the support slot 1132 may also comprise a circular, or at least substantially circular, surface. For example, the surface defining the slit 1132 may be defined by a radius of curvature that is greater than or equal to a radius of curvature defining the bottom surface 1124. Although the slits 1132 may assist in preventing or reducing sliding motion between the staples 1120 and the staple cartridge holder 1130, the slots 1132 may also be configured to prevent or reduce relative rotational movement between the staples 1120 and the staple cartridge holder 1130. More particularly, the slots 1132 may be configured to tightly receive bases 1122 to prevent or reduce rotation of clamps 1120 about axes 1129, for example, so that clamps 1120 do not rotate or twist when being deformed.

[000747] In addition to the above, each clip 1120 may be formed from a round, or at least substantially round, wire. The legs and base of each clamp can be formed from a wire that has a non-circular cross-section, such as a rectangular cross-section, for example. For example, the staple cartridge holder 1130 may comprise corresponding non-circular slots, such as rectangular slots, for example, configured to receive the bases of such staples. Referring now to Figure 22, each clamp 1120 may comprise a crown, such as a crown 1125, for example, overmolded onto a base 1122, each crown 1125 being positioned in a support slot in the clamp cartridge holder 1130. For example, each crown 1125 may comprise a square and/or rectangular cross-section, for example, which may be configured to be received in square and/or rectangular slots 1134, for example, in the staple cartridge holder 1130. Crowns 1125 may consist of a bioabsorbable plastic, such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), available under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), available under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and/or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL, and/or PCL, for example, and can be formed around the bases 1122 of the staples 1120 by a molding process. injection, for example. Various crowns and methods of forming various crowns are disclosed in US Patent Application Serial No. 11/541,123 entitled "SURGICAL STAPLES HAVING COMPRESSIBLE OR CRUSHABLE MEMBERS FOR SECURING TISSUE THEREIN AND STAPLING INSTRUMENTS FOR DEPLOYING THE SAME", filed September 2006, the full disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Referring again to Figure 22, the slots 1134 may additionally comprise entry areas, or chamfers 1135 which may be configured to facilitate the insertion of the crowns 1125 into the slots 1134. The bases and/or crowns of the clamps 1120 may be positioned in the slots 1134 when staple cartridge 1100 is mounted to staple cartridge holder 1130. Crowns 1125 of staples 1120 may be aligned with slots 1134 when staple cartridge 1100 is mounted to staple cartridge holder 1130. For example, the crowns 1125 may not enter the slots 1134 until a compressive force is applied to the legs of the clips 1121 and the bases and/or crowns of the clips 1120 are forced down into the slots 1134.

[000748] Now referring to Figures 23 and 24, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 1200, for example, may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 1210 comprising an outer layer 1211 and an inner layer 1212. similar to the above embodiment, staple cartridge 1200 may comprise a plurality of staples 1220 positioned in cartridge body 1210. Optionally, each staple 1220 may comprise a base 1222 and one or more staple legs 1221 extending therefrom. For example, the legs of the staples 1221 may be inserted into the inner layer 1212 and seated at a depth at which the bases 1222 of the staples 1220 are bordering and/or disposed adjacent to the bottom surface 1218 of the layer. internal 1212, for example. In Figures 23 and 24, inner layer 1212 does not comprise staple cavities configured to receive a portion of staples 1220 while, alternatively, inner layer 1212 may comprise such staple cavities. In addition to the above, the inner layer 1212 may consist of a compressible material, such as bioabsorbable foam and/or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example, which may be configured to allow the cartridge body 1210 to flatten when a load of compression is applied to it. The inner layer 1212 may consist of a lyophilized foam comprising polylactic acid (PLA) and/or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example. The ORC may be commercially available under the tradename Surgicel and may comprise a loose woven cloth (such as a surgical sponge), loose fibers (such as a cotton ball), and/or a foam. The inner layer 1212 may consist of a material that includes drugs, such as freeze-dried thrombin and/or fibrin, for example, contained therein and/or coated over the layer, which may be activated by water and/or activated by fluids in the body. patient, for example. For example, freeze-dried thrombin and/or fibrin can be maintained in a Vicryl matrix (PGA), for example. In certain circumstances, however, activatable drugs may be unintentionally activated when the staple cartridge 1200 is inserted into a surgical site on the patient, for example. Referring again to Figures 23 and 24, the outer layer 1211 may consist of a material impermeable, or at least substantially impermeable, to water and water, so that liquids do not come into contact with, or at least substantially contact with, the surface. inner layer 1212 until the cartridge body 1210 has been compressed and the legs of the staples have penetrated the outer layer 1211 and/or until the outer layer 1211 has been cut in some way. The outer layer 1211 may consist of a reinforcing material and/or plastic material, such as polydioxanone (PDS) and/or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example. Outer layer 1211 may comprise a wrapper that surrounds inner layer 1212 and clips 1220. More particularly, clips 1220 may be inserted into inner layer 1212 and outer layer 1211 may be wrapped around the subassembly comprising inner layer 1212 and clamps 1220 and then sealed.

[000749] Now referring to Figures 25 and 26, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 1300, for example, may comprise an implantable cartridge body 1310 comprising an outer layer 1311 and an inner layer 1312. Similarly In the above embodiment, staple cartridge 1300 may additionally comprise staples 1320 positioned in the cartridge body 1310 wherein each staple 1320 may comprise a base 1322 and one or more legs 1321 extending therefrom. Similar to the staple cartridge 1200, the bases 1322 of staples 1320 can extend below the bottom surface 1318 of the inner layer 1312 and the outer layer 1311 can surround the bases 1322. For example, the outer layer 1311 can be flexible enough so as to enclose each staple base 1322 so that the outer layer 1311 conforms to the contour of the bases 1322. Alternatively, again referring to Figure 24, the outer layer 1211 may be rigid enough to extend around the bases. 1222 without conforming to each base 1222. In either case, the outer layer 1311 may be disposed in an intermediate position between the bases 1322 of the staples 1320 and a support surface of the staple cartridge, such as the support surfaces 1031 or 1131, for example, which support the staple cartridge 1300. For example, the outer layer 1311 may be disposed in an intermediate position between the bases 1322 and support slots, such as the slots 103 2 or 1132, for example, defined on the staple cartridge support surface. For example, in addition to the above, the outer layer 1311 may be configured to limit movement of the bases 1322 and/or increase the coefficient of friction between the bases 1322 and the staple cartridge support surface and/or support slots for reduce relative motion in this region. Alternatively, referring now to Figures 27 and 28, the outer layer of a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 1400, for example, may not completely surround the staples positioned therein. For example, an outer layer 1411 of an implantable compressible cartridge body 1410 may be mounted to the inner layer 1412 before the clip legs 1421 of the clips 1420 are inserted into the cartridge body 1410. As a result of the foregoing, the bases 1422 of the staples 1420 may extend out of outer layer 1411 and, for example, bases 1422 may be positioned directly in support slots 1032 or 1132 on staple cartridge support surfaces 1031 or 1131, for example. Staple legs 1421 can cut outer layer 1411 as they are inserted therethrough. In various circumstances, the holes created by the legs of the staples 1421 can closely surround the legs of the staples 1421 so that very little, if any, fluid can leak between the legs of the staples 1421 and the outer layer 1411, which can reduce, or avoid the possibility that the medicament contained in the staple cartridge body 1410 is activated and/or leaks out of the cartridge body 1410 prematurely.

[000750] As discussed earlier, again with reference to Figures 23 and 24, the legs 1221 of the clips 1220 may be incorporated into the cartridge body 1210 and the bases 1222 of the clips 1220 may extend outwardly from the bottom surface 1218 of the inner layer 1212. Additionally, in addition to the above, inner layer 1212 may not comprise staple cavities configured to receive staples 1220. Alternatively, now referring to Figures 29 and 30, a staple cartridge such as staple cartridge 1500 , for example, may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 1510 which comprises clip cavities 1515 which may be configured to receive at least a portion of the clips 1520 therein. For example, an upper portion of the staple legs 1521 of the staples 1520 may be incorporated into the inner layer 1512 while a bottom portion of the staple legs 1521 and the bases 1522 may be positioned in the recesses of the staples 1515. The bases 1522 may be positioned completely into the cavities of clips 1515 or bases 1522 may extend, at least partially, below the bottom surface 1518 of inner layer 1512. Similar to the above embodiment, outer layer 1511 may enclose inner layer 1512 and clips 1520 positioned inside. Alternatively, referring now to Figure 31, a staple cartridge 1600 may comprise staples 1620 positioned in staple cavities 1615 in an implantable compressible cartridge body 1610 wherein at least a portion of the staples 1620 is not enclosed by outer layer 1611 For example, each clip 1620 may comprise clip legs 1621 that are at least partially incorporated into the inner layer 1612 and, additionally, bases 1622 that extend outwardly around the outer layer 1611.

[000751] Now referring to Figures 32 and 33, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 1700, for example, may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 1710 and a plurality of staples 1720 at least partially positioned in the cartridge body 1710. Cartridge body 1710 may comprise an outer layer 1711, an inner layer 1712, and, in addition, an alignment die 1740 that may be configured to align and/or secure the clips 1720 in position on the cartridge body 1710. inner layer 1712 may comprise a recess 1741 which may be configured to receive alignment matrix 1740 therein. Alignment matrix 1140 may be snap-fitted into recess 1741 and/or otherwise properly secured to inner layer 1712 using at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and/or protein hydrogel, for example. The recess 1741 may be configured so that the bottom surface 1742 of the alignment die 1740 is aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the bottom surface 1718 of the inner layer 1712. The bottom surface 1742 of the alignment die may be recessed from and/or extend from the bottom surface 1718 of the second layer 1712. Optionally, each clip 1720 may comprise a base 1722 and one or more legs 1721 extending from the base 1722, with at least one leg portions of clips 1721 may extend through alignment die 1740. Alignment die 1740 may further comprise a plurality of openings and/or slits, for example, extending therethrough which may be configured to receive the legs of the 1721 clamps inside. For example, each opening may be configured to closely receive a clip leg 1721 so that there is little, if any, relative movement between the clip leg 1721 and the side walls of the opening. Alignment die openings may not extend completely through alignment die 1740 and clamp legs 1721 may be required to cut alignment die 1740 as clamp legs 1721 are forced therethrough.

[000752] Alignment die 1740 may consist of a molded plastic body which, for example, may be more rigid or less compressible than inner layer 1712 and/or outer layer 1711. For example, alignment die 1740 may consist of a plastic material and/or any other suitable material, such as polydioxanone (PDS) and/or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example. Alignment die 1740 may be mounted on inner layer 1712 and clamp legs 1721 may thereafter be inserted through alignment die 1740 and incorporated into inner layer 1712. Bottom surface 1742 of alignment die 1740 may comprise one or more grooves, slits or recesses, for example, which may be configured to receive, at least partially, the bases 1722 of the clips 1720. Similar to the above embodiment, the outer layer 1711 may then be arranged around the subassembly comprising inner layer 1712, alignment die 1740 and staples 1720. Alternatively, outer layer 1711 may be arranged around a subassembly comprising inner layer 1712 and alignment die 1740, with staples 1720 can thereafter be inserted through the outer layer 1711, the alignment matrix 1740 and the inner layer 1712. In any case, as a result of the above, the inner layer 17 12, alignment die 1740 and/or outer layer 1711 may be configured to hold clamps 1720 in position until and/or after they are deformed by an anvil as described above. For example, the alignment die 1740 can serve to hold the staples 1720 in place before the staple cartridge 1700 is implanted in a patient, and additionally secure tissue along the staple line after the staple cartridge 1700 is implanted in a patient. 1700 is deployed. Clips 1720 may be secured to alignment die 1740 without being incorporated into inner layer 1712 and/or outer layer 1711, for example.

[000753] Now referring to Figures 34 to 40, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 1800, for example, can be assembled by compressing an inner layer 1812, inserting staples, such as the 1820 staples, for example. , at inner layer 1812, and enclosing inner layer 1812 with an outer layer 1811. With special reference to Figure 34, there is shown a compressible inner layer 1812 comprising a plurality of clip cavities 1815 defined therein, although alternatives may be envisaged wherein the inner layer 1812 does not comprise staple cavities as described above. Referring now to Figure 35, the compressible inner layer 1812 may be disposed in an intermediate position between a transfer plate 1850 and a support plate 1860 and compressed between the compression surfaces 1852 and 1862, respectively, of these plates. As illustrated in Figure 35, the top and bottom surfaces of the inner layer 1812 may be pinched towards each other and, in response, the inner layer 1812 may swell outwardly in the lateral directions. The inner layer 1812 can be compressed to a height that is approximately one-third of its original height, for example, and can have a height or thickness between approximately 1.5 mm (0.06”) and approximately 2.0 mm ( 0.08”) in its compressed state, for example. As also illustrated in Figure 35, transfer plate 1850 may additionally comprise a plurality of clips, such as clips 1820, for example, positioned in a plurality of clip cavities 1853. In addition, transfer plate 1850 may comprise , additionally, a plurality of drivers 1851 that can be configured to force the staples 1820 up and out of the staple cavities 1853. Now referring to Figure 36, the drivers 1851 can be used to push the staple legs 1821 of the staples. 1820 into and through the compressed inner layer 1812. The drivers 1851 may be configured so that the top surfaces thereof are positioned flush, or at least nearly flush, with the compression surface 1852 of the transfer plate 1850 after the 1820 clips have been fully ejected from the 1853 clip cavities of the 1850 transfer plate. Figure 36, support plate 1860 may comprise a plurality of receiving apertures 1861 which may be configured to receive staple legs 1821, or at least the ends of staple legs 1821, after they are forced through inner layer 1812 Receiving apertures 1861, or the like, may be necessary when the inner layer 1812 has been compressed to a height that is less than the height of the staples 1820, and thus, after the staples 1820 are completely ejected from the staple cavities 1853, the legs of the clips 1821 may project from the top surface of the compressed inner layer 1812. The inner layer 1812 may be compressed to a height that is greater than the height of the clips 1820 and, as a result, the receiving openings 1861 in the plate 1860 support may be unnecessary.

[000754] After the clips 1820 are inserted into the inner layer 1812, now referring to Figure 37, the backing plate 1860 can be moved away from the transfer plate 1850 to allow the decompression of the inner layer 1812. In such circumstances, the bed - Internal 1812 can resiliently re-expand to its original uncompressed height, or at least close to its original height. As the inner layer 1812 is re-expanded, the height of the inner layer 1812 may increase to exceed the height of the staples 1820, so that the staple legs 1821 of the staples 1820 no longer protrude from the top surface of the staple. inner layer 1812. In various circumstances, receiving openings 1861 may be configured to hold the legs of the clamps 1821 in position at least until the backing plate 1860 has been spaced far enough apart that the legs 1821 no longer rest in the receiving openings 1861. In such circumstances, the receiving apertures 1861 can help maintain relative alignment between the clips 1820 of the inner layer 1812 as it is re-expanded. In various circumstances, inner layer 1812 and clips 1820 positioned therein may comprise a subassembly 1801 which, now referring to Figure 38, may be inserted into an outer layer 1811, for example. For example, outer layer 1811 may comprise a cavity 1802 which may be configured to receive subassembly 1801. In various circumstances, a tool, such as pliers 1855 for example, may be used to push outer layer 1811 over subassembly 1801. When subassembly 1801 is sufficiently positioned on outer layer 1811, now referring to Figure 39, outer layer 1811 can be sealed. The outer layer 1811 may be sealed using the application of heat to a portion thereof. More particularly, the outer layer 1811 may consist of a plastics material, whereby the open end of the outer layer 1811 may be heat-sealed by one or more heated elements, or irons, 1856 to bond and/or seal the perimeter of the open end of the outer layer 1811. For example, referring to Figure 40, an excess portion 1857 of outer layer 1811 can be removed and staple cartridge 1800 can then be used as described herein.

[000755] As described above, a staple cartridge may be positioned within and/or attached to a staple cartridge clamping portion. Referring now to Figures 41 and 42, a staple cartridge fixing portion may comprise a staple cartridge groove, such as the staple cartridge groove 1930, for example, which may be configured to receive at least a portion of a staple cartridge, such as the 1900 staple cartridge, for example. The staple cartridge channel 1930 can comprise a bottom support surface 1931, a first support side wall 1940, and a second support side wall 1941. In use, the staple cartridge 1900 can be positioned in the staple cartridge channel 1900. staples 1930 such that staple cartridge 1900 is positioned against and/or adjacent to bottom support surface 1931 and disposed in an intermediate position between first support side wall 1940 and second support side wall 1941. first supporting side wall 1940 and second supporting side wall 1941 may define a side span therebetween. For example, staple cartridge 1900 may comprise a side width 1903 that is equal to and/or greater than the side span defined between support walls 1940 and 1941 so that a compressible implantable cartridge body 1910 of staple cartridge 1900 can be fitted securely between walls 1940 and 1941. Side width 1903 of staple cartridge 1900 may be less than the gap defined between first and second side walls 1940 and 1941. Optionally, at least a portion of walls 1940 and 1941 and the bottom support surface 1931 may be defined by a groove of stamped metal or, alternatively, at least a portion of the supporting side wall 1940 and/or the supporting side wall 1941 may consist of a flexible material, such as an elastomeric material , for example. Referring primarily to Figure 41, the first side wall 1940 and the second side wall 1941 of the staple cartridge channel 1930 may each consist of a rigid portion 1933 extending upwardly from the bottom support surface 1931 and a flexible portion 1934 extending upwardly from the rigid portion 1933.

[000756] In addition to the above, the cartridge body 1910 of the staple cartridge 1900 may consist of one or more compressible layers, such as the first layer 1911 and the second layer 1912, for example. When cartridge body 1910 is pressed against bottom support surface 1931 by an anvil as described above, the side portions of cartridge body 1910 can expand laterally. When the 1930 staple cartridge has rigid side walls, lateral expansion of the 1910 cartridge body can be prevented, or at least limited, by the rigid side walls and, as a result, a significant amount of internal pressure, or stress, can be developed. in the cartridge body 1910. When at least a portion of the staple cartridge 1930 has flexible side walls, the flexible side walls may be configured to flex laterally and allow the side portions of the cartridge body 1910 to expand laterally, thereby reducing pressure internal, or stress, generated in the cartridge body 1910. When the cartridge groove does not comprise side walls, or comprises side walls that are relatively shorter than the staple cartridge, the side portions of the staple cartridge can be expanded laterally without limitation. , or at least substantially without limitation. In any case, now referring to Figure 42, a staple cartridge channel 2030 may comprise side walls 2040 and 2041 which may consist entirely of a flexible material, such as an elastomeric material, for example. The staple cartridge channel 2030 may additionally comprise side slots 2033 that extend along the sides of the bottom support surface 2031 of the staple cartridge channel 2030 that may be configured to receive and hold at least a portion of the side walls 2040 and 2041 inside. Sidewalls 2040 and 2041 may be secured in slots 2033 by snapping and/or pressing while sidewalls 2040 and 2041 may be secured in slots 2033 by one or more adhesives. The side walls 2040 and 2041 may be separable from the bottom support surface 2031 during use. In any case, a compressible implantable cartridge body 2010 can be detached and/or disengaged from the side walls 2040 and 2041 when the cartridge body 2010 is implanted with the clamps 2020.

[000757] Now referring to Figure 43, a surgical instrument may comprise a stem 2150 and an end actuator extending from the distal end of the stem 2150. The end actuator may comprise, similarly to the above embodiment, a staple cartridge channel 2130, an anvil 2140 movable between an open position and a closed position, and a staple cartridge 2100 disposed in an intermediate position between the staple cartridge channel 2130 and anvil 2140. Also similar to the embodiment above, the staple cartridge 2100 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 2110 and a plurality of staples 2120 positioned in the cartridge body 2110. The staple cartridge channel 2130 may comprise, a, a bottom support surface 2131 against the which the staple cartridge 2100 can be positioned, two, a distal end 2135 and, three, a proximal end 2136. As shown in Figure 43, the card Staple tappet 2100 may comprise a first end 2105 which is positionable at the distal end 2135 of the staple cartridge channel 2130 and a second end 2106 which is positionable at the proximal end 2136 of the staple cartridge channel 2130. The distal end 2135 cartridge slot 2130 may comprise at least one distal retaining feature, such as a retaining wall 2137, for example, and similarly, the proximal end 2136 may comprise at least one proximal retaining feature, such as a retaining wall. retainer 2138, for example. For example, the distal retaining wall 2137 and the proximal retaining wall 2138 may define a gap in this region that may be equal to or less than the length of the staple cartridge 2100 so that the staple cartridge 2100 can fit securely into the staple cartridge channel 2130 when the staple cartridge 2100 is inserted therein.

[000758] Again with reference to Figures 23 and 24, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 1200, for example, may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, tissue-contacting surface 1219. For example, the body of staple cartridge 1210 of staple cartridge 1200 may comprise a first end 1205 that can be defined by a first height, or thickness, 1207 and a second end 1206 that can be defined by a second height, or thickness, 1208, wherein the first height 1207 may be equal to, or at least substantially equal to, the second height 1208. The cartridge body 1210 may comprise a constant, or at least substantially constant, height, or thickness, between the first end 1205 and the second end 1206. For example, fabric contacting surface 1219 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to bottom surface 1218 of cartridge body 1210. Again with reference to Figure 43 , the first end 2105 of the cartridge body 2110 of the staple cartridge 2100 can be defined by a first height 2107 that is different from a second height 2108 of the second end 2106. As illustrated, the first height 2107 is greater than the second height 2108, although second height 2108 could be greater than first height 2107 alternatively. The height of the cartridge body 2110 may decrease linearly and/or geometrically between the first end 2105 and the second end 2106. For example, the fabric contact surface 2119, which extends between the first end 2105 and the second end, 2106, can be oriented along an angle defined in this region. For example, the fabric contacting surface 2119 may not be parallel to the bottom surface 2118 of the cartridge body 2110 and/or parallel to the supporting surface 2131 of the staple cartridge channel 2130.

[000759] Again with reference to Figures 43 and 44, the anvil 2140 may comprise a tissue-contacting surface 2141 that may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the support surface 2131 of the staple cartridge channel 2130 when the anvil 2140 is in a closed position, as illustrated in Figure 44. When anvil 2140 is in a closed position, anvil 2140 can be configured to compress the first end 2105 of the staple cartridge 2100 more than the second end 2106 due to the greater height of the first end 2105 and the lesser height of the second end 2106. In some circumstances, including the circumstance where the fabric T, disposed in an intermediate position between the contacting surfaces of the fabric 2119 and 2141, has a constant thickness , or at least substantially constant, the pressure generated in the fabric T and cartridge 2100 may be greater at the distal end of the end actuator than at the proximal end of the end actuator. More particularly, when the tissue T between the anvil 2140 and the staple cartridge 2100 is of substantially constant thickness, the tissue T, disposed in an intermediate position between the distal end 2145 of the anvil 2140 and the first end 2105 of the staple cartridge 2100 , can be compressed more than the tissue T, disposed in an intermediate position between the proximal end 2146 of the anvil 2140 and the second end 2106 of the staple cartridge 2100. In accordance with the invention, a pressure gradient can be generated in the tissue T between the proximal end and the distal end of the end actuator. More particularly, when the tissue T between the anvil 2140 and the staple cartridge 2100 has a substantially constant thickness and the height of the staple cartridge 2100 decreases linearly between the distal end and the proximal end of the end actuator, the pressure on the tissue T can decrease linearly between the distal end of the end actuator and the proximal end of the end actuator. Similarly, when the tissue T between the anvil 2140 and the staple cartridge 2100 has a substantially constant thickness and the height of the staple cartridge 2100 decreases geometrically between the distal end and the proximal end of the end actuator, the pressure in tissue T may decrease geometrically between the distal end of the end actuator and the proximal end of the end actuator.

[000760] Again with reference to Figure 43, the fabric T, disposed in an intermediate position between the staple cartridge 2100 and the anvil 2140, may not have a constant thickness throughout its length. In at least one of these circumstances, the tissue T positioned between the proximal end 2146 of the anvil 2140 and the second end 2106 of the staple cartridge 2100 may be thicker than the tissue T positioned between the distal end 2145 of the anvil 2140 and the first end 2105 of the staple cartridge 2100. In such circumstances, as a result, the thicker tissue T can be generally positioned above the shorter proximal end 2106 of the staple cartridge 2100 and the thinner tissue T can be generally positioned above the end 2106 of the staple cartridge 2100. 2105. In use, the firing collar 2152 of the rod 2150 may be advanced distally along the back of the rod 2151 so that the firing collar 2152 engages the cam portion 2143 of the anvil 2140 and rotates the anvil 2140 in direction of staple cartridge 2100, as illustrated in Figure 44. Once anvil 2140 has been rotated to a fully closed position, fabric T can be lengthened. between the tissue-contacting surfaces 2119 and 2141, and while the height of the staple cartridge 2100 may not be constant between the proximal and distal ends of the end actuator, the pressure or compressive forces applied to the T-tissue may be constant, or at least substantially constant, therethrough. More particularly, as the thinner fabric T can be associated with the greater height of the staple cartridge 2100 and the thicker fabric T can be associated with the lesser height of the staple cartridge 2100, the cumulative or summed height of the fabric T and the staple cartridge 2100 can be constant, or at least substantially constant, between the proximal and distal ends of the end actuator and, as a result, the compression of that height built up by the anvil 2140 can be constant, or at least substantially constant, between the ends. .

[000761] Again with reference to Figures 43 and 44, the staple cartridge 2100 may comprise an asymmetrical configuration. For example, the height of the staple cartridge 2100 at the first end 2105 thereof may be greater than the height of the staple cartridge 2100 at the second end 2106 thereof. The staple cartridge 2100 and/or the staple cartridge groove 2130 may comprise one or more alignment and/or retention features that can be configured to ensure that the staple cartridge 2100 can be positioned in the staple cartridge groove 2130 only in one orientation, i.e., an orientation in which the first end 2105 is positioned at the distal end 2135 of the staple cartridge channel 2130 and the second end 2106 is positioned at the proximal end 2136. Alternatively, the staple cartridge 2100 and/or or the staple cartridge channel 2130 may comprise one or more alignment and/or retention features which can be configured to allow the staple cartridge 2100 to be positioned in the staple cartridge channel 2130 in more than one orientation. Referring now to Figure 45, for example, the staple cartridge 2100 may be positioned in the staple cartridge groove 2130 so that the first end 2105 of the staple cartridge 2100 may be positioned at the proximal end 2136 of the staple cartridge groove. 2130 and the second end 2106 may be positioned at the distal end 2135. Optionally, as a result, the shorter height of the staple cartridge 2100 may be positioned adjacent to the distal retaining wall 2137 and the major height of the staple cartridge 2100 may be positioned adjacent to the proximal retaining wall 2138. For example, the staple cartridge 2100 may be suitably arranged to apply constant, or at least substantially constant, clamping pressure to tissue T that has a thicker portion at the distal end of the clamping actuator. end and a thinner portion at the proximal end of the end actuator. The 2100 staple cartridge, for example, can be selectively oriented in the 2130 staple cartridge slot. For example, the alignment and/or retention features of the 2100 staple cartridge can be symmetrical, and a surgeon can selectively place the 2100 staple cartridge. staple cartridge 2100 in staple cartridge channel 2130 in the orientations shown in Figure 43 and Figure 45, for example.

[000762] In addition to the above embodiments, the implantable cartridge body 2110 may comprise a longitudinal axis 2109 which, when the staple cartridge 2100 is positioned in the staple cartridge channel 2130, can extend between the proximal and distal ends of the actuator. far end. The thickness of cartridge body 2110 may generally decrease and/or generally increase between first end 2105 and second end 2106 along longitudinal axis 2109. For example, the distance, or height, between the bottom surface 2118 and the surface contact area 2119 can generally decrease and/or generally increase between first end 2105 and second end 2106. The thickness of the cartridge body 2110 can increase and decrease along the longitudinal axis 2109. For example, the thickness of the body of cartridge 2110 may comprise one or more portions whose thickness can be increased and one or more portions whose thickness may decrease. Staple cartridge 2100 may comprise a plurality of staples 2120 positioned therein. In use, as described above, the clamps 2120 can be deformed when the anvil 2140 is moved to a closed position. Each clip 2120 may have the same, or at least substantially the same, height. For example, the height of a staple can be measured between the bottom of the base of the staple and the top, or tip, of the longest leg of the staple, for example.

[000763] Staples in a staple cartridge can have different heights. For example, a cartridge of staples may comprise a first group of staples having a first staple height that are positioned in a first portion of a compressible body and a second group of staples having a second height of clip, which are positioned on a second portion of the compressible body. The first staple height may be greater than the second staple height, and the first group of staples may be positioned at the first end 2105 of the staple cartridge 2100 while the second group of staples may be positioned at the second end 2106. Alternatively, the The first group of taller staples may be positioned at the second end 2106 of the staple cartridge 2100 while the second group of shorter staples may be positioned at the first end 2105. A plurality of groups of staples may be used, in which each group has a different clamp height. For example, a third group having an intermediate clamp height can be positioned on the cartridge body 2110 at an intermediate position between the first clamp group and the second clamp group. Optionally, each staple in a row of staples in the staple cartridge may comprise a different staple height. The tallest staple in a row of staples can be positioned at a first end of a row of staples and the shortest staple can be positioned at the opposite end of the row of staples. For example, staples arranged in an intermediate position between the tallest staple and the shortest staple can be arranged so that the heights of the staples decrease between the tallest staple and the shortest staple, for example.

[000764] Now referring to Figure 46, an end actuator of a surgical stapler may comprise an anvil 2240, a staple cartridge channel 2230 and a staple cartridge 2200 supported by the staple cartridge channel 2230. The staple cartridge 2200 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 2210 and a plurality of clips, such as clips 2220a and clips 2220b, for example, positioned therein. The staple cartridge channel 2230 may comprise a cartridge support surface 2231 and a plurality of staple support slots, such as support slots 2232a and 2232b, for example, defined therein. For example, staple cartridge 2200 may comprise two rows of outer staples 2220a and two rows of inner staples 2220b, where support slots 2232a may be configured to support staples 2220a, and support slots 2232b may be configured to support 2220b clamps. Referring to Figures 46 and 47, the anvil 2240 may comprise a plurality of staple forming pockets 2242 defined therein that can be configured to receive and deform the staples 2220a and 2220b when the anvil 2240 is moved toward the staple cartridge 2200. For example, the bottom surfaces of the support slots 2232a can be a first distance 2201a away from the top surfaces of the staple-forming pockets 2242, while the bottom surfaces of the support slots 2232b can be a second distance 2201b away from the top surfaces of staple forming pockets 2242. For example, support slots 2232b are positioned closer to anvil 2240 due to the raised step in support surface 2231 on which they are defined. Due to the different distances 2201a and 2201b, the outer staple rows 2220a and the inner staple rows 2220b can be deformed to different formed heights. Under various circumstances, staples deformed at different formed heights may apply different clamping forces or pressures to the T fabric being stapled. In addition to the above, staples can start with different unformed staple heights. For example, again with reference to Figure 46, the outer clips 2220a may have an initial unformed height that is greater than the initial unformed height of the inner clips 2220b. As illustrated in Figures 46 and 47, inner clips 2220b, which have a lower unformed height than outer clips 2220a, may also have a lower formed height than outer clips 2220b. Alternatively, inner clips 2220b may have an unformed height greater than outer clips 2220a and still have a deformed clip height less than outer clips 2220a.

[000765] In addition to the above, the anvil 2240 can be moved to a closed position, as shown in Figure 47, to compress the cartridge body 2210 and deform the clamps 2220a and 2220b. A surgical stapler comprising the end actuator shown in Figures 46 and 47, for example, may additionally comprise a cutting element that may be configured to cut tissue T disposed at an intermediate position between the anvil 2240 and the staple cartridge. 2200. For example, anvil 2240, staple cartridge channel 2230 and/or staple cartridge 2200 may define a slot configured to slidably receive a cutting element therein. More particularly, the anvil 2240 may comprise a slot portion 2249, the staple cartridge channel 2230 may comprise a slot portion 2239, and the staple cartridge 2200 may comprise a slot portion 2203 which may be aligned, or at least substantially aligned with each other when the anvil 2240 is in a closed, or at least substantially closed, position. The cutting element can be moved from the proximal end of the end actuator towards the distal end of the end actuator after the anvil 2240 is closed and the clamps 2220a and 2220b are deformed. The cutting element can be moved independently of the clamp deformation process. The cutting element can be advanced while the staples are being deformed. Either way, the cutting element can be configured to cut the fabric along a path disposed at an intermediate position between the rows of inner staples 2220b.

[000766] Optionally, as illustrated in Figure 47, the inner staples 2220b can be formed with a lower height than the outer staples 2220a, with the inner staples 2220b being able to apply greater clamping force or pressure to the tissue adjacent to the cut line created by the cutting element. For example, the greater clamping force or pressure created by the internal staples 2220b can provide several therapeutic benefits such as reducing bleeding from cut tissue T, while the less clamping pressure created by the external staples 2220a can provide flexibility in the stapled tissue. Referring again to Figures 46 and 47, the anvil 2240 may additionally comprise at least one piece of reinforcing material, such as reinforcing material 2260, for example, affixed thereto. For example, staple legs 2220a and 2220b may be configured to cut through reinforcing material 2260 and/or pass through openings in reinforcing material 2260 when staple cartridge 2200 is compressed by anvil 2240 and thereafter comes into contact with the staple forming pockets 2242 on the anvil 2240. As the legs 2220a and 2220b of the staples are deformed, they may contact and/or cut the reinforcing material 2260 once again. Reinforcement material 2260 can optimize hemostasis and/or provide strength to the tissue being stapled.

[000767] Again with reference to Figures 46 and 47, the bottom surface of the cartridge body 2210 may comprise a stepped contour that conforms, or at least substantially conforms, to the stepped contour of the cartridge support surface 2231. The bottom surface of the cartridge body 2210 may deform to match, or at least substantially match, the contour of the support surface of the cartridge 2231. Now referring to Figure 48, an end actuator, similar to the end actuator shown in Figure 46, for example, may comprise a staple cartridge 2300 positioned therein. The staple cartridge 2300 may comprise an implantable compressible body 2310 comprising an inner layer 2312 and an outer layer 2311 wherein, in addition to the above, the outer layer 2311 may consist of a water impermeable material. Outer layer 2311 may extend around clips 2220a, 2220b and may be disposed in an intermediate position between clips 2220a, 2220b and support slots 2232a, 2232b, respectively. Referring now to Figure 49, an end actuator, similar to the end actuator shown in Figure 46, for example, may comprise a staple cartridge 2400 positioned therein. Similar to the staple cartridge 2300, the compressible implantable cartridge body 2410 of the staple cartridge 2400 may comprise an inner layer 2412 and an outer layer 2411, however, the cartridge body 2410 may not comprise a cutting element slot in the same. For example, the cutting element may be required to cut the inner layer 2412 and/or the outer layer 2411, for example, as it is advanced through the staple cartridge.

[000768] Now referring to Figure 50, an end actuator of a surgical stapler may comprise an anvil 2540, a staple cartridge groove 2530 and a staple cartridge 2500 positioned in the staple cartridge groove 2530. In the above embodiment, the staple cartridge 2500 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 2510, rows of outer staples 2220a, and rows of inner staples 2220b. The staple cartridge channel 2530 may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, cartridge support surface 2531 and staple support slots 2532 defined therein. Anvil 2540 may comprise a stepped surface 2541 and a plurality of staple forming pockets, such as forming pockets 2542a and 2542b, for example, defined therein. Similar to the above embodiment, forming pockets 2542a and support slots 2532 may define a distance between them that is greater than the distance between forming pockets 2452b and support slots 2532. Anvil 2540 may additionally comprise , a piece of reinforcing material 2560 affixed to the tread surface 2541 of the anvil 2540. For example, the reinforcing material 2560 may conform, or at least substantially conform, to the tread surface 2541. The reinforcing material 2560 may be releasably attached to the surface 2541 by at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and/or protein hydrogel, for example. The cartridge body 2510 may also comprise a step profile that, for example, is parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the step surface 2541 of the anvil 2540. More particularly, the anvil 2540 may comprise steps 2548 extending towards the staple cartridge 2500, the steps 2548 may comprise a step height that is equal to, or at least substantially equal to, the step height of steps 2508 extending from the cartridge body 2510. For example, as a result of the foregoing, the amount of compressible body 2510 that can be captured in first staples 2220a may be different from the amount of compressible body 2510 that can be captured in second staples 2220b, for example.

[000769] Now referring to Figure 51, an end actuator may comprise an anvil 2640, a staple cartridge channel 2530 and a staple cartridge 2600 positioned therebetween. The staple cartridge 2600 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 2610 that includes an inner layer 2612, an outer layer 2611, and a plurality of staples, such as staples 2220a and 2200b, for example, positioned therein. Anvil 2640 may comprise a plurality of staple-forming pockets 2642 in surface 2641, and staple cartridge channel 2530 may comprise a plurality of staple-forming slots 2532 defined in support surface 2531. As shown in Figure 51, the surface of anvil 2641 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the support surface of the cartridge 2531, with each forming pocket 2642 being positioned an equal, or at least substantially equal, distance away from a staple support slot. opposite and corresponding 2532. Staple cartridge 2600 may comprise staples having the same, or at least substantially the same, initial unformed staple height and, additionally, the same, or at least substantially the same, formed staple height. The rows of outer clips may comprise clips 2220a and the rows of inner clips may comprise clips 2220b, whereby, as discussed above, clips 2220a and 2220b may have different unformed clip heights. When the anvil 2640 is moved toward the staple cartridge 2600 to a closed position, the staples 2220a and 2220b can be formed so that they have the same, or at least substantially the same, height of the formed staple. For example, as a result of the foregoing, outer clips 2220a and inner clips 2220b formed may have the same, or at least substantially the same, amount of compressible cartridge body 2610 contained therein; however, since the outer clips 2220a have a greater unformed clip height than the inner clips 2220b and, nevertheless, may have the same formed clip height, a pinch pressure may be generated on the outer clips 2220a greater than than on the 2220b internal clamps, for example.

[000770] Now referring to Figure 52, an end actuator of a surgical stapler may comprise an anvil 2740, a staple cartridge groove 2530, and a staple cartridge 2700 positioned in the staple cartridge groove 2530. In the above embodiment, the staple cartridge 2700 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 2710 comprising an inner layer 2712, an outer layer 2711, and a plurality of staples, such as staples 2220a and 2220b, for example, positioned therein. The thickness of the 2710 cartridge body can vary across its width. For example, the cartridge body 2710 may comprise a center portion 2708 and side portions 2709, wherein the center portion 2708 may comprise a thickness that is greater than the thickness of the side portions 2709. The thicker portion of the cartridge body 2710 may be located at the center portion 2708, while the thinner portion of the cartridge body 2710 may be located at the side portions 2709. For example, the thickness of the cartridge body 2710 may gradually decrease between the center portion 2708 and the 2709. The thickness of cartridge body 2710 may decrease linearly and/or geometrically between center portion 2708 and side portions 2709. For example, tissue-contacting surface 2719 of cartridge body 2710 may comprise two inclined surfaces , or angled, which slope downwards from the center portion 2708 towards the side portions 2709. The anvil 2740 may comprise two inclined surfaces , or at an angle, which are parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the inclined tissue-contacting surfaces 2719. The anvil 2740 may additionally comprise at least one piece of reinforcing material 2760 secured to the inclined surfaces of the anvil 2740.

[000771] Additionally, in addition to the above, the rows of inner staples in the staple cartridge 2700 may comprise the taller staples 2220a and the rows of outer staples may comprise the shorter staples 2220b. Taller clips 2220a may be positioned at and/or adjacent to thicker center portion 2708 while shorter clips 2220b may be positioned at and/or adjacent to side portions 2709. For example, as a result of the foregoing above, the taller 2220a staples can capture more material from the 2710 implantable cartridge body than the shorter 2220b staples. Such circumstances could result in a situation in which staples 2220a apply greater clamping pressure to the fabric T than staples 2220b. While the taller staples 2220a can capture more material from the cartridge body 2710 than the shorter staples 2220b, the taller staples 2220a can have a higher formed staple height than the shorter staples 2220b due to the slanted arrangement of the forming pockets. clamps 2742a and 2742b. These considerations can be used to obtain a desired squeezing pressure on the tissue captured by staples 2220a and 2220b whereby, as a result, the squeezing pressure on staples 2220a may be greater than, less than, or equal to the squeezing pressure applied to the woven by staples 2220b, for example. As an alternative to the end actuator illustrated in Figure 52, the shorter clips 2220b may be positioned at and/or adjacent to the thicker center portion 2708 of the cartridge body 2710, and the taller clips 2220a may be positioned at the and/or adjacent to the thinner side portions 2709. Additionally, while staple cartridge 2700 is shown to comprise rows of inner and outer staples, staple cartridge 2700 may comprise additional rows of staples, such as rows of staples arranged in an intermediate position between the rows of inner and outer staples, for example. For example, the rows of intermediate staples may comprise staples that have an unformed staple height that is intermediate between the unformed staple heights of staples 2220a and 2220b, and a formed staple height that is intermediate between the heights of the formed staples. formed clips 2220a and 2220b, for example.

[000772] Now referring to Figure 53, an end actuator of a surgical stapler may comprise an anvil 2840, a staple cartridge groove 2530, and a staple cartridge 2800 positioned in the staple cartridge groove 2530. In the above embodiment, the staple cartridge 2800 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 2810 comprising an inner layer 2812, an outer layer 2811, and a plurality of staples, such as staples 2220a and 2220b, for example, positioned therein. The thickness of the 2810 cartridge body can vary across its width. For example, the cartridge body 2810 may comprise a center portion 2808 and side portions 2809, wherein the center portion 2808 may comprise a thickness that is less than the thickness of the side portions 2809. The thinner portion of the cartridge body 2810 may be located at the center portion 2808, while the thickest portion of the cartridge body 2810 may be located at the side portions 2809. For example, the thickness of the cartridge body 2810 may gradually increase between the center portion 2808 and the 2809. The thickness of cartridge body 2810 may increase linearly and/or geometrically between center portion 2808 and side portions 2809. For example, tissue-contacting surface 2819 of cartridge body 2810 may comprise two inclined surfaces , or at an angle, which slope upwards from the center portion 2808 towards the side portions 2809. The anvil 2840 may comprise two inclined surfaces, or at an angle, which are parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the inclined surfaces of tissue contacting 2819. The anvil 2840 may additionally comprise at least one piece of reinforcing material 2860 attached to the inclined surfaces of the anvil 2840. Additionally, in addition to the set out above, the rows of outer staples in the staple cartridge 2800 may comprise the taller staples 2220a and the rows of inner staples may comprise the shorter staples 2220b. The taller clips 2220a may be positioned at and/or adjacent to the thicker side portion 2809 while the shorter clips 2220b may be positioned at and/or adjacent to the central portion 2808. For example, as a result of the above , the taller 2220a staples can capture more material from the 2810 deployable cartridge body than the shorter 2220b staples.

[000773] As previously described with respect to Figure 46, for example, the staple cartridge channel 2230 may comprise a stepped support surface 2231 which may be configured to support the staples 2220a and 2220b at different heights relative to the anvil 2240 The staple cartridge channel 2230 can consist of metal and the steps on the support surface 2231 can be formed on the support surface 2231 by a grinding operation, for example. Referring now to Figure 54, an end actuator of a surgical instrument may comprise a staple cartridge channel 2930 comprising a support insert 2935 positioned therein. More particularly, the staple cartridge channel 2930 may be formed so that it has a flat, or at least substantially flat, support surface 2931, for example, which may be configured to support the insert 2935 comprising the stepped surfaces. to support staples 2220a and 2220b of staple cartridge 2200 at different heights. For example, insert 2935 may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, bottom surface that can be positioned against support surface 2931. Insert 2935 may additionally comprise support slots, grooves, or recesses. 2932a and 2932b which can be configured to support clamps 2220a and 2220b, respectively, at different heights. Similar to the above embodiment, insert 2935 may comprise a knife slot 2939 which may be configured to allow a cutting element to pass therethrough. The staple cartridge channel 2930 can consist of the same or a different material as the support insert 2935. The staple cartridge channel 2930 and the support insert 2935 can consist of metal, for example, while, alternatively, the staple cartridge channel 2930 could consist of metal, for example, and the support insert 2935 could consist of plastic, for example. Support insert 2935 may be secured and/or welded to staple cartridge channel 2930. Support insert 2935 may be snapped and/or press-fitted to staple cartridge channel 2930. 2935 bracket insert can be attached to the 2930 staple cartridge groove using an adhesive.

[000774] Now referring to Figure 55, an end actuator of a surgical stapler may comprise an anvil 3040, a staple cartridge channel 3030, and a compressible implantable staple cartridge 3000 positioned in the staple cartridge channel 3030. similar to the above embodiment, the anvil 3040 may comprise a plurality of staple forming pockets 3042 and a knife slot 3049 which may be configured to slidably receive a cutting element therein. Also similarly to the above embodiment, the staple cartridge channel 3030 may comprise a plurality of staple support slots 3032 and a knife slot 3039 which may also be configured to slidably receive a cutting element. Staple cartridge 3000 may comprise a first layer 3011, a second layer 3012, and a plurality of staples, such as staples 3020a and 3020b, for example, positioned therein. The staples 3020a may comprise an unformed staple height that is greater than the unformed staple height of the staples 3020b. The first layer 3011 may consist of a first compressible material and the second layer 3012 may consist of a second compressible material. The first compressible material can be compressed at a higher rate than the second compressible material, while the first compressible material can be compressed at a lower rate than the second compressible material. The first compressible material may consist of a resilient material which may comprise a first spring rate and the second compressible material may consist of a resilient material which may comprise a second spring rate which is different from the first spring rate. The first compressible material may comprise a spring rate that is greater than the spring rate of the second compressible material. The first compressible material may comprise a spring rate that is less than the spring rate of the second compressible material. The first compressible layer may comprise a first stiffness and the second compressible layer may comprise a second stiffness, the first stiffness being different from the second stiffness. The first compressible layer may comprise a stiffness that is greater than the stiffness of the second compressible layer. The first compressible layer may comprise a stiffness that is less than the stiffness of the second compressible layer.

[000775] Again referring to Figure 55, the second layer 3012 of the staple cartridge 3000 may comprise a constant, or at least substantially constant, thickness along its width. The first layer 3011 may comprise a thickness that varies across its width. For example, the first layer 3011 may comprise one or more steps 3008 that may increase the thickness of the cartridge body 3010 in certain portions of the cartridge body 3010, such as the center portion, for example. Referring again to Figure 55, the shorter clips 3020b may be positioned at or aligned with the rungs 3008, i.e. the thicker portion of the cartridge body 3010, and the taller clips 3020a may be positioned at or aligned with the thinner portions of the 3010 cartridge body. Optionally, as a result of the thicker and thinner portions of the 3010 cartridge body, the rigidity of the 3010 cartridge body may be greater along the rows of inner clips 3020b than along the rows of external clamps 3020a. First layer 3011 may be connected to a second layer 3012. For example, first layer 3011 and second layer 3012 may comprise interlocking features that may hold layers 3011 and 3012 together. First layer 3011 may comprise a first laminate and second layer 3012 may comprise a second laminate, wherein the first laminate may be secured to the second laminate by one or more adhesives. Staple cartridge 3000 may comprise a knife slot 3003 which may be configured to slidably receive a cutting element.

[000776] Now referring to Figure 56, a staple cartridge 3100 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 3110 comprising a single layer of compressible material and, in addition, a plurality of staples, such as staples 3020b, for example, positioned inside. The thickness of the 3110 cartridge body can vary across its width. For example, cartridge body 3110 may comprise steps 3108 extending along its side portions. Referring now to Figure 57, a staple cartridge 3200 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 3210 comprising a single layer of compressible material and, in addition, a plurality of staples, such as staples 3020b, for example, positioned in your inside. The thickness of the 3210 cartridge body can vary across its width. For example, cartridge body 3210 may comprise steps 3208 extending along its central portion. Referring now to Figure 58, a staple cartridge 3300 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 3310 wherein, similarly to the above embodiment, the thickness of the cartridge body 3310 may vary across its width. The thickness of the cartridge body 3310 may increase geometrically between the side portions and the central portion of the cartridge body 3310. For example, the thickness of the cartridge body 3310 may be defined by an arcuate or curved profile and may comprise a contact surface. with the arcuate or curved fabric 3319. The thickness of the cartridge body 3310 and the contour of the fabric contacting surface 3319 can be defined by a radius of curvature or, alternatively, by several radii of curvature, for example. Referring now to Figure 59, a staple cartridge 3400 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 3410, wherein the thickness of the cartridge body 3410 may increase linearly, or at least substantially linearly, between the side portions and the center portion. of the 3410 cartridge body.

[000777] Now referring to Figure 60, a staple cartridge 3500 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 3510 and a plurality of staples 3520 positioned therein. The implantable cartridge body 3510 may comprise a first inner layer 3512, a second inner layer 3513 and an outer layer 3511. The first inner layer 3512 may comprise a first thickness and the second inner layer 3513 may comprise a second thickness, the second inner layer 3513 can be thicker than the first inner layer 3512. Alternatively, the first inner layer 3512 can be thicker than the second inner layer 3513. As a further alternative, the first inner layer 3512 can be the same, or at the same time less substantially the same thickness as the second inner layer 3513. Each clip 3520 may comprise a base 3522 and one or more deformable legs 3521 extending from the base 3522. Optionally, each leg 3521 may comprise a tip 3523 which is immersed in the first inner layer 3511 and, additionally, each base 3522 of the staples 3520 may be immersed in the second inner layer 3512. The inner layer 3512 and/or the second inner layer 3513 may comprise at least one drug stored therein, and the outer layer 3511 may encapsulate and seal the first inner layer 3512 and the second inner layer 3513 so that the drug does not flow into it. out of the staple cartridge body 3510 until the outer layer 3511 is pierced by the staples 3520. More particularly, in addition to the above, an anvil may be forced down against tissue positioned against the tissue-contacting surface 3519 of the cartridge of clips 3500 so that the cartridge body 3510 is compressed and the surface 3519 is moved downwardly towards, and at least partially below, the tips of the clips 3523 so that the tips 3523 rupture or puncture the outer layer 3511. After the outer layer 3511 is ruptured by the legs of the clamps 3521, the at least one drug M can flow out of the cartridge body 3510 and around the legs of the clamps 352 1. In various circumstances, further compression of the cartridge body 3510 may press additional medication M out of the cartridge body 3510, as illustrated in Figure 61.

[000778] Again with reference to Figure 60 , the outer layer 3511 may comprise a water impermeable, or at least substantially impermeable, wrapper which may be configured to, one, prevent medicament from prematurely flowing out of the staple cartridge 3500 and, two, prevent fluids from a surgical site, for example, from prematurely entering the staple cartridge 3500. The first inner layer 3512 may comprise a first medicament stored, or absorbed, therein, and the second inner layer 3513 may comprising a second medicament stored or absorbed therein, the second medicament being able to be different from the first medicament. An initial compression of the cartridge body 3510, which causes the outer layer 3511 to rupture, can generally squeeze the first drug out of the first inner layer 3512, and a subsequent compression of the cartridge body 3510 can generally squeeze the second drug out. of the second inner layer 3513. In such cases, however, portions of the first drug and the second drug may be squeezed out simultaneously, although the majority of the drug that is initially squeezed may consist of the first drug and the majority of the drug that is subsequently squeezed may consist of the second drug. medicine. In addition to the above, the first inner layer 3512 may be comprised of a more compressible material than the second inner layer 3513, so that the initial compression forces or pressures, which may be less than the subsequent compression forces or pressures, may cause a greater initial deflection in the first inner layer 3512 than in the second inner layer 3513. This greater initial deflection in the first inner layer 3512 can cause a portion of the first drug squeezed from the first inner layer 3512 to be larger than the second drug squeezed of the second inner layer 3513. The first inner layer 3512 may be more porous and/or more flexible than the second inner layer 3513. For example, the first inner layer 3512 may comprise a plurality of pores, or voids, 3508 defined in its interior, and the second inner layer 3513 may comprise a plurality of pores, or voids, 3509 defined therein, if wherein the pores 3508 can be configured to store the first drug in the first inner layer 3512 and the pores 3509 can be configured to store the second drug in the second inner layer 3513. The size and density of the pores 3508 in the first inner layer 3512 and of the pores 3509 in the second inner layer 3513 can be selected so as to provide a desired result described herein.

[000779] Again with reference to Figures 60 and 61, the outer layer 3511, the first inner layer 3512 and/or the second inner layer 3513 may consist of a bioabsorbable material. The first inner layer 3512 may consist of a first bioabsorbable material, the second inner layer 3513 may consist of a second bioabsorbable material, and the outer layer 3511 may consist of a third bioabsorbable material, with the first bioabsorbable material, the second bioabsorbable material and/or the third bioabsorbable material may consist of different materials. The first bioabsorbable material can be bioabsorbed at a first rate, the second bioabsorbable material can be bioabsorbed at a second rate, and the third bioabsorbable material can be bioabsorbed at a third rate, the first rate, the second rate and/or the third rate may be different. For example, when a material is bioabsorbed at a particular rate, that rate can be defined as the amount of mass of the material that is absorbed by the patient's body per unit of time. As is known in the art, different patient bodies can absorb different materials at different rates and thus these can be expressed as average rates to account for such variability. In any case, a higher rate might be a rate at which a greater amount of mass is bioabsorbed during a unit of time than a lower rate. Referring again to Figures 60 and 61, the first inner layer 3512 and/or the second inner layer 3513 may consist of a material that bioabsorbs faster than the material comprising the outer layer 3511. For example, the first inner layer 3512 and/or the second inner layer 3513 may consist of a bioabsorbable foam, a tissue sealant and/or a hemostatic material such as oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example, and the outer layer 3511 may be comprised of a reinforcing material and/or a plastic material, such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), available under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), available under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and/or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and/or PCL, for example. In such cases, the first inner layer 3512 and/or the second inner layer 3513 can treat the tissue immediately and can reduce tissue bleeding, for example, the outer layer 3514 can provide more lasting structural support and can be bioabsorbed at a lower rate.

[000780] Due to the lower rate of bioabsorption capacity of the outer layer 3511, in addition to the above, the outer layer 3511 can structurally reinforce the tissue at the staple line during curing. One of the first inner layer 3512 and the second inner layer 3513 may consist of a material that can be bioabsorbed more quickly than the material of the other so that one of the layers can provide an initial release of a therapeutic material and the other layer may provide a sustained release of the same therapeutic material and/or a different therapeutic material. For example, the rate at which a therapeutic material can be released from a layer 3512 or 3513 can be a function of the bioabsorption capacity of the substrate layer in which the drug is absorbed or dispersed. For example, the substrate comprising the first inner layer 3512 may be bioabsorbed faster than the substrate comprising the second inner layer 3513 and, as a result, a drug may be released from the first inner layer 3512 more quickly than from the second inner layer 3513 , for example. Optionally, as described herein, one or more of layers 3511, 3512, and 3513 of cartridge body 3510 may be secured together by at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and/or protein hydrogel, for example. The adhesive may be water soluble and may be configured to break the connection between the layers when the 3500 staple cartridge is deployed and/or some time thereafter. For example, the adhesive can be configured to bioabsorb faster than the outer layer 3511, the first inner layer 3512 and/or the second inner layer 3513.

[000781] Now referring to Figures 62 and 63, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 3600, for example, may comprise a cartridge body 3610 that includes a compressible first layer 3611, a second layer 3612 attached to the first layer 3611, and a removable compressible layer 3613 attached to the second layer 3612. For example, the first layer 3611 may consist of a compressible foam material, the second layer 3612 may comprise a laminated material secured to the first layer 3611 using one or more adhesives, and the third layer 3613 may comprise a compressible foam material removably secured to the second layer 3612 with the use of one or more adhesives, for example. The staple cartridge 3600 may additionally comprise a plurality of staples, such as staples 3620, for example, positioned in the cartridge body 3610. For example, each staple 3620 may comprise a base 3622 positioned in the third layer 3613 and one or more deformable legs 3621 extending upwardly from base 3622 through second layer 3612 and into first layer 3611, for example. In use, in addition to the above, the top surface 3619 of the staple cartridge body 3610 may be forced down by an anvil until the staple legs 3621 penetrate through the top surface 3619 and the target tissue and enter into contact with the anvil. After the legs of the staples 3621 have been sufficiently deformed, the anvil can be moved away from the staple cartridge 3600 so that its compressible layers can expand again, at least partially. In various circumstances, inserting staples through tissue can cause tissue to bleed. The third layer 3613 can consist of an absorbent material, such as a protein hydrogel, for example, that can remove blood from the stapled tissue. In addition to or instead of the foregoing, the third layer 3613 can consist of a hemostatic material and/or a tissue sealant, such as thrombin and/or freeze-dried fibrin, for example, which can be configured to reduce bleeding from the tissue. tissue. Third layer 3613 may provide structural support to first layer 3611 and second layer 3612, and third layer 3613 may consist of a bioabsorbable material and/or a non-bioabsorbable material. In either case, the third layer 3613 can be separated from the second layer 3612 after the staple cartridge 3610 is implanted. When the third layer 3613 comprises an implantable quality material, the surgeon may choose to remove the third layer 3613 from the cartridge body. 3610. The third layer 3613 can be configured to be completely removed from the second layer 3612.

[000782] The first layer 3611 may consist of a first foam material and the third layer 3613 may consist of a second foam material which may be different from the first foam material. The first foam material may have a first density and the second foam material may have a second density, the first density may be different from the second density. For example, the second density may be greater than the first density, and as a result, a third layer 3613 may be less compressible, or have a lower compression ratio, than the first layer 3611. Alternatively, the first density may be higher. than the second density and, as a result, the first layer 3611 may be less compressible, or have a lower compression ratio, than the third layer 3613. Now referring to Figures 64 and 65, a staple cartridge 3700, similar to the staple cartridge 3600, may comprise a cartridge body 3710 comprising a first layer of compressible foam 3711, a second layer 3712 attached to the first layer 3711, and a third layer of detachable compressible foam 3713 removably attached to the second layer 3712. For example, third layer 3713 may comprise a plurality of clip receiving slots or cutouts 3709 that may each be configured to receive at least a portion not a staple 3620, such as a staple base 3622, for example. Staples 3620 can be configured to slide into staple-receiving slots 3709 or, put another way, third layer 3713 can be configured to slide relative to staples 3620 when staple cartridge 3700 is positioned against tissue. target and compressed by an anvil, for example. Receiving slots 3709 may be configured so that there is clearance between the clips 3620 and the side walls of the receiving slots 3709. For example, as a result of the above, clips 3620 may not capture a portion of the third layer 3713 when clips 3620 are deformed, as shown in Figures 64 and 65. The ends of the staple receiving slots 3709 adjacent to the second layer 3712 may be closed by a portion of the third layer 3713 and, as a result, at least a portion of the third layer 3713 may be closed. be captured by the clamps 3620 when they are deformed. In any case, the third layer 3713 may comprise one or more perforations and/or perforations 3708, for example, which may be configured to allow the third layer 3713 to be removed from the second layer 3712 in two or more pieces, as illustrated. in Figure 64. In Figure 64, one of the pieces of the third layer 3713 is shown being removed by a tool 3755. The perforations 3708 may be placed along a line disposed at an intermediate position between a first row of staples and a second row of staples.

[000783] Again with reference to Figures 64 and 65, the bases 3622 of the clamps 3620 can be positioned in the receiving slots 3709 and the side walls of the receiving slots 3709 can be configured to contact and detachably hold the legs of the clamps 3621 in position. Although this is not shown, the third layer 3713 may comprise an elongate slit encircling all of the staples in the row of staples. For example, a staple cartridge comprising four rows of staples, for example, may comprise an elongated slot aligned with each row of staples in a base layer of the staple cartridge. In addition to the above embodiments, at least a portion of the staple cartridge 3600 and/or the staple cartridge 3700 may be implanted in a patient, and at least a portion of the staple cartridge may be removable from the patient. Again referring to Figures 64 and 65, the first layer 3711 and the second layer 3712 can be captured by the staples 3620 and can be implanted with the staples 3620, while the third layer 3713 can optionally be removed or separated from the staple cartridge 3700. In many circumstances, removing a portion of the implanted staple cartridge can reduce the amount of material the patient's body needs to reabsorb, which can provide a number of therapeutic benefits. In the event that a portion of a staple cartridge is detached and removed, as by a 3755 laparoscopic tool, for example, the detached staple cartridge portion may be removed from the surgical site through a trocar, such as a trocar that has an opening. 5mm, for example. A cartridge body may comprise more than one peelable layer. For example, the cartridge body 3710 may comprise a fourth layer wherein the third layer 3713 of the cartridge body 3710 may consist of a hemostatic material and the fourth layer may consist of a backing layer. For example, a surgeon may remove the support layer and then choose whether or not to remove the hemostatic layer, for example.

[000784] Now referring to Figure 66, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 3800, for example, may comprise a cartridge body 3810 that includes an outer layer 3811 and an inner layer 3812. The inner layer 3812 may consist of in a compressible foam material and the outer layer 3811 may be at least partially applied as a wrapper of the inner layer 3812. The outer layer 3811 may comprise a first portion 3811a configured to be positioned on a first side of the inner layer 3812, and a second portion 3811b configured to be positioned on a second side of inner layer 3812, wherein first portion 3811a and second portion 3811b may be connected by a flexible hinge, such as hinge 3809, for example. For example, at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and/or protein hydrogel, for example, can be applied to the first side and/or the second side of inner layer 3812 to secure portions of outer layer 3811 thereto. The outer layer 3811 may comprise one or more fasteners extending therefrom. For example, outer layer 3811 may comprise a plurality of deformable legs 3821 extending from one side of outer layer 3811 that can be seated on inner compressible layer 3812. For example, legs 3821 may not protrude from the second side. of the inner layer 3812 while, alternatively, the legs 3821 may protrude at least partially from the inner layer 3812. When the compressible body 3810 is compressed in use, the legs 3821 may be configured to puncture the inner layer 3812 and the second portion 3811b of outer layer 3811. Second portion 3811b of outer layer 3811 may comprise apertures, such as apertures 3808, for example, defined therein that may be configured to receive staple legs 3821. At least portions of the staple cartridge 3800 may comprise a knife slot 3803 which is configurable to slidably receive a cutting element therein. For example, the knife slot 3803 may not extend completely through the thickness of the cartridge body 3810 and, as a result, the cutting element may cut into the cartridge body 3810 as the element is moved relative to the cartridge.

[000785] Now referring to Figure 67, a staple cartridge 3900 may comprise, similarly to the staple cartridge 3800, a cartridge body 3910 that includes an inner layer 3812 and an outer layer 3811, the outer layer 3811 being may comprise a first portion 3811a positioned adjacent the first side of the inner layer 3812 and a second portion 3811b positioned adjacent the second side of the inner layer 3812. Similar to the description above, the outer layer 3811 may comprise one or more fasteners that extend from it. For example, outer layer 3811 may comprise a plurality of deformable legs 3921 extending from one side of outer layer 3811 that can be seated on inner compressible layer 3812. Each deformable leg 3921 may comprise at least one hook or barb 3923 protruding therefrom which may be configured to engage the second portion 3811b of the outer layer 3811 and, as a result, retain the outer layer 3811 in the inner layer 3812. For example, the barbs 3923 may be configured to protrude from the second side of the inner layer 3812 and extends through openings 3808 in the second portion 3811b of outer layer 3811 so that barbs 3923 can engage the outer surface of outer layer 3811 and lock outer layer 3811 into inner layer 3812. clips 3900, inner layer 3812 can be at least partially compressed to cause barbs to protrude therefrom and enter openings 3808. For example, the 3900 staple cartridge may be, at least partially, pre-compressed when it is inserted into a staple cartridge, for example. Additionally, in addition to the above, at least a portion of the legs 3921 may be immersed in the first portion 3811a of the outer layer 3811 wherein the outer layer 3811 may consist of a plastic material such as polydioxanone (PDS) and/or polyglycolic acid (PGA). ), for example, and the plastics material can be overmolded around at least a portion of the legs 3921.

[000786] Now referring to Figures 68 to 72, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 4000, for example, may comprise a cartridge body 4010 that includes a first compressible layer 4011 and a second layer 4012 and, in addition, a plurality of clips 4020 positioned on the cartridge body 4010. Referring to Figure 70, each clip 4020 may comprise a base 4022 and at least one deformable leg 4023 extending from base 4022. Referring to Figure 68, the cartridge of staples 4000 may be positioned between a staple cartridge groove 4030 and an anvil 4040 of an end actuator of a surgical stapler, whereby the second layer 4012 of the cartridge body 4010 and/or the bases 4022 of the staples 4020 may be positioned against the staple cartridge channel 4030. Now referring to Figure 69, the second layer 4012 may comprise a layer of bandages 4060 interconnected to one another by a support frame of bandages 4061. For example, the bandages 4060 and the bandage support frame 4061 may consist of a molded plastic material, such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example. Each bandage 4060 may comprise one or more openings or slits 4062 which may be configured to receive a clamp leg 4021 extending therethrough, as shown in Figures 70 and 71. Each bandage 4060 may additionally comprise a receiving slit 4063 , which may be configured to receive a base 4022 of a staple 4020. Again referring to Figure 69, bandages 4060 and/or bandage support frame 4061 may comprise a plurality of markings, perforations, or the like, which may be configured to allow the bandages 4060 to be detached from the bandage support frame 4061 at a desired location. Similarly, with reference to Figure 71, one or more bandages 4060 may be connected to one another along a line comprising perforations and/or markings 4064, for example. In use, the compressible foam layer 4011 can be positioned against the target tissue T, and the cartridge body 4010 can be compressed by the anvil 4040 so that the anvil 4040 can deform the staples 4020. When the staples 4020 are deformed, legs 4021 of each staple 4020 can capture the T fabric, a portion of the first layer 4011 and a bandage 4060 on the deformed staple. When the staple cartridge channel 4030 is moved away from the implanted staple cartridge 4060, for example, the bandage support structure 4061 may be detached from the bandages 4060 and/or the bandages 4060 may be detached from one another. In certain circumstances, bandages 4060 may be separated from frame 4061 and/or from each other when clips 4020 are deformed by anvil 4040, as described above.

[000787] As described herein, the staples of a staple cartridge can be formed entirely by an anvil when the anvil is moved to a closed position. Alternatively, now referring to Figures 73 to 76, staples of a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 4100, for example, can be deformed by an anvil when the anvil is moved to a closed position, and additionally by a clamp drive system that moves the clamps towards the closed anvil. The staple cartridge 4100 may comprise a compressible body 4110 which may consist of a foam material, for example, and a plurality of staples 4120 positioned, at least partially, on the compressible body 4110. The staple drive system may comprise a staple driver 4160, a plurality of staple drivers 4162 positioned on driver holders 4160, and a staple cartridge housing 4180 that can be configured to retain staple drivers 4162 in driver holder 4160. For example, drivers of staples 4162 may be positioned in one or more slots 4163 in the driver support 4160, so that the side walls of the slots 4163 can help guide the staple drivers 4162 upward toward the anvil. Clamps 4120 can be held in slots 4163 by clamp drivers 4162, with clamps 4120 being fully positioned in slots 4163 when clamps 4120 and clamp drivers 4162 are in the unfired position. Alternatively, at least a portion of the clamps 4120 may extend upwardly through the open ends 4161 of the slots 4163 when the clamps 4120 and the clamp drivers 4162 are in the unfired position. For example, now referring primarily to Figure 74 , the bases of the clamps 4120 may be positioned in the driver support 4160 and the tips of the clamps 4120 may be immersed in the compressible body 4110. Approximately one third of the height of the clamps 4120 may be positioned in the driver holder 4160 and approximately two-thirds of the height of clips 4120 may be positioned on cartridge body 4110. Referring to Figure 73A, clip cartridge 4100 may additionally comprise a wrapper or a water impermeable membrane 4111 surrounding the body cartridge 4110 and driver support 4160, for example.

[000788] In use, the staple cartridge 4100 can be placed in a staple cartridge groove, for example, and the anvil can be moved towards the staple cartridge 4100 to a closed position. The anvil may contact and compress the compressible body 4110 when the anvil is moved to its closed position. The anvil may not contact the 4120 clamps when it is in the closed position. The anvil may contact the legs of the clamps 4120 and at least partially deform the clamps 4120 when the anvil is moved to the closed position. In any of these cases, the staple cartridge 4100 may additionally comprise one or more sliders 4170 that can be advanced longitudinally on the staple cartridge 4100 so that the sliders 4170 can sequentially engage the staple drivers 4162 and move the staple drivers 4162. clamps 4162 and clamps 4120 towards the anvil. The 4170 slides can slide between the 4180 staple cartridge compartment and the 4162 staple drivers. When closing the anvil has started the process of forming the 4120 staples, the upward movement of the 4120 staples toward the anvil can complete the forming process and deforming the clamps 4120 to their fully formed, or at least desired, height. When closing the anvil has not deformed the clamps 4120, upward movement of the clamps 4120 towards the anvil can initiate and complete the forming process and deform the clamps 4120 to their fully formed, or at least desired, height. Sliders 4170 may be advanced from a proximal end of the staple cartridge 4100 to a distal end of the staple cartridge 4100 so that the staples 4120 positioned at the proximal end of the staple cartridge 4100 are formed completely before the staples 4120 positioned at the distal end of the staple cartridge 4100 are fully formed. Referring to Figure 75, the slides 4170 may each comprise at least one angled or sloped surface 4711 that can be configured to slide under the staple drivers 4162 and lift the staple drivers 4162 as illustrated in Figure 76 .

[000789] In addition to the above description, the staples 4120 may be formed to capture at least a portion of the T-tissue and at least a portion of the compressible body 4110 of the staple cartridge 4100. After the staples 4120 are formed, the anvil and staple cartridge channel 4130 of the surgical stapler may be spaced away from the implanted staple cartridge 4100. In various circumstances, the cartridge housing 4180 may be fixedly engaged with the staple cartridge channel 4130 so that, as a result, the cartridge housing 4180 can be separated from compressible body 4110 as staple cartridge groove 4130 is spaced away from implanted cartridge body 4110. Referring again to Figure 73, cartridge housing 4180 may comprise opposing side walls 4181 between which cartridge body 4110 may be removably positioned. For example, the compressible cartridge body 4110 can be compressed between the side walls 4181 so that the cartridge body 4110 can be removably retained in that region during use and releasably disengaged from the cartridge housing 4180 as the 4180 cartridge compartment is removed. For example, the 4160 Trigger Holder can be attached to the 4180 Cartridge Slot so that the 4160 Trigger Holder, 4162 Triggers and/or 4170 Slides can remain in the 4180 Cartridge Slot when the 4180 Cartridge Slot is removed from the surgical site. The 4162 Triggers can be ejected from the 4160 Trigger Holder and left in the surgical site. For example, 4162 triggers can be comprised of a bioabsorbable material such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), available under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), available under the tradename Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and/or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and/or PCL, for example. Drivers 4162 may be attached to clamps 4120 such that drivers 4162 are deployed with clamps 4120. For example, each driver 4162 may comprise a recess configured to receive the bases of clamps 4120, for example, the recesses being can be configured to hold clamp bases by snap and/or snap-in.

[000790] In addition to the above, driver holder 4160 and/or sliders 4170 can be ejected from cartridge housing 4180. For example, sliders 4170 can slide between cartridge housing 4180 and driver holder. sliders 4160 so that as sliders 4170 are advanced to drive staple drivers 4162 and staple drivers 4120 upward, sliders 4170 can also move driver support 4160 up and out of cartridge compartment 4180. For example, the 4160 Driver Holder and/or the 4170 Slider may consist of a bioabsorbable material such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), available under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), poly- hydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), available under the tradename Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and/or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and/or PCL, for example. Sliders 4170 may be integrally formed and/or attached to a drive bar, or cutting element, which pushes slides 4170 through staple cartridge 4100. In such cases, slides 4170 may not be ejected from the housing. cartridge holder 4180 and may remain with the surgical stapler whereas, in other cases where the gliders 4170 are not attached to the drive bar, the gliders 4170 may be left in the surgical site. In any case, in addition to the above, the compressibility of the cartridge body 4110 may allow the use of thicker staple cartridges in the end actuator of a surgical stapler, since the cartridge body 4110 may compress, or retract. , when the stapler anvil is closed. As a result of at least partial deformation of the staples upon closing the anvil, taller staples could be used, such as staples that have a height of approximately 4.6 mm (0.18 inches), for example, with a height of approximately 3.0 mm (0.12 inches) from the height of the clip may be positioned on the compressible layer 4110 and wherein the compressible layer 4110 may have an uncompressed height of approximately 3.6 mm (0.14 inches). inch), for example.

[000791] Now referring to Figures 77 to 80, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 4200, for example, may comprise a compressible body 4210, a plurality of staples 4220 positioned therein, and a plurality of support elements 4234. Now referring to Figure 78, the staple cartridge 4200 may be disposed in an intermediate position between an anvil 4240 and a staple cartridge groove 4230 wherein, in at least one embodiment, the lateral support elements 4234 can be attached to the staple cartridge groove 4230. When the anvil 4240 is moved downward to compress the cartridge body 4210 and at least partially deform the staples 4220, as shown in Figure 79, the side portions of the cartridge body 4210 can laterally swell and force the side support elements 4234 outward. For example, the side support elements 4234 can be attached to the cartridge body 4210, and when the cartridge body 4210 swells laterally as described above, the side support elements 4234 can detach from the cartridge body 4210 as shown in Figure 79 The side support elements 4234 can be secured to the cartridge body 4210 using at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and/or protein hydrogel, for example. Similar to the above embodiment, closing the anvil 4240 can only partially deform the staples 4220, whereby the formation of the staples 4220 can be completed by advancing one or more slides 4270 through the staple cartridge 4200, as illustrated in Figure 80 Referring now to Figures 82 and 83, sliders 4270 may be advanced from a proximal end of staple cartridge 4200 to a distal end of staple cartridge 4200 by a cutting member 4280. For example, cutting member 4280 may comprising a cutting element, or knife, 4283 that can be advanced through the fabric T and/or compressible body 4210. The cutting element 4280 can comprise cam elements 4282 that can travel along the outer surfaces of the jaws 4230 and 4240 and move or hold the jaws in position. Optionally, as a result of the foregoing, staples 4220 can be molded into their final shapes at the same time, or at least substantially at the same time, that the fabric T is cut. For example, the slides 4270 can be positioned distally to the knife 4283 so that the fabric T is cut only after the preceding portion of the fabric is completely stapled, for example.

[000792] Again with reference to Figures 82 and 83, the slides 4270 may comprise separate slide elements that are advanced together by the cutting element 4280. For example, the slides 4270 may be contained in the staple cartridge 4200 and the clipping element 4200. Cutting 4280 may be advanced into staple cartridge 4200 by firing bar 4281 so that cutting element 4280 engages slides 4270 and pushes slides 4270 distally. The 4270 slides can be connected to each other. In any event, each slider 4270 may comprise an angled surface, or cam, 4271 which may be configured to lift clips 4220 aligned in a row of clips. Angled surfaces 4271 may be formed integrally with cutting element 4280. Again referring to Figures 82 and 83, each clamp 4200 may comprise a base, at least one deformable element extending from the base, and a crown 4229 overmolded over and/or positioned around at least a portion of the base and/or deformable elements of clamp 4200. Optionally, these crowns 4229 can be configured to be driven directly by a slider 4270, for example. More particularly, the crowns 4229 of the 4220 clamps may be configured so that the angled surfaces 4271 of the slides 4270 can slide under and directly contact the crowns 4229 without a clamp driver positioned therebetween. In such cases, each ring gear 4229 may comprise at least one angled or angled surface that is cooperative and that can be engaged by an angled surface 4271 of glides 4270 so that the angled cooperating surfaces can drive the clamps 4220 upward when the 4270 slides are slid under the 4220 clips.

[000793] Now referring to Figure 81, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 4300, for example, may comprise a compressible body 4310 and a plurality of staples 4320 positioned in the compressible body 4310. Similar to the above embodiment, staple cartridge 4300 can comprise flexible side supports 4334 that can be attached to a staple cartridge channel and/or secured to compressible structure 4310. In addition to the above, flexible side supports 4334 can be connected together by one or more struts, or connecting elements, 4335 that can be configured to hold the side supports 4334 together. In use, the connecting elements 4335 can be configured to prevent, or at least inhibit, the side supports 4334 from prematurely separating from the cartridge body 4310. The connecting elements 4335 can be configured to hold the side supports 4334 together after the 4300 staple cartridge is compressed by an anvil. In such cases, the side supports 4334 can resist expansion, or lateral displacement, of the side portions of the cartridge body 4310. A cutting element, such as the cutting element 4280, for example, can be configured to transect the connecting elements. 4335 as cutting element 4280 is moved distally in cartridge body 4310. For example, cutting element 4280 may be configured to push one or more slides, such as slides 4270, for example, distally to form the 4320 clamps against an anvil. Sliders 4270 can drive cutting edge 4283 so that cutting element 4280 does not transect a connecting element 4335 until clips 4320 adjacent to connecting element 4335 are fully formed, or at least formed to a desired height. In various circumstances, the connecting elements 4335, which are cooperative with the lateral supports 4334, can prevent, or at least reduce, the lateral movement of the compressible body 4310 and, at the same time, avoid, or at least reduce, the lateral movement of the clamps 4320 positioned on the cartridge body 4310. In such circumstances, the connectors 4335 can hold the clamps 4320 in position even after they are deformed and the connectors 4335 can thereafter be cut to release the side portions of the cartridge body 4310. As mentioned earlier, the side supports 4334 can be connected to the staple cartridge channel and, as a result, can be removed from the surgical site with the staple cartridge channel after implantation of the staple cartridge. clips 4300. Side supports 4334 may consist of an implantable material and may be left in a surgical site. Connecting elements 4335 can be arranged in an intermediate position between the cartridge body 4310 and the tissue T and, after the connecting elements 4335 are separated from the side supports 4334, the connecting elements 4335 can remain implanted in the patient. For example, connecting elements 4335 can consist of an implantable material and connecting elements 4335 can consist of the same material as side supports 4334, for example. Connecting elements 4335 and/or lateral supports 4334 may consist of a flexible, bioabsorbable material such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), available under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), poly- hydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), available under the tradename Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and/or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and/or PCL, for example. In accordance with the invention, a connecting element may comprise a sheet of material connecting the side supports 4334. A staple cartridge may comprise connecting elements extending across the top surface of the cartridge body 4310 and, additionally, clamping elements. connection extending around the bottom surface of the 4310 cartridge body.

[000794] Now referring to Figure 84, a staple cartridge may comprise staples, such as staples 4420, for example, which may comprise a wire portion inserted into a crown portion. The wire portion may be comprised of metal, such as titanium and/or stainless steel, for example, and/or plastic, such as polydioxane (PDS) and/or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example. The crown portion may consist of metal, such as titanium and/or stainless steel, for example, and/or plastic, such as polydioxanone (PDS) and/or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example. The wire portion of each clip 4420 may comprise a base 4422 and deformable legs 4421 extending from the base 4422, wherein the crown portion of each clip 4420 may comprise a crown 4429 which may be configured to receive at least one base portion 4422. To assemble the portions of each clamp 4420, now referring to Figures 85A to 85C, the legs 4421 of the wire portion may be inserted into an opening 4426 in the crown 4429, with the opening 4426 being configured to guide legs 4421 into a base chamber 4427. The wire portion may be further inserted into the crown 4429 so that the legs 4421 exit the base chamber 4427 and the base 4422 of the wire portion enters the base chamber 4427. For example, the base chamber 4427 can be configured so that the wire portion is rotated in the crown 4429 as the base 4422 enters the base chamber 4427 so that the legs of the clamps 4421 are pointed in an upward direction, or at least s substantially up. Referring again to Figure 84, the crown 4429 may comprise exit holes 4425 which may be configured to receive the legs of the clamps 4421 therein.

[000795] In addition to the above, a surgical stapler may comprise a slider 4470 configured to traverse the staple cartridge 4400 and the staple cartridge groove 4430 and move staples 4420 contained in the cartridge body 4410 toward an anvil. In various circumstances, the slider 4470 may be moved from a proximal end of the cartridge groove 4430 to a distal end of the groove of the cartridge 4430 to deploy the cartridge body 4410 and the clips 4420. Under certain circumstances, the slider 4470 may be retracted or returned to the proximal end of the 4430 cartridge groove and another 4400 staple cartridge can be inserted into the 4430 cartridge groove. After the new 4400 staple cartridge is positioned in the 4430 cartridge groove, the 4470 slider can be advanced distally once more. The surgical stapler may comprise one or more locking features that can prevent the slider 4470 from being advanced distally again without a new staple cartridge 4400 placed in the groove of the cartridge 4430. For example, again with reference to Figure 84, the groove cartridge 4430 may comprise a locking shield 4439 which may be configured to prevent, or at least limit, distal movement of slider 4470. More particularly, slider 4470 may be configured to be side by side with the bulkhead 4439 unless the slider 4470 is lifted, at least partially, upward over the bulkhead 4439 by a lifting feature 4428, for example, extending between the most proximal staples 4420 of a staple cartridge 4400. In other words, without the presence of the more proximal 4420 staples in a new 4400 staple cartridge, the 4470 slider cannot be advanced. Thus, when an expanded staple cartridge 4400 is present in the cartridge slot 4430, or there is no staple cartridge 4400 present in the cartridge slot 4430, the slider 4470 cannot be advanced in the cartridge slot 4430.

[000796] In addition to the above embodiments, now referring to Figure 86, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 4500, for example, may be positioned in a staple cartridge channel 4530 and may comprise a compressible body 4510, a plurality of clips 4520 positioned on cartridge body 4510 and a cartridge housing, or retainer, 4580. Compressible body 4510 may comprise an outer layer 4511 and an inner layer 4512 wherein, in at least one embodiment, the outer layer 4511 may sealantly encloses inner layer 4512. For example, outer layer 4511 may extend between inner layer 4512 and cartridge housing 4580. Outer layer 4511 may only partially surround inner layer 4512 and, for example, inner layer 4512 outer layer 4511 and cartridge compartment 4580 may cooperate to encompass, or at least substantially encompass, inner layer 4512. In addition to the above, clips 4520 may be the supported by cartridge housing 4580, cartridge housing 4580 may comprise one or more staple support channels configured to support staples 4520. Cartridge housing 4580 may be secured to cartridge body 4510, whereby, for example , cartridge body 4510 may be laterally compressed between opposing side walls of cartridge housing 4580. Sidewalls of cartridge housing 4580 may support cartridge body 4510 laterally and, for example, cartridge housing 4580 may comprise one or more more walls, or fins, 4582 extending upwardly from bottom bracket 4583 into cartridge body 4510. For example, cartridge body 4510 may comprise one or more slots, or channels, therein which may be configured to receive and/or be interlocked with walls 4582. Walls 4582 may extend partially, or almost entirely, through the body of cartridge 4510. For example, walls 4582 may extend longitudinally across staple cartridge 4500 between a first row of staples 4520 and a second row of staples 4520.

[000797] The 4510 cartridge body and/or the 4580 cartridge housing may comprise cooperative retention features that can provide a fit between the 4580 cartridge housing and the 4510 cartridge body. The 4500 staple cartridge may be positioned in the groove cartridge slot 4530 so that cartridge slot 4580 is positioned against and/or secured to cartridge slot 4530. Cartridge slot 4580 may be detachably coupled to cartridge slot 4530 so that after compression of the cartridge clamps 4500 by the anvil 4540 and after the clamps 4520 are deformed, the cartridge compartment 4580 may separate from the groove of the cartridge 4530 and be implanted with the cartridge body 4510. For example, the cartridge compartment 4580 may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), available under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxy lcanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), available under the tradename Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and/or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and/or PCL, for example. A surgical stapler may additionally comprise a trigger mechanism and/or trigger that can be slid to an intermediate position between the staple cartridge groove 4530 and a bottom drive surface on the cartridge housing 4580 that can be configured to lift. or eject the cartridge compartment 4580 from the slot of the cartridge 4530. The cartridge body 4510 can be detachably attached to the cartridge compartment 4580 so that after compression of the staple cartridge 4500 by the anvil 4540 and after the staples 4520 are deformed, the 4510 cartridge body may separate from the 4580 cartridge housing. For example, the 4580 cartridge housing may remain securely engaged with the 4530 cartridge groove so that the 4580 cartridge housing is removed from location. with the cartridge slot 4530. A surgical stapler may additionally comprise a triggering mechanism and/or trigger. which can be slid to an intermediate position between the 4580 staple cartridge cage and a bottom drive surface on the 4510 cartridge body that can be configured to lift or eject the 4510 cartridge body from the 4580 cartridge cage. For example , the staple cartridge 4500 may additionally comprise staple drivers disposed at an intermediate position between the cartridge housing 4580 and the staples 4520 so that, as the firing mechanism is slid distally, the staple drivers and 4520 clamps can be driven up towards the anvil. For example, the clamp drivers may be at least partially immersed in the compressible body 4510.

[000798] Optionally, similar to the above embodiment, the staple cartridge 4500 may comprise a locking feature that may be configured to prevent, or at least limit, distal movement of a cutting element unless a cartridge of unfired staples 4500 is positioned in the staple cartridge channel 4530. The staple cartridge compartment 4580 may comprise a surface that moves the cutting element above and above a locking surface of the staple cartridge channel 4530, for example example. If a 4500 staple cartridge comprising a 4580 cartridge compartment is not present in the 4530 cartridge groove, the cutting element cannot be advanced. The most proximal staples, and/or any other suitable staples, in a staple cartridge 4500 may comprise a lifting surface that can sufficiently lift the cutting element above the locking surface. In addition to or instead of the foregoing, various portions of the staple cartridge 4500 may consist of materials that have different colors. In such cases, the surgeon can visually detect that an unfired and/or fired staple cartridge is present in the staple cartridge groove 4530. For example, the outer layer 4511 of the cartridge body 4510 may have a first color, the housing cartridge slot 4580 can be a second color, and the staple cartridge groove 4530 can be a third color. In the event that the surgeon observes the first color, the surgeon may know that an unfired cartridge 4500 is present in the staple cartridge channels 4530; in the event that the surgeon observes a second color, the surgeon may know that a fired cartridge 4500 is present in the staple cartridge channel 4530 and that the remaining cartridge compartment 4580 needs to be removed; and in the event that the surgeon observes the third color, the surgeon can know that no portion of a staple cartridge 4500 remains in the cartridge channel 4530.

[000799] Now referring to Figure 87, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 4600, for example, may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 4610 and a plurality of staples 4620 positioned therein. Cartridge body 4610 may comprise an outer layer 4611 and an inner layer 4612. The inner layer 4612 may comprise a plurality of pockets, such as pockets, or cavities, 4615, for example, defined therein that can facilitate flattening of the cartridge. cartridge body 4610. For example, inner layer 4612 may comprise a corrugated, or honeycomb, lattice that may be configured to withstand a compressive force, or pressure, provided that the compressive force, or pressure, does not exceed a certain limit value. As long as the threshold is not exceeded, the inner layer 4612 can deform at a linear rate, or at least substantially linear, with respect to the force, or pressure, of compression being applied. When the compressive force, or pressure, exceeds the threshold value, the inner layer 4612 may suddenly give way to large deflections and flatten, or warp, as a result of the compressive load. Inner layer lattice 4612 may consist of a plurality of sublayers 4612a that may be connected to one another. Each sublayer 4612a may comprise a plurality of alternating notches and ridges, or waves, which may be aligned with the alternating notches and ridges of an adjacent sublayer 4612a. For example, the notches of a first sublayer 4612a may be disposed adjacent the ridges of a second sublayer 4612a, and similarly, the ridges of the first sublayer 4612a may be disposed adjacent the notches of the second sublayer 4612a. Adjacent sublayers 4612a may be secured to each other and/or to the outer layer 4611 by at least one adhesive, such as fibrin and/or protein hydrogel, for example. Figure 88 illustrates the staple cartridge 4600 after the cartridge body 4610 is flattened and the staples 4620 are deformed to capture and hold tissue T against the cartridge body 4610.

[000800] Now referring to Figures 89 to 91, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 4700, for example, may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge body 4710 and a plurality of staples 4720 positioned in the cartridge body 4710. In a similar manner to the above embodiment, cartridge body 4710 may comprise an outer layer 4711 and an inner layer 4712, wherein inner layer 4712 may comprise a plurality of sublayers 4712a. Also similarly to the above embodiment, each sublayer 4712a may comprise alternating notches 4717 and ridges 4718 that may be aligned with each other to define pockets, or cavities, 4715 therebetween. Notches 4717 and/or ridges 4718 may extend along axes that are parallel to each other and/or parallel to a longitudinal axis 4709. Clips 4720 may be aligned in a plurality of rows of clips that may extend along the along axes parallel to each other and/or parallel to the longitudinal axis 4709. Alternatively, again with reference to Figures 87 and 88, the clamps 4620 contained in the cartridge body 4600 may extend along axes that are transverse or perpendicular to the axes defined by the notches and ridges of the 4612a sublayers. Referring again to Figures 89 to 91, the clamps 4720 can extend through the notches 4717 and the ridges 4718, with frictional forces between the clamps 4720 and the underlayers 4712a holding the clamps 4720 in the cartridge body 4710. The plurality of sublayers 4712a may consist of a reinforcing material and/or plastic material, such as polydioxanone (PDS) and/or polyglycolic acid (PGA), for example, which may be configured to hold the clamps 4720 in a vertical orientation, for example, and/or keeping the staples 4720 in alignment with each other, as shown in Figures 89 and 90. Figure 91 illustrates the staple cartridge 4700 after the cartridge body 4710 has been flattened and the staples 4720 have been been deformed to capture and hold the T fabric against the 4710 cartridge body.

[000801] Again with reference to Figures 89 to 91, the cartridge body 4710 can resiliently or elastically flatten when compressed. For example, the waves formed in each sublayer 4712a by notches 4717 and ridges 4718 can be flattened, or at least substantially flattened, when the cartridge body 4710 is compressed, which can flatten, or at least substantially flatten, the cavities 4715 defined in that region. In various circumstances, the cartridge body 4710, or at least portions of the cartridge body 4710, may resiliently or elastically re-expand after the compressive force, or pressure, is removed from the cartridge body 4710. For example, connections between notches 4717 and ridges 4718 of adjacent sublayers 4712a may remain intact, or at least substantially intact, when the cartridge body 4710 is compressed such that, after the compressive force is removed from the cartridge body 4710, the sublayers 4712a can move away from each other and, as a result, at least partially re-expand the cartridge body 4710. The cartridge body 4710 can be plastically deformed, or crushed, when it is compressed and, as a result, the cartridge body 4710 may not re-expand after removing the compressive force, or pressure, from the 4710 cartridge body. Now referring to Figure 92, a staple cartridge, such as the 4800 staple cartridge, for example, may comprising a crushable cartridge body 4810 comprising an outer layer 4811 and an inner layer 4812, wherein the inner layer 4812 may comprise a corrugated lattice, configured as a beehive, having a plurality of pockets, or cavities, defined 4815 inside you. The lattice defining walls of the inner layer 4812 may comprise one or more weakened, or thin, cross-sections 4819 which can be configured to allow the lattice defining walls to rupture when the cartridge body 4810 is compressed. In such circumstances, the cartridge body 4810 can be crushed when the staple cartridge 4800 is deployed.

[000802] Now referring to Figures 93 to 95, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 4900, for example, may comprise a cartridge body 4910 comprising an outer layer 4911 and a plurality of retractable elements 4912 arranged in a intermediate position between the top and bottom portions of the outer layer 4911, for example. Referring primarily to Figures 93 and 94, staple cartridge 4900 may additionally comprise a plurality of staples 4920, wherein each staple 4920 may be positioned on a retractable element 4912. More particularly, each retractable element 4912 may comprise a first portion 4912a, a second portion 4012b, and a third portion 4012c which may be cooperative to define a cavity 4915 that is configured to receive a staple 4920. In use, in addition to the above, the staple cartridge 4900 may be positioned in a groove. cartridge clamps and a compressive force may be applied to the fabric-contacting surface 4919 to compress the cartridge body 4910. As the fabric-contacting surface 4919 is moved downwards, the retractable elements 4912 may collapse. flatten. In such circumstances, the second portion 4912b of each retractable element 4912 may flatten into a corresponding first portion 4912a, and similarly, the third portion 4912c of each retractable element 4912 may flatten into a corresponding second portion 4912b. As cartridge body 4910 is compressed and retractable elements 4912 are flattened, clamps 4920 positioned on retractable elements 4912 may be deformed, as illustrated in Figure 95. The second portion 4912b of each retractable element 4912 may be frictionally engaged and/or press fit into a corresponding first portion 4912a so that when the compressive force applied to the retractable member 4912 exceeds the retaining force that retains the first portion 4912a and second portion 4912b in their extended position (Figure 94) , the first portion 4912a and the second portion 4912b may begin to slide relative to each other. Similarly, the third portion 4912c of each retractable member 4912 may be frictionally engaged and/or press fit to a corresponding second portion 4912b so that when the compressive force applied to the retractable member 4912 exceeds the retaining force that retains the second portion 4912b and the third portion 4912c in their extended position (Figure 94), the third portion 4912b and the third portion 4912c may begin to slide relative to each other.

[000803] As described herein, a staple cartridge may comprise a plurality of staples therein. Optionally, such staples may consist of a metal wire deformed into a substantially U-shaped configuration having two staple legs. Alternatives are envisaged in which the clips may comprise different configurations such as two or more strands which have been joined together and having three or more clip legs. The yarn or yarns used to form the staples may comprise a round, or at least substantially round, cross-section. The staple wires may comprise any other suitable cross-section, such as square and/or rectangular cross-sections, for example. Staples may consist of plastic wires. Staples may consist of plastic coated metal wires. In accordance with the invention, a cartridge may comprise any suitable type of fastener in addition to or in place of staples. For example, such a fastener may comprise pivoting arms which are bent when engaged by an anvil. Two-piece fasteners could be used. For example, a staple cartridge may comprise a plurality of first fastener portions and an anvil may comprise a plurality of second fastener portions which are connected to the first fastener portions when the anvil is pressed against the staple cartridge. As described above, a slider or driver can be advanced into a staple cartridge to complete the staple forming process. A slider or driver may be advanced within an anvil to move downwardly one or more forming elements in engagement with the staple cartridge and the opposing staples, or fasteners, positioned therein.

[000804] A staple cartridge may comprise four rows of staples stored therein. The four rows of staples can be arranged into two rows of inner staples and two rows of outer staples. For example, an inner row of staples and an outer row of staples can be positioned on a first side of a cutting element, or knife, slot in the staple cartridge, and similarly, an inner row of staples and a row of staples. of external staples can be positioned on a second side of the cutting element slot, or knife. A staple cartridge may not comprise a cutting member slot; however, such a staple cartridge may comprise a designated portion configured to be cut by a cutting element instead of a staple cartridge slot. The inner staple rows may be arranged in the staple cartridge so that they are equally, or at least substantially equally, spaced from the cutting element slot. Similarly, rows of outer staples may be arranged on the staple cartridge so that they are equally, or at least substantially equally, spaced from the cutting element slot. In accordance with the invention, a staple cartridge may comprise more or less than four rows of staples. A staple cartridge may comprise six rows of staples. For example, the staple cartridge may comprise three rows of staples on a first side of a cutting element slot and three rows of staples on a second side of the cutting element slot. A staple cartridge may comprise an odd number of rows of staples. For example, a staple cartridge may comprise two rows of staples on a first side of a cutting element slot and three rows of staples on a second side of the cutting element slot. The rows of staples may comprise staples that have the same, or at least substantially the same, unformed staple height. Alternatively, one or more of the rows of staples may comprise staples that have an unformed staple height different from the height of other staples. For example, staples on a first side of a cutting element slot can have a first unformed height and staples on a second side of a cutting element slot can have a second unformed height that is different from the first height. , for example.

[000805] Now referring to Figures 96A to 96D, an end actuator of a surgical stapler may comprise a cartridge holding portion, such as the staple cartridge groove 5030, for example, a cartridge of fasteners detachably positioned in the staple cartridge channel 5030, such as the staple cartridge 5000, for example, and a jaw 5040 in position opposite the staple cartridge 5000 and the staple cartridge channel 5030. The staple cartridge 5000 may comprise a compressible structure 5010 and a plurality of clips 5020, and/or any other suitable fasteners, at least partially positioned on the compressible structure 5010. For example, each clip 5020 may comprise a base 5022 and, additionally, legs 5021 extending upwardly from base 5022 , wherein at least a portion of the legs 5021 may be immersed in the cartridge body 5010. The compressible body 5010 may comprise a top, or contact, surface with the fabric, 5019 and a bottom surface 5018, wherein the bottom surface 5018 may be positioned against and supported by a supporting surface 5031 of the staple cartridge channel 5030. Similar to the above embodiment, the surface support slots 5031 may comprise a plurality of support slots 5032 (Figure 96D), for example defined in the surface which may be configured to receive and support the bases 5022 of staples 5020. The end actuator of the surgical stapler may additionally comprise a retaining die, such as the retaining die 5050, for example, which can be configured to engage the staples 5020 and capture tissue. For example, the 5050 Retaining Die can be detachably mounted to the 5040 Jaw. In use, after the 5000 Staple Cartridge is positioned in the 5030 Staple Cartridge groove, the 5040 Jaw and 5050 Retention Die is secured. therewith can be moved towards the staple cartridge 5000 and the staple cartridge groove 5030. The jaw 5040 can be moved down along an axis 5099 so that the jaw 5040 and the staple cartridge groove 5030 remain parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to each other as the jaw 5040 is closed. More particularly, for example, the jaw 5040 can be closed in such a way that a tissue contacting surface 5051 of the retention die 5050 is parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the tissue contacting surface 5019 of the cartridge. staples 5000 as the jaw 5040 is moved towards the staple cartridge 5000.

[000806] Now with reference to Figure 96A, the retaining die 5050 may be detachably attached to the jaw 5040 so that there is little, if any, relative movement between the retaining die 5050 and the jaw 5040 when the retaining die 5050 is secured to the jaw 5040. The jaw 5040 may comprise one or more retaining features that can be configured to hold the retaining array 5050 in position. For example, the retaining die 5050 can be snapped and/or snap-fitted to the jaw 5040. The retainer die 5050 can be secured to the jaw 5040 using at least one adhesive. In either case, the jaw 5040 can be moved to a position in which the retention die 5050 is brought into contact with the fabric T and the fabric T is positioned against the fabric contacting surface 5019 of the staple cartridge 5000. When the T fabric is positioned against the staple cartridge 5000 by the jaw 5040, the compressible structure 5010 of the staple cartridge 5000 may or may not be compressed by the jaw 5040. Under any circumstances, the legs 5021 of the staples 5200 may not protrude through the surface contact with the tissue 5019 of the staple cartridge 5000, as illustrated in Figure 96A. In addition, as also illustrated in Figure 96A, the jaw 5040 can hold the T tissue against the compressible structure 5010 without interconnecting the retention matrix 5050 with the clamps 5020. This can allow the surgeon to open and close the jaw 5040 several times to achieve the desired positioning of the end actuator at the surgical site, for example, without damaging the tissue T. Alternatives are envisaged, however, when the tips of the staples 5023 can protrude from the tissue contacting surface 5019 before the body of the cartridge 5010 to be compressed by the anvil 5040. After the end actuator is properly positioned, now referring to Figure 96B, the jaw 5040 can be moved down towards the cartridge groove of staples 5030 so that the compressible structure 5010 is compressed by the anvil 5040 and so that the tissue contacting surface 5019 is forced downward with respect to the clamps 5020. As the suture When the fabric contacting surface 5019 is pressed down, the legs 5023 of the staples 5021 can pierce the fabric contact surface 5019 and puncture at least a portion of the fabric T. In such circumstances, the retaining die 5050 may be positioned above the clips 5020 so that the retaining apertures 5052 of the retaining die 5050 are aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the ends 5023 of the legs of the clips 5021.

[000807] As retaining die 5050 is forced down along axis 5099, now referring to Figure 96C, clip legs 5021 of clips 5020 may enter retaining apertures 5052. Clip legs 5021 may engaging the side walls of the retaining apertures 5052. As described in more detail below, the retaining die 5050 may comprise one or more retaining elements that extend into and/or around the retaining apertures 5052, which may engage the retaining apertures 5052. legs of clips 5021. In either case, legs of clips 5021 may be retained in retaining openings 5052. In various circumstances, prongs 5023 of legs of clips 5021 may enter retaining openings 5052 and may frictionally engage elements and/or the side walls of the openings 5052. As the retaining die 5050 is pushed towards the bases 5022 of the clamps 5020, the legs of the clamps 5021 can slide in r relation to the side walls and/or the retaining elements. As a result of the foregoing, sliding friction forces can be created between the legs of the clamps 5021 and the retaining die 5050, such sliding friction forces being able to resist the insertion of the retaining die 5050 over the clamps 5020. sliding friction between the retaining die 5050 and the clamps 5020 can be constant, or at least substantially constant, as the retaining die 5050 is slid downwards along the clamp legs 5021 of the clamps 5020. Sliding friction forces may increase and/or decrease as the retaining die 5050 is slid down along the legs of the clips 5021 due to variations in the geometry of the legs of the clips 5021, the retaining apertures 5052, and/or the retaining elements that extend into and/or around retention apertures 5052, for example. The insertion of the retention die 5050 over the staples 5020 may also have strength from the compressible body 5010 of the staple cartridge 5000. More particularly, the compressible structure 5010 may consist of an elastic material, for example, which can apply a resisting force to the retention matrix 5050 that increases with increasing distance over which the compressible structure 5010 is compressed. For example, the increase in resistive force generated by the cartridge body 5010 may be linearly proportional, or at least substantially linearly proportional, with respect to the distance at which the cartridge body 5010 is compressed. The increase in resistive force generated by the 5010 cartridge body may be geometrically proportional to the distance at which the 5010 cartridge body is compressed.

[000808] In addition to the above, sufficient trigger force can be applied to the gripper 5040 and the retaining die 5050 to overcome the drag and friction forces described above. In use, the retention die 5050 can be seated at any suitable depth with respect to the staples 5020. The retention die 5050 can be seated at a depth with respect to the bases 5022 of the staples 5020 to secure two or more layers of fabric together and generate compressive forces, or pressures, on the tissue. In various circumstances, the system comprising the retention matrix 5050 and the clamps 5020 may allow a surgeon to select the amount of compressive forces, or pressures, that are applied to tissue by selecting the depth at which the retention matrix 5050 is seated. . For example, the retaining die 5050 can be forced down towards the clamp bases 5022 of the clamps 5020 until the retaining die 5050 is seated at a certain depth 5011 away from the base of the support slots 5032, with a lesser depth 5011 may result in higher compressive forces, or pressures, applied to fabric T than at a greater depth 5011, which may result in lower compressive forces, or pressures, applied to fabric T. The forces, or pressures, of compression applied to the fabric T may be linearly proportional, or at least substantially linearly proportional, to the depth 5011 at which the retention matrix 5050 is seated. In various circumstances, the compressive forces, or pressures, applied to the fabric T may depend on the thickness of the fabric T positioned between the retention matrix 5050 and the staple cartridge 5020. More particularly, for a given distance 5011, the presence of a Thicker T fabric may result in greater compressive forces, or pressures, than the presence of thinner T fabric.

[000809] In various circumstances, in addition to the above, a surgeon may adjust the depth at which the 5050 Retention Matrix is seated to take into account the thicker and/or thinner tissue positioned in the end actuator and to apply a certain pressure or a predetermined pressure to the fabric T irrespective of the thickness of the fabric. For example, the surgeon may seat the retention matrix 5050 to a lesser depth 5011 when clamping thinner tissue T, or to a greater depth 5011 when clamping thicker tissue T to achieve the same compression pressure, or at least substantially the same in the fabric. In addition to the above, a surgeon can selectively determine the amount of compressive pressure to be applied to the T-tissue positioned between the Retention Matrix 5050 and the Staple Cartridge 5010. In various circumstances, a surgeon may engage the Retention Matrix 5050 with clips 5020 and positioning retention die 5050 at a first distance from bases 5022 of clips 5020 to apply a first compressive pressure to the fabric. The surgeon may alternatively position the retention matrix 5050 a second distance away from the bases 5022, which distance is less than the first distance, to apply a second compressive pressure to the tissue that is greater than the first pressure. The surgeon may alternatively position retention matrix 5050 a third distance away from bases 5022, which distance is less than the second distance, to apply a third compressive pressure to the tissue that is greater than the second pressure. The fixation system comprising the 5050 retention matrix and 5020 clamps can be configured to allow a surgeon to apply a wide range of compressive pressures to the target tissue.

[000810] Now referring to Figure 96D, the legs of the clamps 5021 may be inserted through the retaining die 5050 so that the tips of the legs of the clamps 5023 extend above the top surface of the retaining die 5050. Again with reference 96C, jaw 5040 may additionally comprise clearance openings 5042 defined in the jaw which may be configured to receive the ends of the legs of clamps 5023 as they pass through retaining apertures 5052 in retaining die 5050. For example , the clearance openings 5042 may be aligned with the retaining apertures 5052 so that the legs 5021 do not contact the jaw 5040. The clearance apertures 5042 may be of sufficient depth so that the legs of the clamps 5021 do not enter in contact with the 5040 jaw, regardless of how far the 5050 retaining die is seated. After the retaining die 5050 is engaged with the staples 5020 and seated in the desired position, now referring to Figure 96D, the staple cartridge groove 5030 and jaw 5040 can be moved away from the T fabric. Staple cartridge holder 5030 can be separated from the implanted staple cartridge 5000 and the anvil 5040 can be separated from the implanted retaining die 5050. As the jaw 5040 is moved away from the retaining die 5050 and the staple holders 5032 are moved away of the bases of the staples 5022, the distance 5011 between the retaining die 5050 and the bottom of the bases 5022 can be maintained, although the jaw 5040 and the cartridge groove of staples 5030 are no longer supporting them. The static frictional forces between the legs of the clamps 5021 and the retaining die 5050 may be sufficient to hold the retaining die 5050 in position despite the altering force that is applied to the retaining die 5050 by the compressed cartridge body 5010 and/or the compressed fabric T. For example, the cartridge body 5010 can consist of a resilient material which, when compressed, can apply an elastic changing force to the retaining die 5050 and clamps 5020 so that it tends to push the retaining die 5050 and the clamps 5020 separating them, although this movement is counteracted by the frictional engagement between the legs of the clamps 5021 and the retaining die 5050.

[000811] Optionally, as described above, the retaining die may comprise a plurality of retaining apertures, each retaining aperture being configured to receive a leg of a fastener therein. Referring now to Figure 97, there is illustrated a portion of a retaining die 5150 which may comprise a retaining aperture 5152 defined by a perimeter 5156. The perimeter 5156 of aperture 5152 may comprise a circular, or at least substantially circular, profile, and /or any other suitable profile. Retaining die 5150 may comprise one or more retaining elements, such as retaining elements 5153, for example, which extend into opening 5152 and can be configured to engage a fastener leg when the fastener leg is inserted through the same. For example, each retaining member 5153 may comprise a cantilever that extends inwardly toward a central axis 5159, i.e., toward the center of aperture 5152. Optionally, each cantilever may comprise a first end that is attached to to the retaining die structure 5158 and a second end forming the perimeter 5156 of the retaining opening 5152. The perimeter 5156 of a retaining opening 5152 may be defined by a first diameter, or width, and a fastener leg may be defined by a second diameter, or width, the second diameter may be larger than the first diameter. For example, the fastener leg may be configured to contact and deflect one or more of the retaining members 5153 to increase the diameter of the retaining aperture 5152 as the fastener leg is inserted therethrough. In addition to the above, the fastener leg can define a perimeter that is greater than the perimeter 5156 of the retaining opening 5152 so that the fastener leg can expand the perimeter 5156 when the fastener leg is inserted into the opening.

[000812] Again with reference to Figure 97, the opening 5152 can be defined by the deformable elements 5153, with each deformable element 5153 being configured to deflect relative to, or independently of, the other deformable elements 5153. For example, elements Adjacent deformable elements 5153 may be separated by slots 5154 which may be configured to allow each deformable element 5153 to be flexed relative to one another. Each slot 5154 may comprise a first end 5155 in the retaining die body 5158, a second end opening in the retaining opening 5152, and a constant, or at least substantially constant, width extending between the first end 5155 and the second. far end. Alternatively, the width of each slot 5154 may not be constant and each slot 5154 may increase and/or decrease the width between the first and second ends thereof. The first ends 5155 of the slots 5154 may comprise an enlarged portion, such as a circular portion, which may provide, one, stress relief for the bases of the deformable elements 5153 attached to the retaining die body 5158, and, two, means for increasing the flexibility of deformable elements 5153. The geometry of deformable elements 5153, and/or slots 5154, can be selected so as to provide deformable elements 5153 with a desired flexibility. For example, slots 5154 can be extended to create longer deformable elements 5153 that can be more flexible than deformable elements 5153 that have a shorter length. The width of each deformable element 5153 can be selected to provide a desired flexibility thereto. More particularly, deformable elements that have a thinner width can be more flexible than deformable elements that have a thicker width. Referring again to Figure 97, the first ends of the cantilevers of the deformable elements 5153 attached to the retaining die body 5158 may be wider than the second ends of the cantilevers. For example, cantilevers can be tapered in a linear, or at least substantially linear, manner between the first and second ends thereof.

[000813] Referring again to Figure 97, the retaining die body 5158 may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, sheet of material having a fabric-contacting surface 5151 and a top surface 5157. For example , the fabric contacting surface 5151 and the top surface 5157 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, with respect to each other. Optionally, each deformable element 5153 may comprise a first portion 5153a and a second portion 5153b, wherein the first portion 5153a may extend in a first direction and the second portion 5153b may extend in another, or second, direction. For example, the retaining die body 5158 may define a plane and the first portions 5153a of the deformable elements 5153 may be located in such a plane. The second portions 5153b of the deformable elements 5153 may extend at an angle to the first portions 5153a. For example, second portions 5153b may extend in directions away from top surface 5157 of retaining die body 5158 and second portions 5153b may converge toward the central axis 5159 of retaining aperture 5152. In either case, the second portions 5153b may be configured to deflect away from the central axis 5159 when the fastener leg is inserted therethrough. When a clamp leg 5021 of a clamp 5020 is inserted into a retaining opening 5152, the deformable elements 5153 may deform in a direction that is generally away from the bases 5122 of the clamps 5120. As a result, the deformable elements 5153 may deflect in a direction general direction which is the same, or at least substantially the same, as the direction in which the legs of the clamps 5021 are inserted.

[000814] Referring again to Figure BD, the second portions 5153b of the deformable elements 5153 may each comprise a sharp point, for example, which may be configured to slide against a clamp leg 5021 as the clamp leg 5021 is inserted inside. The sharp points of the second portions 5153b may also be configured to "bite" the clip leg 5021 in the event that the clip leg 5021 is pulled in the opposite direction, i.e., in a direction that would remove the clip leg 5021 from the clip opening. retainer 5052. Under certain circumstances, the second portions 5153b may be inclined at an angle to the side of the clamp leg 5021 that is greater than 90 degrees, and as a result, the second portions 5153b may pierce, or penetrate, the side of the clamp. clamp leg 5021 when clamp leg 5021 is subjected to a force tending to remove clamp leg 5021 from retention opening 5052. Clamp legs 5021 may comprise recesses and/or concavities, such as micro-recess, for example , on their surfaces that can be configured to receive the tips of the deformable elements 5053, for example, inside. For example, the tips of the deformable elements 5053 can catch and penetrate the recesses in the legs of the staples 5021 when a removal force is applied to the legs of the staples 5021. Optionally, as a result of the penetration of the second portions 5153b into the legs of the staples 5021, the forces acting to remove the legs of the clamps 5021 from the retaining openings 5022 may seat only the second portions 5153b deeper into the legs of the clamps 5021 and increase the force required to remove the legs of the clamps 5021. Also, due to the upward tilt of the second portions 5153b, the second portions 5153b may be more amenable to the insertion of a staple leg 5021 into a retention opening 5152 and more resistant to removal of the staple leg 5021. As a result, the force required to insert a staple leg 5021 into a holding opening 5022 may be less than the force required to remove the clamp leg 5021 from the holding opening. 5022. The force required to remove clip leg 5021 from retention opening 5022 can be approximately 50 percent greater than the force required to insert clip leg 5021 into retention opening 5022, for example. Alternatively, the force required to remove the clamp leg 5021 may be from approximately 10 percent to approximately 100 percent greater than the force required to insert the clamp leg 5021, for example. The force required to remove the clamp leg 5021 may be approximately 100 percent, approximately 150 percent, approximately 200 percent, and/or more than approximately 200 percent greater than the force required to insert the clamp leg 5021, for example.

[000815] Again with reference to Figure 97, the second portions 5153b can be arranged circumferentially around the opening 5152 and can define a pocket in that region. More particularly, second portions 5153b may define a pocket 5160 which may be configured to receive the tip of the fastener leg as it is inserted into retention opening 5152. Second portions 5153b of deformable elements 5153 may comprise an annular contour, or at least substantially annular, which may cooperatively define an annular, or at least substantially annular, profile of pocket 1560, for example. For example, second portions 5153b may define a conical or frusto-conical pocket. The pocket can be defined by an appropriate number of deformable elements, such as four deformable elements 5153 (Figure 97), six deformable elements 5153 (Figure 98), or eight deformable elements 5153 (Figure 99), for example. Referring now to Figure 100, the deformable elements of a retention matrix, such as the retention matrix 5250, for example, can form a pyramidal shape, or an at least substantially pyramidal shape, for example. In accordance with the invention, a retaining array 5250 may comprise a plurality of retaining apertures, such as retaining aperture 5252, for example, which may be defined by a perimeter 5256. Perimeter 5256 may comprise a polygonal profile, or at the same time less substantially polygonal, and/or any other suitable profile. Retaining die 5250 may comprise one or more retaining elements, such as retaining elements 5253, for example, which extend into opening 5252 and may be configured to engage a fastener leg when the fastener leg is inserted through the same. For example, each retaining member 5253 may comprise a cantilever that extends inwardly toward a central axis 5259, i.e., toward the center of opening 5252. Optionally, each cantilever may comprise a first end that is secured to the frame. of the retaining die 5258 and a second end forming the perimeter 5256 of the retaining opening 5252. The perimeter 5256 of a retaining opening 5252 may be defined by a first diameter, or width, and a fastener leg may be defined by a second diameter, or width, with the second diameter being greater than the first diameter. For example, the fastener leg may be configured to contact and deflect one or more of the retaining members 5253 to increase the diameter of the retaining aperture 5252 as the fastener leg is inserted therethrough. In addition to the above, the fastener leg can define a perimeter that is greater than the perimeter 5256 of the retaining opening 5252 so that the fastener leg can expand the perimeter 5256 when the fastener leg is inserted into the opening.

[000816] Again with reference to Figure 100, the opening 5252 can be defined by the deformable elements 5253, with each deformable element 5253 being configured to deflect relative to, or independently of, the other deformable elements 5253. For example, elements Adjacent deformable elements 5253 may be separated by slots 5254 which may be configured to allow each deformable element 5253 to be flexed relative to one another. The retaining die body 5258 may comprise a sheet of flat, or at least substantially flat, material having a fabric-contacting surface 5251 and a top surface 5257. For example, the fabric-contacting surface 5251 and the top surface 5257 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, with respect to each other. Optionally, each deformable member 5253 may comprise a first portion 5253a and a second portion 5253b, wherein the first portion 5253a may extend in a first direction and the second portion 5253b may extend in another, or second, direction. For example, the retaining die body 5258 may define a plane and the first portions 5253a of the deformable elements 5253 may be located in such a plane. The second portions 5253b of the deformable elements 5253 may extend at an angle to the first portions 5253a. For example, second portions 5253b may extend in directions away from top surface 5257 of retaining die structure 5258 and second portions 5253b may converge toward the central axis 5259 of retaining aperture 5252. In either case, second portions 5253b may be configured to deflect away from center axis 5259 when the fastener leg is inserted therethrough. Referring again to Figure 100 , second portions 5253b may be arranged circumferentially around opening 5252 and may define a pocket in that region. More particularly, second portions 5253b may define a pocket that may be configured to receive the tip of the fastener leg as it is inserted into retention opening 5252. Second portions 5253b of deformable elements 5253 may define a polygonal pocket, or at the same time less substantially polygonal, for example. The pocket can be defined by an appropriate number of deformable elements, such as four deformable elements 5253 (Figure 100) that can define a square, six deformable elements 5253 (Figure 101) that can define a hexagon, or eight deformable elements 5253 (Figure 102). ) that can define an octagon, for example.

[000817] Now referring to Figure 103, the retention die, such as the 5350 retention die, for example, may be formed from a sheet of flat material, or an at least substantially flat one, such as titanium and/or steel. stainless, for example. For example, a plurality of openings 5352 may be formed in the structure 5358 of the retaining die 5350 by means of one or more stamping processes. The sheet of material may be positioned in a stamping die which, when actuated, may puncture and remove certain portions of the material to form slots 5354, slots 5355 of slots 5354, and/or the perimeter 5356 of retention slot 5352, for example . The stamping die may also be configured to tilt the deformable elements 5353 into a suitable configuration. For example, the stamping die may deform second portions 5353b upwardly relative to first portions 5353a along a fold line 5353c. Referring now to Figure 104, the retaining die, such as the retaining die 5450, for example, may comprise a plurality of retaining apertures 5452. Similar to the above embodiment, the perimeter 5456 of each retaining aperture 5452 may be The retainer 5450 may comprise a plurality of openings 5455 surrounding, or at least substantially surrounding, the retaining opening 5452. For example, openings 5455 may be arranged in a circular array surrounding or forming a closed perimeter defined by the fixed ends of the cantilevers of the deformable elements 5453. Each opening 5455 may comprise a circular perimeter, or at least s substantially circular, and/or any other suitable perimeter. In use, apertures 5455 may provide, one, stress relief for the bases of deformable elements 5453 secured to the retaining die structure 5458, and, two, means for increasing the flexibility of deformable elements 5453. Optionally, larger apertures 5455 may provide more flexibility to deformable elements 5453 compared to smaller apertures 5455. Also, apertures 5455 that are closer to deformable elements 5453 can provide more flexibility compared to apertures 5455 that are further apart.

[000818] Referring now to Figure 105, the retaining die, like the retaining die 5550, for example, may comprise a plurality of retaining apertures 5552. Each retaining aperture 5552 may comprise an elongated slot 5554 having enlarged ends circular, or at least substantially circular, 5555. For example, ends 5555 may be defined by a diameter that is wider than slit 5554. Elongated slit 5554 and ends 5555 may be positioned along and/or centered along long, of a longitudinal axis 5559. Slot 5554 and ends 5555 may define two opposing tabs 5553 which can be configured to engage a leg of a fastener and deflect as the fastener leg is inserted through the tabs. Ends 5555 that have a larger perimeter, or diameter, can define longer tabs 5553 that can be more flexible than tabs 5553 defined by ends 5555 of smaller perimeter, or diameter. The ends 5555 can have the same perimeter and diameter and, for example, each tab 5553 can be symmetrical about an axis that is perpendicular, or at least substantially perpendicular, to the longitudinal axis 5559. Alternatively, the ends 5555 can have perimeters and /or different diameters where each tab 5553 may not be symmetrical about its axis. For example, the tabs 5553 can twist around their axes as the fastener leg is inserted through the retaining opening 5552. Now referring to Figure 106, the retaining die, like the retaining die 5650, for example , may comprise a plurality of holding apertures 5652. Each holding aperture 5652 may comprise an elongated slit 5654 comprising circular, or at least substantially circular, ends 5655. For example, elongated slit 5654 and ends 5655 may be positioned along, and/or centered along, a longitudinal axis 5659. Optionally, each end 5655 may be defined by a diameter that is equal to, or at least substantially equal to, the width of slot 5654.

[000819] Referring now to Figure 107, the retaining die, like the retaining die 5750, for example, may comprise a plurality of retaining apertures 5752. Each retaining aperture 5752 may comprise a plurality of slits, such as the slits 5754, for example, which have widened ends 5755. For example, slots 5754 and ends 5755 can be positioned along and/or centered along longitudinal axes 5759. Axes 5759 can extend in directions that are perpendicular or transverse each other. Slots 5754 and ends 5755 can define four tabs 5753, for example, which can be configured to engage a fastener leg and deflect when the fastener leg is inserted through retention opening 5752. Each tab 5753 may comprise a triangular configuration. , or at least substantially triangular, such as an equilateral triangle, for example. Alternatively, now referring to Figure 108, a retaining die, such as retaining die 5850, for example, may comprise a plurality of retaining apertures 5852. Each retaining aperture 5852 may comprise a plurality of slots, such as slots 5854 , for example, that have ends 5855, where slots 5854 and ends 5855 can be positioned along and/or centered along longitudinal axes 5859. Axes 5859 can extend in directions that are perpendicular or transverse between yes. Slots 5854 and ends 5855 may define tabs 5853 which may be configured to engage a fastener leg and deflect when the fastener leg is inserted through retention opening 5852. Each tab 5853 may comprise an arcuate profile. More particularly, each tab 5853 may comprise a curved end, rather than a pointed end shown in Figure 105, which may be configured to contact the fastener leg.

[000820] Referring now to Figure 109, the retaining die, like the retaining die 5950, for example, may comprise a plurality of retaining apertures 5952. Each retaining aperture 5952 may comprise a plurality of slits, such as the slits 5954, for example, wherein each slot 5954 may extend along, and/or may be centered along, an axis 5959. Axes 5959 may be transverse to each other, and, for example, axes 5959 may be arranged so that so that all axes 5959 extend through a center of retention aperture 5952 and are spaced equidistantly, or at least substantially equidistantly, from one another. Each slot 5954 may comprise an open end facing the center of retention opening 5952 and a second, or closed end, 5955 at the opposite end of slot 5954. Similar to the above embodiment, slots 5954 and ends 5955 may define three tabs 5953, for example, which may be configured to engage a fastener leg and deflect when the fastener leg is inserted into retention opening 5952. Optionally, each tab 5953 may comprise an arcuate configuration extending between adjacent ends 5955 of the slots 5954. Referring now to Figure 110, the retaining die, such as the retaining die 6050, for example, may comprise a plurality of retaining apertures 6052. Each retaining aperture 6052 may comprise a tab 6053 which may be configured to to engage a fastener leg and to deflect when the fastener leg is inserted into retention opening 6052. For example, tab 6053 may comprising a base fixed to the retaining die body 6058 and a free end comprising an arcuate or curved profile 6056 that can be configured to contact the fastener leg. The fastener leg may be a staple leg comprising a round wire, wherein the curved profile 6056 may be configured to match, or at least substantially match, a curved outer surface of the round wire.

[000821] Referring again to Figure 110, the retaining die body 6058 may comprise a plurality of slots 6054 and openings 6055 which may be configured to define the flap 6053 and various portions of the retaining opening 6052. The flap 6053 may comprise a rectangular configuration comprising parallel, or at least substantially parallel, sides. Referring now to Figure 111, the retaining die, such as the retaining die 6150, for example, may comprise a plurality of retaining apertures 6152. Each retaining aperture 6152 may comprise a tab 6153 which may be configured to engage a leg. of fastener and to deflect when the fastener leg is inserted into the retaining opening 6152. For example, the tab 6153 may comprise a base attached to the retaining die body 6158 and a free end comprising an arcuate or curved profile 6156 which may be configured to contact the fastener leg. The retaining die body 6158 may comprise a plurality of slots 6154 and openings 6155 which may be configured to define the tab 6153 and various portions of the retaining aperture 6152. The tab 6153 may comprise a tapered configuration comprising arcuate sides. For example, tab 6153 may taper geometrically, with the base being wider than the free end, for example.

[000822] Optionally, as described above, a fastening system may comprise a plurality of clips comprising legs of clips that are inserted through a plurality of retention apertures in a retention die. As described in more detail below, the clamps can be held in a first jaw and the retaining die can be held in a second jaw, with at least one of the first jaw and the second jaw being moved one towards the other. other. In various circumstances, the clamps positioned in the first jaw may be secured thereto so that the legs of the clamps are aligned with the retaining apertures when the retaining die is engaged with the legs of the clamps. Referring to Figures 112 and 113, a fastener system may comprise a staple cartridge 6200, for example, positioned in a first jaw of a surgical stapler and a retention die 6250, for example, positioned in a second jaw of a surgical stapler. . Referring now to Figures 119 and 120, in addition to the above, the retaining die 6250 may comprise a plurality of retaining apertures 6252, with each retaining aperture 6252 comprising a perimeter 6256 defined by one or more deflectable elements 6253. For example, in addition to the foregoing, deflectable elements 6253 defining each opening 6252 may define a pocket 6201. Optionally, each pocket 6201 may comprise a curved and/or concave surface, for example, which may be configured to guide a tip. a clip leg into an opening 6252 in the event that the clip leg is misaligned with the retention opening 6252 and initially comes into contact with the deflectable elements 6253 and/or the fabric contacting surface 6251, for example.

[000823] In addition to the foregoing, the fastening system may additionally comprise a plurality of clips 6220 comprising clip legs 6221 that can be inserted through retaining apertures 6252 in retaining die 6250. For example, each clip 6220 may comprise a substantially U-shaped configuration, for example, comprising a base 6222 from which the legs of the clamps 6221 may extend upwardly. Referring now to Figures 115 and 116, the retaining apertures 6252 in the retaining die 6250 may be arranged in two parallel, or at least substantially parallel, longitudinal rows, for example, which may extend along, or parallel to, the a longitudinal axis of the retention matrix. Retaining apertures 6252 in a first row may be offset, or misaligned, with respect to retaining apertures 6252 in a second row. For example, each clip 6220 may comprise a first clip leg 6221 positioned in a retaining opening 6252 in the first row and a second clip leg 6221 positioned in a retaining opening 6252 in the second row with, as a result, the bases 6222 may extend in a direction that is transverse to the longitudinal axis of the retaining die 6250. For example, the clips 6220 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to one another. More particularly, a base 6222a of a staple 6220a may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to a base 6222b of a staple 6220b which may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to a base 6222c of a staple 6220c, for example . Clip legs 6221a of clip 6220a may define a plane that is parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to a plane defined by clip legs 6221b of clip 6220b which may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to a plane defined by clamp legs 6221 of clamp 6220c, for example.

[000824] Now referring to Figures 112 and 114, the staple cartridge 6200 may comprise a plurality of staples 6220 and, in addition, an alignment die 6260 comprising a plurality of alignment guides, such as slots, grooves, and/or openings. , for example, which can be configured to align the clamps 6220. In various circumstances, the alignment die 6260 can be configured so that the clamp legs 6221 of the clamps 6220 align with the retaining openings 6252 in the retaining array 6250 prior to engagement of retaining die 6250 with clamp legs 6221. Referring now to Figures 117 and 118, alignment die 6260 may comprise a plurality of alignment apertures 6262 which may be configured to closely receive the retaining legs 6260. clip 6221 of clips 6220. For example, each clip 6220 may comprise a base 6222 and two clip legs 6221 extending from base 6222 with the base The legs 6222 of the clamps 6220 can extend around a bottom surface 6264 of the retaining die 6260 and the legs of the clamps 6221 can extend upwards through the alignment openings 6262. Each alignment opening 6262 can be circular, or at the same time less substantially circular, and may be defined by a diameter that is equal to or slightly greater than the diameter of the clamp leg 6221 extending through the opening. Alignment die 6260 may further comprise a plurality of raised elements 6263 that can extend upwardly from top surface 6261 of alignment die 6260 and encircle, or at least partially encircle, alignment apertures 6262. raised elements 6263 can provide longer alignment openings 6262 whereby, in various circumstances, longer openings 6262 may provide more control over the alignment of the legs of the clamps 6221 than shorter openings 6262.

[000825] In use, a first jaw supporting the staple cartridge 6200 may be positioned on one side of the fabric that is to be stapled and a second jaw supporting the retaining die 6250 may be positioned on the other side of the fabric. When the jaws are properly positioned relative to the tissue, the second jaw and retaining die 6250 can be moved toward the staple cartridge 6200. As the staple legs 6221 are inserted through the retaining apertures 6252 of the staple die. retention 6250, a fabric contacting surface, or bottom surface, 6251 of the retention matrix 6250 may contact the fabric and press the fabric against the fabric contacting surface, or top surface, 6261 of the matrix 6260. Alternatively, as described in more detail below, the staple cartridge 6200 may additionally comprise a compressible body positioned above the top surface 6261 of the alignment die 6260, for example, which may contact the tissue. Referring again to Figures 114 and 118, the alignment die 6260 may additionally comprise one or more apertures 6203 defined in the die which, when the alignment die 6260 is positioned against the fabric, can be configured to receive a portion of the fabric. inside you. When a compressible body is positioned above and/or against alignment die 6260, a portion of the compressible body may enter openings 6203 when the cartridge body is compressed. Similarly, retention matrix 6250 may comprise a plurality of apertures 6202 which may be configured to receive at least a portion of tissue when retention matrix 6250 is positioned against tissue.

[000826] As the clamp legs 6221 of the 6220 clamps are inserted through the retention openings 6252 of the 6250 retention die, in addition to the above, the tips of the legs of the clamps 6221 may project upwards from the surface of top 6257 of retaining die 6250. In various circumstances, as described above, the ends of the legs of the clamps 6221 may remain unangled after being inserted through the retaining apertures 6252. Now referring to Figures 121 to 124, a system of attachment comprising the staple cartridge 6200 and the retaining die 6250 may further comprise a plurality of protective caps or covers, such as caps 6270, for example, which may be mounted on the legs of the staples 6221 projecting above of the retaining die 6250. Optionally, each cap 6270 may cover entirely, or at least partially, the sharp end of a clamp leg 6221 so that the sharp end does not contact tissue positioned adjacent to it. Referring now to Figure 124, each cap 6270 may comprise an opening 6271 defined therein that may be configured to closely receive a tip of a clip leg 6221 therein. The 6270 caps can consist of an elastomeric material such as silicone, polyisoprene, sanoprene and/or natural rubber, for example. The opening 6271 may comprise a perimeter or diameter that is less than the perimeter or diameter of the clamp leg 6221 inserted therein. For example, opening 6271 in protective cover 6270 may expand to receive clamp leg 6221 therein. Alternatively, the caps 6270 may not comprise openings and the ends of the legs of the clips 6221 may be configured to cut the caps 6270 as the legs 6221 are inserted therein. In either case, each cap 6270 may be seated on a clamp leg 6221 until the base 6272 of the cap 6270 is contiguous with, or is positioned adjacent to, the top surface 6257 of the retaining die 6250. In various circumstances, the caps 6270 may be configured so that they are seated firmly over the ends of the legs of the clips 6221 so that they are not easily removed therefrom. Each cap 6270 may comprise a conical, or at least substantially conical, outer surface, for example. Caps 6270 can comprise any suitable shape, such as shapes that comprise a parabolic, or at least substantially parabolic, outer surface, for example.

[000827] The fastener system described above, for example, could be deployed using the surgical stapler shown in Figures 125 to 127, for example. The end actuator may comprise a first jaw, or staple cartridge groove, 6230 which may be configured to support the staple cartridge 6200 therein, and a second jaw 6240 which may be configured to support the retention die 6250 and a plurality of protective caps 6270. With special reference to Figure 125, which illustrates the second jaw 6240 in an open configuration, the jaws 6230 and 6240 may be positioned relative to the fabric T such that the fabric T is disposed in an intermediate position. between retention die 6250 and staple cartridge 6200. Optionally, as discussed above, staple cartridge 6200 may additionally comprise a compressible body, such as cartridge body 6210, for example, in which staples 6220 and alignment matrix 6260 can be positioned. For example, the fabric T may be positioned against a top surface of the cartridge body 6210. The second jaw 6240 may comprise a plurality of recesses, or openings, 6245 configured to receive a plurality of protective caps 6270 and, in addition, one or more more retention features, or retainers, that can be configured to hold the 6250 retention matrix in position over the 6270 covers. For example, the 6250 retention matrix can be configured to retain the 6270 covers in the 6245 openings. Now with reference to the Figure 137, each opening 6245 may be configured to receive a portion, or all, of a cover 6270 therein. The openings 6245 can be sufficiently sized and configured so that the covers 6270 can be secured therein by at least one of a snap-fit and/or snap-fit arrangement, for example. At least one adhesive could be used to secure the covers 6270 to the openings 6245. For example, such an adhesive may be selected so that the covers 6270 can detach from the second jaw 6240 after the covers 6270 are engaged with the legs of the clamps 6221 and a second jaw 6240 is spaced from the deployed fastener assembly. Referring now to Figure 138, the second jaw 6240 may additionally comprise at least one cover sheet 6246 which is mountable to the second jaw 6240 and can extend over and secure the covers 6270 in the openings 6245. For example, at least a portion of cover sheet 6246 may be attached to gripper 6240 using at least one adhesive, for example. During use, cover sheet 6246 can be at least partially detached from gripper 6240 before the end actuator is inserted into a surgical site. Cover sheet 6246 may consist of an implantable material, such as PDS and/or PGA, for example, which may be cut by the legs of the clamps 6221 as the legs of the clamps 6221 emerge from the retention matrix 6250. For example, the cover sheet 6246 can be attached to the fastening system in an intermediate position between the covers 6270 and the retaining die 6250.

[000828] In addition to the above embodiments, now referring to Figure 126, the jaw 6240 can be moved from an open position to a closed position in which the fabric T is positioned against the retaining die 6250 and the cartridge body 6210. Therein position, the retaining die 6250 may not yet be engaged with the clamps 6220. The jaw 6240 may be moved between its open position and its closed position by an actuator 6235. For example, the jaw 6240 may comprise a distal pin 6243 and a proximal pin 6244 extending therefrom, the distal pin 6243 being able to slide vertically, or at least substantially vertically, in a distal slot 6233 defined in the slot of the cartridge 6230, and the proximal pin 6244 being able to slide vertically, or at least substantially vertically, in a proximal slot 6234 which is also defined in the staple cartridge groove 6230. In use, actuator 6235 can be retracted proximally for actuation. push pins 6243 and 6244 into the upper ends of their respective slots 6233 and 6234, as illustrated in Figure 126. For example, actuator 6235 may comprise a distal drive slot 6236 and a proximal drive slot 6237, wherein the side walls of drive slots 6236 and 6237 can be configured to contact distal pin 6243 and proximal pin 6244, respectively, and drive pins 6243 and 6244 upward as actuator 6235 is moved proximally . More particularly, as actuator 6235 is moved proximally, distal pin 6243 may slide up a first angled portion 6236a of distal drive slot 6236 to an intermediate portion, or second portion, 6236b, and similarly, proximal pin 6244 can slide up a first angled portion 6237a from distal drive slot 6237 to an intermediate portion, or second portion, 6237b. As the pins 6243 and 6244 are both moved up the jaw 6240 can be rotated down towards the tissue T to a closed position.

[000829] In addition to the above embodiments, now referring to Figure 127, the actuator 6235 may be pulled further proximally to force the second jaw 6240 down towards the first jaw 6230, compress the cartridge body 6210 and engage the die retainer 6250 and a plurality of protective caps 6270 with legs of clamps 6220. For example, further proximal movement of actuator 6235 may cause the side walls of drive slots 6236 and 6237 to contact pins 6243 and 6244 , respectively, and drive pins 6243 and 6244 down toward the bottom ends of slots 6233 and 6234, respectively. In such circumstances, actuator 6235 may be pulled proximally so that, a, distal pin 6243 exits the second portion 6236b of drive slot 6236 and enters a third angled portion 6236c, and similarly the proximal pin 6244 exits the second portion 6237b of the drive slot 6237 and enters a third angled portion 6237c. As pins 6243 and 6244 are both moved downwards, second jaw 6240 may move downwards towards first jaw 6230 to a triggered position. For example, the second jaw 6240 can be moved downward so that the retention die 6250 remains parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the top surface of the cartridge body 6210 and/or parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the alignment die 6260. In any case, after engaging the retaining die 6250 and protective caps 6270 with the clamp legs 6221 of the clamps 6220, as illustrated in Figure 129, the second jaw 6240 can be returned to a position open, or at least substantially open. For example, actuator 6235 can be pushed distally to drive pins 6243 and 6244 to the top ends of slots 6233 and 6234, respectively, and then drive down toward the bottom ends of slots 6233 and 6234 after that. the pins pass through the intermediate portions 6236b and 6237b of the respective drive slots 6236 and 6237. After opening the second jaw 6240, the first jaw 6230 can be separated from the implanted staple cartridge 6200 and the first and second jaws 6230, 6240 can be removed from the deployed fastener set, as illustrated in Figure 128.

[000830] Referring again to Figure 127, the reader will note that pins 6243 and 6244 are not illustrated being seated in the bottom portions of their respective slots 6233 and 6234, although the retaining die 6250 and caps 6270 have been engaged with the legs of the clamps 6221. Such circumstances may occur when thick fabric T is positioned between the retention matrix 6250 and the cartridge body 6210. In circumstances where thinner fabric T is positioned between the retention matrix 6250 and the body of the cartridge 6210. of cartridge 6210, now referring to Figure 130, pins 6243 and 6244 can be driven further down into their respective slots 6233 and 6234, as illustrated in Figure 132. Generally, actuator 6235 can be pulled proximally to drive pins 6243 and 6244 up and down through the advances described above and illustrated in Figures 130 to 132 and, due to the thinner fabric T, the retaining die 6250 and protective caps The 6270s can be further driven over the clamp legs 6221 of the 6220 clamps, as illustrated in Figures 133 and 134. Optionally, as a result of the adjustability allowed by the retaining die 6250, the same, or at least substantially the same, compression pressure can be obtained in the trapped tissue regardless of whether the tissue captured in the end actuator is thick or thin. The adjustability allowed by the 6250 Retention Matrix may allow a surgeon to select between applying a higher compression pressure or a lesser compression pressure to tissue by selecting the depth at which the Retention Matrix 6250 is seated. For example, the range in which the retaining die 6250 may be seated over the legs of the clamps 6221 may be determined by the lengths, or ranges, of slots 6233 and 6234, for example.

[000831] Optionally, as described above, protective caps 6270 can consist of a soft or flexible material, for example, which can be configured to hold the ends of the legs of clamps 6221. Protective caps 6270 can consist of a bioabsorbable plastic, polyglycolic acid (PGA), available under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), available under the tradename Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) , and/or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and/or PCL, for example, and/or a biocompatible metal, such as titanium and/or stainless steel, for example. As illustrated in Figure 124, each cap 6270 can be disconnected from the other caps 6270. Alternatively, one or more caps 6270 can be mounted to the retention die 6250. For example, the caps 6270 can be connected to the retention die 6250 for at least an adhesive, for example, the apertures 6271 in the caps 6270 may be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the retention apertures 6252 in the retaining die 6270. Now referring to Figure 135, a protective cover, such as the cover 6370, for example, may define an internal cavity, or dome, 6374 that may be configured to receive an end of a staple leg 6221, for example, therein. For example, the lid 6370 may comprise a bottom 6372 and an opening 6371 extending through the bottom 6372. The opening 6371 may be defined by one or more deflectable elements 6373 that may be configured to deflect when the clip leg 6221 is inserted. through them. Two or more caps 6370, for example, may be connected together to form an array of caps 6370. For example, now referring to Figure 136, a plurality of caps 6370 may have caps connected together by a sheet of material 6375. 6375 can be rigid enough to maintain a desired arrangement and/or alignment of the 6370 caps. The 6370 caps can consist of a biocompatible metal such as titanium and/or stainless steel, for example, and the 6375 sheet can consist of a plastic. bioabsorbable, polyglycolic acid (PGA), available under the tradename Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), available under the tradename Monocryl, polycaprolactone ( PCL), and/or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and/or PCL, for example. In accordance with the invention, a 6375 sheet can consist of a bioabsorbable material that includes an antimicrobial agent, such as colloidal silver and/or triclosan, for example, stored and/or dispersed in the material that can be released as the 6375 sheet is bioabsorbed, for example.

[000832] In addition to the above, sheet 6375 can be injection molded around caps 6370 using an injection molding process, for example, so that caps 6370 are embedded in sheet 6375. Sheet 6375 can be molded by an injection molding process, for example, in which openings 6376 can be formed in sheet 6375 during the injection molding process and/or after the injection molding process using an injection molding process. stamping, for example. In either case, the covers 6370 can be inserted and secured in the openings 6376 using a snap-fit and/or snap-fit interconnect and/or at least one adhesive. Each cap 6370 may comprise an annular groove surrounding, or at least partially surrounding, the perimeter of the cap 6370 which may be configured to receive the perimeter of an opening 6376 therein. Sheet 6375 can consist of a flexible and/or malleable material that can allow relative movement between the caps 6370. For example, flexible sheet 6375 may consist of a rubber, plastic and/or silicone material, for example, and the 6370 covers can consist of a rigid material, such as metal, for example. For example, similar to the above embodiment, flexible material can be molded around caps 6370. Caps 6370 can be pressed into a pre-molded sheet 6375, for example. The durometer of the flexible material may be selected to provide a desired stiffness of sheet 6375. Sheet 6375 may be configured so that it comprises a flexible band. In any case, sheet 6375 can facilitate mounting of caps 6370 on an end actuator while a plurality of caps 6370 can be positioned and/or aligned simultaneously on the end actuator. Additionally, the sheet 6375 connecting the caps 6370, once deployed, may strengthen or support the fabric along the staple line, for example. In addition to or instead of a sheet connecting the caps 6370, the caps 6370 may be connected together by a plurality of links. For example, these links can be flexible and can allow relative movement between the 6370 covers.

[000833] Now referring to Figures 139 and 140, the protective cap, such as cap 6470, for example, may comprise a forming surface which may be configured to deform a tip of a staple leg. For example, cover 6470 may comprise a base 6472 which may include an opening 6471 that extends through the base. Aperture 6471 may be configured to closely receive a clamp leg, such as a clamp leg 6221, for example, therein. Opening 6471 may be defined by a diameter or perimeter that may be equal to or greater than the diameter or perimeter of clamp leg 6221. Lid 6470 may additionally comprise a cavity, or dome, 6474 that may be configured to receive the tip of the clamp leg 6221 as it is inserted into the cap 6470. With special reference to Figure 140, the cap 6470 may additionally comprise an anvil, or forming surface, 6473 which may be configured to deflect and deform the leg clip 6221. In various circumstances, forming surface 6473 may be curved and/or concave, for example, and may be configured to curl clip leg 6221 as it is inserted into cap 6470. Clip leg 6221 may be deformed sufficiently so that it cannot be removed through opening 6471, and as a result, cover 6470 may become locked in clamp leg 6221. For example, base 6472 of cover 6470 may define a flange. extending around opening 6471, which may prevent deformed clamp leg 6221 from being removed from cavity 6474. In various circumstances, as a result of the above, one or more caps 6470 may prevent, or inhibit, a die of retention, such as retention die 6250, for example, retracts or is disengaged from clips 6220. Optionally, although not illustrated, cap 6470 can be formed symmetrically, or at least substantially symmetrically, and opening 6471 can be located along of a central axis 6479 extending through cover 6470. Alternatively, again with reference to Figure 139, opening 6471 may be offset relative to central axis 6479. For example, offset opening 6471 may allow clamp leg 6221 contact one side of forming surface 6473 and be curved over the other side of forming surface 6473 instead of contacting the center of forming surface 6473 as can occur in embodiments comprising a centered aperture 6471 mentioned above.

[000834] Optionally, as discussed above, a retaining die, such as the retaining die 6250, for example, may consist of a sheet of material and a plurality of retaining apertures 6252 extending therethrough. The sheet of material comprising the retention die 6250 can be rigid or substantially inflexible. Alternatively, a retention matrix may consist of an array of retention matrix elements and a plurality of flexible connectors, or links, connecting the retention matrix elements. Referring now to Figure 141, a retention matrix, or a retention matrix portion, 6550 may comprise a plurality of element structures 6505 that may be connected together by one or more connecting links 6507. Each element structure 6505 may comprising a plurality of deformable elements 6553 defining a retention opening 6552 therein. Element structures 6505 and connecting links 6507 of a retaining die 6550 may be integrally formed and may comprise a unitary piece of material. Retention die 6550 can be stamped or molded, for example, from a metallic material, such as titanium and/or stainless steel, for example. The 6550 retention matrix can be comprised of plastic such as polyether ether ketone (peek), polypropylene which is available under the tradename Prolene, polyester, polyethylene terephthalate which is available under the tradenames Ethibond and Mersilene, polyvinylidene fluoride, fluoride of polyvinylidene-cohexafluoropropylene, poly hexafluoropropylene-VDF which is available under the tradename Pronova and/or long chain aliphatic polymers Nylon 6 and Nylon 6,6 which are available under the tradenames Ethilon & Nurolon, for example, and may be formed by through an injection molding process, for example. The element structures 6505 may not be integrally formed with the connecting links 6507. In accordance with the invention, a plurality of single element structures 6505 may be produced, whereby the element structures are subsequently connected to each other and immersed in a retention matrix. For example, 6505 element structures can be stamped from a metallic material, such as titanium and/or stainless steel, for example, and placed in a plastic injection mold, whereupon a plastic material can be injected into the mold to form one, an edge 6506 of material surrounding, or at least partially surrounding, the element structures 6505 and, two, connecting links 6507 extending from the edges 6506. Alternatively, one or more connecting grids comprising openings defined in a plurality of edges 6506, each such opening being configurable to receive an element structure 6505 therein. Each element structure 6505 can comprise a circular, or at least substantially circular, outer perimeter, and similarly, each edge 6506 can define a circular, or at least substantially circular, opening therein, the diameter of the The opening may be equal to or smaller than the diameter of the 6505 element structure. For example, the 6505 element structures can be snap-fitted or incorporated into the edge openings 6505. The 6505 element structures can be secured in the openings with the use of at least one adhesive.

[000835] In addition to the above, a retaining array can comprise a plurality of element structures 6505 and a plurality of connecting links 6507 which can connect element structures 6505 in any suitable arrangement, such as those illustrated in Figures 142 to 145 , for example. Regardless of the layout pattern, the 6507 connecting links can be configured to allow the 6505 element frames and 6552 retaining apertures to move relative to each other. For example, the lattice of element structures 6505 and the connecting links 6507 comprising the retaining die 6550, once engaged with the fabric, may be configured to stretch, twist, contract and/or otherwise flex to allow the least some movement in the fabric and yet, at the same time, resist greater movement of the fabric. Optionally, each connecting link 6507 may comprise a flexible element configured to stretch, twist and/or contract to allow the retaining die 6550 to flex in an intermediate position between the retaining elements of the die 6505, for example. Again with reference to Figure 141, each link 6507 extending from edge 6506 may be defined by a width that is narrower than the width of element structure 6505 and/or edge 6506. With reference to Figures 142 to 145, one or more links 6507 may comprise straight portions extending along a line between adjacent element structures 6506, for example. For example, each link 6507 may comprise a first end attached to a first edge 6506 and a second end attached to a second edge 6506. Again referring to Figure 141, two or more links 6507 may be connected together. For example, two or more links 6507 may be connected to an intermediate linkage 6509. Linkage 6509 may comprise a reduction in cross-sectional thickness in one or more directions compared to the cross-sectional thickness of links 6507 which may allow that the connected links 6507 move relative to each other, for example. Retention matrix 6550 may additionally comprise hinges 6508 that can connect links 6507 to edges 6506 and allow relative movement between links 6507 and edges 6506. Similar to hinges 6509, hinges 6508 may comprise a reduction in cross-sectional thickness in one or more directions compared to the cross-sectional thickness of 6507 links, for example.

[000836] In addition to the above, 6507 connected links can extend in different directions. For example, a first link 6507 may extend in a first direction and a second link 6507 may extend in a second direction, where the first direction may be different from the second direction. The first link 6507 can extend along a first line and the second link 6507 can extend along a second line, whereby the first line and second line can intersect each other at an angle, such as approx. 30 degrees, approximately 45 degrees, approximately 60 degrees, and/or approximately 90 degrees, for example. The hinges 6508 and/or the hinges 6509 may comprise incorporated hinges that may allow the links 6507 to move relative to each other several times without breaking. , which can break when flexed beyond the bending limit or an excessive number of times. For example, such frangible portions may allow one or more portions of the retaining die 6550 to separate from another portion of the retaining die 6550. The hinges 6508 and/or hinges 6509, for example, may comprise sections of the retaining die 6550. retainer 6550 which are easier to cut than other portions of the retainer die 6550. More particularly, an implanted retainer die and the tissue held by the implanted retainer die can often be cut by a cutting element for various reasons and, for To facilitate this cross-section, hinges 6508 and/or hinges 6509 can provide paths, or thin sections, through which a cutting element can more easily pass through retaining die 6550, for example. In addition to the above, the connecting links 6507 may comprise one or more perforated features or material deformations, for example defined therein, which may facilitate bending, breaking and/or shearing of the connecting links 6507.

[000837] In accordance with the invention, a retention matrix may comprise a plurality of retention matrix elements, such as 6505 matrix element structures, for example, which may be incorporated into a flexible sheet or strip of material. A sheet of flexible material may be formed from a bioabsorbable elastomeric material, such as silicone, for example, the flexible sheet may be produced with a plurality of apertures defined therein. For example, a solid flexible sheet can be molded and a plurality of openings can be perforated and removed from the flexible sheet. Alternatively, the flexible sheet can be molded and openings defined therein can be formed during the molding process. In either case, the elements of retention matrix 6505, for example, can be inserted and held in the flexible sheet. Alternatively, similar to the above embodiment, the flexible sheet may be formed around the elements of the matrix 6505. The flexible sheet may consist of a woven mesh, for example, and/or any other suitable material. This woven net, in addition to the above, can be easily cut crosswise.

[000838] Referring now to Figures 146 and 147, a fastener system comprising a retention matrix, such as retention matrix 6250, for example, may additionally comprise a cover, such as cover 6670, for example, which can cover the ends of the legs of the clips 6221 as they extend above the top surface 6257 of the retention die 6250. The cover 6670 can be secured to the retention matrix 6250. The cover 6670 and/or the retention matrix 6250 can comprise retention features that can be configured to retain the 6670 cover on the 6250 retention matrix. At least one adhesive may be used to secure the 6670 cover to the 6250 retention matrix. The 6670 cover may consist of a single layer, although the cover 6670 is illustrated as comprising two layers, as described in more detail below. Referring particularly to Figure 147, the ends of the clamp legs 6221 may extend along a base surface 6673 of the cap 6670; however, the cap 6670 may comprise sufficient thickness so that the clip tips do not extend along the top surface 6675 of the cap 6670. For example, as a result, the leg tips of the clips 6221 may not protrude from the cover. 6670. Cover 6670 may comprise a plurality of layers. For example, cover 6670 may comprise a first layer 6671 and a second layer 6672. The first layer 6671 and the second layer 6672 may be secured together, whereby, in at least one embodiment, the second layer 6672 may comprising a bottom surface 6676 which is secured to the first layer 6671. The first layer 6671 and the second layer 6672 may be of different thicknesses but they may be of the same thickness. First layer 6671 and second layer 6672 may have substantially equal widths and/or lengths. Alternatively, layers 6671 and 6672 may comprise different widths and/or lengths.

[000839] In addition to the above, the first layer 6671 may consist of a compressible foam, mesh material and/or hydrogel, for example, which may be cut by the staple legs 6211. The second layer 6672 may consist of a more rigid, or covering, such as PGA and/or PDS, for example, and/or any suitable reinforcing material. For example, staple legs 6221 may be configured to penetrate first layer 6671; however, the clamp legs 6221 may not have the ability to penetrate the second layer 6672. The second layer 6672 may consist of a material that has sufficient resilience and/or strength to allow contact with the second layer 6672 and that the it is displaced by the staple leg 6221, but not cut, or only marginally cut, by the staple end of the staple leg 6221. Although not illustrated, a cover may comprise more than two layers, one or more of these layers may be penetration resistant. During use, for example, the retaining die 6250 may be positioned against the fabric to be secured and forced downward so that the staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220 are forced through the T fabric and the retaining apertures 6252 in the die retainer 6250 enters the first layer 6271 of the cover 6270. The leg tips of the clips 6221 may not enter, or at least substantially enter, the second layer 6272 of the cover 6270. After the retaining die 6250 is properly positioned, jaw 6240 can be opened and cover 6670 and retention die 6250 can be separated from jaw 6240, as shown in Figure 146. As illustrated in Figure 146, a jaw 6640 can be configured to contain more than one retention die 6250 and cover 6670. For example, jaw 6640 may comprise two channels 6679, each of which may be configured to receive a cover 6670 therein, and a retention die 625 0 positioned so that the tissue-contacting surface 6251 of each retaining die 6250 hangs down from the base of the jaw 6240. For example, a retaining die 6250 and a cover 6270 can be accommodated in the jaw 6640 on each side of a knife slot 6678. In use, both the retaining dies 6250 and the covers 6670 can be deployed simultaneously and/or at the same depth relative to opposing staple cartridges, such as the 6200 cartridges, for example, positioned transverse to the same. Thereafter, the trapped fabric can be cut along a cutting line by a cutting element passing through the knife slot 6678, whereupon the jaw 6640 can then be reopened. Covers 6670 may not be secured to Retaining Die 6250. For example, Covers 6670 can be positioned in Channels 6679 and can be retained in Channels 6679 by Retaining Mats 6250 which can be attached to Jaw 6640. Each Retaining Die 6250 may be wider and/or longer than their respective covers 6670 so that the retention dies 6250 can retain all of their covers 6670 in position. Each retention matrix 6250 may comprise the same width and/or length as their respective covers 6670, for example.

[000840] Optionally, as described above, a fastener system may comprise a layer of material that can be attached to a retention matrix, such as the retention matrix 6250, for example. Referring now to Figure 150, a layer of material 6870 may be attached to the bottom surface 6251 of the retention matrix 6250. The layer 6870 and/or the retention matrix 6250 may comprise retention features that can be configured to retain layer 6870 on retention matrix 6250. At least one adhesive may be used to secure layer 6870 to retention matrix 6250. In either case, layer 6870 may comprise a backing, or fabric contacting surface, 6873 that may be configured to contact fabric T when retaining die 6250 is moved downwardly toward clips 6220 to engage retaining apertures 6252 with clip legs 6221. For example, layer 6870 may consist of a compressible material, such as a bioabsorbable foam, for example, that can be compressed between the bottom surface 6251 of the retention matrix 6250 and the fabric T. Layer 6870 can additionally comprise at least one drug stored and/or absorbed therein that can be squeezed out of layer 6870 as layer 6870 is compressed. The medicament may comprise at least one tissue sealant, hemostatic agent and/or antimicrobial material, such as ionized silver and/or triclosan, for example. Compression of layer 6870 can press the drug from layer 6870 so that all, or at least a significant portion, of the surface of the fabric T is covered with the drug. In addition, as layer 6870 is compressed and staple legs 6221 penetrate tissue T and layer 6870, medicament can flow down staple legs 6221 and treat newly cut tissue by staple legs 6221, e.g. example. Retention matrix body 6250 may comprise a first layer consisting of a biocompatible material such as titanium and/or stainless steel, for example, and base layer 6870 may comprise a second layer consisting of a bioabsorbable material such as cellulose oxidized regenerated regeneration (ORC), biologically active agents such as fibrin and/or thrombin (either its liquid or freeze-dried state), glycerin, absorbable porcine gelatin in gas or foam configurations, and/or antimicrobials such as ionized silver and/or or triclosan, for example. Additional bioabsorbable materials may comprise Surgicel Nu-Knit, Surgicel Fibrillar, collagen/ORC, which is a hybrid with a collagen matrix incorporated and is available under the tradename Promogran, polyglycolic acid (PGA), available under the tradename Vicryl, acid polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), available under the tradename Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and/or a compound of PGA, PLA, PDS , PHA, PGCL and/or PCL, for example. Although only one 6870 layer is illustrated in Figure 150, any number of layers could be used. A first layer comprising a first drug could be attached to retention matrix 6250 and a second layer comprising a second drug or a different drug could be attached to the first layer. For example, a plurality of layers could be used, with each layer comprising a different drug and/or a different combination of drugs contained therein.

[000841] Referring now to Figure 148, a fastener system may comprise a layer of material 6770 attached to the bottom surface 6251 of the retention matrix 6250. The layer 6770 and/or the retention matrix 6250 may comprise retention features that may be configured to retain layer 6770 on retention matrix 6250. At least one adhesive may be used to secure layer 6770 to retention matrix 6250. In either case, layer 6770 may comprise the backing, or contacting surface. the fabric, 6773 which may be configured to contact the fabric T when the retaining die 6250 is moved downwardly towards the staples 6220 to engage the retaining apertures 6252 with the legs of the staples 6221. For example, the layer 6770 may consist of a compressible material, such as a bioabsorbable foam, for example, which may be compressed between the surface 6251 of the retention matrix 6250 and the fabric T. Layer 6770 may comprise, add Basically, one or more encapsulations, or cells, 6774 that can be configured to store at least one drug therein. Referring to Figure 149, the housings 6774 may be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the retention openings 6252 so that when the legs of the staples 6221 are forced through the fabric T and the layer 6770, the legs of clamps 6221 may puncture and/or otherwise rupture encapsulations 6774. After encapsulations 6774 are ruptured, the at least one drug M stored in encapsulations 6774 may flow out onto tissue T. For example, drug M may comprising a fluid that can flow or be transported by capillarity down the legs of the staples 6221 and treat the freshly cut T-fabric by the legs of the staples. As a result of the above, the drug stored in the 6774 encapsulations can provide a localized treatment for the tissue. Encapsulations 6774 on sheet 6770 may comprise different components stored therein. For example, a first group of encapsulations 6774 may comprise a first drug, or a first combination of drugs, stored therein, and a second group of encapsulations may comprise a different drug, or a different combination of drugs, stored therein. . The 6770 layer may consist of a flexible silicone sheet and the 6774 encapsulations may represent voids in the silicone sheet. For example, the silicone sheet may comprise two layers that can be secured together, with encapsulations 6774 being defined between the two layers. Layer 6770 may comprise one or more thin sections or weakened portions, such as partial perforations, for example, which may facilitate cutting of layer 6770 and disruption of encapsulations 6774 by legs 6221. At least a portion of encapsulations 6774 may be positioned in pouches 6777, wherein pouches 6777 may extend upward from sheet 6770. For example, pouches 6777 and/or at least a portion of encapsulations 6774 may be positioned within pockets 6201 formed in retention matrix 6250. 6774 encapsulations may comprise distinct cells that are disconnected from each other. Alternatively, one or more of the 6774 encapsulations may be in fluid communication with each other through one or more passages, conduits and/or channels, for example, extending through layer 6770. US Patent Specification No. 7,780. 685, entitled "ADHESIVE AND MECHANICAL FASTENER," issued 24, 2010, is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

[000842] In addition to the above, a staple cartridge comprising a cartridge body, staples and/or an alignment die therein can be loaded into a first jaw of an end actuator and similarly a die retainer and/or one or more covers can be loaded into a second jaw of the end actuator. Now referring to Figure 151, an instrument such as the 6990 cartridge loader, for example, can be used to insert two or more fastener cartridges into an end actuator at the same time. Cartridge magazine 6990 may comprise a handle 6991 and a cartridge magazine 6992, wherein cartridge magazine 6992 may comprise a first retaining portion configured to retain cartridge body 6210 of staple cartridge 6200 in that portion and, additionally, a second retaining portion configured to retain a cartridge body 6980 which supports, one, a plurality of protective caps 6270 therein and, two, a retaining die 6250 along the bottom surface thereof, for example. The first and second retaining portions may each comprise one or more retaining members configured to releasably engage cartridge bodies 6210 and 6980. In use, now referring to Figures 152 and 153, an end actuator may comprise a first or bottom jaw 6230 and a second or top jaw 6940, wherein the staple cartridge 6200 may be loaded in the first jaw 6230 and the cartridge body 6980 may be loaded in the second jaw 6940. In various circumstances, the top jaw 6940 may be rotated from an open position (Figure 152) to a closed position (Figure 153) by an actuator 6235, whereby the operation of the actuator 6235 is described above and is not repeated in the present invention. for brevity purposes. When the top jaw 6940 is in its closed position, now referring to Figure 153, the distal end 6993 of the cartridge carrier 6992 can be inserted into the end actuator so that the staple cartridge 6200 is slid through the distal end 6938 of the first jaw 6930 and into a first clamping portion, or groove, 6939 in the first jaw 6230. Similarly, the distal end 6993 of the cartridge carrier 6992 may be inserted into the end actuator so that the cartridge body 6980 is slid through the distal end 6948 of the second jaw 6940 and into a second clamping portion, or groove, 6949 in the second jaw 6940. A surgeon, or other physician, holding the handle 6991 of the cartridge magazine 6990 may push the cartridge out. 6200 staples and 6980 cartridge body through slots 6939 and 6949, respectively, until the 6200 staple cartridge and 6980 cartridge body are matched. fully seated inside.

[000843] As the 6200 staple cartridge and 6980 cartridge body are seated, the 6200 staple cartridge and 6980 cartridge body can each engage one or more retaining portions in their respective jaws 6230 and 6940 , as described in more detail below. In any case, after seating the 6200 staple cartridge and 6980 cartridge body, now referring to Figure 154, the 6990 cartridge magazine can be separated from the 6200 staple cartridge and 6980 cartridge body and removed from the far end. For example, the holding force holding the 6200 staple cartridge in the 6230 first jaw may be greater than the holding force holding the 6200 staple cartridge in the 6992 cartridge carrier so that as the 6992 cartridge carrier is pulled distally out of the end actuator, the staple cartridge 6200 may remain behind in the first jaw 6230. Similarly, the holding force holding the cartridge body 6980 in the second jaw 6940 may be greater than the holding force which holds the cartridge body 6940 in the cartridge magazine 6992 so that as the cartridge magazine 6992 is pulled distally out of the end actuator, the cartridge body 6940 can remain behind in the second jaw 6940. After the cartridge magazine 6990 is removed from the end actuator, the first loaded jaw 6230 and the second loaded jaw 6940 can be positioned relative to the T fabric that is to be stapled. Referring now to Figure 155, the second jaw 6940 can be moved from an open position (Figure 154) to a fired position (Figure 155) to engage the retention die 6250 and the plurality of protective caps 6270 carried by the cartridge body 6980 with the 6220 staples positioned in the 6200 staple cartridge.

[000844] Now referring to Figures 156 and 157, the second jaw 6940 can be reopened and the plurality of protective caps 6270 and retention die 6250 can be separated from the cartridge body 6980 so that the caps 6270 and retainer 6250 can remain engaged with the fabric T and staple cartridge 6200. The cartridge body 6980 can comprise a plurality of pockets, in which the plurality of caps 6270 can be removably positioned, and one or more retention slots configured to removably retain the 6250 retention matrix therein. Second jaw retaining members 6940 engaged with cartridge body 6980 may retain cartridge body 6980 in second jaw 6940 after opening of second jaw 6940. Cartridge body 6980 may be configured to tear as the second jaw 6940 is opened so that a portion of cartridge body 6980 is implanted with caps 6270 and retention die 6250, and a portion of cartridge body 6980 remains in second jaw 6940. Similarly, again with reference to Figures 156 and 157 , the first jaw retaining elements 6230 engaged with the cartridge body 6210 may retain the cartridge body 6210 in the first jaw 6230 after opening the second jaw 6940. The cartridge body 6210 may be configured to tear apart. As the first jaw 6230 is moved away from the implanted cartridge 6200 so that a portion of the cartridge body 6210 is implanted with the clamps 6220 and the alignment die 6260, and a portion of the body cartridge 6210 remains in the first jaw 6230. Now referring to Figures 158 to 160, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 6900, for example, may comprise one or more longitudinal retaining slots 6913 that extend along the along the length of the cartridge body 6910 which, when the staple cartridge 6900 is inserted into a jaw 6930, for example, can be configured to receive therein one or more longitudinal retaining rails 6916 extending from the jaw 6930. During use, one end of the retaining slots 6913 may be aligned with the distal ends of retaining rails 6916 before the staple cartridge 6900 is slid through the distal end 6938 of retaining channel 6939, for example.

[000845] Again with reference to Figure 160, the gripper 6940 may comprise two retaining channels 6949, each retaining channel 6949 being configured to receive therein a cartridge body 6980 comprising a plurality of caps 6270 and a retaining die 6250. Each cartridge body 6980 may comprise one or more longitudinal retaining pads 6917 which can be configured to be slid along one or more longitudinal retaining rails 6918 of the second jaw 6940 as the cartridge bodies 6980 cartridges are inserted into their respective retaining grooves 6949 in the 6940 jaw. The 6918 retaining rails and the 6917 retaining shields can be cooperative to retain the 6980 cartridge body in the second 6940 jaw as the 6980 cartridge bodies are separate from the caps 6270 and the retention matrix 6250 stored therein. Referring now to Figure 159, the second jaw 6940 may additionally comprise one or more distal protuberances, or retention elements, 6915 extending therefrom, which may be configured to removably lock the cartridge bodies 6980 in their respective retention channels. For example, the second jaw 6940 may comprise a distal protuberance 6915 configured and positioned with respect to each retaining groove 6949 so that each cartridge body 6980 can flex around the protuberances 6915 as the cartridge bodies 6980 are inserted into the slots 6949, whereby once the 6915 cartridge bodies are fully seated in the 6949 slots, the distal ends of the 6980 cartridge bodies can pull away and engage over the 6915 protrusions. To remove the 6980 cartridge bodies after to be expanded as described above, cartridge bodies 6980 may be pulled back over protuberances 6915 and removed from retaining channels 6949. Similar to the above embodiment, first jaw 6930 may comprise one or more distal retaining protuberances 6914 extending therefrom, which may be configured to be received in one or more grooves, or slits, of retainer 6912 (Figure 158) in the body of the 6910 cartridge when the 6900 staple cartridge is fully seated.

[000846] In addition to the above, a first fastener cartridge comprising a plurality of first fasteners positioned therein may be positioned in a first jaw of a surgical fixation device, and a second fastener cartridge comprising a plurality of second fasteners positioned thereon may be positioned on a second jaw of the surgical fixation device. In use, the first jaw and/or the second jaw can be moved towards each other to engage the first fasteners with the second fasteners and secure the fabric therebetween. The first fastener cartridge and the second fastener cartridge can be engaged with each other when the first fasteners are engaged with the second fasteners. The body of the first fastener cartridge may consist of a first compressible material and the body of the second fastener cartridge may consist of a second compressible material, whereby the first body and/or the second body may be pressed against the fabric being stapled. . After the tissue is stapled, the first jaw can be pulled away from the implanted first fastener cartridge and the second jaw can be pulled away from the implanted second fastener cartridge. Thereafter, the first jaw can be reloaded with another first cartridge of fasteners, or the like, and the second jaw can be reloaded with another second cartridge of fasteners, or the like, and the surgical fixation instrument can be reused. While clamps may be used, alternatives are envisaged comprising other types of fasteners, such as two-piece fasteners that lock together when they are engaged with each other, for example. For example, the first fastener cartridge may comprise a first storage portion for storing the first fastener portions and the second fastener cartridge may comprise a second storage portion for storing the second fastener portions. The fastening systems described herein may utilize fasteners comprising any suitable type of material and/or shape. Fasteners may comprise penetrating elements. Such penetrating elements could consist of a polymer, a composite and/or a multilayer substrate, for example. An example of a multilayer substrate could be a yarn or foil substrate with an elastomeric or polymeric coating. It could be a thin sheet formed so that the penetrating elements are oriented perpendicularly, or at least substantially perpendicularly, to the connecting element. The penetrating elements could comprise a rectangular profile, a semicircular profile and/or any beam profile. The fasteners described herein may be manufactured using any suitable process, such as a yarn extrusion process, for example. Another possibility is the use of microfabrication to create hollow penetrating elements. These penetrating elements could be manufactured using a process different from the wire extrusion process and could use a combination of materials.

[000847] As previously described, the ends of the legs of the clamps that protrude through a retaining die may be covered by one or more caps and/or covers. The ends of the legs of the clamps can be deformed after being inserted through the retaining die. A jaw supporting the retaining die may additionally comprise anvil pockets positioned above and/or aligned with the retaining apertures, which may be configured to deform the legs of the clamps as they protrude above the retaining die. . The legs of the clamps of each clamp can be curved inwardly towards each other and/or towards the center of the clamp, for example. Alternatively, one or more legs of a clamp may be curved outwards, away from the other legs of the clamps and/or away from the center of the clamp. Optionally, regardless of the direction in which the legs of the staples are bent, the tips of the legs of the staples may contact the retaining die structure and may not re-enter the tissue that has been secured by the staples. Deformation of the legs of the clips after passing through the retaining die can lock the retaining die in place.

[000848] Now referring to Figures 161 and 162, a surgical stapling instrument, such as the surgical stapler 7000, for example, may comprise a first jaw 7030 and a second jaw 7040, with the second jaw 7040 being moved in the direction and moved away from first jaw 7030 by movement of actuator 6235. The operation of actuator 6235 is described above and is not repeated in the present description for purposes of brevity. The first jaw 7030 may comprise a distal end 7031 and a proximal end 7032, the first jaw 7030 being able to define a channel extending between the distal end 7031 and the proximal end 7032 that is configured to receive a staple cartridge. . For purposes of illustration, the body of such a staple cartridge is not shown in Figure 161, although such a staple cartridge may comprise a cartridge body, staples 6220 positioned in the cartridge body, and staple drivers 7012 positioned under the staples 6220. not illustrated in Figure 161 for purposes of clarity, the second jaw 7040 may be configured to support a retention matrix, such as the retention matrix 6250, for example, above the clamps 6220 and/or move the retention matrix into engagement with the legs of the 6220 clamps as described above. Surgical stapler 7000 may additionally comprise a slider 7010 positioned on first jaw 7030 which is slidable from distal end 7031 of first jaw 7030 toward proximal end 7032, for example, and lifts the triggers of clips 7012, and clip 6220 supported thereon, toward the retaining die and second jaw 7040. Alternatively, slider 7010 may be moved from proximal end 7032 toward distal end 7031 to deploy clips 6020, for example. example. Slider 7010 may comprise one or more inclined ramps, or cams, 7011 that may be configured to slide under staple drivers 7012 and lift staple drivers 7012. Surgical stapler 7000 may additionally comprise a drive rod or rod. impeller operatively coupled to the slider 7010 that can be moved proximally and/or distally by an actuator located on a handle and/or shaft of the surgical stapler 7000, for example.

[000849] Referring again to Figure 161, the second jaw 7040 of the surgical stapler 7000 may comprise a frame 7041, a distal end 7048 and a proximal end 7049 opposite the distal end 7048. The second jaw 7040 may additionally comprise a guide system comprising one or more guide rails, such as guide rails 7045 and 7046 for example, which extend along the longitudinal axis of the frame 7041 which, as described in more detail below, can be configured to guiding one or more anvils, or cams, which can engage and deform the legs of the clamps 6220 after the clamp legs 6221 of the clamps 6220 pass through the retaining die. For example, guide rails 7045 and 7046 may comprise a guide wire or cable extending along an upper portion or surface of the frame 7041, around a distal column 7047, and back along the upper portion or surface of the frame 7041. top of the 7041 frame, for example. Optionally, as mentioned above and now with reference to Figures 163 and 165, the second jaw 7040 may additionally comprise one or more anvils, or cams, such as the first anvil 7050 and the second anvil 7060, for example, which can be moved. longitudinally along the second jaw 7040 to deform the legs of the clamps 6220 after passing through the retaining die. Surgical stapler 7000 may additionally comprise a first anvil driver, or actuator, 7051 connected and/or operatively coupled to first anvil 7050 which may be configured to proximally pull first anvil 7050 and/or push first anvil 7050 distally. Similarly, the surgical stapler 7000 may additionally comprise a second anvil driver, or actuator, connected and/or operatively coupled to the second anvil 7060 that may be configured to push the second anvil 7060 distally and/or pull the second anvil 7060 distally. second anvil 7060 proximally. The first anvil 7050 may comprise guide slots 7052 and the second anvil 7060 may comprise guide slots 7062 which may each be configured to slidably receive the guide rail 7045 or the guide rail 7046 therein. For example, guide rails 7045 and 7046 may be closely received in guide slots 7052 and 7062 in order to prevent, or at least limit, relative lateral or side-to-side movement therebetween.

[000850] In addition to the above, the first anvil 7050 can be pulled proximally and the second anvil 7060 can be pulled distally. Referring to Figure 161, guide rails 7045 and 7046 and distal post 7047 may comprise a pulley system configured to pull second anvil 7060 distally and/or pull second anvil 7060 proximally. For example, guide rail 7045 and guide rail 7046 may comprise a continuous wire or cable extending around the distal column 7047, whereby a portion of the continuous wire may be pulled to cycle the wire around the distal column. 7047. Guide rail 7046, for example, can be mounted on the second anvil 7060 so that when the continuous cable is cycled in a first direction, the second anvil 7060 can be pulled distally toward the distal end 7048 of the gripper 7040. and, when the continuous cable is cycled in a second or opposite direction, the second anvil 7060 can be pulled proximally towards the proximal end 7049. Now referring to Figure 163, the guide rail 7046 can be secured in a guide slot 7062 so that a pulling force can be transmitted therebetween. For example, the guide rail 7045 can be configured to slide inside the other guide slot 7062. The first anvil 7050 can operate independently of the second anvil 7060 and the pulley system and the guide slots 7052 defined in the first anvil 7050 can be configured to slidably receive guide rails 7045 and 7046 so that relative movement is allowed therebetween. The continuous cable comprising guide rails 7045 and 7046 may be flexible enough to accommodate the opening and closing of the top gripper 7040. The continuous cable may also be flexible enough to accommodate the vertical movement of the second anvil 7060 towards and away from the bottom gripper 7030, which is described in more detail below.

[000851] Again with reference to Figures 163 and 165, the first anvil 7050 may comprise cam followers 7055 extending therefrom which may be configured to move in one or more cam slots, or guide slots, as cam slot 7070 (Figure 166), for example, defined in frame 7041 of second jaw 7040. More particularly, frame 7041 may comprise a first cam slot 7070 extending longitudinally along a first side of frame 7041 and a second cam 7070 extending longitudinally along a second, or opposite side, of frame 7041, wherein cam followers 7055 extending from a first side of first anvil 7050 are movable in the first slot of cam 7070 and cam followers 7055 extending from a second side of the first anvil 7050 can move in the second cam slot 7070. For example, the contours of each cam slot 7070 can m be identical, or at least substantially identical, and may be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with one another. Similarly, in various embodiments, second anvil 7060 may comprise cam followers 7065 extending therefrom, which may be configured to move in cam slots 7070 (Figure 166) defined in frame 7041 of second jaw 7040 More particularly, cam followers 7065 extending from a first side of second anvil 7060 are movable in first cam slot 7070 and cam followers 7065 extending from a second side of second anvil 7060 can move in second cam slot 7070. In use, cam followers 7055 of first anvil 7050 and cam followers 7065 of second anvil 7060 can slide into cam slots 7070 so that first anvil 7050 and second anvil 7060 follow the contours of cam slots 7070 as the first anvil 7050 and second anvil 7060 are pulled proximally and/or pushed distally. Optionally, each cam slot 7070 may comprise a plurality of cam or upper portions 7071 and a plurality of driver or lower portions 7072 which may be configured to move anvils 7050 and 7060 vertically, i.e. in the direction and away from bottom jaw 7030 while anvils 7050 and 7060 are moved longitudinally, i.e., between distal end 7048 and proximal end 7049 of frame 7041, as described in more detail below.

[000852] When the surgical stapler 7000 is in a non-fired condition, with reference to Figure 166, the first anvil 7050 may be positioned at the distal end 7048 of the frame 7041 and the second anvil 7060 may be positioned at the proximal end 7049 of the frame 7041 ; further, now referring to Figure 167, the staples 6220 positioned in the first jaw 7030 may not yet be inserted into the T tissue and/or the retention matrix positioned above that when the surgical stapler 7000 is in a non-triggered condition. In use, now referring to Figure 168, staples 6220 can be pushed up and into staple cavities 7033 of a staple cartridge by staple drivers 7012 and, additionally, the first anvil 7050 can be moved from proximally from the distal end 7048 of the frame 7041 toward the distal end 7049 to engage the clamp legs 6221 of the clamps 6220. The clamps 6220 may be driven upward before the first anvil 7050 is engaged with the legs of the clamps 6221 of the same. Optionally, all of the 6220 clamps can be deployed upward by the 7010 slider before the first anvil 7050 is advanced into contact with the legs of the 6221 clamps, or alternatively, the 7010 slider can be moved proximally at the same time as the first anvil 7050 is moved proximally, although the slider 7010 can sufficiently drive the first anvil 7050 to deploy the clamps 6220 in front of the first anvil 7050. Optionally, as illustrated in Figure 168, the cam slots 7070 can be configured and arranged so that forming surfaces, such as forming or acting surfaces such as cams, 7053 and 7054, for example, of the first cam 7050 can contact at least some of the legs of the clamps 6221 when the first cam 7050 is passing through a cam position, or top position. In various circumstances, cam followers 7055 of first anvil 7050 may each be positioned in a cam portion 7071 of cam slots 7070 so that forming surfaces 7053 and 7054 are in an elevated position and such that the legs of the clamps 6221 are only partially deformed when the anvil 7050 passes through them in the cam position. When the first cam 7050 is further moved along the cam slots 7070, as illustrated in Figure 169, the cam followers 7055 of the first anvil 7050 can be driven into driven or lower portions 7072 of the cam slots. 7070, such that forming surfaces 7053 and 7054 are moved vertically downward toward the clamp legs 6021 to drive the clamp legs 6021 into their finally formed configurations. Thereafter, when the first anvil 7050 is advanced further along the cam slots 7070, the first anvil 7050 can be driven vertically upward to another set of cam portions 7071 of the cam slots 7070. As illustrated in Figures 168 and 169, the reader will note that the first anvil 7050 can engage only some of the clamp legs and not others. For example, the first anvil 7050 can be configured to deform only a group of staple legs which comprises distal staple legs 6221 of staples 6220, for example. For example, the first anvil 7050 can be configured to deform the distal clamp legs 6221 towards the center of the clamps 6220. Optionally, each proximal clamp leg 6221 can be contacted twice by the first anvil 7050, i.e., by a first forming surface 7053 and by a second forming surface 7054 aligned with the first forming surface 7053. For example, the first forming surfaces 7053 may deform the distal clamp legs 6221 into a partially deformed configuration when the first anvil 7050 is in a cam, or higher, position, and second forming surfaces 7054 may deform distal clamp legs 6221 into a fully formed configuration when first anvil 7050 is moved to a driven, or lower, position. Referring now to Figures 163 and 164, the first anvil 7050 may comprise a plurality of first forming surfaces 7053 and a plurality of second forming surfaces 7054 for deforming the distal staple legs 6221 of the staples 6220 when the legs of the staples 6221 are arranged in more than one row or row. Optionally, as described in more detail below, the proximal clamp legs 6221 of the clamps 6020 can be deformed by the second anvil 7060, for example.

[000853] In addition to the above, the first anvil 7050 can be moved from the distal end 7048 of the frame 7041 to the proximal end 7049 to deform all of the distal clamp legs 6221 of the clamps 6220. As will be appreciated by the reader, the first anvil 7050 can be moved up and down relative to the incompletely formed proximal clamp legs 6221, and to accommodate such relative movement, in various embodiments, the first anvil 7050 can comprise one or more clearance slots 7057 (Figure 165) that can be configured to receive proximal non-tilted clamp legs 6221 as first anvil 7050 angles distal clamp legs 6221. Similarly, again with reference to Figure 163, second anvil 7060 may comprise a clearance slot 7067 which may be configured to accommodate the vertical movement of the first cam actuator 7051 which moves up and down as the first anvil 7050 is moved life between its cam and actuated positions as described above. After all the distal clamp legs 6221 are tilted, the second anvil 7060 can be moved from the proximal end 7049 of the frame 7041 to the distal end 7048 by the anvil actuator 7061. Similarly to the above embodiment, now with reference to Figure 170 , the cam followers 7065 of the second anvil 7060 can slide within the cam slots 7070 so that the second anvil 7060 is moved between the cam positions, or higher, and the driven, or lower, positions to deform the legs. proximal clips 6221 inward toward the centers of clips 6220, for example. Similar to the above embodiment, the second anvil 7060 may comprise a plurality of first forming or cam-acting surfaces 7063 and a plurality of second forming or cam-acting surfaces 7064 which may each be configured to at least partially deform and/or completely deform one or more proximal clamp legs 6021. Again referring to Figure 164, second anvil 7060 may comprise a plurality of first forming surfaces 7063 and a plurality of second forming surfaces 7064 which may be configured to deform the proximal clamp legs 6221 of the clamps 6220 arranged in a plurality of rows, or rows, for example. As also illustrated in Figure 164, the first forming surfaces 7063 and the second forming surfaces 7064 of the second anvil 7060 may not be aligned with the first forming surfaces 7053 and the second forming surfaces 7054 of the first anvil 7050 where, as As a result, the proximal legs 6221 of the staples 6220 can be positioned in rows, or rows, different from the distal legs 6221 of the staples 6220. As will also be appreciated by the reader, the second anvil 7060 can push the first anvil 7050 as the second anvil 7060 is moved distally. For example, the second anvil 7060 can push the first anvil 7050 back to the distal end 7048 of the frame 7041 so that the first anvil 7050 can be returned to its initial position, or not fired. After all of the proximal clamp legs 6221 of the 6220 clamps are deformed, the second anvil 7060 can be proximally retracted and returned to its initial position, or not fired. In this way, the surgical stapler 7000 can be reset so that a new cartridge of staples can be positioned in the first jaw 7030 and a new retention matrix can be positioned in the second jaw 7040 to utilize the surgical stapler 7000 once again.

[000854] Optionally, as described above, a surgical stapler may comprise two or more anvils that can move longitudinally in a transverse direction to engage the legs of a plurality of staples. A surgical stapler may comprise an anvil which is moved proximally, for example, to deform a first group of staple legs, and distally, for example, to deform a second group of staple legs. For example, such an anvil may comprise proximally facing forming surfaces and distally facing forming surfaces, for example.

[000855] Now referring to Figure 171, an anvil, such as anvil 7140, for example, may comprise a bottom, or tissue contacting surface, 7141 and a plurality of forming pockets 7142 defined therein. Anvil 7140 may comprise more than one plate, such as pocket plates 7143, for example, which may be welded to a frame 7144. For example, each pocket plate 7143 may be positioned in a plate groove 7145 on frame 7144 and welded to frame 7144 through a weld slot 7146 extending through frame 7144 to form a longitudinal weld 7147. In various circumstances, longitudinal weld 7147 may comprise a continuous weld extending the entire length of the slot solder 7146 or a series of spaced apart solder points extending along the length thereof, for example. Optionally, each pocket plate 7143 may comprise two or more plate portions that have been soldered together. For example, each pocket plate 7143 may comprise a first plate portion 7143a and a second plate portion 7143b that can be welded together along a joint 7148. The first plate portion 7143a and the second plate portion 7143b of each plate 7143 may be welded together before plates 7143 are welded into plate groove 7145 in frame 7144. For example, first plate portion 7143a and second plate portion 7143b may comprise cooperating profiles, such as the toothed profiles shown in Figure 171, for example, which may fit together to form a tight joint 7148. Each plate 7143 may comprise a height of approximately 0.5 mm (0.02 inch), for example, which may be greater than the depth of the plate. channel of plates 7145 so that the tissue contacting surfaces 7141 thereof extend from the frame 7044 of the anvil 7040. Now referring to Figure 172, the plates 7143 can be connected together ties by at least one solder 7149 at the distal ends of the plates 7143, for example.

[000856] As illustrated in Figures 171 and 172, each pocket plate 7143 may comprise a plurality of forming pockets 7142 defined therein. The forming pockets 7142 can be formed on the plates 7143 using any suitable manufacturing process, such as a grinding process and/or electrode firing process, for example. For example, now referring to Figures 173 and 174, each forming pocket 7142 can be produced by first forming a deep cavity 7150, and then forming an arcuate or curved surface 7151 around the deep cavity 7150, and , then, by forming a clamp leg guide groove 7152 in the curved surface 7151, for example. Alternatively, these steps can be performed in any suitable order. Referring now to Figure 175, the staple forming pockets 7142 may be formed so that the inner edges 7153 of the forming pockets are separated by a consistent, or at least substantially consistent, gap 7154. For example, the gap 7154 may be approximately 0.2 mm (0.008 inch). Further, for example, the forming pockets 7142 may be positioned along two or more rows, or lines, the centerlines of which may be separated by a consistent, or at least substantially consistent, spacing 7155. For example, the spacing 7155 between the centerlines can be approximately 0.89 mm (0.035 inch), for example. Referring again to Figure 175, each forming pocket 7142 may taper between a narrow width 7156 and a wide width 7157. For example, the narrow width 7156 may be approximately 1.1 mm (0.45 inches) and the wide width 7157 may be approximately 1.9 mm (0.75 inch). Plates 7143 may consist of the same material as frame 7144. Plates 7143 and frame 7144 may both consist of stainless steel, such as 300 series or 400 series stainless steel, for example, and/or titanium, for example. Alternatively, the plates 7143 and the frame 7144 may consist of different materials. For example, plates 7143 can consist of a ceramic material, for example, and frame 7144 can consist of stainless steel and/or titanium, for example. In various circumstances, depending on the materials used, at least one brazing process could be used to secure the plates 7143 to the frame 7144 in addition to or instead of the soldering processes described above, for example.

[000857] Referring now to Figures 176 to 178, an anvil 7240 may comprise a frame 7244 and a plurality of pocket plates 7243 that can be inserted into the frame 7244. Similar to the above embodiment, each pocket plate 7243 may with - engaging a plurality of forming pockets 7242 defined therein. Anvil frame 7244 may comprise retaining slots 7246 defined therein which may each be configured to receive a retaining rail 7247 extending from pocket plate 7243. To mount pocket plates 7243 to the frame of the anvil anvil 7244, the side walls 7245 of the anvil frame 7244 can be flexed or angled downwards, as illustrated in Figure 177, to widen the retaining slots 7246 so that each retaining slot 7246 can receive a retaining rail therein. 7247 of a pocket plate 7243. Once the retaining rails 7247 have been positioned in the retaining slots 7246, the side walls 7245 can be released, as illustrated in Figure 178, thus allowing the frame 7244 to resiliently contract. and/or return to its uninflected state. In such circumstances, retaining slots 7246 may contract and thus capture retaining rails 7247 therein. Retaining rails 7247 and/or retaining slots 7246 may comprise one or more tapered, cooperating surfaces which, after flexed retaining slots 7246 are released, can form a tapered latching engagement that can retain retaining rails 7247 in retaining slots 7246. Similar to the above embodiment, pocket plates 7243 may consist of the same or a different material as frame 7244. For example, plates 7243 may consist of a ceramic material, for example, and the 7244 frame may consist of stainless steel and/or titanium, for example. In various circumstances, depending on the materials used, at least one brazing process and/or at least one soldering process, for example, could be used to secure the 7243 plates to the 7244 frame.

[000858] In Figures 179 and 180, a surgical stapling and cutting instrument 8010 may comprise an anvil 8014 that can be repeatedly opened and closed about its pivotal attachment to an elongated staple channel 8016. A staple application structure 8012 may comprise anvil 8014 and channel 8016, wherein frame 8012 may be attached proximally to elongate rod 8018 forming an implementation portion 8022. When clamping structure 8012 is closed, or at least substantially closed, the implementation portion 8022 may have a sufficiently small cross-section suitable for inserting the clamping structure 8012 through a trocar. The assembly 8012 may be manipulated by a handle 8020 connected to the shaft 8018. The handle 8020 may comprise user controls such as a rotation knob 8030 which rotates the elongated shaft 8018 and the clamping frame 8012 about a longitudinal axis of the shaft. rod 8018. A lock trigger 8026, which can pivot on the front of a pistol grip 8036 about a lock trigger pin 8152 (Figure 181) laterally engaged through the cable compartment 8154, can be pressed to close the lock assembly. application of clamps 8012. In accordance with the invention, a lock release button 8038 can be presented out over the handle 8020 when the lock trigger 8026 is secured so that the release button 8038 can be pressed to release the trigger 8026 and open clamping frame 8012, as described in more detail below. A trigger trigger 8034, which can rotate opposite the closing trigger 8026, can cause the staple delivery structure 8012 to simultaneously cut and staple the tissue attached thereto. In various circumstances, as described in more detail below, multiple trigger strokes may be employed using the 8034 trigger trigger to reduce the amount of force required to be applied by the surgeon's hand per stroke. Cable 8020 may comprise swiveling right and/or left indicator wheels 8040, 8041 (Figure 181) which may indicate the progress of firing. For example, the full firing motion may require three full firing strokes of the 8034 firing trigger, and in this way, the 8040, 8041 indicator wheels can rotate up to one-third of a revolution per stroke of the 8034 firing trigger. As described in In more detail below, an 8042 manual fire release lever can allow the firing system to be retracted before the full firing movement has been completed, if desired, and in addition, the 8042 fire release lever can allow a surgeon, or other physician, retract the triggering system in the event that the triggering system turns on and/or fails.

[000859] Referring to Figures 179 and 181, the elongated rod 8018 may comprise an external structure that includes a longitudinally reciprocating closing tube 8024 which rotates the anvil 8014 toward its closed position in response to the proximal depression of the closing trigger 8026 cable 8020. Elongated channel 8018 may be connected to cable 8020 by a frame 8028 (Figure 181) which is on the inside of closure tube 8024. Frame 8028 may be pivotally engaged with cable 8020 so that rotation of the knob 8030 (Figure 179) may rotate the implementation portion 8022. With particular reference to Figure 181, the rotation knob 8030 may be comprised of two half-wraps which may include one or more inward projections 8031 which may extend through one or more elongate side openings 8070 in closing tube 8024 and engaging frame 8028. As a result of the above, rotation knob 8030 and frame 8028 can be rotated together or synchronously, so that the rotated position of knob 8030 determines the rotated position of implementation portion 8022. The longitudinal length of the longest opening 8070 is long enough to allow longitudinal closing movement, and a opening, of the closing tube 8024. With respect to generating the closing movement of the closing tube 8024, referring primarily to Figures 181 and 183, an upper portion 8160 of the closing trigger 8026 can push a closing fork 8162 through a locking link 8164. Locking link 8164 is pivotally secured at its distal end by a locking yoke pin 8166 to locking yoke 8162 and is pivotally secured at its proximal end by a locking link pin 8164. 8168. Closing trigger 8026 can be biased to an open position by an 8246 closing trigger tension spring which is connected provided proximally to the upper portion 8160 of the closing trigger 8026 and a cable compartment 8154 formed by the right and left halves of the case 8156, 8158. The tension force applied by the tension spring 8246 can be overcome by a closing force applied to the trigger. lock 8026 so as to advance fork 8162, lock link 8164, and lock tube 8024 distally.

[000860] When the 8026 Closing Trigger is pulled, or pressed, as described above, the 8038 Closing Release Button can be positioned so that the surgeon or other clinician can push the 8038 Closing Release Button if necessary. is desired, and allow the close trigger 8026, and the rest of the surgical instrument, to return to a non-triggered state. The lock release button 8038 can be connected to a pivoting locking arm 8172 by a center side pivot 8173 so that movement can be transferred between the release button 8038 and the locking arm 8172. Again with reference to the Figure 181, a compression spring 8174 may pull the lock release button 8038 proximally, i.e. clockwise around the center side pivot 8173 as seen on the right and upper portion 8160 of the lock trigger 8026 may include a proximal ridge 8170 with a rear notch 8171. When the closing trigger 8026 is depressed, the pivoting locking arm 8172 can slide over the proximal ridge 8170 and when the closing trigger 8026 reaches its fully depressed position, it should be appreciated that the rear notch 8171 is shown below the pivoting locking arm 8172 which drops into and engages in the rear notch 8171 under the thrust of the compression spring 81 74. At this point, manually depressing the lock release button 8038 rotates the pivoting locking arm 8172 up and out of the rear notch 8171 thereby unlocking the locking trigger 8026 and allowing the locking trigger 8026 to be returned to its position. its unlocked position.

[000861] When the Closing Trigger 8026 is clamped proximally, as discussed above, the Fire Trigger 8034 can be pulled towards the Handle of the 8036 Pistol in order to advance a Fire Rod of Fasteners 8032 Distal from the Handle 8020. Firing Trigger 8034 can pivot around a Firing Trigger Pin 8202 which crosses laterally and is engaged with the right and left halves of the 8156 wrap, 8158 of the 8020 handle. The 8034 Firing Trigger, when actuated, can forward an 8150 linked transmission triggering mechanism. The 8150 linked transmission triggering mechanism can be placed in a retracted position and not triggered by a spring 8184 i.e. one, fixed to the pistol grip 8036 of the 8020 handle and, two, attached to one of the links, for example, of the 8150 linked transmission trigger mechanism as described in more detail below. Spring 8184 may comprise a non-movable end 8186 connected to housing 8154 and a movable end 8188 connected to a proximal end 8190 of a steel band 8192. A distally disposed end 8194 of steel band 8192 can be secured to an element. attachment 8195 to a front link 8196a of a plurality of links 8196a -8196d forming a chained rack 8200. The chained rack 8200 may be flexible so that it can easily retract into the pistol grip 8036 and reduce the length of the cable 8020 and still form a straight, rigid rack structure that can transfer significant firing force to and/or through the firing rod of fasteners 8032. As described in more detail below, the firing trigger 8034 can be engaged with a first link 8196a during a first activation of the trigger trigger 8034, engaged with a second link 8196b during a second activation of the trigger trigger 8034 , engaged with a third link 8196c during a third activation of trigger 8034, and engaged with a fourth link 8196d during a fourth activation of trigger 8034, each actuation of trigger 8034 can advance the chained rack 8200 distally for an increasing distance. In addition to the above, the multiple strokes of the trigger 1034 can rotate the right and left gauge wheels 1040, 1041 to indicate the distance the chained rack 8200 has been displaced.

[000862] Now referring to Figures 181 and 183, an anti-return mechanism 8250 can prevent the tension/compression combination spring 8184 from retracting the chained rack 8200 between firing strokes. In accordance with the invention, a sliding coupling tube 8131 adjoins the first link 8196a and connects the fastener firing rod 8032 to transmit the firing motion. Fastener firing rod 8032 extends proximally out of a proximal end of frame 8028 and through a through hole 8408 of a non-return plate 8266. Through hole 8408 is sized to slidably receive fastener firing rod 8032 when aligned perpendicularly but to bond when coated. A lower flap attachment 8271 extends proximally from a lower lip of the proximal end of the frame 8028, extending through an opening 8269 over a lower edge of the anti-return plate 8266. This lower flap attachment 8271 pulls the portion bottom of the 8266 anti-return plate close to the 8028 frame so that the 8266 anti-return plate is perpendicular when the 8032 fastener firing rod is displaced distally and allowed to tilt the top back into a link state when the 8032 fastener firing rod attempts to retract . An anti-return compression spring 8264 is biased distally by the proximal end of the frame 8028 and is in proximal contiguity with an upper portion of the anti-return plate 8266, pulling the anti-return plate 8266 into a locked state. In opposition to spring pull, a non-return cam tube 8268 slidingly spans the coupling slide tube 8131 and is adjacent to the anti-return plate 8266. A proximally projecting non-return yoke 8256 secured to the cam tube backstop 8268 extends over closing clevis 8162.

[000863] Referring to Figure 181, a link driven automatic retraction mechanism 8289 is incorporated into the 8010 surgical stapling and cutting instrument to retract the knife at the end of the full firing path. To this end, a distal link 8196d includes a connecting terminal 8290 that projects upward when the distal link 8196d is displaced into the rack groove 8291 (Figure 181) formed in the closing yoke 8162. This connecting terminal 8290 is aligned to activate an 8292 bottom proximal cam on an 8248 anti-return release lever (Figure 186). With particular reference to Figures 186 and 187, the structures formed on the right and left halves of the shells 8156, 8158 constrain the movement of the anti-return release lever 8248. A pin receptacle 8296 and a circular pin 8293 formed, respectively, between the right and left halves of shells 8156, 8158 are received through a longitudinally elongated opening 8294 formed in anti-return release lever 8248 distal to lower proximal cam 8292, thus allowing longitudinal translation as well as rotation around the circular pin 8293. In the right half of housing 8156, a proximally open channel 8295 includes a proximal horizontal portion 8295a that communicates with an upward and distally angled portion 8295b, which receives a right rear pin 8297 (Figure 187) nearby. to the proximal end of the 8248 anti-return release lever, thereby providing upward rotation as the 8248 anti-return release lever reaches the most distal portion of its translation. A locking structure formed on the right half of the housing 8156 proximal to the anti-return release lever 8248 prevents its proximal movement when mounted to hold the right posterior pin 8297 in the proximally open channel 8295.

[000864] In addition to the above, as shown in Figures 187 and 188, a distal end 8254 of the anti-return release lever 8248 which is pushed distally and downwards causing a right front pin 8298 to fall into the rung structure distally open 8299 formed in the right half of the housing 8156, which is urged into this engagement by a compression spring 8300 (Figure 188) hooked to a left hook 8301 on the anti-return release lever 8248 between the right front pin 8298 and the longitudinally elongated opening 8294. The other end of the compression spring 8300 is secured to a hook 8302 (Figures 186, 188, 189) formed in the right half of the housing 8156 in a more proximal and lower position just above the closing yoke 8266. The compression spring 8300 then pushes the distal end 8254 of the anti-return release lever 8248 down and back, which results in the right front pin locking 8 298 in the distally open rung structure 8299 when advanced distally. In this way, once activated, with reference to Figure 189, the anti-return release lever 8248 remains forward holding the anti-return plate 8266 perpendicularly and thereby allowing the chained rack 8200 to be retracted. When the closing yoke 8266 is subsequently retracted by unlocking the end actuator 8012, an upwardly projecting reset connection terminal 8303 on the closing yoke 8266 contacts a lower distal cam 8305 of the anti-return release lever. 8248, lifting right front pin 8298 out of distally open rung frame 8299 so that anti-return compression spring 8264 can proximally push anti-return cam tube 8268 and anti-return release lever 8248 to their retracted positions (Figure 186).

[000865] With reference to Figures 179 and 189, the trigger trigger 8034 may be operatively engaged with the chained rack 8200 in any suitable manner. With particular reference to Figures 180 and 185, the trigger 8034 rotates around a trigger pin 8202 that is connected to the housing 8154. An upper portion 8204 of trigger 8034 moves distally around the pin. of the trigger 8202 when the trigger 8034 is pressed towards the pistol grip 8036, stretching a proximally placed trigger tension spring 8206 (Figure 181) connected proximally between the upper portion 8204 of the trigger trigger 8034 and housing 8154. The upper portion 8204 of the trigger trigger 8034 engages the chained rack 8200 during each depression of the trigger via a spring-loaded side pawl mechanism 8210. When the trigger trigger is released, the trigger is released. side pawl mechanism is disengaged from the 8200 chained rack and the trigger trigger can be turned to a non-pressed or non-fired position. In use, an angled right side rail formed by a proximally beveled, right-facing surface 8284 on each of links 8196a-8196d is engaged by a side pawl structure 8285. In particular, a pawl sliding piece 8270 (Figures 181). and 183) has right and left lower guides 8272 that slide respectively on a left-hand rail 8274 (Figure 181) formed in the closing yoke 8266 below the rack channel 8291 and a right-hand rail 8275 on a closing yoke rail 8276 that is parallel to a rack groove 8291 and is attached to a rack groove cover 8277 that closes an open portion to the right of the rack groove 8291 at the closing yoke 8266 that is distal to the passage of the tongue slider 8270. In Figures 181, 182, and 185, a compression spring 8278 is secured between a hook 8279 at a top proximal position on the closing fork track 8276 and a g hook 8280 on a right distal side of pawl slider 8270, which holds pawl slider 8270 pulled proximally into contact with upper portion 8204 of trigger 8034.

[000866] With particular reference to Figure 181, a pawl block 8318 rests on pawl sliding piece 8270 rotating around a vertical rear pin 8320 which passes through a proximal left corner of pawl block 8318 and the pawl piece 8320. pawl slider 8270. A splitter block recess 8322 is formed in a distal portion of a top surface of block 8318 to receive a splitter block 8324 pivotally secured thereto by a vertical pin 8326 whose lower end extends into a pawl spring recess 8328 in a top surface of pawl slide 8270. A pawl spring 8330 in pawl spring recess 8328 extends to the right of vertical front pin 8326 pushing pawl block 8318 rotating counterclockwise when viewed from above to engage the right-hand angled track 8282. A small coil spring 8332 in the recess in the splitter block 83 22 urges the splitter block 8324 to rotate clockwise when viewed from above, its proximal end urged to contact the curved lip 8334 formed in the closing yoke 8266 above the rack groove 8291. As shown in Figure 184, the Stronger mechanical advantage of pawl spring 8330 over small coil spring 8332 means pawl block 8318 tends toward engagement with split block 8324 rotated clockwise. In Figure 185, when the trigger trigger 8034 is fully depressed and begins to be released, the splitter block 8324 encounters a ridge 8336 on the curved lip 8334 when the pawl slider 8270 retracts, forcing the splitter block 8324 to rotate in clockwise when viewed from above and thereby detaching pawl block 8318 from the engagement with chained rack 8200. The shape of the recess of the splitting block 8322 for clockwise rotation of the splitting block 8324 to an orientation perpendicular to the curved rim 8334 maintaining this disengagement during full retraction and thus eliminating ratchet noise.

[000867] In Figures 181, 183, 190 and 195, the 8010 surgical stapling and cutting instrument may include an 8500 manual retraction mechanism that provides manual release of the trigger mechanism, manual retraction and in one version (Figures 196- 202) also performs automatic retraction at the end of the complete firing path. Referring now to Figures 181, 190, and 191, in particular, a front idler gear 8220 is engaged with a left top toothed surface 8222 of the chained rack 8200 wherein the front idler gear 8220 also engages a rear idler gear 8230 having a smaller right-hand ratchet gear 8231. Both the front idler gear 8220 and the rear idler gear 8230 are pivotally connected to the cable housing 8154, respectively, on the front pulley shaft 8232 and the tail pulley shaft 8234 Each end of the rear axle 8232 extends through the respective right and left halves of the housing 8156, 8158 and is attached to the left and right gauge wheels 8040, 8041 and, provided that the rear axle 8234 is freely rotating in the cable compartment 8154 and has a hitch linked to the rear gear 8230, gauge wheels 804 0.8041 rotate with tail gear 8230. The gear ratio between the chained rack 8200, idler gear 8220 and tail gear 8230 can be advantageously selected so that the top toothed surface 8222 has tooth dimensions that are suitably strong and that the rear gear 8230 does not make more than one revolution during the entire firing path of the connected transmission firing mechanism 8150. In addition to the gear mechanism 8502 visually indicating the travel or firing progress, the gear mechanism 8502 can also be Used to manually retract the knife. The smaller right-hand ratchet gear 8231 of the rear idler gear 8230 extends into a central portion 8506 of the manual retract lever 8042, specifically aligned with a longitudinally aligned vertical slot 8508 (Figure 190) that divides the central portion 8506. A lateral through hole 8510 of central portion 8506 communicates with an upper recess 8512. A front portion 8514 is shaped to receive a proximally directed locking pawl 8516 that rotates around a right side pin 8518 formed at a distal end of the recess. 8512. A rear portion 8520 is shaped to receive an L-shaped spring tab 8522 that drives the locking pawl 8516 downward in engagement with the smaller right hand ratchet gear 8231. A support frame 8524 (Figures 186 and 193) projects from the right half of the housing 8156 into the upper recess 8512 supporting the tongue 8516 from engagement with the smaller right hand ratchet gear 8231 when the manual retract lever 8042 is lowered (Figure 193). A coil spring 8525 (Figure 181) drives the manual retract lever 8042 down.

[000868] In use, as shown in Figures 192 and 193, the 8184 tension/compression spring combination can disconnect from the distally positioned chained rack. In Figures 194 and 195, when manual retract lever 8042 is raised, lock pawl 8516 rotates clockwise and is no longer supported by support frame 8524 and engages smaller right hand ratchet gear 8231 , turning the 8230 rear idler gear clockwise when viewed from the left. In this way, the rear idler gear 8220 responds counterclockwise by retracting the chained rack 8200. In addition, a curved ridge to the right 8510 projects from the center portion 8506, sized to contact and move distal to 8248 anti-return release lever to release the 8250 anti-return mechanism when the 8042 manual retract lever is rotated.

[000869] In Figures 196 to 202, an automatic retraction mechanism 8600 for an 8010a surgical stapling and cutting instrument may incorporate automatic retraction at the end of the full firing path for a front idler gear 8220a that has a tooth 8602 that moves in. from a circular groove 8604 on a cam wheel 8606 until it encounters a lock 8608 after an almost complete rotation corresponding to three firing strokes. In these circumstances, the right ridge 8610 is rotated upward to contact a lower cam recess 8612 to distally move an anti-return release lever 8248a. With particular reference to Figure 197, the anti-return release lever 8248a includes a distal end 8254 that functions as previously described. The circular pin 8293 and the pin receptacle 8296 formed between the right and left halves of the shells 8156, 8158 are received through a generally rectangular opening 8294a formed in the anti-return release lever 8248a behind the lower cam 8192, thus allowing longitudinal translation thus as a downward locking movement of the distal end 8254 of the anti-return release lever 8248a. In the right half of the housing 8156, a proximally horizontal open channel 8295a receives the right rear pin 8297 near the proximal end of the anti-return release lever 8248a.

[000870] In operation, prior to firing in Figures 198, 198A, the chained rack 8200 and anti-return cam tube 8268 are in a retracted position, locking the anti-return mechanism 8250 when the anti-return compression spring 8264 proximally tilts the anti-return plate 8266 The 8600 auto-retract mechanism is in an initial state with the anti-return release lever 8248a retracted with the link 8196a in contact with the front idler gear 8220a. Tooth 8602 is at the six o'clock position with full displacement of the circular groove 8604 progressing counterclockwise with the right ridge 8610 immediately proximal to tooth 8602. In Figures 199, 199A, a firing stroke occurred by moving a link distal 8196b up to contact the front idler gear 8220a. Tooth 8602 has progressed a third of a turn through circular groove 8604 of stationary cam wheel 8606. In Figures 200, 200A, a second firing stroke has occurred, moving up another link 8196c to contact the previous idler gear 8220a. Tooth 8602 has progressed two-thirds of a turn through circular groove 8604 of stationary cam wheel 8606. In Figures 201, 201A, a third firing stroke has occurred by moving a distal link 8196d upward into contact with anterior idler gear 8220a. Tooth 8602 has progressed completely around circular groove 8604 to contact lock 8608 which initiates counterclockwise rotation (when viewed from right) of cam wheel 8606 bringing right ridge 8608 to contact the shift lever. anti-return release 8248a. In Figure 202, the anti-return release lever 8248a moved distally in response to this, locking the right front pin 8298 in the distally open rung structure 8299 and releasing the anti-return mechanism 8250. Similar surgical stapling instruments are shown in the patent. US No. 7,083,075, which was issued August 1, 2006, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

[000871] Referring to Figure 203, the stapling structure 9012 of a surgical stapling instrument 9010 performs the functions of stapling tissue, directing staples, and cutting tissue by two distinct motions transferred longitudinally down the shank 9016 with respect to the stem structure 9070. This stem structure 9070 is attached proximally to a handle of a surgical stapling instrument and is coupled thereto for rotation about a longitudinal axis. An illustrative multi-stroke handle for the surgical stapling and cutting instrument is described in greater detail in the co-pending US patent application by the same holder entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT INCORPORATING A MULTITROKE FIRING POSITION INDICATOR AND RETRACTION MECHANISM, Serial No. 10/374,026), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. Other applications compatible with the present invention may incorporate a single firing stroke, as described in the co-pending and co-pending US patent application SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT HAVING SEPARATE DISTINCT CLOSING AND FIRING SYSTEMS, Serial No. 10/441,632), the contents of which are is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

[000872] With particular reference to Figure 204, the distal end of the rod frame 9070 is secured to the clamp groove 9018. The anvil 9022 has a proximal pivoting end 9072 that is pivotally received within a proximal end 9074 of the clamp groove. staples 9018, in a position immediately distal to its engagement with the shank frame 9070. When the anvil 9022 is rotated downward, the anvil 9022 moves a tissue contacting surface 9028 and forming pockets 9026 toward an opposing staple cartridge , described in more detail below. The pivoting end 9072 of the anvil 9022 includes a closing element 9076 proximate but distal to its pivoting attachment with the clamp groove 9018. In this way, a closing tube 9078, the distal end of which includes a horseshoe opening 9080 which engages this closure member 9076, selectively imparts an opening movement to the anvil 9022 during proximal longitudinal movement and a closing movement to the anvil 9022 during the distal longitudinal movement of the closure tube 9078 sliding over the rod structure 9070 in response to a close trigger, similar to the above. The rod structure 9070 includes and guides a firing movement of the cable through a longitudinally reciprocating two-piece firing bar 9090. In particular, the rod structure 9070 includes a longitudinal firing bar slot 9092 which receives a portion 9090, specifically, a 9094 tapered and laminated trigger bar. It is to be understood that the 9094 tapered, laminated trigger bar may be replaced by a solid and/or any other suitable materials.

[000873] An "E" beam (E-beam) 9102 is the distal portion of the 9090 two-piece firing and cutting bar, which facilitates separate closing and firing as well as the spacing of the anvil 9022 from the staple channel. elongated 9018 while shooting. With particular reference to Figures 204 and 205, in addition to any attachment treatment, such as soldering or an adhesive, the firing and cutting bar 9090 is formed by a female vertical attachment aperture 9104 formed proximally in the "E" beam 9102 that receives a corresponding male fastener 9106 presented in a distal position by the tapered and laminated trigger bar 9094, allowing each portion to be formed by a selected material and by a process suitable for its different functions (e.g. strength, flexibility, friction). The "E" beam 9102 may advantageously be formed of a material having suitable material properties to form a pair of top pins 9110, a pair of intermediate pins 9112 and a bottom pin or foot 9114, as well as being able to acquire a sharpened cutting edge 9116. In addition, proximally projecting integrally formed top guide 9118 and intermediate guide 9120 that includes each vertical end of cutting edge 9116 further define a tissue preparation area 9122 that aids in guide fabric to sharp cutting edge 9116 before cutting. Intermediate guide 9120 also serves to engage and trigger clamp application apparatus 9012 by contiguously placing a stepped central member 9124 of a triangular body sliding support 9126 (Figure 206) which forms the clamp by the clamp application assembly. 9012 clamps, as described in more detail below. Forming these elements (e.g. top pins 9110, intermediate pins 9112, and bottom foot 9114) integrally with the "E" beam 9102 facilitates fabrication to tighter tolerances of each other compared to assembling from a plurality of parts, ensuring desired operation during firing and/or effective interaction with various locking elements of the 9012 clamping frame.

[000874] In Figures 207 and 208, the clamping frame 9012 is shown open with the "E" beam 9102 fully retracted. During assembly, the lower foot 9114 of the "E" beam 9102 is released through an enlarged hole 9130 of the clamp channel 9018 and the "E" beam 9102 is then advanced so that the "E" beam 9102 slides distally along of a bottom rail 9132 formed in the staple channel 9018. In particular, the bottom rail 9132 includes a narrow slot 9133 that opens as a widened slot 9134 on a lower surface of the staple channel 9018 to form an inverted T-shape in the section lateral transverse as shown particularly in Figures 208 and 209, which communicates with the flared hole 9130. Once assembled, the components proximally coupled to the laminated tapered firing bar 9094 do not allow the smaller foot 9114 to move proximally again to the flared hole 9130 to allow disengagement. Referring to Figure 210, the tapered, laminated firing bar 9094 facilitates insertion of the clamping frame 9012 through a trocar. In particular, a more distal downward projection 9136 raises the "E" beam 9102 when fully retracted. This is done by placing the descending projection 9136 at a point at which it acts upwards on a proximal edge of the flared hole 9130 in the staple channel 9018. Now referring to Figure 211, the tapered and laminated firing bar 9094 also intensifies. the operation of certain locking elements that may be incorporated into the clamp channel 9018 by including a more proximal upward projection 9138 which is driven downward by the rod structure 9070 during an initial portion of the firing path. In particular, a sidebar 9140 is defined between a pair of square openings 9142 in the shank structure 9070 (Figure 204). A clip spring 9144 encompassing the sidebar 9140 pushes down a portion of the laminated, tapered firing bar 9094 that projects distally out of the longitudinal slot of the firing bar 9092, which ensures that certain advantageous locking elements are engaged. when appropriate. This push is most pronounced or confined to just that portion of the firing path when the upward projection 9138 contacts the clip spring 9144.

[000875] In Figures 207 and 208, the "E" beam 9102 is retracted with its top pins 9110 contained within an anvil pocket 9150 near the pivoting proximal end of the anvil 9022. A vertical slot of the anvil opens downwards 9152 (Figure 203) flares laterally at the anvil 9022 into an inner rail of the anvil 9154 that captures the top pins 9110 of the "E" beam 9102 as they advance distally during firing, as shown in Figures 210 and 211, positively spacing the anvil 9022 from the staple groove 9018. In this way, with the "E" beam 9102 retracted, the surgeon is able to repeatedly open and close the staple delivery frame 9012 until satisfied with the placement. and orientation of the tissue captured there for stapling and cutting, in addition, the "E" beam 9102 helps in the proper positioning of the tissue even for a 9012 stapling frame with reduced diameter and reduced rigidity so corresponding. In Figures 203, 204, 206, 207, 209, and 215, staple delivery structure 9012 is shown with replaceable staple cartridge 9020 that includes gauntlet slider 9126. A plurality of downwardly open gauntlet slots longitudinally aligned and parallel lines 9202 (Figure 209) receive respective wedges 9204 integral with the triangular body slider 9126. In Figures 209 to 211, the triangular body slider 9126 then upwardly actuates a plurality of clamp drivers 9206 which are sliding vertically within the recesses of the staple driver 9208. In this illustrative version, each staple driver 9206 includes two vertical extensions, each translating upwardly into a respective staple hole 9210, or cavity 9024, to force upward and deform a staple 9023 resting against a staple forming surface 9214 (Figure 211) of anvil 9022. A central firing recess 9 216 (Figure 204) defined within the staple cartridge 9020 next to the staple channel 9018 allows the passage of the horizontal bottom portion 9218 (Figure 206) of the triangular body slider 9126 as well as the intermediate pins 9112 of the "E" beam 9102. Specifically, a 9220 staple cartridge tray (Figures 204, 209) attaches to and rests under a 9222 polymeric staple cartridge body that has the staple driver recesses 9208, staple holes 9210, and trigger recess. central 9216 formed in it. When the staples 9023 are then formed either way, the sharp cutting edge 9116 enters a vertical through slot 9230 that passes through the longitudinal axis of the staple cartridge 9020, except for only a more distal end thereof.

[000876] The firing of the clamping frame 9012 begins as shown in Figure 211 with the two-piece firing and cutting bar 9090 pulled proximally until the downward projection 9136 actuates the intermediate guide 9120 on the "E" beam 9102 upwards and backwards, allowing a new staple cartridge 9020 to be inserted into the staple groove 9018 when the anvil 9022 is open, as shown in Figures 203 and 207. In Figure 212, the two-piece firing and cutting bar 9090 has been advanced distally by a short distance, allowing the downward projection 9136 to fall into the flared hole 9130 of the lower rail 9132 under the thrust of the clip spring 9144 against the upward projection 9138 of the laminated and tapered firing bar 9094. The intermediate guide 9120 prevents downward rotation additional by resting on the stepped central element 9124 of the triangular body slider 9126, thus keeping the intermediate pin 9112 of the "E" beam within the recess. central firing range 9216. In Figure 213, the two-piece firing and cutting bar 9090 has been fired distally, advancing the triangular body slider 9126 to cause the staples 9023 to form while cutting the tissue 9242 trapped between the anvil 9022 and the staple cartridge 9020 with the sharp cutting edge 9116. Later, in Figure 214, the two-piece firing and cutting bar 9090 is retracted, leaving the triangular body slider 9126 positioned in a distal position. In Figure 215, the intermediate pin 9112 is allowed to translate downwards into a locking recess 9240 formed in the clamp groove 9018 (see also Figures 208, 211). In this way, the operator receives a tactile indication when the intermediate pin 9112 meets the distal edge of the locking recess 9240 when the triangular body slider 9126 (not shown in Figure 215) is not located in a proximal position (i.e., staple cartridge). 9020 missing or 9020 staple cartridge spent). Similar surgical stapling instruments are disclosed in US Patent No. 7,380,696, which issued June 3, 2008, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

[000877] Optionally, as described above, a staple cartridge may comprise a cartridge body that includes a plurality of staple cavities defined therein. The cartridge body may comprise a platform and an upper platform surface, where each staple cavity may define an opening in the platform surface. As also described above, a staple can be positioned within each staple cavity so that the staples are stored within the cartridge body until they are ejected. Prior to being ejected from the cartridge body, the staples may be contained with the cartridge body so that the staples do not protrude above the platform surface. When the staples are positioned below the platform surface, in such cases the possibility of the staples becoming damaged and/or prematurely contacting the target tissue can be reduced. In various circumstances, clips can be moved between an unfired position in which they do not protrude from the cartridge body and a fired position in which they emerge from the cartridge body and can contact an anvil positioned opposite the cartridge. of staples. The anvil and/or forming pockets defined within the anvil may be positioned a predetermined distance above the platform surface so that when the staples are being dispensed from the cartridge body they are deformed to a predetermined formed height. In some cases, the thickness of tissue captured between the anvil and staple cartridge may vary and as a result, thicker tissue may be captured within certain staples while thinner tissue may be captured within certain other staples. In any case, the pinching pressure, or force, applied to the fabric by the staples may vary from staple to staple, or it can vary between a staple at one end of a row of staples and a staple at the other end of the row of staples. for example. Under certain circumstances, the gap between the anvil and the staple cartridge platform can be controlled so that the staples apply a certain minimum pinch pressure within each staple. In some of such circumstances, however, there may still be significant variation in clamping pressure within different clamps.

[000878] As described herein, a staple cartridge may comprise means for compensating for the thickness of tissue captured within staples dispensed from the staple cartridge. Referring to Figure 216, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 10000, for example, may include a rigid first portion, such as the support portion 10010, for example, and a second compressible portion, such as the 10020 fabric, for example. Referring primarily to Figure 218, the support portion 10010 may comprise a cartridge body, an upper platform surface 10011, and a plurality of staple cavities 10012 wherein, similarly to the above, each staple cavity 10012 may define an opening in the platform surface 10011. A clip 10030, for example, may be removably positioned in each clip cavity 10012. For example, with reference primarily to Figure 245 and as described in more detail below, each clip 10030 may comprising a base 10031 and one or more legs 10032 extending from the base 10031. Before the staples 10030 are dispensed, as also described in more detail below, the bases 10031 of the staples 10030 may be supported by the staple drivers positioned within of the support portion 10010 and, simultaneously, the legs 10032 of the clamps 10030 can be at least partially contained within the cavities s for staples 10012. Staples 10030 may be dispensed between a non-fired position and a fired position so that the legs 10032 move through the fabric thickness compensator 10020, penetrate through a top surface of the fabric thickness compensator 10020. fabric 10020, penetrate fabric T, and contact an anvil positioned opposite the staple cartridge 10000. When legs 10032 are deformed against the anvil, legs 10032 of each staple 10030 can capture a portion of the thickness compensator of fabric 10020 and a portion of the fabric T within each clip 10030 and applying a compressive force to the fabric. In addition to the above, the legs 10032 of each staple 10030 can be deformed downwardly towards the base 10031 of the staple to form a staple gripping area 10039 in which the fabric T and the fabric thickness compensator 10020 can be captured. In various circumstances, the clamp gripping area 10039 can be defined between the inner surfaces of the deformed legs 10032 and the inner surface of the base 10031. The size of the gripping area for a staple can depend on various factors such as the length. of the legs, the diameter of the legs, the width of the base, and/or the extent to which the legs are deformed, for example.

[000879] In the past, it was often necessary for the surgeon to select the proper staples with the proper staple height for the tissue being stapled. For example, a surgeon might select tall staples for use with thick tissue and short staples for use with thin tissue. In some circumstances, however, the fabric being stapled did not have a consistent thickness, and therefore some staples were unable to achieve the desired fired configuration. For example, Figure 250 illustrates a high staple used in thin fabric. Referring now to Figure 251, when a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 10020, for example, is used with thin fabric, for example, the larger staple can be formed to a desired fired configuration.

[000880] Due to the compressibility of the fabric thickness compensator, the fabric thickness compensator can compensate for the thickness of the fabric captured inside each staple. More particularly, now referring to Figures 245 and 246, a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 10020, for example, may consume larger and/or smaller portions of the staple gripping area 10039 of each staple 10030 depending on the thickness and/or type of fabric contained within the staple gripping area 10039. For example, if thinner tissue T is captured within a staple 10030, the fabric thickness compensator 10020 may consume a larger portion of the area 10039 staple trapping compared to cases where thicker tissue T is captured inside the 10030 staple. Correspondingly, if thicker tissue T is captured inside a 10030 staple, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may consume a smaller portion of the staple entrapment area 10039 compared to cases where thinner tissue T is captured within the staple 10030. In this way, the thickness compensator of fabric can compensate for thinner fabric and/or thicker fabric and ensure that compressive pressure is applied to the fabric independently, or at least substantially independent, of the thickness of the fabric captured within the staples. In addition to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 10020 can compensate for different types, or compressibilities of tissue captured within different staples 10030. Now, referring to Figure 246, the fabric thickness compensator 10020 can apply a compressive force to the vascular tissue T which may include vessels V and, as a result, restrict blood flow through less compressible vessels V, while also applying a desired compressive pressure to the surrounding tissue T. In various circumstances in addition to those exposed above, the 10020 fabric thickness compensator can also compensate for malformed staples. Referring to Figure 247, malformation of multiple staples 10030 can result in larger staple entrapment areas 10039 being defined within such staples. Due to the resiliency of the fabric thickness compensator 10020, now referring to Figure 248, the fabric thickness compensator 10020 positioned within malformed staples 10030 can still apply sufficient compressive pressure to the fabric T even though the areas of entrapment of clip 10039 defined within such malformed clips 10030 can be enlarged. In various circumstances, tissue thickness compensator 10020 located between adjacent staples 10030 may be pulled against tissue T by appropriately formed staples 10030 encircling a malformed staple 10030 and, as a result, apply compressive pressure to the surrounding tissue and/or or captured within the malformed clamp 10030, for example. In various circumstances, a tissue thickness compensator can compensate for different tissue densities that may arise due to calcifications, fibrous areas, and/or tissue that has been previously stapled or treated, for example.

[000881] In accordance with the invention, a fixed, or immutable, tissue gap can be defined between the support portion and the anvil and, as a result, the staples can be deformed to a predetermined height regardless of the thickness of the tissue captured within. of the staples. When a tissue thickness compensator is used in such cases, the tissue thickness compensator can adapt to the tissue captured between the anvil and staple cartridge of the support portion and, due to the resilience of the tissue thickness compensator, the Fabric thickness compensator can apply additional compressive pressure to the fabric. Now referring to Figures 252-257, a staple 10030 has been formed to a predefined height H. Referring to Figure 252, a fabric thickness compensator has not been used and the fabric T consumes the entire staple gripping area 10039 Referring to Figure 259, a portion of a fabric thickness compensator 10020 was captured within a staple 10030, compressed the fabric T, and consumed at least a portion of the staple gripping area 10039. Now referring to Figure 254 , thin tissue T has been captured within the clamp 10030. In this embodiment, the compressed tissue T has a height of approximately 2/9H and the compressed tissue thickness compensator 10020 has a height of approximately 7/9H, for example. Referring now to Figure 255 , fabric T with an intermediate thickness has been captured within the clamp 10030. In this embodiment, the compressed fabric T has a height of approximately 4/9H and the compressed fabric thickness compensator 10020 has a height of approximately 5/9H, for example. Referring now to Figure 256 , fabric T with an intermediate thickness has been captured within the clamp 10030. In this embodiment, the compressed fabric T has a height of approximately 2/3H and the compressed fabric thickness compensator 10020 has a height of approximately 1/3H, for example. Referring now to Figure 255, thick tissue T has been captured within the staple 10030. In this embodiment, the compressed tissue T has a height of approximately 8/9H and the compressed tissue thickness compensator 10020 has a height of approximately 1/2 9H, for example. In various circumstances, the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a compressed height comprising approximately 10% of the staple gripping height, approximately 20% of the staple gripping height, approximately 30% of the staple gripping height, approximately 40% of the staple gripping height, approximately 50% of the staple gripping height, approximately 60% of the staple gripping height, approximately 70% of the staple gripping height, approximately 80% of the staple gripping height, and /or approximately 90% of the clamp grip height, for example.

[000882] Clamps 10030 may comprise any suitable unformed height. Clips 10030 may comprise an unformed height of between approximately 2 mm and approximately 4.8 mm, for example. Clips 10030 may comprise an unformed height of approximately 2.0 mm, approximately 2.5 mm, approximately 3.0 mm, approximately 3.4 mm, approximately 3.5 mm, approximately 3.8 mm, approximately 4.0 mm. mm, approximately 4.1 mm, and/or approximately 4.8 mm, for example. The height H at which the clamps can be deformed can be determined by the distance between the platform surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 and the opposing anvil. The distance between the platform surface 10011 and the tissue contacting surface of the anvil can be approximately 2.5 mm (0.097”), for example. Height H can also be determined by the depth of formation pockets defined inside the anvil. Formation pockets can have a depth measured from the fabric contact surface, for example. Optionally, as described in more detail below, the staple cartridge 10000 may further comprise staple drivers which can lift the staples 10030 toward the anvil and lift, or "excessively move", the staples above the platform surface 10011. In such cases , the height H at which clips 10030 are formed can also be determined by the distance at which clips 10030 are excessively directed. For example, clamps 10030 can be further moved by approximately 0.71 mm (0.028”), for example, and can result in clamps 10030 being formed to a height of approximately 4.80 mm (0.189”), for example. Clips 10030 can be formed to a height of approximately 0.8mm, approximately 1.0mm, approximately 1.5mm, approximately 1.8mm, approximately 2.0mm, and/or approximately 2.25mm , for example. Clips can be formed to a height between approximately 2.25 mm and approximately 3.0 mm, for example. In addition to the above, the height of the staple gripping area of a staple can be determined by the formed height of the staple and the width, or diameter, of the wire comprising the staple. The height of the staple gripping area 10039 of a staple 10030 may comprise the formed height H of the staple minus two wire diameter widths. The staple wire may comprise a diameter of approximately 0.23 mm (0.0089 in.), for example. The staple wire may comprise a diameter between approximately 0.18 mm (0.0069 in.) and approximately 0.30 mm (0.0119 in.), for example. For example, the H formed height of a 10030 clamp can be approximately 4.8 mm (0.189 in.) and the wire diameter of the clamp can be approximately 0.23 mm (0.0089 in.) resulting in a height clamp grip of approximately 4.34 mm (0.171 in.), for example.

[000883] In addition to the above, the fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed, or pre-dispensed height, and may be configured to deform to one of a plurality of compressed heights. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height of approximately 3.18 mm (0.125 in.), for example. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height greater than or equal to approximately 2.0 mm (0.080 in.), for example. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed, or pre-dispensed, height that is greater than the unfired height of the staples. The uncompressed, or pre-dispensed, height of the fabric thickness compensator can be approximately 10% higher, approximately 20% higher, approximately 30% higher, approximately 40% higher, approximately 50% higher, approximately 60% higher, approximately 70% higher, approximately 80% higher, approximately 90% higher, and/or approximately 100% higher than the unfired height of the staples, for example. The uncompressed, or pre-dispensed, height of the fabric thickness compensator can be up to approximately 100% higher than the unfired height of the staples, for example. The uncompressed, or pre-released height of the fabric thickness compensator can be more than 100% higher than the unfired height of the staples, for example. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height which is equal to the unfired height of the staples. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height that is less than the unfired height of the staples. The uncompressed, or pre-dispensed height of the thickness compensator can be approximately 10% shorter, approximately 20% shorter, approximately 30% shorter, approximately 40% shorter, approximately 50% shorter, approximately 60% shorter , approximately 70% shorter, approximately 80% shorter, and/or approximately 90% shorter than the unfired height of the staples, for example. The second compressible portion may comprise an uncompressed height which is higher than an uncompressed height of the fabric T being stapled. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height which is equal to an uncompressed height of the fabric T being stapled. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height that is shorter than an uncompressed height of the fabric T being stapled.

[000884] As described above, a fabric thickness compensator can be compressed within a plurality of formed staples, regardless of whether thick tissue or thin tissue is captured within the staples. For example, staples within a row, or row, of staples can be deformed so that the staple gripping area of each staple comprises a height of approximately 2.0 mm, for example, where the T fabric and the Fabric thickness compensator can be compressed within this height. Under certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a pinch height of approximately 1.75mm within the staple gripping area while the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a pinch height of approximately 0.25mm within the staple gripping area , thus totaling the height of the clamp gripping area of approximately 2.0 mm, for example. Under certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a pinch height of approximately 1.50mm within the staple gripping area while the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a pinch height of approximately 0.50mm within the staple gripping area. , thus totaling the height of the clamp gripping area of approximately 2.0 mm, for example. Under certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a pinch height of approximately 1.25mm within the staple gripping area while the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a pinch height of approximately 0.75mm within the staple gripping area , thus totaling the height of the clamp gripping area of approximately 2.0 mm, for example. Under certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a pinch height of approximately 1.0 mm within the staple gripping area while the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a pinch height of approximately 1.0 mm within the staple gripping area , thus totaling the height of the clamp gripping area of approximately 2.0 mm, for example. Under certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a pinch height of approximately 0.75mm within the staple gripping area while the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a pinch height of approximately 1.25mm within the staple gripping area , thus totaling the height of the clamp gripping area of approximately 2.0 mm, for example. Under certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a pinch height of approximately 1.50mm within the staple gripping area while the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a pinch height of approximately 0.50mm within the staple gripping area. , thus totaling the height of the clamp gripping area of approximately 2.0 mm, for example. Under certain circumstances, the fabric T may comprise a pinch height of approximately 0.25 mm within the staple gripping area while the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a pinch height of approximately 1.75 mm within the gripping area. of staple, thus totaling the height of the staple gripping area of approximately 2.0 mm, for example.

[000885] In addition to the above, the fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height which is less than the height fired from the staples. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height which is equal to the fired height of the staples. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height that is greater than the height fired from the staples. For example, the uncompressed height of a fabric thickness compensator may comprise a thickness that is approximately 110% of the height of the formed staple, approximately 120% of the formed staple height, approximately 130% of the formed staple height, approximately 140% of the formed clamp height, approximately 150% of the formed clamp height, approximately 160% of the formed clamp height, approximately 170% of the formed clamp height, approximately 180% of the formed clamp height, approximately 190% of the formed clamp height, and/or approximately 200% of the height of the formed clip, for example. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise an uncompressed height which is more than twice the height fired from the staples. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise a compressed height that is from approximately 85% to approximately 150% of the height of the formed staple, for example. Optionally, as described above, the fabric thickness compensator can be compressed between an uncompressed thickness and a compressed thickness. The compressed thickness of a fabric thickness compensator can be approximately 10% of its uncompressed thickness, approximately 20% of its uncompressed thickness, approximately 30% of its uncompressed thickness, approximately 40% of its uncompressed thickness, approximately 50 % of its uncompressed thickness, approximately 60% of its uncompressed thickness, approximately 70% of its uncompressed thickness, approximately 80% of its uncompressed thickness, and/or approximately 90% of its uncompressed thickness, for example. The uncompressed thickness of the fabric thickness compensator can be approximately twice, approximately ten times, approximately fifty times, and/or approximately one hundred times thicker than its compressed thickness, for example. The compressed thickness of the fabric thickness compensator can be between approximately 60% and approximately 99% of its uncompressed thickness. The uncompressed thickness of the fabric thickness compensator can be at least 50% thicker than its compressed thickness. The uncompressed thickness of the fabric thickness compensator can be up to one hundred times thicker than its compressed thickness. The second compressible portion can be elastic, or at least partially elastic, and can pull the T-fabric against the deformed legs of the staples. For example, the second compressible portion can resiliently expand between the T fabric and the base of the staple so as to push the T fabric against the staple legs. As discussed in more detail below, the fabric thickness compensator can be positioned between the fabric T and the deformed clamp legs. In various circumstances, as a result of the above, the fabric thickness compensator may be configured to consume any gaps within the staple gripping area.

[000886] The fabric thickness compensator may comprise a polymeric composition. The polymeric composition may comprise one or more synthetic polymers and/or one or more non-synthetic polymers. The synthetic polymer may comprise an absorbable synthetic polymer and/or a non-absorbable synthetic polymer. The polymeric composition may comprise a biocompatible foam, for example. The biocompatible foam may comprise a porous open cell foam and/or a porous closed cell foam, for example. The biocompatible foam may have a uniform pore morphology or it may have a gradient pore morphology (i.e., small pores that gradually increase in size to large pores across the thickness of the foam in one direction). The polymeric composition may comprise one or more of a porous scaffold, a porous matrix, a gel matrix, a hydrogel matrix, a solution matrix, a filamentous matrix, a tubular matrix, a composite matrix, a membrane matrix, a polymer. biostable, and a biodegradable polymer, and combinations thereof. For example, the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a foam reinforced by a filamentous matrix, or it may comprise a foam that has an additional hydrogel layer that expands in the presence of body fluids to provide further compression on the fabric. In accordance with the invention, a fabric thickness compensator could also be comprised of a coating over a material and/or a second or third layer that expands in the presence of body fluids to provide even more compression on the fabric. Such a layer could be a hydrogel which could be a synthetic and/or naturally derived material and could be biodurable and/or biodegradable, for example. A fabric thickness compensator could be reinforced with fibrous non-woven materials or fibrous mesh-like elements, for example, which can provide additional flexibility, rigidity, and/or strength. In accordance with the invention, a fabric thickness compensator having a porous morphology that exhibits a gradient structure, for example, small pores on one surface and larger pores on the other surface. Such morphology could be better for tissue ingrowth or hemostatic behavior. Additionally, the gradient could also be compositional with a different bioabsorption profile. A short-term absorption profile may be preferred to handle hemostasis while a long-term absorption profile may better handle tissue healing without leakage.

[000887] Examples of non-synthetic polymers include, but are not limited to, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, gelatin, collagen, and oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC). Examples of synthetic absorbable polymers include, but are not limited to, poly(lactic acid) (PLA), poly(L-lactic acid) (PLLA), polycaprolactone (PCL), polyglycolic acid (PGA), poly(carbonate of trimethylene) (TMC), polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), a copolymer of glycolide and ε-caprolactone (PGCL), a copolymer of glycolide and trimethylene carbonate, poly(glycerol sebacate) ( PGS), polydioxanone, poly(orthoesters), poly anhydrides, polysaccharides, poly(ester amides), tyrosine-based polyarylates, tyrosine-based polyiminocarbonates, tyrosine-based polycarbonates, poly(D,L-lactide- urethane), poly(B-hydroxybutyrate), poly(E-caprolactone), polyethylene glycol (PEG), poly[bis(carboxylatophenoxy)phosphazene], poly(amino acids), pseudo-poly(amino acids), absorbable polyurethanes, and combinations thereof. The polymeric composition may comprise from approximately 50% to approximately 90% by weight of the PLLA polymer composition and approximately 50% to approximately 10% by weight of the PCL polymer composition, for example. The polymeric composition may comprise approximately 70% by weight of PLLA and approximately 30% by weight of PCL, for example. The polymeric composition may comprise from approximately 55% to approximately 85% by weight of the PGA polymeric composition and 15% to 45% by weight of the PCL polymeric composition, for example. The polymeric composition may comprise approximately 65% by weight of PGA and approximately 35% by weight of PCL, for example. The polymeric composition may comprise from approximately 90% to approximately 95% by weight of the PGA polymeric composition and approximately 5% to approximately 10% by weight of the PLA polymeric composition, for example.

[000888] The synthetic absorbable polymer may comprise a bioabsorbable biocompatible elastomeric copolymer. Suitable bioabsorbable biocompatible elastomeric copolymers include, but are not limited to, copolymers of epsilon-caprolactone and glycolide (preferably having a molar ratio of epsilon-caprolactone and glycolide of from about 30:70 to about 70:30, preferably 35:65 to about 65:35, and more preferably 45:55 to 35:65); elastomeric copolymers of epsilon-caprolactone and lactide, including L-lactide, D-lactide and mixtures thereof or lactic acid copolymers (preferably having an epsilon-caprolactone and lactide molar ratio of about 35:65 to about 65:35 and more preferably 30:70 to 30:70), elastomeric copolymers of p-dioxanone (1,4-dioxan-2-one) and lactide including L-lactide, D-lactide and lactic acid (having preferably a molar ratio of p-dioxanone to lactide of about 40:60 to about 60:40); elastomeric copolymers of epsilon-caprolactone and p-dioxanone (preferably having a molar ratio of epsilon-caprolactone and p-dioxanone of from about 30:70 to about 70:30); elastomeric copolymers of p-dioxanone and trimethylene carbonate (preferably having a molar ratio of p-dioxanone and trimethylene carbonate of about 30:70 about 70:30); elastomeric copolymers of trimethylene carbonate and glycolide (preferably having a molar ratio of trimethylene carbonate and glycolide of from about 45:55 to about 70:30); elastomeric copolymer of trimethylene carbonate and lactide including L-lactide, D-lactide, mixtures thereof or lactide copolymers (preferably having a molar ratio of trimethylene carbonate and lactide of from about 30:70 to about 70 :30) and mixtures thereof. The elastomeric copolymer may be a copolymer of glycolide and epsilon-caprolactone. Alternatively, the elastomeric copolymer is a copolymer of lactide and epsilon-caprolactone.

[000889] The disclosures of US Patent No. 5,468,253, entitled ELASTOMERIC MEDICAL DEVICE, which was granted on November 21, 1995, and of US Patent No. 6,325,810, entitled FOAM BUTTRESS FOR STAPLING APPARATUS, which was granted on December 4, 2001, are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

[000890] The synthetic absorbable polymer may comprise one or more of a 90/10 poly(glycolide-L-lactide) copolymer, commercially available from Ethicon, Inc. under the tradename VICRYL (polyglactic 910), polyglycolide, commercially available from American Cyanamid Co., under the tradename DEXON, polydioxanone, commercially available from Ethicon, Inc. under the tradename PDS, poly(glycolide-trimethylene carbonate) random block copolymer, commercially available from American Cyanamid Co., under the tradename MAXON, 75/25 copolymer poly(glycolide-E-caprolactone-polyglecaprolactone 25) , available commercially from Ethicon under the tradename MONOCRYL, for example.

[000891] Examples of synthetic non-absorbable polymers include, but are not limited to, foamed polyurethane, polypropylene (PP), polyethylene (PE), polycarbonate, polyamides such as nylon, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polymethyl methacrylate ( PMMA), polystyrene (PS), polyester, polyether ether ketone (peek), polytetrafluoro ethylene (PTFE), polytrifluorochloroethylene (PTFCE), polyvinyl fluoride (PVF), fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP), polyacetal, polysulfone, and combinations thereof. Synthetic non-absorbable polymers can include, but are not limited to, foamed elastomers and porous elastomers, such as, for example, silicone, polyisoprene, and rubber. Synthetic polymers may comprise expanded polytetrafluoroethylene (ePTFE), commercially available from W. L. Gore & Associates, Inc. under the tradename GORE-TEX Soft Woven Patch and polyetherester urethane foam commercially available from Polyganics under the tradename NASOPORE.

[000892] The polymeric composition of a fabric thickness compensator can be characterized by the percentage of porosity, pore size, and/or hardness, for example. The polymeric composition may have a porosity percentage from approximately 30% by volume to approximately 99% by volume, for example. The polymeric composition may have a porosity percentage from approximately 60% by volume to approximately 98% by volume, for example. The polymeric composition may have a porosity percentage of approximately 85% by volume to approximately 97% by volume, for example. The polymeric composition may comprise approximately 70% by weight PLLA and approximately 30% by weight PCL, for example, and may comprise approximately 90% porosity by volume, for example. For example, as a result, the polymeric composition would comprise approximately 10% copolymer by volume. The polymer composition may comprise approximately 65% by weight of PGA and approximately 35% by weight of PCL, for example, and may have a porosity percentage of approximately 93% by volume to approximately 95%, in volume, for example. The polymeric composition may comprise a porosity greater than 85% by volume. The polymeric composition may have a pore size of from approximately 5 micrometers to approximately 2000 micrometers, for example. The polymeric composition may have a pore size between approximately 10 micrometers and approximately 100 micrometers, for example. For example, the polymeric composition may comprise a copolymer of PGA and PCL, for example. The polymeric composition may have a pore size between approximately 100 micrometers and approximately 1000 micrometers, for example. For example, the polymeric composition may comprise a copolymer of PLLA and PCL, for example. In certain respects, the hardness of a polymeric composition can be expressed in terms of Shore hardness, which can be defined as the permanent indentation resistance of a material, as determined with a durometer such as a Shore durometer. In order to assess the durometer value for a given material, pressure is applied to the material with a durometer indenter foot according to ASTM procedure D2240-00, entitled, "Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness" , which is fully incorporated herein by reference. The durometer indenter foot can be applied to the material for a sufficient period of time, such as 15 seconds for example, whereupon a reading is then taken at the proper scale. Depending on the type of scale used, a reading of 0 may be obtained when the indenter foot completely penetrates the material, and a reading of 100 may be obtained when no penetration occurs in the material. This reading is dimensionless. The durometer can be determined according to any suitable scale, such as type A and/or type OO scales, for example according to ASTM D2240-00. The polymer composition of a fabric thickness compensator may have a Shore A hardness value of approximately 4 A to approximately 16 A, for example, which is approximately 45 OO to approximately 65 OO in the Shore OO range. For example, the polymeric composition may comprise a PLLA/PCL copolymer or a PGA/PCL copolymer, for example. The polymer composition of a fabric thickness compensator may have a Shore A hardness value of less than 15 A. In various embodiments, the polymer composition of a fabric thickness compensator may have a Shore A hardness value of less than 10 A. The polymeric composition of a fabric thickness compensator may have a Shore A hardness value of less than 5 A. In certain embodiments, the polymeric material may have a Shore OO composition value of from approximately 3500 to approximately 7500, for example.

[000893] The polymeric composition may have at least two of the properties identified above. The polymeric composition can have at least three of the properties identified above. The polymer composition may have a porosity of 85% to 97% by volume, a pore size of 5 micrometers to 2000 micrometers, and a Shore A hardness value of 4 A to 16 A and a Shore OO hardness value of 45 OO to 65 OO, for example. The polymeric composition may comprise 70% by weight of the polymeric composition of PLLA and 30% by weight of the polymeric composition of PCL having a porosity of 90% by volume, a pore size of 100 micrometers to 1000 micrometers. - others, and a Shore A hardness value of 4 A to 16 A and a Shore OO hardness value of 45 OO to 65 OO, for example. The polymeric composition may comprise 65% by weight of the PGA polymeric composition and 35% by weight of the PCL polymeric composition having a porosity of 93% to 95% by volume, a pore size of 10 micrometers. to 100 micrometers, and a Shore A hardness value of 4 A to 16 A and a Shore OO hardness value of 45 OO to 65 OO, for example.

[000894] The polymeric composition may comprise a pharmaceutically active agent. The polymeric composition can release a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutically active agent. The pharmaceutically active agent can be released when the polymeric composition is desorbed/absorbed. The pharmaceutically active agent can be released into the fluid, for example blood, which passes over or through the polymeric composition. Examples of pharmaceutically active agents may include, but are not limited to, hemostatic agents and drugs, such as, for example, fibrin, thrombin, and oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC); anti-inflammatory drugs, such as diclofenac, aspirin, naxoprene, subidac and hydrocortisone; antibiotic and antimicrobial drug or agents such as, for example, triclosan, ionic silver, ampicillin, gentamicin, polymyxin B, chloramphenicol; and anti-cancer agents such as, for example, cisplatin, mitomycin, adriamycin.

[000895] Now referring to Figure 216, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 10000, for example, may comprise a support portion 10010 and a compressible fabric thickness compensator 10020. Now referring to Figures 218220, the support portion 10010 may comprise a platform surface 10011 and a plurality of clamp recesses 10012 defined within the support portion 10010. Each clamp recess 10012 may be sized and configured to detachably store a clamp, such as a clamp 10030 , for example. Staple cartridge 10000 may further comprise a plurality of staple drivers 10040 which can each be configured to support one or more staples 10030 within staple cavities 10012 when staples 10030 and staple drivers 10040 are in their positions. not fired. For example, referring primarily to Figures 224 and 225, each clamp driver 10040 may comprise one or more cradles, or channels, 10041, for example, which may be configured to support the clamps and limit relative movement between the clamps. 10030 and staple drivers 10040. Again referring to Figure 218, the staple cartridge 10000 may further comprise a staple firing slider 10050 which is moveable from a proximal end 10001 to a distal end 10002 of the staple cartridge so sequentially lifting the staple drivers 10040 and the staples 10030 from their unfired positions to an anvil positioned opposite the staple cartridge 10000. Referring primarily to Figures 218 and 220, each staple 10030 may comprise a base 10031 and one or plus legs 10032 extending from base 10031 wherein each clamp may be at least one of substantially U-shaped and substantially cially in a V-shape, for example. Clamps 10030 may be configured so that the ends of clamp legs 10032 are recessed with respect to platform surface 10011 of support portion 10010 when clamps 10030 are in their unfired positions. Clamps 10030 may be configured so that the ends of clamp legs 10032 are flush with the platform surface 10011 of support portion 10010 when clamps 10030 are in their unfired positions. Clamps 10030 may be configured so that the ends of clamp legs 10032, or at least some portion of clamp legs 10032, extend above the platform surface 10011 of support portion 10010 when clamps 10030 are in their non-active positions. shot. In such cases, the clamp legs 10032 can extend inwardly and can be fitted within the fabric thickness compensator 10020 when the clamps 10030 are in their unfired positions. For example, clamp legs 10032 can extend above the platform surface 10011 by approximately 1.9 mm (0.075 in.), for example. The clamp legs 10032 can extend above the platform surface 10011 by a distance between approximately 0.64 mm (0.025 in.) and approximately 3.18 mm (0.125 in.), for example. In addition to those set out above, fabric thickness compensator 10020 may comprise an uncompressed thickness between approximately 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) and approximately 3.18 mm (0.125 in.), for example.

[000896] In use, in addition to the above and primarily with reference to Figure 233, an anvil such as the anvil 10060 for example can be moved to a closed position opposite the staple cartridge 10000. As described in more detail below , the anvil 10060 can position the fabric against the fabric thickness compensator 10020 and compress the fabric thickness compensator 10020 against the platform surface 10011 of the support portion 10010, for example. When the anvil 10060 has been properly positioned, the staples 10030 can be dispensed with, as also illustrated in Figure 233. Optionally, as mentioned above, the staple firing slider 10050 can be moved from the proximal end 10001 of the staple cartridge 10000 to the distal end 10002 as shown in Figure 234. When the 10050 slider is advanced, the 10050 slider can contact the 10040 staple drivers and lift the 10040 staple drivers into the 10012 staple cavities. 10050 and staple drivers 10040 may each comprise one or more slopes, or sloped surfaces, which may cooperate to move staple drivers 10040 upward from their unfired positions. For example, with reference to Figures 221-225, each clamp driver 10040 may comprise at least one sloped surface 10042 and the slider 10050 may comprise one or more sloped surfaces 10052 which may be configured so that sloped surfaces 10052 may slide under sloped surface 10042 when slider 10050 is advanced distally within the staple cartridge. When the staple drivers 10040 are lifted within their respective staple cavities 10012, the staple drivers 10040 may lift the staples 10030 so that the staples 10030 can emerge from their staple cavities 10012 through openings in the staple platform 10011. During an exemplary firing sequence, referring primarily to Figures 227 to 229, slider 10050 may first contact clamp 10030a and begin lifting clamp 10030a. When slider 10050 is advanced further distally, slider 10050 may begin lifting clamps 10030b, 10030c, 10030d, 10030e, and 10030f, and any subsequent clamps, in a sequential order. As illustrated in Figure 229, the slider 10050 can direct the clamps 10030 upwards so that the legs 10032 of the clamps contact the opposing anvil, are deformed into a desired shape, and ejected from the support portion 10010. In various circumstances , slider 10030 can move multiple staples up simultaneously as part of a firing sequence. With respect to the firing sequence illustrated in Figure 229, staples 10030a and 10030b have been moved to their fully fired positions and ejected from support portion 10010, staples 10030c and 10030d are in the process of being fired and are at least partially contained within the support portion 10010, and clamps 10030e and 10030f are still in their unfired positions.

[000897] As discussed above, and with reference to Figure 235, the clamp legs 10032 of the clamps 10030 may extend above the platform surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 when the clamps 10030 are in their unfired positions. With further reference to this firing sequence illustrated in Figure 229, the staples 10030e and 10030f are illustrated in their unfired position and their staple legs 10032 extend above the platform surface 10011 and into the fabric thickness compensator 10020. ends of staple legs 10032, or any other portion of staple legs 10032, may not protrude through a top fabric contacting surface 10021 of fabric thickness compensator 10020 when staples 10030 are in their unfired positions . When the staples 10030 are moved from their non-fired positions to their fired positions, as illustrated in Figure 229, the tips of the staple legs may protrude through the tissue-contacting surface 10032. The tips of the staple legs 10032 may comprise sharp points that can cut and penetrate the fabric thickness compensator 10020. The fabric thickness compensator 10020 may comprise a plurality of openings that may be configured to receive the staple legs 10032 and allow the staple legs 10032 to slide relative to the fabric thickness compensator 10020. Support portion 10010 may further comprise a plurality of guides 10013 extending from platform surface 10011. Guides 10013 may be positioned adjacent to staple cavity openings in the platform surface. 10011 so that the clamp legs 10032 can be at least partially supported by the guides 10013. A guide 10013 may be positioned at a proximal end and/or a distal end of a staple cavity opening. In accordance with the invention, a first guide 10013 can be positioned at a first end of each opening of the staple cavity and a second guide 10013 can be positioned at a second end of each opening of the staple cavity so that each first guide 10013 can support a first clamp leg 10032 of a clamp 10030 and each second guide 10013 can support a second clamp leg 10032 of the clamp. Referring to Figure 235, each guide 10013 may comprise a groove or slot, such as groove 10016 for example, within which a clamp leg 10032 may be slidably received. Optionally, each guide 10013 may comprise a handle, protrusion, and/or peg that may extend from the platform surface 10011 and may extend into the fabric thickness compensator 10020. As discussed in more detail below, the handles , protrusions, and/or pegs may reduce relative movement between the fabric thickness compensator 10020 and the support portion 10010. The ends of the staple legs 10032 may be positioned within the guides 10013 and may not extend above the gripping surfaces. top of guides 10013 when clamps 10030 are in their unfired position. For example, guides 10013 may define a guide height and clamps 10030 may not extend above this guide height when they are in their unfired positions.

[000898] According to the invention, a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 10020, for example, can be comprised of a single sheet of material. A fabric thickness compensator may comprise a continuous sheet of material that may cover the entire upper platform surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 or, alternatively, cover less than the entire platform surface 10011. The sheet of material may cover the staple cavity openings in support portion 10010 while, alternatively, the sheet of material may comprise openings that can be aligned, or at least partially aligned, with the staple cavity openings. In accordance with the invention, a fabric thickness compensator may be comprised of multiple layers of material. Referring now to Figure 217, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise a compressible core and a shell surrounding the compressible core. A housing 10022 may be configured to releasably secure the compressible core to the support portion 10010. For example, the support portion 10010 may comprise one or more projections, such as projections 10014 (Figure 220), for example, that extend therefrom and which can be received into one or more openings and/or slots, such as openings 10024, for example, defined in housing 10022. Projections 10014 and openings 10024 can be configured so that the projections 10014 can secure the housing 10022 to the support portion 10010. The ends of the projections 10014 may be deformed, as by a hot-fitting process, for example, in order to widen the ends of the projections 10014 and, as a result, limit movement relative between the housing 10022 and the support portion 10010. The housing 10022 may comprise one or more perforations 10025 that can facilitate the release of the housing 10022 from the support portion 10010, as illustrated in Figure 217. Referring now to Figure 226, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise a housing 10222 that includes a plurality of apertures 10223, wherein apertures 10223 may be aligned, or at least partially aligned, with the apertures of the staple cavity in support portion 10010. The fabric thickness compensator core may also comprise apertures that are aligned, or at least partially aligned, with apertures 10223 in housing 10222. Alternatively, the fabric thickness compensator core may comprises a continuous body and can extend below the openings 10223 so that the continuous body covers the openings of the staple cavity in the platform surface 10011.

[000899] Optionally, as described above, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise a housing for releasably securing a compressible core to the support portion 10010. For example, with reference to Figure 218, a staple cartridge may additionally comprise tabs retainers 10026 which may be configured to inhibit the shell, and compressible core, from prematurely detaching from the support portion 10010. Optionally, each retaining clip 10026 may comprise apertures 10028 which may be configured to receive projections 10014 extending therefrom. of the support portion 10010 so that the retainer tabs 10026 can be retained on the support portion 10010. The retainer tabs 10026 may each comprise at least one reservoir portion 10027 which can extend beneath the support portion 10010 and may support and retain the clamp drivers 10040 within the support portion 10010. As described As described above, a fabric thickness compensator may be removably attached to the support portion 10010 by the clips 10030. More particularly, as also described above, the legs of the staples 10030 may extend into the fabric thickness compensator 10020 when the staples 10030 are in the unfired position and, as a result, releasably secure the fabric thickness compensator 10020 to the support portion 10010. The legs of the staples 10030 may be in contact with the side walls of their respective staple cavities 10012 wherein, due to friction between the staple legs 10032 and the side walls, staples 10030 and fabric thickness compensator 10020 may be held in position until staples 10030 are dispensed from staple cartridge 10000. When staples 10030 are dispensed, the fabric thickness compensator 10020 can be captured within the staples 10030 and held against the stapled fabric T. When the big When the fabric is later moved to an open position to release the fabric T, the support portion 10010 can be moved away from the fabric thickness compensator 10020 which has been secured to the fabric. An adhesive may be used to removably secure the fabric thickness compensator 10020 to the support portion 10010. A two-part adhesive may be used of which a first part may be placed on the platform surface 10011 and a second part of the adhesive can be placed over the fabric thickness compensator 10020 so that when the fabric thickness compensator 10020 is placed against the platform surface 10011, the first part can contact the second part to activate the adhesive and secure detachably the fabric thickness compensator 10020 to the support portion 10010. Optionally, any other suitable means could be used to detachably secure the fabric thickness compensator to the support portion of a staple cartridge.

[000900] In addition to the above, the slider 10050 can be advanced from the proximal end 10001 to the distal end 10002 to completely dispense all staples 10030 contained within the staple cartridge 10000. Now referring to Figures 258-262, the slider 10050 may be advanced distally into a longitudinal cavity 10016 within the support portion 10010 by a triggering member, or cutting bar, 10052 of a surgical stapler. In use, the 10000 staple cartridge can be inserted into a staple cartridge channel in a surgical stapler jaw, such as the 10070 staple cartridge channel, for example, and the 10052 trigger member can be advanced to contact with the 10050 slider as illustrated in Figure 258. When the 10050 slider is advanced distally by the trigger member 10052, the slider 10050 may contact the more proximal staple driver or drivers 10040 and fire or eject clips 10030 from the cartridge body 10010 as described above. As illustrated in Figure 258, the triggering member 10052 may further comprise a cutting edge 10053 which can be advanced distally through a knife slit in the support portion 10010 when the staples 10030 are being triggered. In accordance with the invention, a corresponding knife slot can extend through the anvil positioned opposite the staple cartridge 10000 so that the cutting edge 10053 can extend between the anvil and the support portion 10010 and cut the tissue and the fabric thickness compensator positioned between them. In various circumstances, the slider 10050 may be advanced distally by the trigger member 10052 until the slider 10050 reaches the distal end 10002 of the staple cartridge 10000, as illustrated in Figure 260. At this point, the trigger member 10052 may be retracted proximally. Slider 10050 may be retracted proximally with triggering member 10052 but, now referring to Figure 261, slider 10050 may be left behind at distal end 10002 of staple cartridge 10000 when triggering member 10052 is retracted. When the firing member 10052 has been sufficiently retracted, the anvil can be reopened, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 can be detached from the support portion 10010, and the remaining non-implanted portion of the used staple cartridge 10000, including the holder 10010, can be removed from the staple cartridge groove 10070.

[000901] After the used staple cartridge 10000 has been removed from the staple cartridge slot, in addition to the above, a new staple cartridge 10000, or any other suitable staple cartridge, can be inserted into the staple cartridge slot 10070 In addition to the above, the staple cartridge channel 10070, the firing member 10052, and/or the staple cartridge 10000 may comprise cooperating elements that can prevent the firing member 10052 from being advanced distally a second time, or a second time. subsequent time, without a new, or unfired, staple cartridge 10000 positioned in the staple cartridge groove 10070. More particularly, again with reference to Figure 258, when firing member 10052 is advanced into contact with slider 10050 and, when the slider 10050 is in its proximal unfired position, a support tip 10055 of the firing member 10052 may be positioned over and/or along a support lug 10056 on slider 10050 so that firing member 10052 is held in a sufficient vertical position to prevent a latch, or beam, 10054 extending from firing member 10052 from falling into a latching recess defined within the cartridge groove of staples. As the latch 10054 will not fall into the locking recess, under such circumstances, the latch 10054 may not be in a position bordering a distal side wall 10057 of the locking recess when the triggering member 10052 is advanced. When the trigger member 10052 pushes the slider 10050 distally, the trigger member 10052 can be supported in its upward shooting position due to the support tip 10055 which rests on the support protrusion 10056. When the trigger member 10052 is retracted with respect to the slider 10050, as discussed above and illustrated in Figure 261, the trigger member 10052 may detach downwardly from its upward position when the support tip 10055 is no longer resting on the support boss 10056 of the slider 10050 For example, the surgical clip may comprise a spring 10058, and/or any other suitable traction element, which may be configured to traction the triggering member 10052 to its downward position. When the trigger member 10052 has fully retracted, as shown in Figure 262, the trigger member 10052 cannot be advanced distally through the used staple cartridge 10000. More particularly, the trigger member 10052 cannot be held in its upper position. by the slider 10050 when the slider 10050, at this point in the sequence of operation, has been left behind at the distal end 10002 of the staple cartridge 10000. Thus, as mentioned above, in the case where the triggering member 10052 is advanced again without replacement of the staple cartridge, the locking beam 10054 will contact the side wall 10057 of the locking recess which will prevent the triggering member 10052 from being advanced distally into the staple cartridge 10000 again. In other words, once the used staple cartridge 10000 has been replaced with a new staple cartridge, the new staple cartridge will have a proximally positioned slider 10050 that can hold the firing member 10052 in its upper position and allow the trigger 10052 is re-advanced distally.

[000902] As described above, the slider 10050 can be configured to move the staple drivers 10040 between a first unfired position and a second fired position so as to eject the staples 10030 from the support portion 10010. The staple drivers 10040 may be contained within clip cavities 10012 after clips 10030 have been ejected from support portion 10010. Support portion 10010 may comprise one or more retention elements which may be configured to prevent clamp drivers 10040 from being ejected or fall out of staple cavities 10012. Alternatively, slider 10050 may be configured to eject staple drivers 10040 from support portion 10010 with staples 10030. For example, staple drivers 10040 may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material. and/or biocompatible, such as Ultem, for example. Staple drivers can be attached to staples 10030. For example, a staple driver can be molded onto and/or around the base of each staple 10030 so that the driver is integrally formed with the staple. US Patent Application Serial No. 11/541,123, entitled SURGICAL STAPLES HAVING COMPRESSIBLE OR CRUSHABLE MEMBERS FOR SECURING TISSUE THEREIN AND STAPLING INSTRUMENTS FOR DEPLOYING THE SAME, filed September 29, 2006, is incorporated herein by reference at its entirety.

[000903] In various circumstances, in addition to the above, a compressible tissue thickness compensator may move, twist, and/or deflect relative to the underlying rigid support portion of a staple cartridge. The support portion, and/or any other suitable portion of the staple cartridge, may comprise one or more elements configured to limit relative movement between the fabric thickness compensator and the support portion. As described above, at least a portion of the clamps 10030 may extend above the surface of the platform 10011 of the support portion 10010 whereby, under certain circumstances, now referring to Figures 263 and 264, lateral forces applied to a compensator of fabric thickness 10120, for example, may encounter resistance from staples 10030 and/or loops 10013 extending from support portion 10010, for example. In various circumstances, staples 10030 may tilt and/or flex within staple cavities 10012 while resisting lateral movement of fabric thickness compensator 10120 wherein staple cavities 10012 and staple cavities 10030 can be sized and configured to maintaining relative alignment between the legs 10032 of the staples 10030 and the forming pockets 10062 on the opposing anvil 10060 so that the staples 10000 are properly formed during the staple forming process. Staples 10030 and/or loops 10013 can be configured to prevent or at least limit lateral distortion within fabric thickness compensator 10020, as illustrated in Figure 264. For example, staples 10030 and/or loops 10013, for example , may be configured to stiffen, or limit lateral and/or longitudinal movement of a first surface or fabric-contacting surface 10021 of the fabric thickness compensator with respect to a second surface or bottom surface 10029. In the invention, a staple cartridge, and/or a staple cartridge channel in which the staple cartridge is positioned, may comprise at least one distortion-reducing element that can extend upwardly to limit lateral and/or longitudinal movement, or distortion, of a fabric thickness compensator. A housing at least partially surrounding a fabric thickness compensator, as discussed above, can also prevent, or at least limit, lateral and/or longitudinal movement, or distortion, of the fabric thickness compensator.

[000904] Again with reference to Figures 263 and 264, a fabric thickness compensator, such as fabric thickness compensator 10120, for example, may comprise a core 10128 and a cover 10122. Cover 10122 and compressible core 10128 may be comprised of different materials or, alternatively, of the same material. In either case, cover 10122 may have a higher density than core 10128. In circumstances where cover 10122 comprises the top of fabric thickness compensator 10120, the ends of staple legs 10032 may be fitted to cover 10122. When a cover comprises the bottom of fabric thickness compensator 10120, clip legs 10032 may extend through the cover and into the core. In either case, the fabric thickness compensator cover can help secure the staple legs 10032 in alignment with the forming pockets 10062 of the anvil 10060. Cover 10122 may comprise a density that is approximately 10% greater than the density of the anvil 10060. 10128 core, approximately 20% greater than 10128 core density, approximately 30% greater than 10128 core density, approximately 40% greater than 10128 core density, approximately 50% greater than 10128 core density, approximately 60% greater than 10128 core density, approximately 70% greater than 10128 core density, approximately 80% greater than 10128 core density, approximately 90% greater than 10128 core density, and/or approximately 100% greater than the density of core 10128, for example. Cover 10122 may comprise a density that is greater than the density of core 10128 and less than twice the density of core 10128, for example. Cover 10122 may comprise a density that is more than twice the density of core 10128, for example. In addition to the above, the cover 10122 and the core 10128 may be formed, or manufactured, simultaneously. For example, a fluid comprising any suitable material disclosed herein can be poured onto a plate or mold, and as the fluid solidifies, the fluid can form a coating, or layer, which has a higher density than the rest of the material. Optionally, multiple layers within a material may be formed using a process in which one or more subsequent layers of material are poured over a previously cured layer. Two or more layers can be bonded together with an adhesive, for example. Two or more layers may be secured together by one or more fasteners and/or one or more mechanical interlocking features, for example. For example, adjacent layers can be connected together by one or more snap joints, for example. The cover may comprise a sealed surface which may prevent, or at least limit, the flow of fluid therethrough. The cover may comprise an open cell porous structure, for example.

[000905] In addition to the above, the cover can be cut from the fabric thickness compensator. The fabric thickness compensator may be cut from a larger block of material so that the fabric thickness compensator does not comprise a cover. For example, the fabric thickness compensator may be comprised of a homogeneous, or at least substantially homogeneous, material comprising large pores, for example.

[000906] In accordance with the invention, a staple cartridge may comprise a plurality of staple cavities, each containing a staple positioned therein, wherein the staple cavities may be arranged in a plurality of rows, and wherein an anvil positioned opposite the staple cartridge may comprise a plurality of forming pockets corresponding to the staple cavities in the staple cartridge. In other words, the anvil may comprise a plurality of rows of forming pockets with each forming pocket being positioned opposite a staple cavity in the staple cartridge. Optionally, each forming pocket may comprise two forming containers configured to receive staple legs 10032 of a staple 10030 wherein each forming container is configured to receive a staple leg 10032 and form or curl a staple leg 10032 toward the other clamp leg 10032, for example. In various circumstances, legs 10032 may or may not properly enter the forming vessels and, as a result, clamp legs 10032 may become malformed during the firing sequence. As described herein, an anvil may comprise an array, or grid, of forming pockets that are each configured to receive and form a clamp leg. For example, the forming pockets arrangement may comprise a number of forming pockets that exceeds the number of staples contained within the staple cartridge. A staple cartridge may comprise six longitudinal rows of staple cavities, for example, wherein the anvil may comprise six rows of forming pockets aligned with the six rows of staple cavities, and further forming pockets positioned between the rows. of training pockets. For example, on one side of the anvil, the anvil may comprise a first row of forming pockets which can be positioned over a first row of staple cavities, a second row of forming pockets which may be positioned over a second row of cavities for staples which is adjacent to the first row of staple pockets, and further, a row of forming pockets positioned between the first row of forming pockets and the second row of forming pockets. Referring now to Figures 276 to 279, an anvil 10260 may comprise six rows of forming pockets 10261 which may be configured to be placed over six corresponding rows of staple cavities in the staple cartridge 10200. For example, rows of forming pockets Intermediate pockets 10262 may be positioned between and/or beside the rows of forming pockets 10261. Now referring to Figures 277, 278, and 280, each forming pocket 10261 and 10262 may comprise two forming containers, wherein each forming container The formation may comprise a distal portion 10263 which may be configured to form or curve a clamp leg 10032 proximally and a proximal portion 10264 which may be configured to form or bend a clamp leg 10032 in a distal position. In various other circumstances, clips 10030 may be formed into a variety of other shapes. For example, a clamp 10030 can be formed so that one leg 10032 is formed outwards and the other leg 10032 is formed inwards (Figure 281), or so that both legs 10032 are formed outwards (Figure 282). ) depending on, one, which forming containers the clamp legs 10032 enter and/or, two, whether the legs 10032 enter the proximal portion 10263 or the distal portion 10064 of each forming container, for example.

[000907] In addition to the above, each forming pocket 10261 and/or forming pocket 10262 may comprise a triangular or diamond-like shape, for example. Each distal portion 10263 and/or each proximal portion 10264 of the forming pockets may comprise a triangular shape wherein, for example, the triangular shapes of the distal portions 10263 and proximal portions 10264 may be arranged so that they have apexes pointing in directions opposite. An anvil may comprise an arrangement of substantially square forming pockets, for example. For example, the forming surface of each square forming pocket may comprise an arcuate surface extending between the sides of the square. An anvil may comprise an arrangement of circular or spherical cavities, for example. In addition to the above, forming pockets 10261 may be positioned along one or more lines, and similarly forming pockets 10262 may also be positioned along one or more lines. Alternatively, forming pockets 10261 and/or forming pockets 10262 may be arranged in one or more circular rows. For example, forming pockets 10261 may be arranged along a primary circumference and forming pockets 10262 may be arranged along a different circumference. The primary circumference and the different circumference may be concentric, or at least substantially concentric. The forming pockets 10262 may be disposed along an inner circumference positioned radially inward with respect to the primary circumference and/or an outer circumference positioned radially outwardly with respect to the primary circumference, for example. The primary circumference can be defined by a primary diameter, the internal circumference can be defined by an internal diameter, and the external circumference can be defined by an external diameter. For example, the inside diameter can be shorter than the primary diameter and the outside diameter can be longer than the primary diameter.

[000908] Optionally, as described above, an anvil can be moved from an open position to a closed position in order to compress tissue against the tissue thickness compensator of a staple cartridge, such as the tissue thickness compensator 10020, by example. In various circumstances, the fabric thickness compensator may be positioned beside the staple cartridge support portion before the fabric thickness compensator is positioned relative to the fabric. The fabric thickness compensator 10020 may be in a position where it is in contiguity with the support portion 10018 before the anvil is moved to its closed position. The fabric thickness compensator 10020 may be in a position where a gap is present between the fabric thickness compensator 10020 and the support portion 10018. For example, the anvil may displace the fabric and the fabric thickness compensator 10020 down until the tissue thickness compensator 10020 is adjacent to the support portion 10018 at which point the anvil can be moved to its closed position and generate compression within the tissue. In the event that a surgeon is not satisfied with the tissue placement between the anvil and staple cartridge, the surgeon may open the anvil, adjust the position of the anvil and staple cartridge, and close the anvil again. Due to such positioning and repositioning of the staple cartridge relative to the tissue, in various circumstances, the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may dislodge from the support portion 10010, for example. In some such circumstances, the distal end of the fabric thickness compensator 10020 may contact the fabric and peel or curl with respect to the support portion 10010. Optionally, as described in more detail below, a staple cartridge may comprise one or more elements configured to releasably retain a fabric thickness compensator to an underlying support portion of the staple cartridge.

[000909] Now referring to Figure 265, a staple cartridge 10300 may comprise a support portion 10310, a tissue thickness compensator 10320 supported by support portion 10310, and a distal end 10302 that includes a tip 10303 configured to grip releasably a distal end 10325 of tissue thickness compensator 10320 in position. Tip 10303 may comprise a slot 10305 configured to receive distal end 10325 of tissue thickness compensator 10320. Distal end 10325 may be pressed into, or wedged, into slot 10305 so that distal end 10325 can be held in place when the staple cartridge 10300 is positioned relative to the fabric. For example, slot 10305 may be oriented in a direction that is parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to platform surface 10311 of support portion 10310. Slot 10305 may be horizontal with respect to platform surface 10311. Alternatively, now Referring to Figure 266, a staple cartridge 10400 may comprise a support portion, a tissue thickness compensator 10420 supported by the support portion, and a distal end 10402 that includes a tip 10403 configured to releasably grip the distal end. 10425 of the fabric thickness compensator 10420 in position. Distal end 10425 may comprise a projection extending therefrom and tip 10403 may comprise a vertical slot 10405 configured to receive the projection from distal end 10425. Distal end 10425, and/or projection extending therefrom, can be pressed into, or wedged, into slot 10405 so that distal end 10425 can be held in place when staple cartridge 10400 is positioned relative to tissue. Fabric thickness compensator 10420 may comprise a slit, such as slit 10429, for example, which may be configured to receive at least a portion of prong 10403. Slit 10405 may be oriented in a direction that is perpendicular, or at least substantially perpendicular to the platform surface 10411 of the support portion. Referring now to Figure 267, a staple cartridge 10500 may comprise a support portion, a tissue thickness compensator 10520 supported by the support portion, and a distal end 10502 that includes a tip configured to releasably grip the distal end. 10525 of the fabric thickness compensator 10520 in position. The tip may comprise a vertical slot 10505 configured to receive the distal end 10525 of the tissue thickness compensator 10520. The distal end 10525 may be pressed into, or wedged, into the slot 10505 so that the distal end 10525 may be held in place. when the 10500 staple cartridge is positioned relative to the fabric.

[000910] Referring again to Figure 265, the fabric thickness compensator 10320 may comprise a top surface 10324 which may be positioned above the top surface 10304 of the nose 10303. Another example in which the top surface of a compensator The fabric thickness gauge 10720 is positioned above the top surface 10004 of the tip 10003, for example. In use, again referring to Figure 265, the fabric may slide over the top surface 10304 of the tip 10303 and, in some circumstances, the fabric may contact the distal end 10325 of the fabric thickness compensator 10320 and may apply a force to the fabric thickness compensator 10320 tending to detach the fabric thickness compensator 10320 from the support portion 10310. This detachment force may be opposed by the distal end portion 10325 wedged within the prong 10303. In any case, when the fabric has been properly positioned relative to staple cartridge 13000, an anvil may be rotated to a closed position to compress the fabric and fabric thickness compensator 10320 against support portion 10310. For example, the anvil may be rotated to a position where the anvil contacts the top surface 10304 of the tip 10303 and, as a result, the anvil may be prevented from rotating further woe In various circumstances, because the top surface 10324 of the fabric thickness compensator 10320 is positioned above the top surface 10304 of the spike 10303, the top surface 10324 may be pushed down toward the support portion 10310 when the anvil is in place. being closed and, in some cases, the top surface 10324 may be pushed below the top surface 10304 of the tip 10303, for example. After the staples contained within the staple cartridge 10300 have been dispensed and the fabric thickness compensator 10320 has been cut, as described herein, the support portion 10310 and the tip 10303 can be moved away from the fabric thickness compensator 10320 so that the distal end 10325 of the fabric thickness compensator 10320 can slide out of the slot 10305.

[000911] As described above, an anvil, such as the anvil 10060, for example, can be rotated to a closed position in which the anvil 10060 makes contact with the upper tip surface 10004 of a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge. 10000 staples, for example. When the anvil has reached its closed position, the amount by which a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 10020, for example, is compressed will depend, among other things, on the uncompressed thickness, or height, of the fabric thickness and fabric thickness compensator. Referring now to Figures 236 and 237, a fabric thickness compensator 10920 may comprise a top surface that is flush, or at least substantially flush, with the top surface 10004 of the tip 10003. In such cases, the top surface of the fabric thickness compensator 10920 may be pushed below the top surface 10004 of the tip 10003. Now referring to Figures 241 and 242, a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 10820, for example, may comprise a top surface 10821 which is positioned below the top tip surface 10004 before the fabric thickness compensator 10820 is compressed by the fabric T and anvil 10060. In circumstances where the fabric T is relatively thin, as illustrated in Figures 239 and 240, the fabric thickness compensator 10920 can be subjected to relatively little compression. Referring now to Figures 241 and 242, the fabric thickness compensator 10820 may be subjected to greater compression when the fabric T is relatively thicker. In circumstances where the fabric T has both thin sections and thicker sections, as illustrated in Figures 243 and 244, the fabric thickness compensator 10820 can be compressed a greater amount when it is positioned under the thicker fabric T. and a lesser amount when it is positioned under the thinner fabric T, for example. In this way, as described above, the fabric thickness compensator can compensate for different fabric thicknesses.

[000912] Now referring to Figures 268 to 270, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise, one, a cartridge groove 16670 configured to receive a staple cartridge 16600 and, two, an anvil 16660 pivotally coupled to the cartridge groove. 16670. The staple cartridge 16600 may comprise a support portion 16610 and a tissue thickness compensator 16620 wherein a distal end 16625 of the tissue thickness compensator 16620 may be releasably held to the support portion 16610 by a spike 16603 at the distal end 16602 of staple cartridge 16600. Tip 16603 may comprise a slot 16605 and may be comprised of a flexible material. In use, referring primarily to Figure 269, the tip 16603 may be flexed downwards to expand the opening of the slot 16605. The tip 16603 may comprise notches or indentations 16606 which may be configured to allow the tip 16603 to flex downwards. . In any case, in various circumstances, the expanded opening of slot 16605 may facilitate insertion of distal end 16625 of tissue thickness compensator 16620 into slot 16605. When tissue thickness compensator 16620 has been properly positioned, tip 16603 may be released and, due to the resilience of the material comprising the tip 16603, the tip 16603 may return, or at least substantially return, to its unflexed condition and entrap the distal end 16625 of the fabric thickness compensator 16620 against the platform surface 16611, as illustrated in Figure 270. In use, similarly to the above, the distal end 16625 can be pulled out of the slot 16605 when the support portion 16610 is pulled away from the stapled tissue. In various circumstances, flexible tip 16603 may be configured to deflect when fabric thickness compensator 16620 is detached from support portion 16610. Again referring to Figure 270, fabric thickness compensator 16620 may comprise a top surface 16621 which is aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with a top surface 16604 of the tip 16603.

[000913] Referring to Figure 271, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise, one, a channel 10770 configured to receive a staple cartridge 10700 and, two, an anvil 10760 rotationally coupled to the channel 10770. The staple cartridge 10700 may comprise a support portion 10710 and a fabric thickness compensator 10720. The fabric thickness compensator 10720 may be held in position by a tip sock 10703 which can be slid over the support portion 10710. Referring primarily to the Figure 272, the toe sock 10703 may comprise one or more side slots 10707 which may be configurable to detachably receive one or more attachment rails that extend along the support portion 10710, for example. Fabric thickness compensator 10720 may be positioned between side slots 10707. Tip sock 10703 may further comprise a distal end 10702 and a cavity 10706 defined in distal end 10702 wherein cavity 10706 may also be configured to receive therein at at least a portion of the support portion 10710, for example. In use, the tip 10703 can be slid over the support portion 10710 in a distal to proximal direction. The fabric thickness compensator 10720 may be removably mounted to the toe sock 10703 so that, after the staples have been fired through the fabric thickness compensator 10720, the fabric thickness compensator 10720 can detach from the fabric thickness compensator 10720. tip 10703 when support portion 10710 and tip sock 10703 are spaced from fabric thickness compensator 10720. Top surface 10721 of fabric thickness compensator 10720 may be positioned below top surface 10704 of tip 10703.

[000914] Now referring to Figures 273 and 274, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise, one, a staple cartridge channel 11070 configured to receive a staple cartridge 11000 and, two, an anvil 11060 rotationally coupled to the channel 11070. Staple cartridge 11000 may comprise a support portion 11010 and a fabric thickness compensator 11020. The fabric thickness compensator 11020 may be held in position by one or more longitudinal tracks 11019 extending from the platform 11011 of the portion support 11010. Longitudinal rails 11019 may be fitted within fabric thickness compensator 11020. Referring primarily to Figure 274, fabric thickness compensator 11020 may comprise a longitudinal recess 11029 which may be configured to receive the rails 11019. For example, recess 11029 can be sized and configured to receive rails 11019 in a snap-fit arrangement, for example. Such elements, in addition to the above, may be configured to prevent, or at least limit, relative lateral movement between the fabric thickness compensator 11020 and the support portion 11010 and, furthermore, limit premature release of the thickness compensator. of fabric 11020 of the support portion 11010, for example. Referring to Figure 275, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise (1) a groove 11170 configured to receive a staple cartridge 11100 and (2) an anvil 11160 rotationally coupled to the groove 11170. The staple cartridge 11100 may comprise a support portion 11110 and a fabric thickness compensator 11120. The fabric thickness compensator 11120 may be held in position by one or more longitudinal rows of pegs or teeth 11119 extending from the platform 11111 of the support portion 11110. The longitudinal rows of piles 11119 can be fitted inside the fabric thickness compensator 11120.

[000915] Referring to Figure 273, in addition to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 11020 of the staple cartridge 11000 can be progressively released from the support portion 11010 when the staples are ejected from the staple cavities 10012 defined therein. More particularly, in addition to the above, staples positioned in staple cavities 10012 may be ejected sequentially between the proximal end 11001 of the staple cartridge 11000 and the distal end 11002 of the staple cartridge 11000 so that when the staples are being ejected , the clamps may apply an upward shifting force to the fabric thickness compensator 11020 which acts to push the fabric thickness compensator 11020 out of the tracks 11019. In such circumstances, the proximal end 11006 of the fabric thickness compensator 11020 can be released from support portion 11010 when staples are ejected from more proximal staple cavities 10012. Fabric thickness compensator 11020 can then be progressively released from support portion 11010 as staples are progressively ejected from support portion 11010 between the proximal end 11001 and the distal end 11002 of the staple cartridge 11000. When the staples positioned within the most distal staple cavities 10012 are ejected from the support portion 11010, the distal end 11007 of the tissue thickness compensator 11020 may be released from the support portion 11010. Referring to Figure 275, the Fabric thickness compensator 11120 can be progressively released from the pegs 1119 extending from the support portion 11110 when the staples are progressively ejected from the staple cartridge between the proximal end 11101 and the distal end 11102.

[000916] As discussed above, a fabric thickness compensator may be progressively released from the support portion of a staple cartridge when the staples are progressively ejected from the support portion and contact the fabric thickness compensator. Staple legs, such as staple legs 10032, for example, may be able to pass through the fabric thickness compensator without releasing the fabric thickness compensator from the support portion. In such cases, the fabric thickness compensator may remain engaged with the support portion until the bases of the staples, such as the bases 10031, contact the fabric thickness compensator and push it up. Optionally, however, lugs and/or other retaining elements that extend from the support portion, for example, may oppose release of the fabric thickness compensator from the support portion. As described in more detail below, a support portion may comprise retaining elements which may be configured to progressively release a fabric thickness compensator from the support portion as staples are progressively fired from the staple cartridge. Referring now to Figure 283, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 11200, for example, may comprise a support portion 11210 that includes retaining members 11213 that can be configured to releasably hold a fabric thickness compensator. 11220 (Figure 284) to support portion 11210. Retaining elements 11213 may be positioned at the ends of each clamp cavity 11212, for example, wherein each retaining element 11213 may comprise a guide groove 11216 defined therein which is configured to slidably receive a staple leg 10032 from a staple 10030. In such cases, both staple legs 10032 and retaining members 11213 may be configured to releasably retain the fabric thickness compensator 11220 to the portion 11210. In use, now referring to Figure 284, the clamp drivers 10040 contained within the support portion 11210 can be directed toward the back. by a slider 10050 as described above, wherein the clamp drivers 10040 can be configured to contact the retaining elements 11213, at least partially detach the retaining elements 11213 from the support portion 11210, and displace the elements. retainer 11213 out and away from clips 10030 and clip cavities 11212. When retaining members 11213 are detached from support portion 11210 and/or displaced outwardly as shown in Figure 284, retaining members 11213 may no longer able to retain the fabric thickness compensator 11220 to the support portion 11210 and, as a result, the fabric thickness compensator 11220 may be released from the support portion 11210. Similar to the above, the compensator of fabric thickness 11220 may be progressively released from the support portion 11210 as the staples 10030 are progressively ejected from the staple cartridge towards not to an anvil, such as the 11260 anvil, for example. The clamp drivers 10040 may contact the retaining elements 11213 when the top surfaces of the clamp drivers 10040 are co-planar, or at least substantially co-planar, with the platform surface 11211 of the support portion. 11210, for example. In such cases, fabric thickness compensator 11220 may be released from support portion 11210 simultaneously and/or immediately before staples 10030 are formed to their fully formed, or fully fired, configuration. For example, with particular reference to Figure 285, the drivers 10040 can be over-directed so that they are pushed above the platform surface 11211 to completely form the clamps 10030 and, in the process of being over-directed, loosen the elements. retainer 11213 of support portion 11210. Again with reference to Figure 284, retaining members 11213 may extend over, or protrude, into clamp cavities 11212 before being released or moved outward so that the actuators 10040 can contact the retaining elements 11213 once the actuators 10040 reach the platform surface 11211. In any case, when the fabric thickness compensator 11220 has been released from the support portion 11210, now with reference to Figure 285 , the support portion 11210 is retractable from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 11220.

[000917] As described above, a compressible tissue thickness compensator of a staple cartridge can be progressively released from a support portion, or cartridge body, of the staple cartridge when staples are fired, or dispensed, from the staple cartridge. Bobby pins. In various circumstances, such release may comprise a progressive loosening of the tissue thickness compensator from the support portion whereby, in some circumstances, a complete detachment of the tissue thickness compensator from the support portion may not occur until the anvil is opened and the support portion is spaced away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator. Referring now to Figure 289, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 11300, for example, may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 11320 that is releasably retained to a support portion 11310. The support portion 11310 may comprising a plurality of retaining members 11313 extending therefrom which are configured to releasably compress and secure the longitudinal sides of fabric thickness compensator 11320 to support portion 11310. For example, each retaining member 11313 may comprise an inwardly facing channel or slot 11316 which may be configured to receive the longitudinal sides of the fabric thickness compensator 11320. In various circumstances, a plurality of retaining members 11313 may extend along a first longitudinal side of the support portion 11310 and a plurality of retaining elements 11313 may extend along a second longitudinal side of the the support portion 11310 wherein, in certain circumstances, the retaining elements 11313 may be configured to prevent, or at least limit, relative lateral movement between the fabric thickness compensator 11320 and the support portion 11310, and further , prevent, or at least limit, the premature release of the fabric thickness compensator 11320 from the support portion 11310. The retaining elements 11313 may be integrally formed with the support portion 11310 and, with reference to Figure 290, the retention elements 11313 may be integrally formed with the support portion 11310. retainer 11313 may be configured to detach, or at least partially detach, from support portion 11310 so as to allow fabric thickness compensator 11320 to detach from support portion 11310, as illustrated in Figure 291, for example. An anvil, such as the anvil 11360, for example, can be configured to compress the fabric thickness compensator 11320 and, in response to pressure generated within the fabric thickness compensator 11320, the fabric thickness compensator 11320 can expand laterally. to at least partially release, or disengage, retaining elements 11313 from fabric thickness compensator 11320. Advancement of a knife element, discussed above, through anvil 11360 and staple cartridge 11300 can dispense with the staples contained therein and , simultaneously squeezing the anvil 11360 and the staple cartridge 11300 closer together, which can apply added compressive pressure to the fabric thickness compensator 11320 and thus cause the retaining elements 11313 to sequentially release when the knife element passes through the 11300 staple cartridge.

[000918] Now referring to Figures 292-294, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 11400, for example, may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 11420 removably secured to a support portion 11410. Clips 11400 may comprise one or more retainer bars 11413 which may be configured to secure the longitudinal sides of fabric thickness compensator 11420 to platform surface 11411. For example, each retainer bar 11413 may comprise opposing arms 11418 which may define a channel 11416 each other. In such cases, one of the arms 11418 can be configured to extend over the fabric thickness compensator 11420 and the other arm 11418 can be configured to extend under a lip 11419 that extends from the support portion 11410. primarily in Figure 292, the groove 11416 of each retainer bar 11413 can be sized and configured to apply a compressive force to the longitudinal sides of the fabric thickness compensator 11420 before the staple cartridge 11400 is used. During use, with reference primarily to Figure 293, the staple cartridge 11400 can be positioned within a staple cartridge groove and, once the staple cartridge 11400 has been properly positioned, an anvil such as the anvil 11460, for example, can be moved to a position where it can compress the fabric thickness compensator 11420. Similar to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 11420, when compressed, can expand laterally, or outwardly. , and, as a result, release retaining bars 11413 from staple cartridge 11400. Closing anvil 11460 may not, or may not completely release, retaining bars 11413 from staple cartridge. For example, advancing a firing bar described above through staple cartridge 11400 can dispense staples 10030 from support portion 11410 and simultaneously press anvil 11460 and staple cartridge 11400 closer together. the other to apply a compressive force to the fabric thickness compensator 11420 that is sufficient to cause the fabric thickness compensator 11420 to expand laterally and release the retaining bars 11413 from the staple cartridge 11400. When the retaining bars 11413 have detached from the staple cartridge 11400, with reference to Figure 294, the support portion 11410 can be moved away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 11420 and removed from the surgical site. Alternatively, now referring to Figure 295, a staple cartridge 11400' may comprise retainer bars 11413' which, similarly to the above, may comprise arms 11418' extending therefrom. For example, each of the arms 11418' may comprise a triangular-shaped locking cutout 11417' which may be configured to releasably lock the retainer bars 11413' to the staple cartridge 11400'. More particularly, the support portion 11410' of the staple cartridge 11400' may comprise undercuts 11419' which, in cooperation with the triangular-shaped locking cuts 11417', may be configured to releasably retain the retaining bars 11413' along the staple cartridge 11400 and prevent fabric thickness compensator 11420 from prematurely detaching from support portion 11410'. During use, similar to the above, retainer bars 11413' may be detached from staple cartridge 11400' when sufficient compressive force is applied to fabric thickness compensator 11420, for example.

[000919] In various circumstances, as described above and again with reference to Figures 259 and 260, the slider 10050 of the staple cartridge 10000 and the trigger member 10052 of a surgical stapling instrument can be moved from the proximal end 10001 of the staple cartridge 10001. clips 10000 to the distal end 10002 (Figure 219) of the clip cartridge 10000 to dispense clips 10030 from the support portion 10010. In at least one such circumstance, each clip 10030 may be moved from a non-fired position to a fired position and ejected from the support portion 10010 to capture the entirety of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 against the tissue positioned between the anvil 10060 and the staple cartridge 10000. In certain circumstances, a surgeon may not need to fire all the staples 10030 from the cartridge. of staples 10000 and the surgeon can stop the progression of the slider 10050 and the trigger bar 10052 at a point located between the proximal end 10001 and the distal end 10002 of the staple cartridge 10000. In such circumstances, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may only be partially implanted to the tissue T and in order to release the non-implanted portion of the thickness compensator of tissue 10020 from the support portion 10010, the surgeon may pull the support portion 10010 away from the partially implanted tissue thickness compensator 10020 so that the non-implanted portion is separated or removed from the support portion 10010. are suitable in various circumstances, an improvement is illustrated in Figures 300 to 302 in which a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 11520 of staple cartridge 11500, for example, may comprise a plurality of connected segments that can be configured to detach from each other. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 11520 may comprise a first or more proximal segment 11520a, a second segment 11520b detachably connected to the first segment 11520a, a third segment 11520c detachably connected to the second segment 11520b, a fourth segment 11520d detachably connected to third segment 11520c, and a fifth segment 11520e detachably connected to fourth segment 11520d, for example. Fabric thickness compensator 11520 may comprise at least one thin section 11529 positioned between any two adjacent segments 11520a-11520e which may be configured to define a predetermined break or separation point at which the fabric thickness compensator segments may separate. each other. A fabric thickness compensator may include any suitable arrangement of perforations, thin sections, and/or any other means for creating a separation point within the fabric thickness compensator. Referring primarily to Figure 301, an anvil 11560 is illustrated in a closed position and the firing member 10052 is illustrated as having been partially advanced through the staple cartridge 11500 so that the staples 10030 underlying the first segment 11520a, the second segment 11520b, and third segment 11520c have been fired to capture fabric thickness compensator 11520 against fabric T. In such a position, firing member 10052 has not yet been advanced to dispense staples 10030 underlying fourth segment 11520d and fifth segment 11520e, for example. Referring now to Figure 302, the anvil 11560 has been moved to an open position and the support portion 11510 of the staple cartridge 11500 has been moved away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator portion 11520. As illustrated in Figure 302, the thin section 11529 (Figure 300) located between the third segment 11520c and the fourth segment 11520d allows the non-implanted portion of the tissue thickness compensator 11520 to separate from the implanted portion.

[000920] In addition to the above, a staple cartridge may comprise a plurality of fasteners configured to releasably secure a fabric thickness compensator to a support portion of the staple cartridge. The support portion may comprise a plurality of openings defined in the platform surface, for example, where fasteners can extend through the fabric thickness compensator and can be releasably retained in the openings of the support portion. In use, the fasteners may be progressively released from the support portion as the clips are progressively ejected from the support portion. For example, fasteners may be implanted with the tissue thickness compensator and fasteners may be formed from at least one bioabsorbable material, for example. Fasteners may detach from the support portion after the tissue thickness compensator has been at least partially implanted and when the support portion is pulled away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator. Referring now to Figures 323 to 325, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 11600, for example, may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 11620 releasably mounted to a support portion 11610 by a plurality of fasteners 11613. Each fastener 11613 may comprise a first end 11618 fitted within and/or otherwise engaged with the fabric thickness compensator 11620, a second end 11618 engaged with the support portion 11610, and a connector 11616 which connects the first end 11618 to the second end 11618. Fasteners 11613 may extend through a knife slit 11615 defined in support portion 11610. In use, firing member 10052, described above, can move a knife point through knife slit 11615 in portion support 11610 and cut fasteners 11613 so as to release fabric thickness compensator 11620 from support portion 11610. For example, firing bar 10052 may be advanced from a proximal end 11601 of the staple cartridge 11600 to a distal end 11602 of the staple cartridge 11600 so as to, one, advance the slider 10050 in distal position and progressively fire the staples 10030 as discussed above, and, two , progressively cutting and/or breaking fasteners 11613 to progressively release fabric thickness compensator 11620 from support portion 11610. Similar to the above, fabric thickness compensator 11620 may comprise a plurality of removable segments 11620a 11620e which may each be secured to the support portion 11610 by one or more fasteners 11613, for example. In the case where the triggering member 10052 is stopped between the proximal end 11601 and the distal end 11602 of the staple cartridge 11600, as illustrated in Figure 324, the fasteners 11613 can help secure the non-implanted portion of the tissue thickness compensator. 11620 to the support portion 11610 after the anvil 11660 is opened and the support portion 11610 is moved away from the fabric T, as shown in Figure 325. In addition to the above, the cutting edge 10053 of the firing member 10052 can be configured to cut and /or break fasteners 11613. Alternatively, now referring to Figures 327 and 328, a staple-dispensing slider, such as slider 11650, for example, may comprise a knife edge 11653 that can be configured to cut connectors 11616 of fasteners 11613 as slider 11650 passes through staple cartridge 11600. For example, each connector 11616 may comprise a cylindrical member extending between the ends. T-shaped adhesion 11618 of fasteners 11613 wherein knife edge 11653 may comprise a concave profile 11653 which may be configured to receive cylindrical connector 11616, for example.

[000921] As discussed above, a staple cartridge can be loaded into a staple cartridge slot of a surgical stapling instrument. In various circumstances, a surgeon or other physician may insert the staple cartridge into the staple cartridge groove by applying downward force on the staple cartridge to hold the staple cartridge in place. In some such circumstances, the physician may place his thumb, for example, on the top surface of the staple cartridge to apply such downward force. The top surface of the staple cartridge may comprise the top surface of a fabric thickness compensator wherein, as described above, the fabric thickness compensator may be compressible and, in certain embodiments, the downward force applied to the compensator Tissue Thickness Compensator may cause the Tissue Thickness Compensator to compress the point at which the physician's thumb contacts the tips of staples stored within the support portion. In accordance with the invention, a staple cartridge applicator can be used to insert a staple cartridge into a staple cartridge slot that may be configured to prevent, or at least limit, the physician's ability to touch the staples in the cartridge. of staples. After the staple cartridge has been properly positioned within the staple cartridge groove, as described in more detail below, the applicator can be detached from the staple cartridge.

[000922] Now referring to Figures 305 and 306, a staple cartridge applicator may comprise a rigid cap, such as cap 10080, for example, which can be attached to a staple cartridge 10000. In addition to the above, the cap 10080 can be configured to prevent, or at least inhibit, a physician's thumb, for example, from contacting the tips of staples 10030 positioned inside the staple cartridge 10000 when the staple cartridge 10000 is inserted into a groove. of staple cartridge. Referring now to Figures 307 and 308, cover 10080 may extend over top surface 10021, or at least a portion of top surface 10021, of fabric thickness compensator 10020, and may include, one, a surface bottom surface 10081 which may extend over and/or may be in a position bordering the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and, two, a top surface 10082 which may provide a propulsion surface for the clinician to apply downward force and it, for example. In use, the clinician may take a handle portion 10084 of the cap 10080, align the support portion 10010 of the staple cartridge 10000 with the staple cartridge groove, and at least partially insert the staple cartridge 10000 into the cartridge groove. of staples. Thereafter, the clinician can fully seat the staple cartridge 10000 in the staple cartridge groove by applying downward force to the top surface 10082 of the cap 10880 which can transmit the downward force directly to the support portion 10010. For example, the cover 10080 may comprise proximal supports 10087 which may extend downwardly and contact the platform surface 10011 of the support portion. Cap 10080 may further comprise a distal support portion 10083 which may be configured to be in a position abutting tip 10003. When downward force is applied to cap 10080, downward force may be transmitted through proximal supports 10087 and/or or distal support portion 10083 without transmitting, or at least not substantially transmitting, downward force to support portion 10010 through tissue thickness compensator 10020. In various circumstances, as a result of the foregoing, the physician may not enter directly in contact with the fabric thickness compensator 10020. Also as a result of the above, the cap 10080 may not compress, or at least substantially compress, the fabric thickness compensator 10020 when the staple cartridge 10000 is being inserted into the staple cartridge channel. In accordance with the invention, a cover may comprise any suitable number of supports, which are configured to transmit a downward force to the support portion without transmitting, or at least substantially transmitting, downward force through the fabric thickness compensator. Brackets may extend around the distal end, proximal end, and/or longitudinal sides of the tissue thickness compensator. Supports can extend through fabric thickness compensator. For example, the supports may extend through openings within the fabric thickness compensator and may be adjacent to the platform of the support portion. At least some of the supports may not be in contact with the platform before downward force is applied to the cover; however, the cover may be configured to flex, or move, downwards until the supports contact the platform of the support portion. At this point, flexing or downward movement of the lid can be prevented, or at least substantially prevented.

[000923] As described above, cover 10080 can be attached to staple cartridge 10000 and can be used to manipulate the position of staple cartridge 10000. Cover 10080 can comprise any suitable amount of gripping elements that can be configured to hold releasably cap 10080 to support portion 10010 of staple cartridge 10000, for example. For example, cover 10080 may additionally comprise one or more retaining elements, such as locking arms 10088 and/or 10089, for example. Locking arms 10089 may be configured to extend around the sides of nose 10003 and engage the bottom surface 10009 (Figure 306) of nose 10003. Similarly, locking arms 10088 may extend around the sides of the tails. latch projections 10008 extending from support portion 10010 and engage the bottom surfaces of latch projections 10008. These latch arms may be configured to position cover 10080 over the zone or region in which staples are stored within. of the support portion 10010. In either case, when the staple cartridge 10000 has been properly positioned, the cap 10080 can be detached from the staple cartridge 10000. The clinician can apply an upward lifting force to the handle 10084 in order to release the distal end of the cap 10080 of the distal end 10002 of the staple cartridge 10000. For example, the locking arms 10088 and 10089 may flex outward when the handle 10084 is raised so that lock arms 10088 and 10089 can flex around lock projections 10008 and tip 10003, respectively. Thereafter, the proximal end of the cap 10080 can be lifted away from the proximal end 10001 of the staple cartridge and the cap 10080 can be pulled away from the staple cartridge 10000.

[000924] Now referring to Figures 309 and 310, a staple cartridge applicator, such as the 10680 staple cartridge applicator, for example, can be configured to position an upper fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator. fabric 10690, for example, relative to an anvil in addition to positioning a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 10600, for example, within a staple cartridge channel. Similar to the above, the applicator 10680 may comprise locking arms 10688 that are releasably engaged with locking projections 10608 that extend from a support portion 10610 of the staple cartridge 10600 so that the applicator 10680 may be held in position over a tissue thickness compensator 10620 of the staple cartridge 10600. The upper tissue thickness compensator 10690 may be removably attached to the staple cartridge applicator 10680 so that the anvil of an instrument such as the anvil 10060, for example, can be closed over the applicator 10680, engage the tissue thickness compensator 10690, and release the tissue thickness compensator 10690 from the applicator 10680. The tissue thickness compensator 10690 and /or the anvil 10060 may comprise one or more retaining members which may be configured to releasably secure the tissue thickness compensator 10690 to the anvil at 10060. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 10690 may comprise a longitudinal track 10695, for example, extending from the top surface 10691 of the fabric thickness compensator 10690 that can be received within a knife slot longitudinal track 10065 defined within anvil 10060. Fabric thickness compensator 10690 and longitudinal track 10695 may be comprised of any suitable compressible material, such as those described in this patent application, for example, wherein longitudinal track 10695 may be compressed and /or jammed in knife slot 10065, for example. When the anvil 10060 has been engaged with the fabric thickness compensator 10690, the anvil 10060 can be returned to an open position and, in such circumstances, the fabric thickness compensator 10690 can detach from the applicator 10680. Thereafter, the applicator 10680 can be detached from the staple cartridge 10600 so that the anvil 10060 and the staple cartridge 10600 can be positioned relative to the fabric to be stapled and/or cut. During use, a staple-dispensing slider, such as the 10050 slider (Figure 236), for example, can be advanced distally through the staple cartridge 10600 by a triggering member 10052 (Figure 236), for example, in order to to eject the staples from the 10060 staple cartridge as mentioned above. When the staples are deformed, each staple can capture a portion of the fabric thickness compensator 10690 against the top surface of the fabric and a portion of the fabric thickness compensator 10620 against the bottom surface of the fabric. At the same time, the trigger member 10052 can advance a knife edge 10053 (Figure 236) through the fabric thickness compensator 10620 and/or the fabric thickness compensator 10690 whereby the knife edge 10053 may be advanced through the fabric thickness compensator 10690. longitudinal track 10695 so as to cut track 10695 and progressively release tissue thickness compensator 10690 from anvil 10060. After the clamps have been dispensed, anvil 10060 can be opened again and moved away from implanted tissue thickness compensator 10690 and, similarly, the support portion 10610 of the staple cartridge 10600 may be spaced from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 10620. In addition to the above, the tissue thickness compensator 10620 and/or the tissue thickness compensator 10690 may comprise a plurality of removable segments that can be configured to separate from each other in the event that only portions of the fabric thickness compensators 10620 and 10690 are deployed by the clamps.

[000925] In addition to the foregoing, the applicator 10680 may comprise one or more retaining elements that may be configured to releasably secure the fabric thickness compensator 10690 to the applicator 10680. For example, with reference primarily to Figure 310, the applicator 10680 may comprise a longitudinal retaining rail 10685 which may be configured to be received in a longitudinal retaining slot 10694 defined in the bottom surface 10692 of the fabric thickness compensator 10690 in a snap-fit manner, for example. In various circumstances, retaining rail 10685 and retaining slot 10694 may be configured to retain fabric thickness compensator 10690 to applicator 10680 until sufficient lifting force is applied to fabric thickness compensator 10690 by anvil 10060 as described above. For example, retainer rail 10685 extending from applicator 10680 may additionally comprise end stops 10686 positioned at the proximal and distal ends of retainer rail 10685 which may be configured to prevent, or at least limit, relative longitudinal movement. between the fabric thickness compensator 10690 and the applicator 10680. Again referring to Figure 310, one or more adhesives, such as the longitudinal adhesive strips 10693, for example, can be placed on the contact surface 10691 of the fabric thickness compensator 10690 so that when the anvil 10060 contacts the fabric thickness compensator 10690 as described above, the adhesive may releasably secure the fabric thickness compensator 10690 to the anvil 10060. Optionally, one or more adhesives may be used in addition to or instead of the compressible retaining elements described above, for example. One or more adhesives may be used to releasably attach a fabric thickness compensator to a staple cartridge applicator. Referring now to Figure 310A, cover 10080, for example, may include one or more adhesive pads 12185 that can be configured to releasably retain an upper fabric thickness compensator, such as fabric thickness compensator 12190, for example. , to the top surface 10082 of the cap 10080. For example, similarly to what has been described above, an anvil may be closed over the fabric thickness compensator 12190 to engage the longitudinal retaining rail 12195 of the fabric thickness compensator 12190. fabric 12190. A release mechanism can be positioned between the fabric thickness compensator 12190 and the cover 10080, which can be used to break the adhesive bonds holding the fabric thickness compensator 12190 to the cover 10080 and release the fabric thickness compensator 12190. fabric thickness 12190 of cover 10080. The release mechanism may comprise a pull tab 12196 and a loop 12197 wherein the loop 12197 may comprise the first and the second ends which are attached to the pull tab 12196. The loop 12197 may comprise a suture, for example, which may define a perimeter that circumscribes the adhesive blocks 12185 so that when the pull tab 12196 is pulled distally , the suture may slide between the tissue thickness compensator 12190 and the cap 10080 and contact the tissue blocks 12185. In such circumstances, the suture may at least one of separate the adhesive blocks 12185 from the tissue thickness compensator. 12190, separate adhesive blocks 12185 from cover 10080, and/or cut adhesive blocks 12185, for example.

[000926] Now referring to Figure 311, a staple cartridge may comprise a support portion 10710, for example, which, similarly to the above, may comprise a longitudinal knife slot 10715 extending therethrough. For example, a staple cartridge applicator, such as applicator 10780, for example, may comprise a longitudinal alignment retaining member 10786 which may extend into knife slot 10715 in support portion 10710. Retaining member 10786 may be configured to engage the side walls of the knife slot 10715 in a snap-fit manner, for example, so that the applicator 10780 may be releasably retained to the support portion 10710. Optionally, although not illustrated, a The first portion of a fabric thickness compensator may be positioned on a first side of the retaining member 10786 and a second portion of the fabric thickness compensator may be positioned on an opposite side, or second side, of the retaining member 10786. In a similar manner to the above, the first and second portions of the fabric thickness compensator may be mounted to the support portion 10710 of the staple cartridge via the retaining elements 10013, for example. Also similarly to the above, an upper fabric thickness compensator 10790 may be removably mounted to the applicator 10780 via a longitudinal retaining member 10785 that extends from the loading surface 10782 of the applicator 10780 where the member retainer 10785 may be releasably snap-fit to a longitudinal slot 10794 defined in the bottom surface 10792 of fabric thickness compensator 10790, for example. Optionally, also similar to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 10790 may additionally comprise a longitudinal retaining member 10795 extending from the top surface 10791 of the releasable fabric thickness compensator 10790 in the longitudinal knife slot 10065 defined in the anvil 10060, for example. For example, the longitudinal retaining member 10795 may comprise a wedge-shaped cross section comprising an upper portion that is larger than a lower portion, wherein the lower portion may secure the retaining element 10795 to the fabric thickness compensator 10790, for example.

[000927] Now referring to Figures 312 and 313, a staple cartridge 10800 comprising a support portion 10810 and a fabric thickness compensator 10820 can be loaded into a staple cartridge channel with a staple cartridge applicator 10880 , for example. Similar to the above, the staple cartridge applicator 10880 can also be configured to position an upper fabric thickness compensator 10890, for example, relative to an anvil, such as the anvil 10060, for example, so that, when the anvil 10060 is closed, the anvil 10060 may contact and engage the fabric thickness compensator 10890. The fabric thickness compensator 10890 may comprise a plurality of retaining legs 10895 extending from the surface top edge 10891 of fabric thickness compensator 10890 which may be configured to engage anvil 10060 and releasably retain fabric thickness compensator 10890 to anvil 10060. For example, legs 10895 may be arranged in a longitudinal row wherein each leg 10895 may comprise at least one foot configured to enter and engage the knife slot 10065 defined in the anvil 10060. Some of the feet of the legs 10895 may extend in one direction while other feet can extend in another direction. Some of the feet may extend in opposite directions. In any case, when the anvil 10060 has been engaged with the tissue thickness compensator 10890, now referring to Figures 313 and 314, the anvil 10060 can be reopened and the clinician can move the staple cartridge applicator 10880 in the opposite direction. of fabric thickness compensators 10820 and 10890. Subsequently, referring to Figure 314A, the upper fabric thickness compensator 10890 may be positioned on a first side of a target fabric and the fabric thickness compensator 10820, which may comprise a bottom fabric thickness compensator, can be positioned on a second side of fabric. After the fabric thickness compensators 10820 and 10890 have been properly positioned, now referring to Figure 314B, a knife edge of a firing member, such as knife edge 10053, for example, can be displaced through the fabric and fabric thickness compensators. Referring now to Figure 318, a staple cartridge applicator, such as the applicator 12280, for example, may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 12290 detachably mounted thereto, which may be, similarly to the above, inserted into a staple cartridge groove, as illustrated in Figure 319, and engaged by anvil 10060 when anvil 10060 is moved to a closed position. For example, fabric thickness compensator 12290 may comprise a plurality of retaining members 12295 extending upwardly from the top surface 12291 of fabric thickness compensator 12290 wherein each retaining member 12295 may comprise a plurality of flexible legs 12296 which may be configured to be inserted into knife slot 10065 in anvil 10060. Referring primarily to Figures 321 and 322, flexible legs 12296 of each retaining member 12295 may be separated by a gap 12298 so that when legs 12296 are inserted into knife slot 10065, legs 12296 can flex inwardly and then resiliently return outward when the flared feet of flexible legs 12296 have passed through knife slot 10065. The enlarged feet of flexible legs 12296 can flex behind opposing retaining edges 12297 set on anvil 10060 and as a result of leg interaction 12296 and flanges 12297, the fabric thickness compensator 12290 may be retained on the anvil 10060. Thereafter, the staple cartridge applicator 12280 may be moved away from the fabric thickness compensator 12290, as illustrated in Figure 320. In use, when the tissue thickness compensator 12290 has been implanted against the tissue by staples dispensed by the staple cartridge 10000, for example, the anvil 10060 can be reopened, and when the anvil 10060 is moved away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 12290, legs 12296 of retaining members 12995 can flex inwardly so that they can be pulled out of knife slot 10065.

[000928] Now referring to Figures 315 and 316, a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 11990, for example, can be loaded longitudinally into an anvil, such as the anvil 11960, for example. More particularly, the tissue thickness compensator 11990 may comprise one or more longitudinal rails 11995 which can be inserted into a distal opening in a knife slot 11965 of the anvil 11960 and then pushed proximally until the tissue thickness compensator 11990 has has been properly seated on the anvil 11960. For example, each rail 11995 may comprise a longitudinal retaining foot 11996 which may be positioned behind a longitudinal retaining lip 11997 which at least partially defines the knife slot 11965, for example. As illustrated in Figure 316, feet 11996 may extend in opposite directions so as to be positioned behind retaining lips 11997 positioned on opposite sides of knife slot 11965. In accordance with the invention, a longitudinal span 11998 may be defined between the rails 11995, which may be configured to allow the rails 11995 to flex inwardly towards each other when the fabric thickness compensator 11990 is detached from the anvil 11960. Now referring to Figure 317, a fabric thickness compensator, such as fabric thickness compensator 12090, for example, may comprise one or more locking arms 12098 that may extend around the sides of an anvil, such as anvil 12060, for example. In use, locking arms 12098 may engage anvil 12060 and releasably retain tissue thickness compensator 12090 to anvil 12060. For example, anvil 12060 may comprise one or more notches, or locking pads, 12097 , for example, which can each be configured to receive a foot that extends from a locking arm 12098. In use, the arms 12098 can flex outward and detach from the anvil 12060 when the anvil 12060 is pulled away. of the tissue thickness compensator 12090 after the tissue thickness compensator 12090 has been at least partially implanted.

[000929] As described above, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise a staple cartridge groove configured to receive a staple cartridge, an anvil rotationally coupled to the staple cartridge groove, and a trigger member comprising a tip. blade that is movable with respect to the anvil and staple cartridge groove. In use, a staple cartridge can be positioned inside the staple cartridge groove and, after the staple cartridge has been at least partially used, the staple cartridge can be removed from the staple cartridge groove and replaced with a new cartridge. of staples. For example, the staple cartridge groove, anvil, and/or the triggering member of the surgical stapling instrument can be reused with the replacement staple cartridge. Alternatively, a staple cartridge may comprise a portion of a disposable loading unit assembly that may include a staple cartridge channel, an anvil, and/or a firing member, for example, that can be replaced along with the cartridge. of staples as part of the replacement disposable charging unit assembly. Certain disposable charging unit assemblies are disclosed in US Patent Application Serial No. 12/031,817 entitled END EFFECTOR COUPLING ARRANGEMENTS FOR A SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING INSTRUMENT, which was filed February 15, 2008, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by way of reference. Referring now to Figure 370, a disposable loading unit, such as the disposable loading unit 12500, for example, may comprise a support portion 12510, an anvil 12560 rotationally coupled to the support portion 12510, and an elongate rod 12570 extending therefrom. support portion 12510. Similar to the staple cartridges described herein, support portion 12510 may comprise a plurality of staple cavities 10012 and a staple, such as a staple 10030, for example, positioned in each cavity to 10012 staples, for example. Disposable loading unit 12500 may further comprise a triggering member 12552 which can be advanced distally to move anvil 12560 from an open position, as shown in Figure 370, to a closed position. Disposable loading unit 12500 may additionally comprise a tissue thickness compensator 12520 positioned in and/or attached to support portion 12510 whereby, when anvil 12560 is in its closed position, anvil 12560 may be positioned opposite the fabric thickness compensator 12520 and, in some cases, anvil 12560 may at least partially compress fabric thickness compensator 12520 when anvil 12560 is in its closed position. In either case, the trigger member 12552 may be advanced further so as to eject the staples from the support portion 12510. When the staples are ejected, the staples can be deformed by the anvil 12560 and entrap at least a portion of the thickness compensator 12560. 12520 fabric on them. Thereafter, the trigger member 12552 can be retracted proximally, the anvil 12560 can be reopened, and the support portion 12510 can be moved away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 12520.

[000930] In addition to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 12520 may be detachably mounted to the support portion 12510. For example, the support portion 12510 may comprise a longitudinal retaining rail 12526 mounted on one of its sides. each track 12526 may comprise one or more openings 12528 which may be configured to receive at least a portion of the fabric thickness compensator 12520. When the fabric thickness compensator 12520 has been at least partially deployed, the fabric thickness compensator 12520 Fabric thickness 12520 may come out of openings 12528 when support portion 12510 is pulled away. Referring now to Figures 371 to 373, a disposable loading unit 12600 may comprise a support portion 12610, a fabric thickness compensator 12620 detachably mounted to the support portion 12610, and one or more retention rails 12626 that may be configured to extend under fabric thickness compensator 12620 and mount fabric thickness compensator 12620 to support portion 12610. Each retaining rail 12626 may comprise a plurality of retaining hooks 12628, for example, which may be engaged to the support portion 12610 through retention slots 12614, for example, defined in the support portion 12610. During use, for example, the fabric thickness compensator 12620 may be configured to detach from the retention rails 12626 after the compensator thickness 12620 has been at least partially implanted and the support portion 12610 is spaced from the fabric thickness compensator 1262 0. Referring now to Figures 374 to 376, a disposable loading unit 12700 may comprise one or more retaining rails 12726 which may each comprise a lower bar 12725 which may extend under the fabric thickness compensator 12720 and an upper bar 12727 which can extend over the top surface 12621 of the fabric thickness compensator 12620. The fabric thickness compensator 12620 may be at least partially compressed between the upper bars 12727 and the lower bars 12725 so that the tracks retainer 12726 can releasably hold fabric thickness compensator 12620 relative to support portion 12610. For example, each retainer rail 12726 may comprise one or more retaining hooks 12728 that can be engaged with the retaining portion 12726. bracket 12610 to retain retaining rails 12726 to support portion 12610.

[000931] Referring now to Figures 377 and 378, a disposable loading unit 12800 may comprise a retention member 12822 which may be configured to mount a fabric thickness compensator 12620 to the support portion 12610. For example, the retainer 12822 may comprise a sheet of material positioned against the platform surface 12611 of the support portion, wherein the fabric thickness compensator 12620 may be secured to the sheet of material by at least one adhesive, for example. Retaining member 12822 may further comprise a longitudinal retaining rail 12825 configured to extend downwardly into a knife slot 12615 defined in support portion 12610. For example, retaining rail 12825 may be sized and configured to to be compressed between the side walls of the knife slot 12615. In use, the trigger member 12552 may comprise a knife tip that can pass through the knife slot 12615 when the trigger member 12552 is displaced distally and crosses the trim tab. fabric thickness 12620 and retaining rail 12825 longitudinally. Further, in use, staples ejected from support portion 12610 may penetrate retention member 12822, fabric thickness compensator 12820, and fabric positioned between fabric thickness compensator 12820 and anvil 12560. retention 12822 may be comprised of a biocompatible and/or bioabsorbable material. Retaining member 12822 may be comprised of a material sufficiently compressible to comprise a fabric thickness compensator underlying fabric thickness compensator 12620. Referring now to Figures 379 to 381, a disposable loading unit 12900 may comprise a loading assembly including a lower portion 12922 detachably attachable to the support portion 12610, an upper portion 12990 detachably attachable to the anvil 12560, and a flexible hinge 12991 that connects the lower portion 12922 and the upper portion 12990. Similar to the above, a longitudinal retaining rail 12825 can extend downwardly from the lower portion 12922 and into the knife slot 12615 defined in the support portion 12610 so that the lower portion 12922 can be releasably retained to the support portion 12610. Similarly, a longitudinal retaining rail 12995 may be extend upwardly from the top portion 12990 into a knife slot defined in the anvil 12560 so that the top portion 12990 can be releasably retained on the anvil 12560. As illustrated in Figures 380 and 381, a thickness compensator of fabric 12620 may be mounted to the lower portion 12922 of the loading assembly whereby, in order to position the fabric thickness compensator 12620 with respect to the support portion 12610, a physician could flex the upper portion 12990 and lower portion 12922 one in toward the other, position the loading assembly between the anvil 12560 and the support portion 12610, and release the flexed loading assembly so that it can resiliently expand and pull the upper portion 12990 against the anvil 12560 and the lower portion 12922 against support portion 12610. Referring now to Figures 382 to 384, the loading assembly may additionally comprise one or more locking, such as locking hooks 12994, for example, extending therefrom, which may be configured to releasably connect the upper portion 12990 to the anvil 12560 and/or releasably connect the lower portion 12922 to the support portion 12610 .

[000932] Now referring to Figure 385, a disposable loading unit 15900, for example, may comprise an anvil 15960 and a staple cartridge groove 15970 wherein the staple cartridge groove 15970 can rotate relative to the anvil 15960. For example, anvil 15960 may not have the ability to rotate. The tissue can be positioned between the 15960 anvil and the 15970 staple cartridge channel, and later, the 15970 staple cartridge channel can be rotated toward the tissue to hold the tissue against the anvil. For example, the disposable loading unit 15900 may further comprise a fabric thickness compensator 15920 which may be configured to contact fabric.

[000933] As discussed above and with reference to Figure 332, a staple cartridge, such as staple cartridge 10000, for example, may comprise a support portion 10010 and a fabric thickness compensator 10020 with a plurality of staples 10030 can be at least partially stored in support portion 10010 and can extend into fabric thickness compensator 10020 when staples 10030 are in their unfired position. The ends of the staples 10030 do not protrude from the fabric thickness compensator 10020 when the staples 10030 are in their unfired positions. When staples 10030 are moved from their non-fired positions to their positions triggered by staple drivers 10040, as discussed above, the tips of staples 10030 may penetrate through fabric thickness compensator 10020 and/or penetrate through the topsheet. , or cover, 10022. Alternatively, the tips of staples 10030 may protrude through the top surface of fabric thickness compensator 10020 and/or cover 10022 when staples 10030 are in their unfired position. In either case, the clips 10030, when they extend above the support portion 10010 before being dispensed, may tilt and/or deflect with respect to the support portion, as also discussed above. Referring now to Figure 329, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 13000, for example, may comprise a plurality of guide elements, or retainers, which may be configured to limit relative movement between the support portion 13010 of the 13000 staple cartridge and the ends of the staples positioned there. Referring primarily to Figure 330, staple cartridge 13000 may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13020 mounted to a support portion 13010 and, in addition, a plurality of bandages 13022 secured to the top surface 13021 of the fabric thickness compensator 13020. Optionally, each bandage 13022 may comprise a plurality of openings 13029 defined therein that may be configured to slidably receive and/or guide legs 13022 of a clamp 13030. In addition to or instead of the openings, a bandage may comprise any suitable opening such as a slot, guide, and/or groove, for example, which may be configured to slidably receive and/or guide legs 13022. As illustrated in Figure 330, the ends of clamp legs 13032 may be positioned into openings 13029 when clips 13030 are in their unfired positions. For example, the ends of the staple legs 13032 may protrude above the bandages 13022 when the staples are in their unfired position. The ends of the staple legs 13032 can be positioned just below the bandages 13022 when the staples 13030 are in their unfired positions so that when the staples 13030 are moved up through the fabric thickness compensator 13020, the staple legs 13032 they can enter the openings 13029 of the bandages 13022 and slide through them. In either case, when legs 13032 of staples 13030 are positioned within the pads, lateral and/or longitudinal movement of staple legs 13032 can be limited without impeding upward movement of staple legs 13032 when staples 13030 are dispensed. When staples 13030 are dispensed, now referring to Figure 331, staple legs 13032 may slide upward through pads 13022 to penetrate tissue T, contact an anvil positioned opposite the staple cartridge 13030, and warp down to capture the fabric T and the fabric thickness compensator 13030 there.

[000934] In addition to the above, bandages 13022 may be attached to tissue thickness compensator 13020 using at least one biocompatible and/or bioabsorbable adhesive, for example. The bandages 13022, and/or a retaining member extending from each bandage, may be at least partially fitted within the fabric thickness compensator 13020. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 13020 may comprise pockets defined therein. , which are configured to at least partially receive a bandage 13022. The fabric thickness compensator 13020 may be integrally molded, or formed around the bandages 13022 during a mold manufacturing process. The 13022 bandages may comprise separate retainers that can move independently of each other. Referring primarily to Figure 330, each bandage 13022 may comprise interlocking and/or snapping features that may be configured to allow and, to some extent, limit relative lateral and longitudinal movement between the bandages 13022. For example, each bandage 13022 may comprise a projection 13026 and one or more recesses 13027, for example, wherein projection 13026 of a first bandage 13022 may be positioned within and/or aligned with respect to recesses 13027 of adjacent second and third bandages 13022. Optionally, gaps may be present between adjacent bandages 13022 which may allow the bandages 13022 to move or slide relative to each other until they contact an adjacent bandage 13022. The bandages 13022 may be loosely interconnected. The 13022 bandages can be detachably connected to each other. For example, bandages 13022 can be manufactured as a sheet of interconnected bandages where, when sufficient force is applied to the sheet, one or more of the bandages 13022 can separate from the others. Referring again to Figure 329, a first sheet 13024 of bandages 13022 may be positioned on a first side of a longitudinal slot 13025 and a second sheet 13024 of bandages 13022 may be positioned on a second side of the slot 13025. In addition to the above, longitudinal slot 13025 extending through fabric thickness compensator 13020 may be configured to facilitate passage of a knife edge of a firing member through fabric thickness compensator 13020 and when the firing member passes therethrough , the trigger member may apply a compressive force to the sheets 13024 and separate or individualize at least some of the bandages 13022.

[000935] Bandages 13022 may be comprised of a biocompatible and/or bioabsorbable plastic, for example. Bandages 13022 can be comprised of a solid material, a semi-solid material, and/or a flexible material, for example. The bandages 13022 can be fitted within a fabric thickness compensator so that the bandages 13022 move with the fabric thickness compensator. For example, bandages 13022 may be flexible enough to flex with the top surface of the fabric thickness compensator. Bandages 13022 may be configured to remain fitted to the fabric thickness compensator while bandages 13022 may be configured to pop up or detach from the fabric thickness compensator. Bandages 13022 may comprise a top surface that is flush with the top surface of the fabric thickness compensator. The top surfaces of bandages 13022 may be positioned above and/or below the top surface of the fabric thickness compensator. The top surfaces of the bandages 13022 can be arranged so as to be visible when viewing the top surface of the fabric thickness compensator while, alternatively, the top surfaces of the bandages 13022 may be positioned below a layer of the thickness compensator. fabric, for example. Guide elements can be molded into the top surface of a fabric thickness compensator, for example. For example, the fabric thickness compensator may not comprise a composite material and may comprise a unitary piece of material, for example.

[000936] Now referring to Figure 338, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13620 and a cover, or topsheet, 13621, for example. For example, one or more bindings, or retainers, 13622, for example, may be fitted to cover 13621. Each retainer 13622 may comprise one or more openings 13629 defined therein, which may be configured to receive clip legs 13032 of the clips. 13030 when clamps 13030 are in their unfired position, as illustrated in Figure 338. In use, in addition to the above, clamp legs 10032 can slide through openings 13629 when clamps 13030 are moved from their non-fired position to their position fired until the bases 13031 of the staples 13030 contact the fabric thickness compensator 13620 and compress at least a portion of the fabric thickness compensator 13620 against the bottom surfaces of the pads 13622, for example. Referring now to Figure 333, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13120 and a cover, or topsheet, 13122, for example. For example, fabric thickness compensator 13120 may comprise stops, projections and/or conical protrusions 13128 which may, for example, extend upward from the top surface 13121 of fabric thickness compensator 13120. Projections 13128 may be configured to receive and envelop the ends of the staple legs 13032 of the staples 13030 when the staples 13030 are in their unfired position, as illustrated in Figure 333. The topsheet 13122 may also comprise stops, projections, and/or conical protuberances 13129 which may be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with projections 13128. In use, clip legs 10032 may penetrate projections 13128 and 13129 and emerge from fabric thickness compensator 13120. Now referring to Figure 337, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13520 and a cover, or top layer, 13522, for example. For example, the cover 13522 may comprise anvils, projections and/or conical protrusions 13529 which may, for example, extend upward from the top surface 13521 of the fabric thickness compensator 13520. Similar to the above, the projections 13529 can be configured to receive and envelop the ends of staple legs 13032 from staples 13030 when staples 13030 are in the unfired position, as illustrated in Figure 337. In use, staple legs 10032 can penetrate projections 13529 and emerge from coverage 13522.

[000937] Now referring to Figure 334, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13220 and a cover, or top layer, 13222, for example. For example, fabric thickness compensator 13220 may comprise conical cavities and/or recesses 13128, for example, which may extend downwardly into the top surface 13221 of fabric thickness compensator 13220. The ends of staple legs 13032 may extend through recesses 13128 when clips 13030 are in the unfired position, as illustrated in Figure 334. Topsheet 13222 may also comprise conical recesses and/or recesses 13229 that may be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the recesses 13228. Referring now to Figure 335, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13320 and a cover, or top layer, 13322, for example. For example, the cover 13320 may comprise thick portions 13329 that can extend downwardly and onto the top surface 13321 of the fabric thickness compensator 13320. In various circumstances, the thick portions 13329 may be configured to receive therein at least a portion of the staple legs 13032 of the staples 13030 when the staples 13030 are in the unfired position, as shown in Figure 335. In such cases, the thick portions 13329 can hold the staple legs 13032 in position so that the legs 13032 are aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the staple forming pockets of an anvil positioned opposite the fabric thickness compensator 13320. Now referring to Figure 336, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13420 and a cover , or top layer, 13422, for example. For example, cover 13422 may comprise thick portions 13429 that may extend upwardly from top surface 13421 of fabric thickness compensator 13420. In various circumstances, thick portions 13429 may be configured to receive therein at least a portion of the clamp legs 13032 of the clamps 13030 when the clamps 13030 are in the unfired position, as illustrated in Figure 336. In such cases, the thick portions 13429 can hold the clamp legs 13032 in position so that the legs 13032 are aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the staple forming pockets of an anvil positioned opposite the fabric thickness compensator 13420.

[000938] Now referring to Figures 339 and 340, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13720 and a cover, or topsheet, 13721, for example. For example, fabric thickness compensator 13720 may comprise stops, projections, and/or pyramidal and/or stepped protuberances 13728, for example, which may extend upward from the top surface 13721 of fabric thickness compensator 13720. Projections 13728 may be configured to receive and envelop the ends of clip legs 13032 of clips 13030 when clips 13030 are in their unfired position, as illustrated in Figure 340. Similarly, topsheet 13721 may also comprise stops, projections, and/or pyramidal and/or stepped protuberances 13729 that may be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the projections 13728. Cover 13721 may additionally comprise one or more teeth 13727 that extend upward from the projections 13728. projections 13729 that can be configured to engage the fabric positioned against the topsheet 13721 and prevent, or at least limit, lateral movement and/or l relative longitudinal between the fabric, the topsheet 13721, and/or the tips of the staple legs 13032. In use, the staple legs 13032 can penetrate projections 13728 and 13729 and emerge from the fabric thickness compensator 13720 when the staples 13030 are moved from their unfired positions to their triggered positions. Referring now to Figures 341 and 342, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13820 and a cover, or top layer, 13821, for example. For example, fabric thickness compensator 13820 may comprise stops, projections, and/or pyramidal and/or stepped protuberances 13828, for example, which may extend upwardly from top surface 13821 of fabric thickness compensator 13820. Projections 13828 may be configured to receive and envelop the ends of clip legs 13032 of clips 13030 when clips 13030 are in their unfired position, as illustrated in Figure 342. Similarly, topsheet 13821 may also comprise stops, projections, and/or pyramidal and/or stepped protuberances 13829 that may be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the projections 13828. The topsheet 13821 may further comprise one or more teeth 13827 that extend downwardly inwardly. of the fabric thickness compensator 13820 which may be configured to prevent or at least limit relative lateral and/or longitudinal movement between the c upper 13821 and the 13820 fabric thickness compensator, for example. In use, staple legs 10032 can penetrate projections 13828 and 13829 and emerge from fabric thickness compensator 13820 when staples 13030 are moved from their unfired positions and their fired positions.

[000939] Now referring to Figure 343, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 13920, for example, which may include ridges 13923 and valleys 13924 defined therein, the valleys 13924 may be defined between ridges 13923. Optionally, each ridge 13923 may comprise the same height, substantially the same height, or different heights. Similarly, each valley 13924 may comprise the same depth, substantially the same depth, or different depths. In accordance with the invention, a plurality of staples 13030 can be at least partially stored within fabric thickness compensator 13920 so that the tips of staples 13030 can be positioned within ridges 13923. For example, staple legs 13032 of the staples 13030 cannot protrude from fabric thickness compensator 13920 and/or a cover, or top layer, 13921 attached to fabric thickness compensator 13920, for example, when staples 13030 are stored in their unfired position. The ridges 13923 and/or the valleys 13924 may extend laterally through the staple cartridge. For example, the staple cartridge may comprise a longitudinal knife slot in which ridges 13923 and valleys 13924 may extend in a direction that is transverse and/or perpendicular to the knife slot. In various circumstances, the ridges 13923 may be configured to hold the ends of the clamp legs 13032 in position until the clamps 13030 are moved from their unfired position to their fired position. Referring now to Figure 344, a fabric thickness compensator, and/or a cover covering a fabric thickness compensator, may comprise longitudinal ridges and/or valleys. For example, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise a top surface defined by ridges 14023 and valleys 14024, where valleys 14024 may be defined between ridges 14023, for example. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise a cover 14021 which may include a plurality of apertures 14029 defined therein, each of which may be configured to receive a staple leg 13032. The apertures 14029 may be defined at ridges 14023, wherein the tips of the clamp legs 13032 may be positioned below the peaks 14028 of the ridges 14029, positioned flush with the peaks 14028, and/or positioned above the peaks 14028. In addition to or instead of the above, apertures 14029 may be defined in valleys 14024, for example. Each opening can be surrounded, or at least partially surrounded, by a relief, for example, which can strengthen the cover and/or the fabric thickness compensator that surrounds the openings. In any event, in addition to the above, cover 14021 may be attached to a fabric thickness compensator in any suitable manner, including using at least one adhesive, for example.

[000940] As described above and again with reference to Figure 233, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise an anvil, such as anvil 10060 for example, which can be moved between an open position and a closed position in order to compress tissue T against the fabric thickness compensator 10020 of a staple cartridge 10000, for example. In various circumstances, the anvil 10060 may be rotated toward the staple cartridge 10000 until its downward movement is stopped by some portion of the staple cartridge 10000 and/or some portion of the channel in which the staple cartridge 10000 is positioned. In at least one of these circumstances, the anvil 10060 may be rotated downward until its downward motion is opposed by the tip 10003 of the staple cartridge 10000 and/or the tissue T positioned between the tip 10003 and the staple cartridge 10000. In some circumstances , the anvil 10060 can sufficiently compress the fabric thickness compensator 10020 to allow the fabric T to contact the tips of the staples 10030. Under certain circumstances, depending on the thickness of the fabric T, the anvil 10060 can sufficiently compress the thickness compensator of fabric 10020 so that the anvil 10060 contacts the clamps 10030 by the time the anvil 10060 has reached its fully closed position. In other words, under such circumstances, anvil 10060 may deform staples 10030 before firing member 10052 is advanced into staple cartridge 10000 to fire staples 10030. Such circumstances may be acceptable in some cases; however, now with reference to Figures 358 and 359, other alternatives are envisaged, in which a distal span adjustment element, such as element 10059, for example, can be used to limit the distance in which the anvil 10060 can be closed before that firing bar 10052 is advanced to staple cartridge 10000. Element 10059 may extend upwardly from top surface 10021 of fabric thickness compensator 10020 so that the downward movement of anvil 10060 can be stopped when the fabric T is pressed against the element 10059 and a resistive force is generated between them. In use, as described above, the triggering member 10052 may be advanced distally into the staple cartridge 10000 towards the distal end 10002 of the staple cartridge 10000 so as to eject the staples 10030 from the support portion 10010. Simultaneously, the trigger member 10052 may engage anvil 10060 and position anvil 10060 at a desired distance from bearing plane surface 10011 (Figure 218) of support portion 10010 over clamps 10030 being formed. In this way, the triggering member 10052 can control the distance, or span, between the tissue contacting surface of the anvil 10060 and the platform surface 10011 at a specific location, which specific location can be advanced distally as the member trigger 10052 is advanced distally. In various circumstances, this gap distance may be shorter than the gap between the anvil 10060 and the platform surface 10011 being controlled or dictated by the distal gap adjustment element 10059 at the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020. Referring now to Figure 359, the knife edge 10053 of the trigger member 10052 can be configured to cut the distal span adjustment member 10059 when the trigger member 10052 reaches the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 so that , after element 10059 has been cut, firing member 10052 can pull anvil 10060 down toward support portion 10010 and close the gap to the desired gap height by firing staples 10030 at the distal end of the staple cartridge 10000. Alternatively, a distal gap adjustment element can be configured to flatten out when the firing member reaches the distal end of the gas cartridge. ramps. For example, the distal span regulating element may comprise a column that can provide resistance to the anvil as described above and then suddenly bend when the buckling resistance of the span regulating element has been achieved when the trigger member reaches the distal end of the staple cartridge. This bending force can be approximately 44 N (10 lbf), for example. A span adjustment element may be configured to be moved downwardly on the platform of the support portion when a force exceeding a predetermined amount is applied to the span adjustment element, for example. The distal span can be controlled by the tip of the staple cartridge. For example, the downward movement of the anvil 10060 can be limited by the tip until the firing member has reached the distal end of the cartridge at which point the compressive force applied to the tip can cause the tip to flatten. The point may comprise a cavity defined by cavity walls which may allow the cavity to flatten when the compressive force applied thereto has overcome a predetermined force. For example, the cavity can be defined by retractable walls.

[000941] Optionally, as described above, an anvil, such as the anvil 10060, for example, can be moved between an open position and a closed position so as to compress a tissue thickness compensator between the anvil and the anvil support portion. a staple cartridge. In certain circumstances, now referring to Figures 360 and 361, the fabric thickness compensator of a staple cartridge, such as the fabric thickness compensator 14120 of the staple cartridge 14100, for example, may expand laterally and/or longitudinally. when the fabric thickness compensator 14120 is pressed against a support portion 14110 of the staple cartridge 14100. The ends and/or sides of the fabric thickness compensator 14120 may not be forced by the support portion 14110 and/or the anvil 10060 and, as a result, the fabric thickness compensator 14120 can expand in these directions without generating compressive pressure, or at least undesirable compressive pressure, within the fabric thickness compensator 14120. In such cases, a member of triggering, such as triggering member 10052 (Figure 236), for example, passing through fabric thickness compensator 14120 may not be unduly impeded by a pressure undesired compression within the fabric thickness compensator 14120, for example. Alternatively, again referring to Figure 360 , the distal end 14125 of the tissue thickness compensator 14120 may be forced by the tip 14103 of the staple cartridge 14100, for example. In this specific embodiment, similarly to the above, the distal end 14125 of the tissue thickness compensator 14120 can be forced by the tip 14103 in order to reduce the possibility of the tissue thickness compensator 14120 prematurely detaching from the support portion 14110 In any case, as a result of the above, a large internal pressure may be generated within the distal end 14125 which may impede the advancement of the triggering member 10052, especially when the triggering member 10052 reaches the distal end 14125. More particularly, under certain circumstances, the trigger member 10052 may push, plow and/or displace the tissue thickness compensator 14120 distally as it cuts the tissue thickness compensator 14120 and, as a result, even greater internal pressure can be created within the tissue thickness compensator 14120. distal end 14125 of tissue thickness compensator 14120. In order to at least partially dissipate this tooth pressure 14120, the tip 14103 may be comprised of a flexible material that can allow the tip 14103 to flex distally, for example, and create additional space for the tissue thickness compensator 14120. Now with reference to the Figures 362 and 363, the tip of a staple cartridge may comprise a distally slidable portion. More particularly, the tip 14203 of the staple cartridge 14200 may comprise a sliding portion 14204 which is slidably connected to the tip 14203 so that when the anvil 10060 is closed and/or the firing member 10052 is advanced towards the end distal of staple cartridge 14200, sliding portion 14204 can slide distally and create additional space for tissue thickness compensator 14200 and at least partially relieve internal pressure therefrom. One of the nose 14203 and the sliding portion 14204 may comprise one or more tracks and the other of the nose 14203 and the sliding portion 14204 may comprise one or more channels configured to receive the tracks in a sliding manner. For example, the channels and rails can be configured to cooperatively limit the movement of the sliding portion 14204 to a longitudinal distal path, for example.

[000942] In various circumstances, in addition to the above, certain staples, such as the more distal staples within a staple cartridge for example, can capture a larger portion of a tissue thickness compensator than the proximal staples within the cartridge of staples. In such circumstances, as a result, greater clamping pressure can be applied to tissue captured within distal staples compared to proximal staples. These circumstances can arise when at least a portion of the tissue thickness compensator is moved to and/or assembled at the distal end of the staple cartridge during use, as described above, even though the tissue thickness compensator may be comprised of a substantially homogeneous material having a substantially constant thickness. In various circumstances, it may be desirable for certain staples to apply greater clamping pressure to the fabric than other staples and a support portion and/or a fabric thickness compensator may be constructed and arranged to control which staples can apply greater tightening pressure to the fabric and which staples can apply less tightening pressure to the fabric. Referring now to Figure 364, a staple cartridge 14300 may comprise a support portion 14310 and, in addition, a fabric thickness compensator 14320 positioned on the platform surface 14311 of the support portion 14310. Compared to other disclosed embodiments in this application comprising a support portion 14310 that has a flat, or at least substantially flat, platform surface, the platform surface 14311 can be tilted and/or sloped between the distal end 14305 and the proximal end 14306 of the support portion 14310 The platform surface 14311 of the support portion 14310 may comprise a platform height at its distal end 14305 that is shorter than the platform height at its proximal end 14306. For example, staples 10030 at the distal end of the staple cartridge 14300 can extend above the platform surface 14311 a greater distance than clamps 10030 at the prox end bad. Alternatively, the platform surface of a support portion may comprise a height at its distal end that is higher than its height at its proximal end. Referring again to Figure 364, fabric thickness compensator 14320 may comprise a thickness that is different along its longitudinal length. Fabric thickness compensator 14320 may comprise a thickness at its distal end 14325 that is thicker than its proximal end 14326, for example. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 14322 may comprise a bottom surface 14322 that may be angled or angled to match, or at least substantially match, the slanted or slanted platform surface 14311 of the support portion 14310. As a result, the top, or fabric contacting, surface 14321 of fabric thickness compensator 14320 may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, surface on which the fabric T can be positioned. In any case, when the tissue thickness compensator 14320 is thicker at its distal end 14325, the distal staples 10030 can capture a larger portion of the tissue thickness compensator 14320 than the proximal staples 10030 and, as a result, the staples 10030 can apply a greater compressive force to the tissue T, especially when the gap distance between the anvil 10060 and the bearing plane surface 14311 is constant, or at least substantially constant, at the proximal and distal ends of the staple cartridge. In certain circumstances, however, the anvil 10060 may not reach a fully closed position and, as a result, the gap distance between the anvil 10060 and the platform surface 14311 may be greater at the distal end of the staple cartridge 14300 than the end proximal. In various circumstances, the distal staples 10030 may not be fully formed and, as a result, the distal staples 10030 may not apply the desired clamping pressure to the tissue T. When the tissue thickness compensator is thicker at the distal end of the staples, the fabric thickness compensator can compensate for the underforming of the staples and apply sufficient pressure to the T fabric.

[000943] Now referring to Figure 365, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 14400, for example, may comprise a support portion 14410 and, in addition, a fabric thickness compensator 14420 positioned on the platform surface 14411 of the support portion 14410. Similar to the above, the platform surface 14411 can be tilted and/or sloped so that the distal end 14405 of the support portion 14410 can have a platform height that is less than the height of the support portion 14410. platform at the proximal end 14406, for example. Fabric thickness compensator 14420 may comprise a constant, or at least substantially constant, thickness along its length and, as a result, the top or fabric contact surface 14421 of fabric thickness compensator 14420 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the contour of the platform surface 14411. The staples 10030 of the staple cartridge 14400 may be fully engaged within the fabric thickness compensator 14420 and the support portion 14410 when the staples 10030 are in position not fired. The staples 10030 positioned at the proximal end of the staple cartridge 14400 may be fully seated within the fabric thickness compensator 14420 and the support portion 14410 when the staples 10030 are in the non-fired position whereas, due to the declined tilt of the platform 14411 and from the top surface 14421, the tips of certain staples 10030, including staples 10030 positioned at the distal end of the staple cartridge 14400, may protrude through the top surface 14421 of the fabric thickness compensator 14420 when the staples 10030 are in their unfired position.

[000944] Optionally, as described above, a fabric thickness compensator may be comprised of a single material whereby the entire fabric thickness compensator may have the same, or at least substantially equal, material properties such as density, stiffness, elasticity rate, durometer, and/or elasticity, for example, from start to finish. Alternatively, referring now to Figure 368, a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 14520, for example, may comprise a plurality of materials or layers of materials. Fabric thickness compensator 14520 may comprise a first, or core, layer 14520a, second, or intermediate layers, 14520b secured to first layer 14520a on opposite sides thereof, and a third, or outer layer 14520c secured thereto. of the second layers 14520b. Intermediate layers 14520b may be attached to core layer 14520a using at least one adhesive, and similarly outer layers 14520c may be attached to second layers 14520 using at least one adhesive. In addition to or instead of an adhesive, layers 14520a to 14520c may be held together by one or more snapping elements and/or fasteners, for example. In any case, the inner layer 14520a may be comprised of a first material having a first set of material properties, the intermediate layers 14520b may be comprised of a second material having a second set of material properties, and the outer layers 14520c may be comprised of a third material that has a third set of material properties, for example. These sets of material properties can include density, stiffness, rate of elasticity, durometer, and/or elasticity, for example. A staple cartridge may comprise six rows of staples 10030, for example, one row of staples 10030 being able to be positioned at least partially in each of the outer layers 14520c and each of the inner layers 14520b, for example, and two rows of staples 10030 may be positioned at least partially with the inner layer 14520a. In use, similar to the above, staples 10030 can be ejected from the staple cartridge so that staple legs 10032 of staples 10030 penetrate top surface 14521 of fabric thickness compensator 14520, penetrate fabric positioned against the top surface 14521 by an anvil, and then contact the anvil so that the legs 10032 are deformed to capture the fabric thickness compensator 14520 and the fabric within the staples 10030. In a similar manner to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 14520 can be cut by a triggering member when the triggering member is advanced through the staple cartridge. For example, the trigger member may cut the inner layer 14520a, and the fabric, along a path defined by an axis 14529, for example.

[000945] In addition to the above, the rows of staples 10030 positioned within the inner layer 14520a may comprise rows of staples that are closest to the edges of the cut fabric. Correspondingly, rows of staples 10030 positioned within outer layers 14520c may comprise rows of staples that are furthest from the edges of the cut fabric. The first material comprising inner layer 14520a may comprise a density that is greater than the density of the second material comprising intermediate layers 14520b, and similarly, the density of the second material may be greater than the density of the third material comprising the 14520c outer layers, for example. In various circumstances, as a result, greater compressive forces may be created within the clamps 10030 positioned within the inner layer 14520a compared to the compressive forces generated within the clamps 10030 positioned within the intermediate layers 14520b and the outer layers 14520c. . Similarly, greater compressive forces may be created within clips 10030 positioned within intermediate layers 14520b compared to compressive forces created within clips 10030 positioned within outer layers 14520c, for example. Alternatively, the first material comprising inner layer 14520a may comprise a density that is less than the density of the second material comprising intermediate layers 14520b, and similarly, the density of the second material may be lower than the density of the third material. comprising the outer layers 14520c, for example. In various circumstances, as a result, greater compressive forces may be created within clips 10030 positioned within outer layers 14520c compared to compressive forces created within clips 10030 positioned within intermediate layers 14520b and inner layer 14520a. Similarly, greater compressive forces may be created within clips 10030 positioned within intermediate layers 14520b compared to compressive forces created within clips 10030 positioned within inner layer 14520a, for example. Alternatively, any other suitable arrangement of layers, materials, and/or suitable material properties could be used. In any case, the layers 14520a to 14520c of the fabric thickness compensator 14520 can be configured to remain attached to each other after they have been implanted. Layers 14520a through 14520c of fabric thickness compensator 14520 may be configured to detach from one another after they have been implanted. For example, layers 14520a to 14520c can be bonded together using one or more bioabsorbable adhesives that can initially hold the layers together and then allow the layers to release from one another over time.

[000946] As described above, a fabric thickness compensator of a staple cartridge, such as the fabric thickness compensator 14520, for example, may comprise a plurality of longitudinal layers. Alternatively, now referring to Figure 369, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator, such as fabric thickness compensator 14620, for example, which may comprise a plurality of horizontal layers. For example, fabric thickness compensator 14620 may comprise a first, or bottom, layer 14620a, a second, or intermediate, layer 14620b attached to the bottom layer 14620a, and a third, or top, layer 14620c attached to the bottom layer 14620a. intermediate 14620b. The first layer 14620a may comprise a flat or substantially flat bottom surface 14626a and a triangular or pyramidal top surface 14625a, for example. For example, second layer 14620b may comprise a triangular, or pyramidal, bottom surface 14626b which may be configured to be parallel and bordering on top surface 14625a of first layer 14620a. Similar to the above, the second layer 14620b may comprise a triangular or pyramidal top surface 14625b which may be parallel and bordering on a triangular or pyramidal bottom surface 14626c of the third layer 14620c, for example . The top surface of the third layer 14626c may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, fabric-contacting surface 14621. Also similar to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 14620 may be configured to hold at least partially six rows of staples, such as staples 10030, for example, where a trigger member can cut the fabric thickness compensator 14620 between the two innermost staple rows along a path extending through axis 14629, for example . Similar to the above, each layer 14620a, 14620b, and 14620c may be comprised of a different material that may comprise different material properties and, as a result of the triangular, or pyramidal, configuration of layers 14620a to 14620c, the thickness compensator 14620 fabric may have different general properties at various locations within it. For example, the outermost rows of staples 10030 can capture in it more of the third layer 14620c than the first layer 14620a while the innermost rows of staples 10030 can capture less of the third layer 14620c than the first layer 14620a, and as a result, fabric thickness compensator 14620 may compress fabric captured within outermost staples 10030 differently from tissue captured within innermost staples 10030, for example, although fabric thickness compensator 14620 may have the same, or at least substantially the same, overall thickness therethrough.

[000947] Now referring to Figure 286, a fabric thickness compensator of a staple cartridge, such as the fabric thickness compensator 14720 of the staple cartridge 14700, for example, may comprise voids, pockets, channels, and/or or grooves, for example, defined therein that can vary the thickness of the fabric thickness compensator 14720. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 14720 may be positioned against the platform surface 14711 of a support portion 14710 of the staple cartridge 14700 so that the voids 14723 defined in the bottom surface 14722 of the fabric thickness compensator 14720 can cover certain staple cavities 10012, but not others. Voids 14723 may extend transversely to knife slot 14715 of support portion 14710, perpendicular to knife slot 14715, and/or parallel to knife slot 14715, for example. The voids 14723 can define a bearing surface pattern on the bottom surface 14722 of the fabric thickness compensator 14720. In any case, when staples, such as staples 10030, for example, are dispensed from the support portion 14710, now Referring to Figures 287 and 288, certain staples 10030 may capture fabric thickness compensator 14720 within a region containing a void 14723 while other staples 10030 may capture fabric thickness compensator 14720 within a region positioned between the voids 14723. In addition to or instead of the foregoing, the fabric thickness compensator 14720 may comprise voids, pockets, channels, and/or grooves, for example, defined in the top surface, or contacting with fabric 14721. Referring now to Figures 366 and 367, a staple cartridge 14800 may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 14820 which may include a plurality of surface areas. and bearing 14823 extending at least one of upwards from a top surface 14821 of fabric thickness compensator 14820, inwardly toward a central groove 14825, and/or distally toward the distal end of the cartridge. 14800 staples, for example. For example, when bearing surfaces 14823 can be separated by grooves, slots, and/or grooves, such as grooves 14824, for example. In various circumstances, as a result of the above, the overall thickness of the fabric thickness compensator may vary between rows of staples and/or vary between staples within a row of staples. In certain circumstances, the bearing surfaces, or thick portions, can be constructed and arranged so that they can flow in a desired direction, such as inward, for example, when the fabric thickness compensator is compressed.

[000948] Now referring to Figure 303, a staple cartridge, such as the staple cartridge 14900, for example, may comprise a support portion 14910 and, in addition, a fabric thickness compensator 14920 positioned against the support portion 14910 . Similar to the above, the support portion 14910 may comprise staple drivers that are liftable by a staple-dispensing slider in order to lift staples, such as staples 10030, for example, positioned at least partially within the staple portion. support 14910 towards an anvil, such as anvil 10060, for example, positioned opposite the staple cartridge 14900. Support portion 14910 may comprise six rows of staple cavities, such as the two outer rows of staple cavities , two inner rows of staple cavities, and two middle rows of staple cavities positioned between the inner and outer rows, po for example, the anvil 10060 may comprise six rows of forming pockets 10062 aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the recesses for staples. The inner rows of the staple cavities may include the 14940a staple drivers positioned therein, the middle rows of the staple cavities may include the 14940b staple drivers positioned therein, and the outer rows of the staple cavities may include the staple drivers 14940c positioned therein, each of the staple drivers 14940a may include a cradle 14949a configured to support a staple 10030, each of the staple drivers 14940b may include a cradle 14949b configured to support a staple 10030, and each one of the clamp drivers 14940c may include a cradle 14949c configured to support a clamp 10030. In their unfired positions, i.e. when the clamp drivers 14940a through 14940c are resting on driver supports 14926 that extend beneath the support portion 14910, the cradles 14949a of the 14940a staple drivers can be positioned closer of the anvil 10060 than the cradles 14949b of the 14940b staple drivers and the cradles 14949c of the 14940c staple drivers. In this position, a first forming distance can be defined between the cradles 14949a and the forming pockets 10062 positioned over the cradles 14949a, a second forming distance can be defined between the cradles 14949b and the forming pockets 10062 positioned over the cradles 14949b , and a third forming distance may be defined between the cradles 14949c and the forming pockets 10062 positioned over the cradles 14949c, wherein the first forming distance may be shorter than the second forming distance and the second forming distance may be be shorter than the third training distance, for example. When the clamp drivers 14940a to 14940c are moved from their unfired positions (Figure 303) to their fired positions, each clamp drivers 14940a to 14940c can be moved up an equal, or at least substantially equal, distance toward the anvil. 10060 by the staple-dispensing slider, such that first drives 14940a direct their respective clamps 10030 to a first formed height, second drivers 14940b direct their respective clamps 10030 to a second formed height, and third drivers 14940c direct their respective clamps 10030 to a third formed height, wherein the first formed height may be less than the second formed height and the second formed height may be less than the third formed height, for example. Various alternatives are envisaged, in which the first staple drivers 14940a are shifted up a first distance, the second staple drivers 14940b are shifted up a second distance, and the third staple drivers 14940c are shifted up a third. distance, one or more of the first distance, second distance, and third distance may be different.

[000949] Again with reference to Figure 303, the platform surface 14911 of the support portion 14910 may vary in height with respect to the tissue-contacting surface 10061 of the anvil 10060. This height variation may occur laterally and in at least In one embodiment, the height of the platform surface 14911 surrounding the inner rows of staple cavities may be greater than the platform surface 14911 surrounding the outer rows of staple cavities, for example. Bottom surface 14922 of fabric thickness compensator 14920 may be configured to be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to platform surface 14911 of support portion 14910. In addition to the above, fabric thickness compensator 14920 may also be of different thickness, whereby the top or fabric contacting surface 14921 of fabric thickness compensator 14920 may slope inward from its outside or side edges. For example, as a result of the above, the fabric thickness compensator 14920 may be thinner in a region positioned over the inner rows of staple cavities and thicker in a region positioned over the outer rows of staple cavities, for example. Referring now to Figure 304, the platform surface of a support portion 15010 may comprise a stepped platform surface, for example, wherein the higher steps of the stepped surface may surround the inner rows of clamp cavities and the lower steps from the stepped surface can surround the outer rows of cavities for staples, for example. For example, steps that have an intermediate height can surround the middle rows of staple cavities. A fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 15020, for example, may comprise a bottom surface that may be parallel to and bordering the platform surface of the support portion 15010. The top surface The fabric thickness compensator 15021 may comprise an arcuate, parabolic, and/or curved surface, for example, which, for example, may extend from a first lateral side of the fabric thickness compensator 15020 to a second lateral side of the fabric thickness compensator 15020 with an apex aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with the center of the staple cartridge 15000, for example. Referring now to Figure 299, a staple cartridge 15300, for example, may comprise a support portion 15310, a plurality of staple drivers 15340 movably positioned within the staple cavities defined in the support portion 15310, and a compensator. of fabric thickness 15320 positioned above the platform surface 15311 of the support portion 15310. The staple cartridge 15300 may further comprise one or more support container portions 15326 which can be attached to the support portion 15310 and extend around the bottom of support portion 15310 and support actuators 15340, and clamps 15330, in their unfired positions. When a staple-dispensing slider is advanced through the staple cartridge, the slider may also be supported by the support container portions 15326 when the slider lifts the staple drivers 15340 and staples 15330 through the fabric thickness compensator 15320 Fabric thickness compensator 15320 may comprise a first or inner portion 15322a positioned over an inner row of staple cavities, a second or intermediate portion 15322b positioned over an intermediate row of staple cavities, and a third portion , or outer 15322c positioned over a row of staple cavities, wherein inner portion 15322a may be thicker than intermediate portion 15322b and intermediate portion 15322b may be thicker than outer portion 15322c, for example. Fabric thickness compensator 15320 may comprise longitudinal grooves, for example defined therein, which may create thinner portions 15322b and 15322c of fabric thickness compensator 15320. Alternatively, longitudinal grooves may be defined at the top surface and/or at the top surface. bottom surface of a fabric thickness compensator. Top surface 15321 of fabric thickness compensator 15320 may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, surface, for example.

[000950] Referring now to Figure 296, a staple cartridge may comprise a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 15120, for example, which may comprise a plurality of portions having different thicknesses. Fabric thickness compensator 15120 may comprise a first, or inner portion 15122a which may have a first thickness, second, or intermediate portions 15122b extending from first portion 15122b, which may each have a second thickness, and third or outer portions 15122c which extend from second portions 15122b and which may each be a third thickness. For example, the third thickness may be thicker than the second thickness and the second thickness may be thicker than the first thickness, for example, although any suitable thickness may be used. Portions 15122a to 15122c of fabric thickness compensator 15120 may comprise steps having different thicknesses. Similar to the above, a staple cartridge may comprise several rows of staples 10030 and a plurality of staple drivers having different heights that can deform staples 10030 to different formed heights. Also similarly to the above, the staple cartridge may comprise first staple drivers 15140a which can direct staples 10030 supported thereon to a first formed height, second staple drivers 15140b which can direct staples 10030 supported thereon to a second formed height, and third clamp drivers which can direct the clamps 10030 supported thereon to a third formed height, wherein the first formed height may be shorter than the second formed height and the second formed height may be longer. shorter than the third formed height, for example. Optionally, as illustrated in Figure 296, each clip 10030 may comprise the same, or substantially the same, unformed, or unfired height. Alternatively, now referring to Figure 296A, first drivers 15140a, second drivers 15140b, and/or third drivers 15140c may support clips having different unformed heights. For example, first staple drivers 15140a can support staples 15130a having a first unformed height, second staple drivers 15140b can support staples 15130b having a second unformed height, and third staple drivers 15140c can support staples. 15130c which have a third unformed height, wherein the first unformed height may be shorter than the second unformed height and the second unformed height may be shorter than the third unformed height, for example. Referring again to Figure 296A, the ends of the staples 15130a, 15130b, and/or 15130c may be situated, or at least substantially situated, in the same plane while, alternatively, the ends of the staples 15130a, 15130b, and/or 15130c may not be situated on the same plane. Referring now to Figure 297, a staple cartridge may include a tissue thickness compensator 15220 that has a plurality of portions having different thicknesses, which can be deployed against tissue T by staples 15130a, 15130b, and 15130c, as described. above. Referring now to Figure 298, clips 15130a, 15130b, and/or 15130c may be deformed to different formed heights, with first clips 15130a being formed to a first formed height, second clips 15130b being formed to a second formed height, and third clips 15130c may be formed to a third formed height, wherein the first formed height may be shorter than the second formed height and the second formed height may be shorter than the third formed height, for example. Alternatives are provided in which clips 15130a, 15130b, and 15130c can be formed to any suitable formed height and/or to any relative formed height.

[000951] Optionally, as described above, the anvil of a surgical stapling instrument can be moved between an open position and a closed position. In such circumstances, the tissue contacting surface of the anvil may be moved to its final, or forming, position when the anvil is moved to its closed position. When the anvil is in its closed position, the tissue contact surface may no longer be adjustable. Alternatively, referring now to Figure 351, a surgical stapler, such as the surgical stapler 15500, for example, may comprise an anvil groove 15560 and an adjustable tissue contacting anvil adjustment plate 15561 positioned within the anvil groove. 15560. In such cases, the anvil plate 15561 may be raised and/or lowered within the anvil groove 15560 in order to adjust the position of the tissue contacting surface of the anvil plate 15561 in relation to a staple cartridge positioned opposite side of anvil plate 15561. Surgical stapler 15500 may comprise an adjustment slide 15564 which, with reference to Figures 356 and 357, may be slid between anvil groove 15560 and anvil plate 15561 in order to control the distance between anvil plate 15561 and staple cartridge. Referring again to Figures 351 and 352, surgical stapler 15500 may further comprise an actuator 15562 coupled to adjustment slide 15564 which may be slid proximally to slide adjustment slide 15564 proximally and/or slide distally so as to slide adjustment slide 15564 distally. Referring again to Figures 356 and 357, actuator 15562 can be slid between two or more preset positions in order to adjust anvil plate 15561 between two or more positions, respectively. Such predefined positions may be demarcated on the surgical stapler 15500, such as demarcations 15563 (Figure 351), for example. Referring to Figure 357, the adjustment slide 15564 may comprise a plurality of support surfaces, such as first support surface 15565a, second support surface 15565b, and third support surface 15565c, for example, which may be aligned with a plurality of plate positioning surfaces, such as first positioning surface 15569a, second positioning surface 15569b, and third positioning surface 15569c, respectively, on the back of anvil plate 15561 so as to position anvil plate 15561 in a first position. In order to position the anvil plate 15561 in a second position, the actuator 15562 and the slide 15564 can be slid proximally, for example, so as to realign the support surfaces 15565a to 15565c of the slide 15564 with respect to the positioning surfaces 15569a a 15569c of the anvil plate 15561. More particularly, with reference to Figure 356, the slide 15564 can be slid distally so that the first support surface 15565a of the slide 15564 can be positioned behind the second positioning surface 15569b of the plate of the anvil 15561a so that the second supporting surface 15565b of the slide 15564 can be positioned behind the third positioning surface 15569c of the anvil plate 15561 so as to move the anvil plate 15561 closer to the staple cartridge. When the anvil plate 15561 is moved from its first position to its second position, under such circumstances, the adjustable anvil plate 15561 can further compress the tissue T positioned between the anvil plate 15561 and the staple cartridge. Furthermore, the formed height of the staples can be controlled by the position of the anvil plate 15561 relative to the staple cartridge as the forming pockets defined in the anvil plate 15561 will move towards and/or away from the staple cartridge. when the 15561 anvil plate is adjusted. Although only two positions are discussed above, the slide 15564 can be slid into a suitable number of positions to move the anvil plate 15561 closer to and/or away from the staple cartridge. In any case, when the 15561 anvil plate has been properly positioned, a 15550 staple-dispensing slider can be slid distally into the staple cartridge to lift the 15540 staple drivers and 15530 staples toward the anvil plate 15561 and staple the tissue T, as illustrated in Figure 354. Similar surgical staplers are disclosed in US patent application Serial No. 13/036,647 entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT, which was filed on February 28, 2011, whose full description is incorporated herein by reference.

[000952] Now referring to Figure 353, a staple cartridge may be positioned within a staple cartridge channel 15570 of the surgical stapler 15500 which may comprise a tissue thickness compensator, such as the tissue thickness compensator 15520, for example. When the anvil plate 15561 is moved toward the staple cartridge as described above, the anvil plate 15561 can compress the fabric thickness compensator 15520 and/or the fabric T positioned between the anvil plate 15561 and the thickness compensator. tissue thickness 15520. When staples 15530 are dispensed from the staple cartridge, referring to Figure 355, staples 15530 can compress and deploy the tissue thickness compensator 15520 against tissue T. Optionally, when anvil plate 15561 is positioned against the slide 15564 and the fabric has not yet been placed between the anvil plate 15561 and the fabric thickness compensator 15520, a gap may be defined between the anvil plate 15561 and the top surface 15521 of the fabric thickness compensator 15564. fabric 15520 when the anvil plate 15561 is in a first position. When anvil plate 15561 is moved to a second position, anvil plate 15561 may contact fabric thickness compensator 15520. Alternatively, when anvil plate 15561 is positioned against slider 15564 and the fabric is not yet has been placed between the anvil plate 15561 and the fabric thickness compensator 15520, a gap may be defined between the anvil plate 15561 and the top surface 15521 of the fabric thickness compensator 15520 when the anvil plate 15561 is in a first position and/or a second position. For example, anvil plate 15561 cannot contact fabric thickness compensator 15520. For example, when anvil plate 15561 is positioned against slide 15564 and fabric has not yet been placed between the anvil plate anvil 15561 and fabric thickness compensator 15520, the anvil plate 15561 may be in contact with the top surface 15521 of the fabric thickness compensator 15520 regardless of whether the anvil plate 15561 is in a first position and/or a second position, for example. While only two positions for the anvil plate 15611 are described herein, the anvil plate 15611 can be positioned, or aligned, in any suitable number of positions.

[000953] Optionally, as a result of the above, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise means for adjusting the formed height of the staples which can, in various circumstances, compensate for different tissue thicknesses. Furthermore, the surgical stapling instrument may comprise other means to compensate for different tissue thicknesses and/or thickness variations within tissue, for example. For example, the anvil plate 15561 can be adjusted above, or away from, the opposite staple cartridge to increase the height formed, or fired, of the staples. Correspondingly, the anvil plate 15561 can be adjusted downwards or towards the opposite staple cartridge to reduce the height formed or fired from the staples. The 15561 Anvil Plate Adjustment, for example, can adjust the gap between the forming pockets defined in the 15561 Anvil Plate and the trigger height of the staple drivers, or more specifically, the triggered height of the staple driver cradles, for example. Even with such an ability to adjust the formed height of the staples to account for thicker and/or thinner fabric, for example, a fabric thickness compensator can also compensate for thicker and/or thinner and/or thinner fabric. or compensate for thickness variations within the fabric as described above. In such cases, a surgeon can be provided with multiple means of compensation within the same surgical stapling instrument.

[000954] As described above, a surgical stapling instrument may utilize a staple cartridge that has a linear array of staple and staple cavities, wherein a triggering member can be advanced distally through the staple cartridge to dispense the staples from the staple cavities. A staple cartridge may comprise rows of staple cavities and staples that are curved. Referring now to Figures 345 and 346, a surgical stapling instrument, such as the stapler 15600, for example, may comprise one or more circular or annular rows of staple cavities defined in a circular or annular support portion 15610. Circular staple rows may comprise a circular row of inner staple cavities 15612 and a circular row of outer staple cavities 15613, for example. For example, circular rows of staple cavities may surround a circular or annular opening 15615 defined in stapler 15600 which can house a circular or annular knife movably positioned therein. In use, the tissue may be positioned against the platform surface 15611 of the support portion 15610 and an anvil (not shown) may be mounted to the surgical stapler 15600 via an actuator that extends through and/or is positioned within the opening 15615 so that when the actuator is actuated, the anvil can be clamped towards the support portion 15610 and compresses the tissue against the platform surface 15611. When the tissue has been sufficiently compressed, the staples positioned within the cavities to staples 15612 and 15613 may be ejected from the support portion 15610 and through the tissue so that the staples can contact the anvil and be sufficiently deformed to capture the tissue there. When the staples are being fired and/or after the staples have been fired, the circular knife can be advanced to cut the fabric. Thereafter, the anvil can be moved away from the support portion 15610 and/or detached from the surgical stapler 15600 so that the anvil and surgical stapler 15600 can be removed from the surgical site. Such surgical staplers 15600 and such surgical techniques can be used to join two portions of the large intestine, for example. In various circumstances, circular staple lines can be configured to hold portions of the large intestine together while the tissue heals and simultaneously allow portions of the large intestine to resiliently expand. Surgical stapling instruments and similar surgical techniques are disclosed in US Patent No. 5,285,945 entitled SURGICAL ANASTOMOSIS STAPLING INSTRUMENT, which was issued February 15, 1994, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

[000955] In addition to the above, a tissue thickness compensator may be positioned against and/or secured to the support portion 15610 of the surgical stapler 15600, for example. The fabric thickness compensator may be comprised of a circular or annular ring of material comprising an inner radius and an outer radius, for example. Under certain circumstances, the fabric may be positioned against this ring of material, and when the anvil is used to move the fabric towards the support portion 15610, the fabric thickness compensator may be compressed between the fabric and the platform surface. 15611. During use, staples can be fired through the fabric thickness compensator and the fabric so that the staples can contact the anvil and deform to its fired position to capture portions of the fabric and thickness compensator of fabric inside the staples. In various circumstances, in addition to the above, the ring of material comprising the tissue thickness compensator must be sufficiently resilient to allow the portions of the large intestine surrounding the staple lines to expand. Referring again to Figures 345 and 346, a flexible fabric thickness compensator 15620 may comprise a flexible circular or annular inner ring 15624 which may, for example, define a circular or annular aperture 15625. The inner ring 15624 may be configured so that that it does not get caught in the installed staples of the 15600 Surgical Stapler; instead, inner ring 15624 may be positioned radially inwardly with respect to inner row of staple cavities 15612. For example, fabric thickness compensator 15620 may comprise a plurality of pins, such as inner pins 15622 and pins 15623, for example, extending therefrom so that the pins can be at least partially captured within the clamps when they are being deformed. More particularly, with particular reference to Figure 345, each inner tag 15622 may comprise a head which is positioned over a staple cavity 15612 defined in the surgical stapler 15600 wherein the head may be attached to the inner ring 15624 by a neck 15626, for example , and similarly, each outer tag 15623 may comprise a head which is positioned over a staple cavity 15613 defined in surgical stapler 15600 wherein the head may be attached to inner ring 15624 by a neck 15627, for example. The heads of inner pins 15622 and outer pins 15623 can comprise any suitable shape, such as circular, oval, and/or elliptical, for example. Necks 15626 and/or 15627 may also comprise any suitable shape wherein necks 15627 connecting the outer pin heads 15623 to the inner ring 15624 may be configured to extend between adjacent inner clip cavities 15612 in the support portion 15610 so that the necks 15627 are not captured within the staples dispensed from the internal staple cavities 15612.

[000956] Referring now to Figures 347 and 348, a flexible fabric thickness compensator 15720 may comprise a circular or annular flexible outer ring 15724, for example. The 15724 outer ring can be configured so that it does not get caught in the installed staples of the 15600 surgical stapler; instead, outer ring 15724 may be positioned radially outwardly with respect to outer row of staple cavities 15613. For example, fabric thickness compensator 15720 may comprise a plurality of pins, such as inner pins 15622 and pins 15623, for example, extending therefrom so that the pins can be at least partially captured within the clamps when they are being deformed. More particularly, with particular reference to Figure 347, each inner tag 15622 may comprise a head which is positioned over a staple cavity 15612 defined in the surgical stapler 15600 wherein the head may be attached to the outer ring 15724 by a neck 15726, for example , and similarly, each outer tag 15623 may comprise a head which is positioned over a staple cavity 15613 defined in surgical stapler 15600 wherein the head may be attached to outer ring 15724 by a neck 15727, for example. The heads of inner pins 15622 and outer pins 15623 can comprise any suitable shape, such as circular, oval, and/or elliptical, for example. Necks 15726 and/or 15727 may also comprise any suitable shape wherein necks 15726 connecting the heads of inner pins 15622 to outer ring 15724 may be configured to extend between adjacent outer clip cavities 15613 so that necks 15726 are not are captured within staples dispensed from inner staple cavities 15613. Alternatively, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise a circular or annular flexible inner ring, a circular or annular flexible outer ring, and, in addition, a plurality of pins which can be connected to the inner ring and/or the outer ring. Certain pins can be connected to the inner ring and certain other pins can be connected to the outer ring. At least some of the pins can be connected to the inner ring and outer ring. In any case, in addition to the above, the inner ring 15624 of the fabric thickness compensator 15620, the outer ring 15724 of the fabric thickness compensator 15720, and/or any other suitable fabric thickness compensator may be configured to expand and/or contract to accommodate expansion and/or contraction of the tissue against which it is implanted. Furthermore, while various embodiments are described herein as comprising circular or annular support rings, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise any support structure shaped appropriately for attaching labels thereto. In addition to the above, the circular knife advanced by the surgical stapler to cut the tissue captured between the anvil and the support portion can also cut the reinforcement material. For example, the knife can separate the inner support ring from the pins by cutting their necks, for example.

[000957] In addition to the above, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise removable and/or relatively movable positions which may be configured to allow the fabric thickness compensator to expand and/or contract to accommodate movement of the fabric against which it was implanted. Referring now to Figures 349 and 350, a circular or annular tissue thickness compensator 15820 may be positioned against and/or supported by the platform surface 15611 of the surgical stapler 15600 which may be held in an unexpanded position (Figure 349) while it is being deployed against the tissue, and after the 15820 Tissue Thickness Compensator has been deployed, the 15820 Tissue Thickness Compensator can be configured to expand outward as shown in Figure 350. The 15820 Tissue Thickness Compensator may comprise a plurality of arcuate portions 15822 which may be connected together by an inner ring 15824, for example. The arcuate portions 15822 may be separated from each other by joints 15828. Alternatively, the arcuate portions 15822 may be connected together, wherein, for example, an arrangement of perforations may allow the arcuate portions 15822 to detach from one another. In any case, the arcuate portions 15822 may each comprise interlocking elements, such as projections 15826 and notches 15823, for example, which may cooperate to limit relative movement between the arcuate portions 15822 before the fabric thickness compensator 15820 be deployed. In addition to the above, each arcuate portion 15822 may be connected to the inner ring 15824 by one or more connectors 15827, for example, which may be configured to releasably hold the arcuate portions 15822 in position. After staples, such as staples 10030, for example, stored within the support portion 15610 have been used to deploy the tissue thickness compensator 15620 against tissue, with reference primarily to Figure 350, the connectors 15827 may detach from the ring 15824 and allow the 15820 Fabric Thickness Compensator to expand at least partially to accommodate movement within the underlying fabric. In various circumstances, all of the arcuate portions 15822 may detach from the inner ring 15824 while, in other circumstances, only some of the arcuate portions 15822 may detach from the inner ring 15824. Alternatively, the arcuate portions 15822 may be connected by flexible sections, the which can allow the arcuate portions 15822 to move relative to each other, but not detach from each other. For example, the flexible sections may not be clipped and may be configured to stretch and/or contract to accommodate the relative movement of the arcuate portions 15822. In Figures 349 and 350, the fabric thickness compensator 15820 may comprise eight arcuate portions. 15822, for example. Alternatively, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise any suitable amount of arcuate portions, such as two or more arcuate portions, for example.

[000958] In addition to the above, a tissue thickness compensator 15620, 15720, and/or 15820, for example, can be configured to compensate for thicker and/or thinner tissue captured between the anvil and the support portion 15610 of the surgical instrument 15600. Optionally, similarly to the above, the height formed, or triggered, of the clamps may be adjusted by moving the anvil towards and/or away from the support portion 15610. More particularly, the anvil may be moved closer to the support portion 15610 to reduce the formed height of the clamps while correspondingly, the anvil can be moved further away from the support portion 15610 to increase the formed height of the clamps. In such cases, as a result, a surgeon may adjust the anvil away from the support portion 15610 to account for thick tissue and towards the support portion 15610 to account for thin tissue. In many other circumstances, the surgeon may decide not to adjust the anvil and rely on the tissue thickness compensator to account for thinner and/or thicker tissue. Optionally, as a result the surgical instrument 15600 may comprise at least two means for compensating for different tissue thicknesses and/or variations in tissue thicknesses.

[000959] Optionally, as described above, a fabric thickness compensator may be attached to a support portion of a staple cartridge. The bottom surface of the fabric thickness compensator may comprise one of a layer of hooks or a layer of loops while a platform surface on the support portion may comprise the other of the layer of hooks and a layer of loops. For example, the hooks and loops can be configured to engage each other and releasably retain the fabric thickness compensator to the support portion. Optionally, each hook may comprise an enlarged head extending from a neck, for example. A plurality of blocks comprising the loops, for example, may be connected to the bottom surface of the fabric thickness compensator while a plurality of blocks comprising the hooks may be attached to the platform surface of the support portion. The support portion may comprise one or more openings and/or recesses, for example, which may be configured to receive an insert comprising hooks and/or loops. In addition to or instead of the above, a fabric thickness compensator may be removably mounted to an anvil using such hook and loop arrangements, for example. Hooks and loops may comprise fibrous surfaces, for example.

[000960] Optionally, as described above, a staple cartridge may comprise a support portion and a tissue thickness compensator attached to the support portion. As also described above, the support portion may comprise a longitudinal slit configured to receive a cutting element therein and the fabric thickness compensator may comprise a retaining element that can be retained in the longitudinal slit. Referring now to Figure 386, a staple cartridge 16000 may comprise a support portion 16010 that includes a platform surface 16011 and a longitudinal slot 16015. The staple cartridge 16000 may additionally comprise a fabric thickness compensator 16020 positioned above the platform surface 16011. Fabric thickness compensator 16020 may include a longitudinal retainer 16025 that extends downwardly into longitudinal slot 16015. For example, retainer 16025 may be pressed into slot 16015 so that the interaction between retaining member 16025 and slot 16015 can resist relative movement between support portion 16010 and fabric thickness compensator 16020. The fabric thickness compensator body 16020 may be comprised of a first material and the fabric thickness compensator body 16020 retainer 16025 may be comprised of a second or different material. The fabric thickness compensator body 16020 may be comprised of a material having a first durometer and the retaining member 16025 may be comprised of a material having a second durometer, wherein the second durometer may be greater than the first durometer. , for example. During use, staples 10030 can be pushed up by staple drivers 10040 so that the tips of staples 10030 can push through the body of fabric thickness compensator 16020 and emerge through the fabric-contacting surface 16021 and capture by the least a portion of the fabric thickness compensator 16020 against the target fabric. In accordance with the invention, a cutting element passing through slot 16015 can cut retaining element 16025 when staples 10030 are being dispensed. When tissue thickness compensator 16020 has been deployed, retaining member 16025 may be withdrawn from slot 16015. Fabric thickness compensator body 16020 may be configured to detach from retaining member 16025.

[000961] Referring now to Figures 387 and 389, a staple cartridge 17000 may comprise a support portion 17010 that includes a platform surface 17011 and a longitudinal slot 17015. The staple cartridge 17000 may additionally comprise a thickness compensator of fabric 17020 positioned above platform surface 17011. Fabric thickness compensator 17020 may include a longitudinal retaining member 17025 that extends downwardly into longitudinal slot 17015. For example, retaining member 17025 may be pressed into the slot 17015 so that the interaction between the retaining member 17025 and the slot 17015 can resist relative movement between the support portion 17010 and the fabric thickness compensator 17020. The retaining element 17025 can extend through the entirety of the thickness compensator 17020. fabric thickness 17020 to its top surface 17021 wherein body portions 17024 of the thickness compensator Fabric insert 17020 may be attached to opposite sides of retention member 17025. For example, retention member 17025 may also be configured to resist lateral deflection of, for example, fabric thickness compensator 17020. Body portions 17024 may be formed from a first material and the retaining member 17025 may be formed from a second or different material. The body portions 17024 may be comprised of a material having a first durometer and the retaining member 17025 may be comprised of a material having a second durometer, wherein the second durometer may be greater than the first durometer, for example. In addition to the above, a cutting element passing through slot 17015 can cut retaining element 17025 while clips 10030 are being dispensed. When tissue thickness compensator 17020 has been deployed, retaining member 17025 may be withdrawn from slot 17015. Body portions 17024 may be configured to detach from retaining member 17025.

[000962] Referring now to Figure 388, a staple cartridge 18000 may comprise a support portion 18010 that includes a platform surface 18011 and a longitudinal slot 18015. The staple cartridge 18000 may additionally comprise a fabric thickness compensator 18020 positioned above the platform surface 18011. Fabric thickness compensator 18020 may include a longitudinal retaining member 18025 that extends downward and into longitudinal slot 18015. For example, retaining member 18025 may be pressed into the slot 18015 so that the interaction between retention member 18025 and slot 18015 can resist relative movement between support portion 18010 and fabric thickness compensator 18020. fabric thickness 18020 to its top surface 18021 wherein body portions 18024 of the thickness compensator of fabric 18020 may be attached to opposite sides of the retaining member 18025. The retaining member 18025 may comprise an enlarged portion 18026 which can be received in a cavity 18016 defined in the slot 18015. For example, the enlarged portion 18026 may resist removal of retaining member 18025 from slot 18015.

[000963] Now referring to Figure 445, a tissue thickness compensator, such as the tissue thickness compensator 22020, for example, can be attached to an anvil of a surgical stapling instrument, such as the anvil 22060, for example. Fabric thickness compensator 22020 may include a cavity 22024 defined between a first film 22026 and a second film 22027, wherein at least portions of the first film 22026 are attached to the second film 22027. For example, the first film 22026 may be attached to the second film 22027 along side junctions 22028a and 22028b, for example. The first film 22026 may be attached to the second film 22027 along a sealed perimeter to sealably confine the cavity 22024. The first film 22026 and the second film 22027 may be heat-insulated together with the side seams 22028a, 22028b and/or or any other junction that connects 22026 and 22027 movies, for example. Referring again to Figure 445, the anvil 22060 may comprise a plurality of staple forming pockets 22062 which may each be configured to receive and deform the staple leg, wherein the second film 22027 may comprise projections 22022 which may extend into forming pockets 22062. Projections 22022 may be sized and configured so that they fit tightly into forming pockets 22062 and can retain fabric thickness compensator 22020 to anvil 22060. As illustrated, anvil 22060 may comprise six rows of forming pockets 22062, wherein fabric thickness compensator 22020 may similarly comprise six rows of projections 22022 which are aligned with forming pockets 22062, for example. Other embodiments comprising more or less than six rows of forming pockets 22062 and/or projections 22022 could be used. One or more adhesives could be used to retain the fabric thickness compensator 22020 to the anvil 20060.

[000964] As discussed above, the fabric thickness compensator 22020 may comprise a cavity 22024 defined therein. Cavity 22024 may extend longitudinally along with anvil 22060. Again referring to Figure 445, tissue thickness compensator 22020 may comprise a compressible material positioned in cavity 22024. Now referring to Figure 446, staples such as staples 22030 , for example, can be ejected from a staple cartridge so that staples 22030 penetrate tissue T and then penetrate tissue thickness compensator 22020 before contacting anvil 22060. As per legs of staples 22030 are deformed by the anvil 22060, the legs can be turned down to re-enter the fabric thickness compensator 22020 once more. In either case, once the staples 22030 have penetrated the fabric thickness compensator 22020, one or more fluids contained in the cavity 22024, for example, may flow or drip out of the fabric thickness compensator 22020 and onto the fabric T. Cavity 22024 may comprise one or more powders contained therein which may escape cavity 22024 once fabric thickness compensator 22020 has been at least partially ruptured by staples 22030, for example. In accordance with the invention, a material 22025 positioned within the cavity 22024 can be compressed or compressed in the clamps 22030 when the clamps 22030 are deformed into their fired configurations so that a fluid stored in the material 22025 can be expressed from the material 22025, e.g. example. Referring again to Figure 446, staples 22030 can also be configured to capture a fabric thickness compensator, such as compensator 22029, for example, removably secured to the staple cartridge against the other side of the fabric T.

[000965] In addition to the above, the material 22025 may comprise freeze-dried thrombin, freeze-dried fibrin and/or small fiber non-woven oxidized regenerated cellulose, for example. Material 22025 may comprise a pellet of compacted powder. The sealed cavity 22024 may comprise an internal atmosphere that has a pressure below the atmosphere surrounding the fabric thickness compensator 22020. In such a case, the pressure difference between the atmosphere in the internal cavity 22024 and the atmosphere may cause the films to 22027 and 22028 are extracted inwards. When inner cavity 22024 is breached by clamps 22030 as described above, the vacuum in inner cavity 22024 can equalize to the surrounding atmosphere and material 22025 can escape inner cavity 22024, also as described above. Under such circumstances, the fabric thickness compensator 22020 may expand and apply a compressive force to the T fabric captured in the staples 20030. Where the material 22025 is vacuum packed in the fabric thickness compensator 22020, the material 22025 may expand after the inner cavity 22024 has been drilled. Films 22026, 22027 may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material and may be configured to dissolve once placed on the patient. For example, each film 22026, 22027 may be comprised of a layer, or laminate, that is between approximately 0.0064 mm (0.25 mils) and approximately 0.013 mm (0.50 mils) thick, for example. In any event, in addition to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 22020, including material 22025, may be transected by a cutting element as staples 22030 are fired from its staple cartridge.

[000966] Again with reference to Figure 445, cavity 22024 and material 22025 of fabric thickness compensator 22020 may be positioned below the four inner rows of staple forming pockets 22062 while seams 22028a, 22028b may be positioned below the outer rows of forming pockets 22062. In such cases, the staples in the outer rows of staples may not engage material 22025 and thus may not capture material 22025 therein. Instead, such clips can only capture films 22026 and 22027 along junctions 22028a, 22028b. Alternatively, now referring to Figures 447 and 448, a fabric thickness compensator 22120 may comprise, similar to the above, a first film 22126, a second film 22127 and a plurality of materials 22125a-d captured between the first film 22126 and the second film 22127. For example, with particular reference to Figure 447, the first material 22125a may be aligned with an outer row of staples 22030 in staple cartridges 22000 and an outer row of staple cavities 22062 in anvil 22060, wherein the second material 22125b and the third material 22125c can each be aligned with the two inner rows of staples 22030 and the staple cavities 22062, and the fourth material 22126d can be aligned with the other outer row of staples 22030 and the cavities of clip 22062. In such a case, now referring to Figure 448, all clips 22030 can be arranged so that they can capture at least one of the materials 22125a to 22125d in them. As illustrated in Figures 447 and 448, in addition to the above, staples 22030 can be lifted between a non-fired position and a fired position by means of staple drivers 22040 positioned on the staple cartridge 22000.

[000967] Again with reference to Figures 447 and 448, layers 22126 and 22127 may define one or more sealed cavities in which materials 22125a-d may be positioned. Layers 22126 and 22127 may be sealed together along a perimeter which may include side seams 22128a and 22128b, for example, using any suitable process, such as heat and/or laser welding, for example. Each of materials 22125a to 22125d may be sealed in separate cavities while alternatively two or more materials 22125a to 22125d may be sealed in the same cavity. Materials 22125a to 22125d may be comprised of the same material or materials while, alternatively, one or more materials 22125a to 22125d may be comprised of different materials. One or more materials 22125a to 22125d may be comprised of sodium stearate and/or LAE, for example. Materials 22125a to 22125d may comprise a lubricant. In such cases, the legs of the staples 22030 may be exposed to the lubricant when the staple legs penetrate the materials 22125a to 22125d of the fabric thickness compensator 22120. After the legs pass through the fabric thickness compensator 22120, the legs may come into contact. contact with the 22060 anvil, where the lubricant can reduce the friction coefficient and friction forces between the clamp legs and the 22060 anvil. Under such circumstances, the force required to fire the 22030 clamps can be reduced. Due to the position of the fabric thickness compensator 22120 against the anvil 22060, the clamp legs of the staples 22030 can contact the anvil 22060 directly after exiting the fabric thickness compensator 22120 thus reducing the possibility that the lubricant can be removed from the clamp legs prior to contacting the anvil 22060. Similarly, the clamp legs of the clamps 22030 may contact the anvil 22060 directly after being exposed to one or more drugs in the tissue thickness compensator 22120 thus reducing the possibility that drugs may be removed from the staple legs before re-entering the T fabric. Under some circumstances, the staple legs may re-enter the 22120 fabric thickness compensator as the staple legs are deformed downwards so that the clamp legs can be re-exposed to the drugs before they re-enter the tether. acid T, for example. Optionally, similar to the above, second film 22127 may comprise a plurality of projections 22122, for example, which may be firmly received in clamp cavities 22062 in order to retain tissue thickness compensator 22120 to anvil 22060 , for example.

[000968] Referring now to Figures 449 and 450, an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument may comprise a tissue thickness compensator, such as compensator 22220, for example, which may comprise a plurality of cavities 22222 aligned with pockets 22062 of the anvil 22060. The compensator 22220 may be comprised of a first or base layer 22226 and a second or top layer 22227, wherein the first layer 22226 and/or the second layer 22227 may comprise a plurality of raised portions or partial bubbles that can define cavities 22222. As illustrated in Figure 449, compensator 22220 can be attached to anvil 22060 such that cavities 22222 align, or at least substantially align, with pockets of forming clamps 22062 of the anvil 22060. Optionally, each cavity 22222 may include one or more medicaments contained therein, such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose. a, calcium and/or alginate. In use, each cavity 22222 may be in a sealed, unpunctured state prior to being punctured by staples 22030 ejected from staple cartridge 22000, for example. After the staple legs 22030 have passed through the fabric T, now referring to Figure 450, each staple leg can pierce and penetrate the first layer 22226 and enter a cavity 22222 in which the staple leg can pass through one or more drugs contained therein. in it before piercing and penetrating the second layer 22227. Similar to the above, the legs of the clamps 22030 may then contact the anvil 22060.

[000969] Cavities 22222 can keep the one or more drugs stored therein in a dry or at least substantially dry state before being ruptured. After a cavity 22222 has been ruptured, a fluid, such as blood, for example, can enter the cavity 22222 and mix with one or more drugs. Mixing the fluid with a drug may cause the drug to expand in cavity 22222, wherein, for example, the drug may comprise at least one hydrogel, for example. The medicament may comprise at least one hemostatic material, for example. First layer 22226 and/or second layer 22227 may be comprised of a flexible material that can stretch to accommodate expansion of the drug. Layers 22226, 22227 may be comprised of a CAP/GLY material, for example. In either case, the expansion of the drug may apply a compressive force to the T-tissue captured within and/or positioned around the staples 22030, for example. Under various circumstances, expansion of the drug can cause cavities 22222 to rupture. A first group of cavities 22222 can comprise a first medicament therein while a second group of cavities 22222 can comprise a second medicament therein, for example. For example, the first drug may be configured to expand at a first amount and/or at a first rate while the second drug may be configured to expand at a second amount and/or at a second rate, for example, where the first amount may be different from the second amount and/or the first rate may be different from the second rate. In addition to the above, one or more cavities 22222 may include two or more drugs stored in each cavity, wherein the drugs may comprise a first drug and a second drug, for example. A cavity 22222 can maintain the first drug and the second drug in a dry state, or at least substantially dry, before being ruptured. After cavity 22222 has been ruptured as described above, blood, for example, may enter cavity 22222 and mix with the first and second drugs, whereupon the first and second drugs may form an expanding gel.

[000970] Now referring to Figures 451 to 453, a fabric thickness compensator, such as compensator 22320, for example, may comprise a plurality of first cavities 22322a and a plurality of second cavities 22322b which may be aligned with the forming pockets of clamps 22062a and 22062b, respectively. Referring particularly to Figure 452, the staple forming pockets 22062a and 22062b may be defined on separate staggered surfaces on the anvil 22060. More particularly, the forming pockets 22062a may be defined on the first surfaces 22069a of the anvil 22060 and the forming pockets 22062b may be defined on second surfaces 22069b, wherein first surfaces 22069a may be positioned offset from, or higher than, second surfaces 22069b, for example. The first cavities 22322a of the fabric thickness compensator 22320 can be larger than the second cavities 22322b, wherein, for example, the first cavities 22322a can extend higher than the second cavities 22322b. As a result of the foregoing, the first cavities 22322a can extend upwardly into the first staple forming pockets 22062a while, at the same time, the second cavities 22322b can extend upwardly into the second staple forming pockets 22062a. 22062b staples. Optionally, each of the first cavities 22322a can be configured to contain a greater amount of a drug than the second cavities 22322b, for example. Alternatively, first cavities 22322a and second cavities 22322b may obtain the same, or at least substantially the same, amount of medicament therein even if cavities 22322a and 22322b are of different sizes.

[000971] In addition to the above, the first cavities 22322a can be arranged in certain rows, while the second cavities 22322b can be arranged in different rows. A fabric thickness compensator may comprise cavities aligned with each forming pocket while, alternatively, with reference to Figure 459, a fabric thickness compensator such as the compensator 22420, for example, may comprise cavities aligned with only a few forming pockets. . Referring again to Figure 452, compensator 22320 can be attached to anvil 22060. Cavities 22322a and/or cavities 22322b can be configured to fit securely into staple forming pockets 22062a and/or 22062b, respectively. The compensator 22320 may be mounted on the anvil 22060 so that the second layer 22327 of the compensator 22320 is positioned against the second surfaces 22069b of the anvil 22060. Alternatively, now referring to Figures 454 and 455, the compensator 22320 may be positioned adjacent to the anvil 22060 so that the compensator 22320 can be adjacent to the anvil 22060 when the anvil 22060 is moved towards the staple cartridge 22000 to compact the T fabric together. Since staples 22030 have been fired from staple cartridge 22000 and deformed by anvil 22060, now referring to Figure 456, compensator 22320 can be captured against tissue T by staples 22030 and anvil 22060 can be moved in the opposite direction. compensator 22320. Under certain circumstances, now referring to Figure 457, one or more staples 22030 may not be properly deformed by the anvil 22030. Under such circumstances, now referring to Figure 458, the cavities in the fabric thickness compensator that overlap the wrongly fired or malformed staples may not be pierced when the staples are fired. For example, the tissue thickness compensator may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material that can dissolve and subsequently release the drug contained in the unperforated cavities.

[000972] In addition to the above, the first cavities 22322a and/or the second cavities 22322b of the fabric thickness compensator 22320 may comprise a gas, such as air, carbon dioxide and/or nitrogen, for example, sealed therein. . Cavities 22322a and/or 22322b may comprise bubbles which may burst when clamps 22030 are fired through cavities 22322a and 22322b to release the gas contained therein. Such an explosion can provide audio feedback to the surgeon that cavities 22322a and 22322b are bursting. Under some circumstances, however, some of the clamps 22030 may be erroneously fired, as described above, and the cavities 22322a and 22322b associated therewith may not explode. Under various circumstances, the surgeon may scan the stapled tissue for any unexploded blisters, or cavities 22322a and 22322b, and determine if any corrective action is needed.

[000973] As discussed above, now with reference to Figure 460, a surgical stapling instrument may comprise a triggering member, such as triggering member 22080, for example, which may include a cutting element, or cutting edge, 22081 that may advance through fabric T and one or more fabric thickness compensators as firing member 22080 advances through cartridge 22000 to position staples 22030 therefrom. Referring particularly to Figure 462, a compensator, such as compensator 22520, for example, may be attached to the anvil 22060 of the surgical stapling instrument, wherein the anvil 22060 may include a knife slot 22061 sized and configured to receive at least at least a portion of the cutting element 22081. Similarly, the staple cartridge 22000 may comprise a knife slot 22011 which is also sized and configured to receive at least a portion of the cutting element 22081. Again with reference to Fig. 460 , compensator 22520 may comprise one or more cavities, such as cavities 22522, for example, positioned along a cut line 22521 of compensator 22520, wherein cavities 22522 may be aligned with knife slot 22061 defined in anvil 22060. As the cutting element 22081 progresses distally through the staple cartridge 22000 to position the staples 22030, the cutting element 22081 may incise the t tissue T and cavities 22522 of compensator 22520. Similar to the above, with reference first to Figure 461, each cavity 22522 may define a sealed cavity 22524 which may contain one or more drugs 22525 therein. One or more cavities 22522 may be configured to contain a fluid that can be released when cavities 22522 are at least partially incised by cutting element 22081. Under various circumstances, cutting element 22081 may sequentially incise cavities 22522 and as a result , sequentially release the drugs contained therein.

[000974] With particular reference to Figure 462, the compensator 22520 may comprise lateral projections, or wings, 22529 which may extend along the sides thereof. Projections 22529 may be attached to anvil surfaces 22069a and/or anvil surfaces 22069b using one or more adhesives, for example. Projections 22522 can be sized and configured to fit tightly into knife slot 22061 of anvil 22060 so that, for example, projections 22522 can retain compensator 22520 to anvil 22060. Side projections 22529 can be sized and configured accordingly. that they extend over, or overlap, the staple-forming pockets 22062b and/or the staple-forming pockets 22062a. Alternatively, now referring to Figures 463 and 464, a compensator 22620 may comprise side projections 22629 that do not extend over, or overlap, the staple-forming pockets 22062a and 22062b of the anvil 22060 and/or any other staple-forming pockets, for example. For example, the compensator 22620 may not be captured in a staple 22030 ejected from the staple cartridge 22030. In any case, again with reference to Figure 460, the cutting element 22081 may tran- sect the compensator 22520 as per the compensator 22520 is secured to the fabric T by the clips 22030. In such cases, the tab 22520 may detach from the anvil 22060 and remain with the fabric T. Again with reference to the tab 22620 illustrated in Figures 463 and 464, the clips 22030 may not hold the tab 22620 to anvil 22060 and may remain attached to anvil 22060 after cutting element 22081 has transected compensator 22620.

[000975] Now referring to Figures 465 and 466, an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument may comprise a tissue thickness compensator, such as the compensator 22720, for example, which may be fixed, or may be configured to be fixed, to an anvil, such as anvil 22760, among others. Similar to the above, the anvil 22760 may comprise a plurality of staple forming pockets 22762 and a longitudinal knife slot 22761 configured to receive a cutting element therein as the cutting element advances through the end actuator. Compensator 22720 may comprise a first layer of film 22726 and a second layer of film 22727 which can be secured together to define a cavity 22724. For example, the first layer of film 22726 may be secured to the second layer of film 22727 along a sealed outer perimeter 22728, wherein the sealed outer perimeter 22728 may contain at least one drug 22725 in cavity 22724, for example. As illustrated in Figure 466, cavity 22724 and medicament 22725 may extend under all clamp cavities 22762 and the sealed perimeter 22728 may be positioned laterally with respect to the outermost clamp cavities 22762. Compensator 22720 may additionally comprise a rib 22721, for example, which can be configured to extend upwards into the knife slot 22761. For example, the rib 22721 can be sized and configured to fit tightly into the knife slot 22761 to secure the compensator 22720 to anvil 22760. Rib 22721 may be configured to align or center compensator 22720 with respect to anvil 22760. Similarly, with reference to Figure 467, a fabric thickness compensator 22820 may comprise a retaining rib 22821 that can be positioned in knife slot 22761, for example, in order to secure compensator 22820 to anvil 22760. Again with reference to Figure 46 6 , as a cutting element advances through knife slot 22761, under various circumstances, the cutting element may transection rib 22721 and release compensator 22720 from anvil 22760. Such cutting element is shown in Figure 467 as part of firing member 22080, for example.

[000976] Referring again to Figure 467, the fabric thickness compensator 22820 may comprise a first layer 22826 and a second layer 22827 which may be configured and arranged to define a plurality of first packets 22824a and a plurality of second packets 22824b. Each of the first packets 22824a may be configured to contain a first drug and each of the second packets 22824b may be configured to contain a second drug, wherein the second drug may be different from the first drug. First packets 22824a and second packets 22824b may be arranged in an alternating arrangement. For example, first packs 22824a and second packs 22824b may extend laterally along fabric thickness compensator 22820 so that a second pack 22824b is positioned intermediate the first two packs 22824a and a first pack 22824a is positioned intermediate the two second 22824b packets, for example. As the shear element 22080 progresses through the compensator 22820, as shown in Figure 467, the shear element 22080 may transect a first packet 22824a, followed by a second packet 22824b, followed by a first packet 22824a, followed by a second package 22824b and so on. Correspondingly, in such cases, the cutting element 22080 may sequentially release the first drug contained in a first pack 22824a and the second drug contained in a second pack 22824b in an alternating arrangement, for example. Where first packets 22824a and second packets 22824b are positioned adjacent to each other, the first drug may be configured to mix with the second drug when they are released from their respective first packets 22824a and second packets 22824b. For example, advancing the permeable shear element of the compensator 22820 may mix the first drug with the second drug.

[000977] In addition to the above, the first drug may comprise a first powder while the second drug may comprise a second powder. The first drug and/or the second drug may be comprised of a hemostatic material, oxidized regenerated cellulose, alginate and/or calcium, for example. The first drug and/or the second drug may comprise a fluid. One or more of the first packs 22824a and/or one or more of the second packs 22824b may comprise a lubricant that can reduce the force required to advance the trigger member 22080 through the compensator 22820 and/or the fabric T. The first layer of film 22826 and/or the second film layer 22827 may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material, such as PDS, for example. The first film layer 22826 and the second film layer 22827 may be secured together so that the first packets 22824a are sealed from the second packets 22824b before being incised by the trigger member 22080. The first packets 22824a and/or the second packages 22825b may comprise a certain breaking strength in order to withstand a certain burst pressure. More particularly, when an anvil, such as anvil 22760, for example, moves compensator 22820 toward a staple cartridge positioned opposite anvil 22760, packs 22824a, 22824b may be positioned against tissue positioned intermediate the packs 22824a, 22824b and the staple cartridge, wherein the anvil 22760 can then be pushed, or pinched, down toward the staple cartridge to compress the tissue positioned therebetween. Under such circumstances, packages 22824a, 22824b may be subjected to compressive pressures. Under some circumstances, it may be desirable for packs 22824a and/or packs 22824b to remain intact until they are incised by cutting element 22080 and/or pierced by staples fired from the staple cartridge. In certain other circumstances, it may be desirable for the packs 22824a and/or packs 22824b to rupture due to the compressive pinch load applied thereto.

[000978] As discussed above, first packets 22824a and second packets 22842b may extend laterally along compensator 22820. First packets 22824a may extend along transverse axes 22823a, while second packets 22824b may extend along of transverse axes 22823b, for example. First axis 22823a and/or second axis 22823b may be perpendicular, or at least substantially perpendicular, to a longitudinal axis 22083 of trimmer 22820. For example, longitudinal axis 22083 may define the cutting path of firing member 22080. First axis 22823a and/or second axis 22823b may not be perpendicular to longitudinal axis 22083 and may be inclined with respect to longitudinal axis 22083. Optionally, as discussed above, first packs 22824a and second packs 22824b may be arranged in a alternate layout. Alternatively, any other suitable arrangement of first packets 22824a and second packets 22824b can be used. For example, a sequence of packs arranged on a fabric thickness compensator could include a first pack 22824a, a second pack 22824b, a second pack 22824b and a first pack 22824a. A fabric thickness compensator may further comprise a plurality of third packages that comprise a third drug that is different from the first drug and the second drug. For example, the first packets, the second packets and the third packets can be arranged in an alternating arrangement. For example, a sequence of packs arranged on a fabric thickness compensator could include a first pack, followed by a second pack, which is followed by a third pack, for example.

[000979] Again with reference to Fig. 467, the first packs 22824a and/or the second packs 22824b of the fabric thickness compensator 22820 may define U-shaped, or at least substantially U-shaped, cross-sections, for example. Referring now to Figure 468, packs 22924 of a fabric thickness compensator 22920 may define circular, or at least substantially circular, cross-sections, for example. Referring now to Figure 469, packs 23024 of a fabric thickness compensator 23020 may define oval and/or elliptical cross-sections, for example. Referring again to Figure 467, first cavities 22824a and second cavities 22824b may comprise symmetrical, or at least nearly symmetrical, configurations which are defined in parallel, or at least substantially parallel, rows. Alternatively, referring now to Figure 470, a fabric thickness compensator, such as the compensator 23120, for example, may comprise asymmetric cavities 23122 defined therein which may have an irregular and/or non-repeating pattern, for example. For example, each of the cavities 23122 may contain one or more different drugs therein.

[000980] Now referring to Figure 471, a fabric thickness compensator, such as the fabric thickness compensator 23220, for example, may comprise a housing 23226 defining a cavity 23224 therein and a material 23225 positioned in the cavity 23224. Compartment 23226 could be comprised of a resorbable polymer, PDS, PGA, PLLA, Cap Gly and/or PCL, for example, while material 23225 could be comprised of a hemostatic agent, oxidized regenerated cellulose, Hercules, fibrin and/or thrombin , for example, which may take any suitable form such as a powder, a fiber and/or a gel, for example. Housing 23226 can be manufactured using an extrusion process. In such cases, housing 23226 may comprise a constant, or at least substantially constant, cross-section along its length that can be created without having to weld a joint. For example, cavity 23224 may be defined by a side wall extending around the entire perimeter thereof with no openings defined therein. Housing 23226 may be comprised of a mesh and/or straw-like material having openings defined therein. Apertures may be cut in housing 23226 by means of a laser cutting process and/or a die cutting process, for example.

[000981] As part of the fabrication of material 23225, now referring to Figures 474 to 476, a strand of yarn can be created using fibers and/or a fibrous material, such as oxidized regenerated cellulose, for example. The longer fibers 23325, shown in Figure 474, and the shorter fibers 23425, shown in Figure 475, may be blended as shown in Figure 476 to form the strand of yarn of material 23225. The strand of yarn may be extracted and/or or placed under tension in order to stretch the fibers contained therein in a longitudinal direction. Referring now to Figure 477, the strand of yarn of material 23225 can be softened by grippers 23290 which can grip and twist the material 23225 in order to increase the volume of the strand of yarn. For example, grips 23290 can soften material 23225 as the strand of yarn moves relative to grips 23290, for example. Referring again to Figure 477, the cutting elements 23291 could be used to make small incisions and/or microcuts, for example, in the wire strand of material 23225. Similar to the above, the cutting elements 23291 can cut the material 23225 as the strand of yarn moves relative to the cutting elements 23291. The strand of yarn of material 23225 may be softened before the incisions described above are performed while, alternatively, the strand of yarn of material 23225 could be incised before to be softened.

[000982] Once the yarn strand of material 23225 has been properly prepared, material 23225 can be positioned in compartment 23226. Now referring to Figure 478, two or more compartments 23226 could be formed together as part of an extrusion process , discussed above, wherein compartments 23226 may be connected together as part of a tube 23227. The strand of material wire 23225 may be positioned within, or drawn into, the cavity 23224 defined in the tube 23227. material 23225 may be positioned adjacent and/or within a first open end 23221 of cavity 23224, wherein a jaw 23292 may be inserted through a second open end 23222 of cavity 23224. The jaw 23292 may then be pushed through. cavity 23224 until the jaws 23292a of the jaw 23292 pass through, and/or are positioned with respect to, the first open end 23222 so that the jaw jaws 2 3292a can be manipulated to grip the strand of yarn of material 23225. A gripper may comprise a hook member, for example, which can be configured to grip the strand of yarn of material 23225. In either case, since the gripper 23292 has sufficiently gripped the strand of material yarn 23225, the gripper 23292 can be dragged back into the cavity 23224 in order to pull the strand of material yarn 23225 into the cavity 23224. The gripper 23292 can be configured to twist the strand of yarn from material 23225 before, during and/or after the strand of yarn is pulled into the tube 23227.

[000983] Once the strand of yarn of material 23225 has been properly positioned in the tube 23227, the gripper 23292 can then be operated to release the strand of yarn of material 23225. The strand of yarn can be released before the strand of yarn is pulled through second open end 23222 of tube 23227 while alternatively the strand of yarn may be released after the strand of yarn has been passed through second open end 23222, as illustrated in Figure 479. Under certain circumstances, the strand of yarn may be passed through the second open end 23222 so that when the strand of yarn is released, the strand of yarn can shrink, or pressure return, in the tube 23227 through the second open end 23222. Under various circumstances , the strand of yarn may be cut at a location adjacent to the first open end 23221 so that, similar to the above, the strand of yarn may shrink, or snap back, into the tumbler. bo 23227 through the first open end 23222. Under various circumstances, in addition to the above, the gripper 23292 may apply a tension force to the wire strand of material 23225 so that when the gripper 23292 releases the strand of wire and /or when the strand of yarn is cut, the tension force in the strand of yarn can be recovered, thereby allowing the strand of yarn to contract.

[000984] Once the strand of yarn of material 23225 has been sufficiently positioned in the tube 23227, now referring to Figure 480, the tube 23227 and the material 23225 can be cut to form a plurality of segments, where each segment can be transformed on a 23220 fabric thickness compensator, for example. The cavity 23224 extending through the cap 23226 of each segment may comprise an open end at opposite ends thereof. For example, one or both of the open ends may be closed and/or sealed by means of a hot fit, heat weld and/or laser weld process, for example. Referring to Figure 481, a segment comprising a cap 23226 and a portion of material 23225 therein may be positioned in a die configured to close and/or seal the open ends of the cap 23226. More particularly, the die may comprise a base 23294 and a movable portion 23296, for example, wherein the segment can be positioned in a cavity 23295 defined in the base 23294. Once positioned, the movable portion 23296 can be moved downwardly to apply a force to the segment. Optionally, heat may be applied to the segment via the base 23294 and/or the movable portion 23296, wherein the heat and/or force applied to the segment can distort the cap 23226. More specifically, the movable portion 23296 may define a pocket 23297 which can be circumvented to apply a pinching force to certain portions of the cover 23226, such as the open ends thereof, in order to close, flatten, and/or narrow such portions of the fabric thickness compensator 23220. For example, the pocket 23297 may be configured to form the closed ends 23228 of the fabric thickness compensator 23220 and flatten the portion of the fabric thickness compensator 23220 positioned intermediate the closed ends 23228. After the fabric thickness compensator 23220 has been properly formed, the movable portion 23296 can be moved to an open position and the fabric thickness compensator 23220 can be removed from the die. The fabric thickness compensator 23220 can then be positioned in a cooling vessel, where the compensator 23220 can be allowed to cool to room temperature and/or to any other suitable temperature.

[000985] Alternatively, in addition to the above, tube 23227 may be positioned in a hot forming die after material 23225 has been positioned therein. After the tube 23227 and the material 23225 positioned therein have been formed, the tube 23227 and the material 23225 can then be segmented into a plurality of fabric thickness compensators 23220, for example. Referring again to Figure 471, the fabric thickness compensator 23220 may comprise side wings, or loops, 23229 which may be configured to be attached to the anvil 22060, for example. For example, side wings 23229 can be formed on cover 23226 when fabric thickness compensator 23220 is formed between die portions 23294 and 23296 as described above. Referring now to Figure 472, a fabric thickness compensator 23320 may comprise side wings 23329 extending from cover 23326. Now referring to Figure 473, a fabric thickness compensator 23420 may comprise a cover 23426 having a or more flexible side joints 23428, for example, which may allow the cap 23426 to flex and flatten when subjected to compressive pressure in the hot forming die described above. Optionally, as a result of the above, the fabric thickness compensator 23220 may not comprise side seams. In such cases, again referring to Figure 471, material 23225 may extend to the side edges of anvil 22060, for example.

[000986] As described above, a strand of yarn can be passed through a tube and then cut to length to form one or more fabric thickness compensators. In addition to the above, a strand of wire can be pulled or pushed through a tube using a rigid strand of material. A rigid bead of polymeric material, such as PCL, for example, can be heated above its glass transition temperature and extended into a deformed shape. For example, the rigid strand may comprise an undeformed coil shape which, when extended in its deformed shape, may comprise a straight, or at least substantially straight, shape, for example. Thereafter, the rigid bead can be cooled below the glass transition temperature of the material while the rigid bead is constricted so that the rigid bead can maintain its deformed shape. Once the rigid strand is in its deformed shape, ORC fibers, for example, can be formed around the rigid strand. A strand of ORC yarn, for example, can be wrapped around, bunched and/or folded over the rigid strand. Alternatively, the rigid strand can be inserted into ORC fibers, for example. The rigid strand may comprise a tacky surface which can be wrapped and/or immersed in the ORC fibers. In either case, the rigid strand and ORC fibers can then be inserted into a tube, similar to the one set out above, and heated again above the glass transition temperature of the rigid strand. Under such circumstances, the rigid cord may be unconstrained, or at least substantially unconstrained, and may be allowed to return, or at least substantially return, to its original undeformed shape. For example, the rigid cord can contract when it returns to its original shape and retracts the ORC fibers in the tube. The center of the tube can be pinched to retain the rigid cord and ORC fibers in the center of the tube as the rigid tube contracts. Similar to the above, the ends of the tube may be sealed to confine the rigid strand and ORC fibers therein.

[000987] Now referring to Figure 573, a fabric thickness compensator 33320 can comprise a housing 33326, a compressible core positioned in the housing 33326 and closed ends 33328 which can be configured to contain the compressible core in the housing 33326. As set out above, housing 33326 may be produced from a continuous extrusion process and may comprise a continuous cross-sectional shape along the length thereof. Referring now to Figures 574 to 576, a fabric thickness compensator 33420 may comprise a housing 33426, a cavity 33424 defined in housing 33426, and a core 33425 positioned in cavity 33424. For example, housing 33426 may comprise a film body formed from a continuous extruded shape and the core 33425 may comprise a fibrous drug core, such as ORC, for example. Housing 33426 may comprise one or more flexible legs 33423 which may be configured to extend into a knife slot 22063 defined in anvil 22060 and releasably retain fabric thickness compensator 33420 to anvil 22060. Figures 577 to 579, a fabric thickness compensator 33520 may comprise a housing 33526, a cavity 33524 defined in housing 33526, and a core 33425 positioned in cavity 33524. For example, housing 33526 may comprise a film body formed from a continuous extruded shape and the core 33425 may comprise a fibrous drug core, such as ORC, for example. Housing 33526 may comprise one or more retaining members 33528 which may be configured to extend around the outer surface of anvil 22060 and releasably retain fabric thickness compensator 33520 to anvil 22060. For example, with particular reference to 579, the housing 33526 may comprise movable portions 33527 and a gap 33523 defined between the movable portions 33527, wherein, after the fabric thickness compensator 33520 has detached from the anvil 22060, the movable portions 33527 may open by the action of spring to expose the 33425 core contained therein. Referring now to Figures 580 to 581, a fabric thickness compensator 33620 may comprise a housing 33626, a cavity 33424 defined in housing 33626, and a core 33425 positioned in cavity 33424. For example, housing 33626 may comprise a body of film formed from a continuous extruded shape and the core 33425 may comprise a fibrous drug core, such as ORC, for example. Housing 33626 may comprise a thin section 33623 that may be aligned with the knife slot 22063 defined in the anvil 22060 so that a cutting element passing through the fabric thickness compensator 33620 can pass through the thin section 33623 and reduce force or energy. needed to transect the fabric thickness compensator 33620. Now referring to Figures 582 to 583, a fabric thickness compensator 33720 may comprise a housing 33726, a cavity 33424 defined in housing 33726 and a core 33425 positioned in cavity 33424 For example, housing 33726 may comprise a film body formed from a continuous extruded shape and core 33425 may comprise a fibrous drug core, such as ORC, for example. Housing 33726 may comprise one or more retaining members 33723 which may be configured to wrap around the outer surface of anvil 22060 and releasably retain fabric thickness compensator 33720 to anvil 22060. Now with reference to Figures 584 through 585, a fabric thickness compensator 33820 may comprise a housing 33826, a cavity 33424 defined in housing 33826, and a core 33425 positioned in cavity 33424. For example, housing 33826 may comprise a film body formed from a continuous extruded shape and the core 33425 may comprise a fibrous drug core, such as ORC, for example. Housing 33826 may comprise a substantially rectangular cavity 33424 and a substantially flat fabric contact surface 33829 as opposed to the arcuate cavity 33424 and the fabric contact surface shown in Figure 583, for example. Referring now to Figures 586 to 587, a fabric thickness compensator 33920 may comprise a housing 33926, a plurality of cavities 33924 defined in housing 33926, and a core 33925 positioned in each of cavities 33924. For example, housing 33926 may comprise a film body formed from a continuous extruded shape and the cores 33925 may each comprise a fibrous drug core, such as ORC, for example. The 33925 cores can be comprised of different materials. Housing 33926 may comprise one or more retaining members 33923 which may be configured to extend into knife slot 22063 of anvil 22060.

[000988] Now referring to Figure 482, a fabric thickness compensator can be formed using a bending process. In accordance with the invention, a 23525 material, such as oxidized regenerated cellulose, for example, can be placed on a lid sheet 23526 which can be folded and then sealed to encapsulate the 23525 material. cap 23526 can be understood from Cap Gly, for example. A continuous process can be used in which lid sheet 23526 can be passed under a hopper 23592 which is configured to dispense material 23525 onto lid sheet 23526. For example, lid sheet 23526 can be flattened between a cylinder 23591 and an anvil 23590 before the material 23525 is placed on the cover sheet 23526. The material 23525 may be placed on one side, or over half, of the cover sheet 23526, wherein the other side, or half, of the cover sheet. cap 23526 may be folded, or inverted, over material 23525. Before, during, and/or after material 23525 has been placed over cap sheet 23526, cap sheet 23526 may be folded or at least partially folded. Anvil 23590, for example, may comprise a cam surface 23594 that may be configured to lift one edge or side of longitudinally moving lid sheet 23526 and then fold lid sheet 23526 in half, for example. Cam surface 23594 may comprise a three-dimensional cam or barrel cam, which progressively lifts and rotates a portion of lid sheet 23526 as lid sheet 23526 passes cam surface 23594.

[000989] After the cover sheet 23526 has been folded over the material 23525, the folded cover sheet 23526 and the material 23525 positioned thereon may pass through a die 23593 which can compress and/or compact the folded cover sheet 23526 and the material 23525 to form a tube 23527. The edges of the folded lid sheet 23526 can be sealed by using any suitable process such as heat welding and/or laser welding, for example. Tube 23527 may be further flattened by means of one or more cylinders 23595, for example, before the side wall of tube 23527 has been sealed. Tube 23527 may be further flattened by means of one or more cylinders after the side wall of tube 23527 has been sealed. In either case, the tube 23527 may be segmented into portions to create separate fabric thickness compensators. The ends of the fabric thickness compensators may be sealed using any suitable process such as heat welding and/or laser welding, for example, while alternatively one or both ends of the fabric thickness compensator may remain in a open configuration, for example.

[000990] Now referring to Fig. 483, a buffer may be attached to an anvil, such as anvil 22060, for example, wherein the buffer may be configured to store at least one drug therein. A compensator 23620 may comprise a central body portion 23626 and lateral attachment portions 23628 which may be configured to be attached to anvil 22060. Compensator 23620 may further comprise an array of capillary channels 23627 defined in a tissue contact surface 23625 of the compensator 23620, wherein the capillary channels 23627 may be configured to store one or more drugs therein. For example, the drug may comprise a fluid which, due to fluid tension forces, may be held between the side walls of the capillary channels 23627. Under various circumstances, the drug may be applied to the buffer 23620 before the buffer 23620 is attached. to the anvil 22060 while, under some circumstances, the drug may be applied to the compensator 23620 after it has been attached to the anvil 22060, for example. In either case, the compensator 23620 can be configured to contact tissue positioned between the anvil 22060 and a staple cartridge positioned opposite the anvil 22060, whereby the drug stored in the capillary channels 23627 can flow over the tissue. Under various circumstances, the drug can flow into the capillary channels 23627.

[000991] Again with reference to the compensator 23620 illustrated in Figure 483, the capillary channel arrangement 23627 may be constructed and arranged in a cross hatch pattern, wherein a first quantity of channels 23627 may extend in a first direction and a second quantity of channels 23627 can extend in a second direction. The first number of channels 23627 may intersect and may be in fluid communication with the second number of channels 23627. Referring now to Figure 484, a compensator 23920 may comprise a body 23926 that includes an array of capillary channels 23927 defined in a tissue contact surface 23925. Channels 23927 can be defined along linear paths while channels 23927 can be defined along non-linear paths. A first number of channels 23927 may extend along axes 23923 while a second number of channels 23927 may extend along axes 23924, for example where axes 23923 may extend in directions other than axes 23924. The axes 23923 may be perpendicular, or at least substantially perpendicular, to axes 23924, where channels 23627 may define islands 23922 therebetween. For example, the top surfaces of the islands 23922 may define the fabric contact surface 23925 of the compensator 23920. The compensator 23920 may comprise a longitudinal axis 23921 and the channels 23627 may extend in directions that are transverse or inclined with respect to the axis. 23921. Again referring to Figure 483, a compensator 23720 may comprise a frame 23726 and a plurality of capillary channels 23727 defined in the body 23726. The compensator 23720 may additionally comprise a longitudinal channel 23721 which may be in fluid communication with the capillary channels 23727. Optionally, one or more drugs may be stored in the longitudinal channel 23721, wherein the drugs may flow between the channel 23721 and the capillary channels 23727, for example. Channel 23721 may define a longitudinal protrusion that may extend upward into a longitudinal knife slot 22061 defined in anvil 22060.

[000992] As discussed above, again with reference to Figure 483, an array of capillary channels defined in a compensator may comprise a cross hatch pattern. Alternatively, however, an array of capillary channels may comprise any suitable shape or configuration. For example, with reference to the compensator 23820 illustrated in Figure 483, the channels 23827 defined in the body 23826 of the compensator 23820 may comprise parallel diagonal channels that converge in the direction and/or diverge in the opposite direction to a central channel 23821, for example. Referring now to Figure 487, an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument may include a staple cartridge 24000 including a tissue thickness compensator 24010, wherein the tissue thickness compensator 24010 may include at least one drug, such as the medicament 24001, for example, in and/or on the same. Referring now to Figure 488, a compensator 24020 attached to an anvil 24060, for example, can be moved to a closed position in order to bring the compensator 24020 into contact with the fabric thickness compensator 24010. Under such circumstances, drug 24001, for example, may be transferred from fabric thickness compensator 24010 to compensator 24020. Now referring to Figure 489, compensator 24020 may comprise a tissue contact surface 24025 that can be contacted with the compensator of tissue thickness 24010, wherein drug 24001 may flow into capillary channels 24027 defined in tissue contact surface 24025. Now referring to Figure 486, buffer 24020 may include at least one drug, such as drug 24002, for example, on the same and/or on the same that can be transferred from the compensator 24020 to the fabric thickness compensator 24010.

[000993] Referring now to Figures 569 and 570, a tissue thickness compensator 33020 may comprise a plurality of channels and/or wells defined in the surface thereof. Fabric thickness compensator 33020 may comprise a longitudinal channel 33026 extending along a longitudinal axis defined through fabric thickness compensator 33020. For example, the end of longitudinal channel 33026 may be in fluid communication with the perimeter of the fabric thickness compensator 33020. tissue thickness compensator 33020. The tissue thickness compensator 33020 may further comprise a plurality of wells 33022 and, in addition, a plurality of diagonal channels 33024 which are in fluid communication with the wells 33022 and with the longitudinal channel 33026. O fabric thickness compensator 33020 may further comprise a plurality of inlet and outlet channels 33027 which may be in fluid communication with the wells 33022 and with the perimeter of the fabric thickness compensator 33020. Optionally, as a result of the foregoing, fluids may flow into and/or out of the 33020 Fabric Thickness Compensator before, d during and/or after it has been implanted against the patient's tissue. The pattern of channels 33024, 33026 and 33027 and the wells 33022 defined in the fabric contact surface 33025 of the fabric thickness compensator 33020 can define grip edges that can be configured to contact the fabric and limit slip between the 33020 fabric thickness compensator and fabric. Referring now to Figures 569A and 570A, a fabric thickness compensator 33120 may comprise a plurality of circular channels defined in the surface thereof. Fabric thickness compensator 33120 may comprise concentric circular channels 33127 comprising openings defined in the perimeter of fabric thickness compensator 33120. Similar to the above, fluids may flow into and/or out of the fabric thickness compensator 33120. fabric 33120 through channels 33127. Fabric thickness compensator 33120 may comprise concentric circular channels 33122 which may not include openings defined in the perimeter of fabric thickness compensator 33120. Now referring to Figures 571 and 572, a fabric thickness compensator 33120 fabric 33220 may comprise a plurality of ridges 33227 extending therefrom which may be configured to catch fabric that is positioned against the fabric thickness compensator 33220. Crests 33227 may be straight or ridges 33227 may comprise a contour curved, for example. While the ridges and channels described above may be useful for tissue thickness compensators, such ridges and channels could be used with any suitable bioabsorbable and/or biocompatible layer.

[000994] According to the invention, a compensator can be comprised of a plurality of layers. The compensator may comprise a first layer and a second layer attached to the first layer, for example. The first layer may comprise a tissue-contacting surface and a plurality of capillary channels defined in the tissue-contacting surface. The first layer may also comprise capillary channels defined on a side that faces the second layer and faces away from the tissue contacting surface. The second layer may comprise capillary channels defined therein. Wells can be defined between the first layer and the second layer of the compensator. Capillary channels can be formed in the layers of the compensator using any suitable process, such as during a molding process in which the layers are formed and/or during a hot assembly process, for example. A hot assembly process can be used to fix the compensator layers together, for example. For example, the layers may be comprised of a material that can become deformable when heat is applied to them, such as CAP/GLY (36/64), for example. In either case, the capillary channels defined in the tissue contacting surface of the compensator can define gripping surfaces therebetween which can improve gripping, or control, which can be applied to tissue positioned between the anvil and staple cartridge of the compensator. surgical stapling instrument. Stated another way, capillary channels defined in the tissue contacting surface of a compensator can decrease the area in which the compensator can contact tissue. Under such circumstances, the smaller contact area can result in higher contact pressures between the compensator and fabric for a given force. Under various circumstances, higher contact pressures can reduce slip between the compensator and fabric.

[000995] Optionally, one or more drugs can be positioned in the capillary channels and/or voids defined within and/or between the first layer and the second layer. The plurality of layers comprising a buffer may comprise a package of therapeutic layers or therapies. For example, a first layer may be comprised of a first drug and a second layer may be comprised of a second drug, where the first drug may be different from the second drug. For example, capillary channels defined in the first layer may store a third drug and capillary channels defined in the second layer may store a fourth drug, where the first, second, third and/or fourth drugs may be different, for example. The first, second, third and/or fourth drugs may be different, for example. Referring now to Fig. 490, a compensator 24120 may comprise a plurality of layers, such as layers 24121 to 24125, for example. First layer 24121 and/or fifth layer 24125 may comprise a flat sheet of material between which second layer 24122, third layer 24123 and/or fourth layer 24124 may be sandwiched. Optionally, one or more layers 24121 to 24125 may comprise one or more channels 24127 defined therein. Channels 24127 can extend from one end of the compensator 24120 to the other end and channels 24127 can extend from one side of the compensator 24120 to the other. Channels 24127 may extend in any suitable direction between any suitable side and/or end of compensator 24120. Now referring to Figures 493 and 494, a compensator 24820 may comprise two or more inner layers 24827 which may define side channels 24822, for example, which extend from one side of the 24820 compensator to the other. Again with reference to Figure 490, channels 24127 defined in one of layers 24121 to 24125 can be aligned to channels defined in a layer positioned adjacent thereto. Channels 24127 defined in one of layers 24121 to 24125 may face, or open in direction, towards a flat surface in a layer positioned adjacent thereto. Referring again to Figure 490, one or more of layers 24121 to 24125 may comprise at least one well 24129 defined therein. Wells 24129 may be in fluid communication with one or more of the channels 24127 defined in the layer. Similar to the above, wells 24129 may comprise an aperture system that opens towards, or faces, an adjacent layer, whereby the adjacent layer may plug the aperture.

[000996] In addition to the above, channels 24127 and/or wells 24129 can be configured to contain one or more drugs therein. Channels 24127 may comprise one or more open ends that may allow a drug to flow out of channels 24127. Similarly, channels 24127 may include one or more openings that may be configured to allow a fluid, such as blood, to flow through. for example, flow into channels 24127. In such cases, fluid may flow into buffer 24120, absorb at least a portion of a drug and/or a layer 24121 to 24125, and then flow out of buffer 24120. Again with reference to Figures 493 and 494, the buffer 24820 may comprise inputs 24828 defined in the outer layers 24826, for example. Referring again to Figure 490, layers 24121 to 24125 may be comprised of any suitable material, such as a bioabsorbable polymer, PLA and/or PGA, for example. All layers 24121 to 24125 may be comprised of the same material. Alternatively, one or more of layers 24121 to 24125 could be comprised of different materials. Optionally, one or more of layers 24121 to 24125 may include through holes 24128 extending therethrough which may be configured to allow fluids, such as blood, for example, to flow into channels 24127, wells 24126 and/or between two or more from layers 24121 to 21135, for example. One or more of layers 24121 to 24125 can be connected to each other using a hot welding process and/or laser welding, for example. In such cases, the fluid or fluids flowing into the compensator 24120 can dissolve the welded portions of layers 24121 to 24125 and allow layers 24121 to 24125 to separate and/or delaminate. One or more of layers 24121 to 24125 may be comprised of a material that dissolves at a faster rate and/or at a slower rate than the material or materials comprising outer layers 24121 to 24125. For example, inner layers 24122 to 24124 of the buffer 24120 may be comprised of a material that dissolves at a faster rate than the material or materials comprising outer layers 24121 and 24125, for example. In such cases, the compensator 24120 can maintain an overall consistent, or at least substantially consistent, shape, while the inner part of the compensator 24120 dissolves in the opposite direction. The outermost layers of a compensator may be comprised of a material that dissolves at a faster rate than the material, or materials, comprising the innermost layers of the compensator, for example. The layers may comprise sheets of material having a thickness between approximately 0.025 mm (1 mil) and approximately 0.10 mm (4 mils), for example.

[000997] Now with reference to Figures 491 and 492, a compensator, such as the compensator 24220, for example, may comprise a support layer 24226 which may be configured to be attached to an anvil, such as the anvil 22060, for example. , and/or a staple cartridge. Compensator 24220 may further comprise a frame 24222 attached to support layer 24226, wherein frame 24222 may comprise a plurality of layers of frame 24227. The frame may comprise a three-dimensional structural matrix, for example. Optionally, each of the frame layers 24227 may be comprised of a plurality of fibers. Referring now to Figure 495, each frame layer 24227 may be comprised of a fiber web including a first plurality of fibers 24228 extending in a first direction and a second plurality of fibers 24229 extending in a second direction, or different. Each fiber web may comprise a plurality of pockets, or cavities, 24223, wherein layers 24227, fibers 24228, 24229, and cavities 24223 may define a matrix favorable to tissue and cell ingrowth. Fibers 24228, 24229 and/or any other suitable fiber may be comprised of a bioabsorbable material. Fibers can be comprised of a hemostatic agent, linked active agents such as those that are biologically and/or pharmacologically active and/or supporting members, for example, that can be intercalated with each other. In either case, the fiber material can be selected to induce a desirable biological response such as cell migration into the 24222 scaffold, ECM secretion, and/or the proliferation of structural support cells, for example.

[000998] In addition to the above, backing layer 24226 may be configured to structurally support frame 24222. Frame 24222 may be secured to backing layer 24226 using one or more bioabsorbable adhesives, for example. Similarly, backing layer 24226 can be attached to an anvil or staple cartridge using one or more biocompatible adhesives, for example. Layers 24227 of frame 24222 may be arranged, or stacked, in any suitable manner. Each layer 24227 can comprise a pattern of fibers, where the layers 24227 can be arranged on the frame 24222 so that the patterns of the layers 24227 are aligned with each other. Referring to Figure 496, layers 24227 can be stacked on top of each other so that fibers 24228 in a first layer 24227 are aligned with fibers 24228 in a second layer 24227. Similarly, layers 24227 can be stacked one on top of each other. the other so that the fibers 24229 in the first layer 24227 are aligned with the fibers 24229 in the second layer 24227. Now referring to Figure 497, a frame 24422 may comprise a plurality of layers of frame 24427, wherein the fibers 24429 in each layer of frame 24427 are oriented in the same direction, such as a longitudinal direction for example. Referring now to Figure 499, each frame layer 24227 may comprise a pattern of fibers, wherein the layers 24227 may be arranged in a frame 24322 so that the patterns of layers 24227 are not aligned with each other. Layers 24227 can be stacked on top of each other so that fibers 24228 in a first layer 24227 extend in a direction that is transverse or oblique to fibers 24228 in a second layer 24227. Similarly, layers 24227 can be stacked one over the other so that the fibers 24229 in the first layer 24227 extend in a direction that is transverse or oblique to the fibers 24229 in the second layer 24227. Now referring to Figure 500, a frame 24522 may comprise a plurality of frame layers 24427 which are oriented so that the fibers 24229 in each frame layer 24427 are oriented in different directions, for example.

[000999] In addition to the above, a first frame layer 24227 of a frame 24222, for example, may be comprised of a first material, while a second frame layer 24227 of a frame 24222 may be comprised of a second material, or different. The first material may comprise a first drug, while the second material may comprise a second or different drug, for example. In addition to the above, a first frame layer 24227 of a frame 24222, for example, may comprise a first drug absorbed into the fibers thereof, while a second frame layer 24227 of frame 24222 may comprise a second or different drug. , absorbed in the fibers thereof, for example. The first material may comprise a first drug, while the second material may comprise a second or different drug, for example. A frame may comprise any suitable number of layers having any suitable density of fibers which are comprised of any suitable number of materials.

[0001000] Tissue Thickness Compensators can be fitted to a surgical device, such as a surgical cutting and stapling device, for example, using a retainer. The retainer may include a gripping surface and allows a surgeon, nurse, technician, or other individual to align one or more of the tissue thickness compensators to features of the surgical instrument, such as an anvil and/or staple cartridge, for example. The retainer may include features that align with one or more tissue thickness compensators by engaging a staple cartridge of the surgical instrument. The retainer may include features that align with one or more tissue thickness compensators by engaging an anvil of a surgical instrument. A staple cartridge for the surgical instrument may be included with the retainer, and the engagement of the retainer to the surgical instrument may install the staple cartridge in the surgical instrument and align with one or more of the tissue thickness compensators. After the tissue thickness compensators have been aligned and secured to the surgical instrument, the retainer can be detached from the tissue thickness compensators and then removed from the surgical instrument.

[0001001] Figures 390 to 396 illustrate an embodiment of a retainer 19000 that can be used to attach a first fabric thickness compensator 19002 to an anvil 19040 and a second fabric thickness compensator 19004 to a staple cartridge 19050 of a surgical stapler, for example. A retainer assembly 19060 may be provided that includes retainer 19000, first tissue thickness compensator 19002, and second tissue thickness compensator 19004. In general use, retainer assembly 19060 may be inserted between the anvil 19040 and a channel configured to support the staple cartridge 19050. Thereafter, the anvil 19040 can be closed. When closing the anvil 19040, the anvil 19040 can be pressed against the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 so that the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 can be fixed to the anvil 19040. Closing the anvil 19040 performs the compression of the retainer 19000 and seats the staple cartridge 19050 in the channel of the surgical instrument. When the anvil 19040 is opened again, the first tissue thickness compensator 19002 may detach from the retainer 19000 and when the retainer 19000 is subsequently removed from the surgical device, the retainer 19000 may detach from the second tissue thickness compensator 19004. The surgical device is then ready for use with the first tissue thickness compensator 19002 attached to the anvil 19040 and the second tissue thickness compensator 19004 attached to the staple cartridge 19050.

[0001002] Referring to Figure 390, retainer 19000 may include a handle 19014 through which an individual, such as a surgeon, nurse, or technician who prepares surgical instruments, may grasp retainer 19000. Retainer 19000 may include a first surface 19001 upon which a first fabric thickness compensator 19002 may be positioned and a second opposing surface 19003 upon which a second fabric thickness compensator 19004 may be positioned. Optionally, one or more adhesives may be applied to the first surface 19001 and/or the second surface 19003 to secure the first and second fabric thickness compensators 19002 and 19004 thereto. The retainer 19000 can also include clips that can engage a staple cartridge 19050 of the surgical device, for example. Referring to Figure 393, retainer 19000 may include distal clips 19108 configured to engage a recess 19056 on a distal end of staple cartridge 19050 and/or proximal clips 19106 configured to engage a ridge or edge 19054 on the staple cartridge 19054. 19050 staples.

[0001003] Referring to Figure 390, the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 may include a retainer facing surface 19006 and an anvil facing surface 19010. The retainer facing surface 19006 may be attached to the first surface 19001 of the retainer 19000 via adhesives and/or snapping features, for example. The anvil facing surface 19010 can include at least one adhesive thereon that can secure the first tissue thickness compensator 19002 to the anvil 19040 of the surgical device. For example, the adhesive may comprise an activatable adhesive that can be adhered to a staple forming surface 19044 (Figure 392) of anvil 19040.

[0001004] Referring to Figures 390 and 392 to 395, the anvil facing surface 19010 of the first fabric thickness compensator may include engagement features 19020 that engage similar engagement features 19042 on anvil 19040. The first holding force may hold the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 to the keeper 19000 and a second holding force may hold the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 to the anvil 19040. The second holding force may be greater than the first holding force. retention so that the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 can remain attached to the anvil 19040 and detach from the retainer 19000 when the retainer 19000 is removed from the end actuator.

[0001005] Again with reference to Figure 390, the second fabric thickness compensator 19004 may include a surface facing the retainer 19008 and a surface facing the staple cartridge 19012. The surface facing the retainer 19006 may be attached to the first surface 19001 of retainer 19000 through one or more adhesives and/or engagement features. The surface facing the staple cartridge 19012 may include an adhesive thereon that can secure the second tissue thickness compensator 19004 to the staple cartridge 19050 of the surgical device. For example, with reference to Figure 393, the adhesive may adhere the second fabric thickness compensator 19004 to a staple platform 19052 of the staple cartridge 19050. The surface facing the staple cartridge 19012 may also include engagement features that engage engage cooperative engagement features on the staple cartridge 19050. In this way, a first holding force may retain the second fabric thickness compensator 19004 to the retainer 19000 and a second retaining force may retain the second fabric thickness compensator 19004 to the retainer 19000. staple cartridge 19050. The second holding force may be greater than the first holding force so that the second fabric thickness compensator 19004 can remain attached to the staple cartridge 19050 and detach from the retainer 19000 when the retainer 19000 is removed from end actuator.

[0001006] As shown in Figure 393, the retainer assembly 19060 can be attached to a staple cartridge 19050 as indicated by arrow A. As described above, the distal clips 19018 on the retainer 19000 can engage a recess 19056 on the staple cartridge. staples and the proximal clips 19016 on the retainer may engage the edge or crest 19054 on the 19050 staple cartridge. At that point, the retainer 19000 is secured to the staple cartridge 19050, as shown in Figure 394, and the second thickness compensator of tissue 19004 may be attached to the staple cartridge 19050. As shown in Figure 395, the confinement of the anvil 19040 of the surgical device in the direction of arrow B may place an anvil surface 19044, such as a staple forming surface and/or a surface of fabric contact, for example in contact with the first fabric thickness compensator 19002. As described above, the anvil 19040 in contact with the first compensator fabric thickness compensator 19002 can cause the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 to attach to anvil 19040.

[0001007] After the retainer assembly 19060 has been attached to the staple cartridge 19050 and the anvil 19040 has been closed, the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 may be attached to the anvil 19040 and the second fabric thickness compensator 19004 may be attached to staple cartridge 19050. As described above, the holding force holding the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 to the retainer 19000 may be less than the holding force holding the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 to the anvil 19040. That way, when the anvil 19040 is opened again, the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 can separate from the retainer 19000 and remain with the anvil 19040, as shown in Figure 396. Also as described above, the retaining force that retaining second fabric thickness compensator 19004 to retainer 19000 may be less than the retaining force retaining first fabric thickness compensator 19004 to the staple cartridge 19050. In this way, when the retainer 19000 is removed in the directions of arrows C and D in Figure 396, the retainer 19000 can separate from the second tissue thickness compensator 19004. The surgical stapler shown in Figure 396 includes the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 attached to anvil 19040 and second fabric thickness compensator 19004 attached to staple cartridge 19050 and is ready for use.

[0001008] Figures 390-396 show the retainer 19000 being used with a first fabric thickness compensator 19002 and a second fabric thickness compensator 19004. The retainer 19000 can also be used with only one of the first fabric thickness compensator 19004. fabric 19002 and the second fabric thickness compensator 19004. For example, the first fabric thickness compensator 19002 may be omitted.

[0001009] Figures 397 to 399 show an embodiment of a retainer 19100 that may include engagement features 19108 on a surface 19101. As shown in Figures 398 and 399, engagement features 19108 on retainer 19100 engage cooperative engagement features 19109 on a first 19102 fabric thickness compensator.

[0001010] Figures 400 to 401 show an embodiment of a retainer 19200 that may include a surface 19202 configured to align and secure a fabric thickness compensator 19210 to an anvil 19230. The retainer 19200 may include alignment pins 19204 extending from surface 19202. The retainer 19200 shown in Figures 400 and 401 includes four alignment dowels 19204, but fewer or greater numbers of alignment dowels 19204 may be present. Referring to Figure 401, fabric thickness compensator 19210 may include a body 19212 that includes holes 19216 that may be located to correspond to the locations of alignment pegs 19204 extending from retainer 19200. Each hole 19216 in the Fabric Thickness Compensator 19210 fits onto an Alignment Dowel 19204 and, due to a tight fit between holes 19216 and Dowels 19204, fabric thickness compensator 19210 can be aligned to retainer 19200. Optionally, each hole 19216 may be slightly smaller than its corresponding peg 19204 so that each hole 19216 stretches when placed on its peg 19204. Such stretching may retain the holes 19216 in the pegs 19204. Each hole 19216 may include an adhesive therein to create a bond removable between pegs 19204 and fabric thickness compensator 19210.

[0001011] Fabric thickness compensator 19220 may include tabs 19220 extending from a body 19212 of fabric thickness compensator 19220 which may be configured to be received by slots 19234 in an anvil 19230. Slots 19234 in the anvil 19230 may be situated on a staple forming surface 19232, for example. After retainer 19200 has been attached to a staple cartridge, similar to the above, anvil 19230 can be closed against fabric thickness compensator 19210 in retainer 19200. As anvil 19230 is closed, referring to Figure 401 , tabs 19220 on fabric thickness compensator 19210 may engage slots 19234, thereby securing fabric thickness compensator 19210 to anvil 19230. Referring particularly to Figure 400, each tab 19220 may include a tapered portion 19222 that guides tab 19220 into slots 19234 of anvil 19230. Tapered portion 19222 may include sloping walls and may have increased cross-sectional area along the length thereof. A base portion 19226 of each tab 19220 may have a lesser cross-sectional area than the greater cross-sectional area of the tapered portion 19222. The tapered portion 19222 may comprise a latch surface 19224, wherein when a tab 19220 comes into a slot 19234, the locking surface 19224 may engage a lip 19235 in the slot 19234. As a result, the locking surface 19224 may retain the tab 19220 in the slot 19234 and thereby retain the fabric thickness compensator 19210 to the anvil 19230. Slots 19228 defined in fabric thickness compensator 19210 and extending between tabs 19220 may allow tabs 19220 to flex inwardly and engage slots 19234. Tabs 19220 that are held with slots 19234 can define a first retaining force which retains the fabric thickness compensator 19210 to the anvil 19230 and the holes 19216 in the fabric thickness compensator 19210 which are retained in the pegs 19204 may define a second a holding force. The first holding force may be greater than the second holding force so that the fabric thickness compensator 19210 can remain attached to the anvil 19230 and detach from the retainer 19200 when the retainer 19200 is removed from the end actuator.

[0001012] Body 19212 of fabric thickness compensator 19210 in Figures 400 and 401 may also define slots 19214 therein. Slots 19214 may be aligned along a longitudinal axis of fabric thickness compensator 19210. For example, slots 19214 may be arranged on a longitudinal axis so that slots 19214 are aligned to a longitudinal path of a cutting blade of the surgical device when the tissue thickness compensator 19210 is attached to an anvil 19230. The slits 19214 can reduce the amount of energy required for the cutting blade to cut through the tissue thickness compensator 19210.

[0001013] Figures 402 to 412 show an embodiment of a retainer 19300 that includes loops 19310 that are configured to retain a fabric thickness compensator 19340 on a first surface 19302 of retainer 19300. When an anvil 19360 is closed in retainer 19300, similar to the above, the anvil 19360 can push and displace the tabs 19310 outward and, as a result, disengage the retainer 19300 from the fabric thickness compensator 19340. The fabric thickness compensator 19340 can attach to the anvil 19360 when anvil 19360 is pressed against fabric thickness compensator 19340 and moved away from retainer 19300 when anvil 19360 is opened again.

[0001014] The retainer 19300 may include staple cartridge mounting tabs 19312 and 19314 which may be similar to those described above with respect to Figures 390 to 399. In addition to the first surface 19302 described above, the retainer 19300 may also include a second surface 19304 that can be configured to carry a second fabric thickness compensator. The second surface 19304 may include an alignment feature such as a raised ridge 19308. The raised ridge 19308 may engage a slot in a second fabric thickness compensator and/or a slot in a staple cartridge 19370, for example.

[0001015] With reference to Figures 404 to 406, in use, retainer 19300 can be attached to a staple cartridge 19370 by means of clips 19314 and 19312. The first fabric thickness compensator 19340 can be positioned on the first surface 19302 in the retainer 19300 and may be held in place by clips 19310. First, with reference to Figures 410 to 412, each clip includes a plane 19313 that can engage first fabric thickness compensator 19340 against first surface 19302 of retainer 19300. Each cleat 19310 may include an inwardly facing tapered or curved surface 19311. As the anvil 19360 moves in the direction of arrow E, with reference to Figure 411, the edges 19366 of the anvil 19360 may contact the curved surfaces facing inward 19311 of the 19310 clamps. As the 19360 anvil continues to move in the direction of arrow E, the interference between the 19366 edges of the 19360 anvil and the curved surfaces 19311 of the cleats 19310 can push the cleats 19310 out in the direction of arrow F, as shown in Figure 411. As the cleats 19310 move in the direction of arrow F, the first fabric thickness compensator 19340 is released from the planes 19313 of the cleats 19310.

[0001016] As anvil 19360 continues to move in the direction of arrow E, it also contacts and attaches to tissue thickness compensator 19340. For example, as anvil 19360 moves in the direction of arrow E, a engagement feature, such as a raised ridge 19344, on the fabric thickness compensator 19340 engages a channel 19364 on the anvil 19360. The raised ridge 19344 may be configured to have an interference fit with channel 19364 so that the 19340 fabric thickness compensator attaches to the 19360 anvil. The 19340 fabric thickness compensator may include an adhesive that adheres to the surfaces of the 19360 anvil. The raised ridge 19344 may include an adhesive that adheres to the surfaces of the 19364 channel. Similarly, the body surfaces 19342 of the fabric thickness compensator 19340 may include an adhesive that adheres to a surface 19362 of the anvil 19360. After the fabric thickness compensator 19340 is attached to the anvil 19360, fabric thickness compensator 19340 can lift off retainer 19300 and remain with anvil 19360 as anvil 19360 returns to its open position by moving in the direction of arrow G, as illustrated in Figure 412.

[0001017] Figure 413 shows a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a retainer 19400. The first fabric thickness compensator 19410 is positioned on a first side 19402 of the retainer 19400 and a second fabric thickness compensator 19420 is positioned on a second opposite side 19404 of retainer 19400. Retainer 19400 defines one or more holes 19406 extending therethrough. The first fabric thickness compensator 19410 and the second fabric thickness compensator 19420 are connected through the holes by connectors 19430 that extend through the holes 19406. The first fabric thickness compensator 19410, the second fabric thickness compensator 19420 and the 19430 connectors may all be formed from a unitary material. For example, the first fabric thickness compensator 19410, the second fabric thickness compensator 19420 and the connectors 19430 may be molded with an overlap over the retainer 19400. Alternatively, the connectors 19430 may be formed as part of one of the thickness compensators. such as the first fabric thickness compensator 19410. The connectors 19430 can be passed through the holes 19406 and then attached to the remaining fabric thickness compensator such as the second fabric thickness compensator 19420 The 19430 connectors can be attached to the second 19420 fabric thickness compensator, for example, through the use of an adhesive or through the use of an interference fit between one end of the connector and a receiving port (not shown) on the second. Fabric thickness compensator 19420. Connectors 19430 can be separate components that are placed in holes 19406 and to which the prim The first fabric thickness compensator 19410 and the second fabric thickness compensator 19410 may be secured, for example, through the use of adhesives or interference fittings between ends of the connectors 19430 and receiving ports on the first fabric thickness compensator 19410 and on the second fabric thickness compensator 19420.

[0001018] After retainer 19400 has been placed on a 19450 staple cartridge, for example, a surgical device anvil 19440 can be moved in the direction of arrow H to a closed position. An adhesive and/or engagement features on a surface 19414 of the first fabric thickness compensator 19410 may secure the first fabric thickness compensator 19410 to the anvil 19440 when the anvil 19440 closes. Similarly, an adhesive and/or engagement features on a surface 19424 of the second fabric thickness compensator 19420 may secure the second fabric thickness compensator 19420 to the staple cartridge 19450. After the anvil 19440 is closed and the first and second tissue thickness compensators 19410 and 19420 are attached to anvil 19440 and staple cartridge 19450, respectively, retainer 19400 can be pulled in the direction of arrow I (Figure 417) to remove retainer 19400 from the first thickness compensator of fabric 19410 and the second fabric thickness compensator 19420 and to break the connectors 19430. As shown in Figure 418, after the connectors 19430 are broken and the retainer 19400 has been removed, the anvil 19440 can be opened again and the first thickness compensator fabric thickness 19410 will be attached to the anvil 19440 and the second fabric thickness compensator 19420 will be attached to the staple cartridge 19450.

[0001019] In accordance with the invention, a proximal portion 19407 of each hole 19406 in retainer 19400 may include a cutting edge. When the retainer is pulled in the direction of arrow I (Figure 417), a pulling force is transmitted through the proximal portion 19407 of the holes 19406 to break the connectors. A cutting edge at the proximal portion 19407 of each hole 19406 will concentrate the transmitted force on a relatively small area of each connector. As a result, the connectors will break more easily and less pulling force may be required to remove the retainer 19400 between the first fabric thickness compensator 19410 and the second fabric thickness compensator 19420.

[0001020] As described above, a retainer assembly may comprise a retainer positioned between a first fabric thickness compensator and a second fabric thickness compensator, wherein, after the two fabric thickness compensators have been inserted and secured to an end actuator of a surgical instrument, the retainer can be pulled between the tissue thickness compensators and removed from the end actuator. The retainer may provide a barrier between the first and second fabric thickness compensators. Once the retainer is removed between the first and second fabric thickness compensators, substances within and/or on the first fabric thickness compensator may react with substances within and/or on the second fabric thickness compensator. fabric thickness, for example. One or both of the fabric thickness compensators may include a film that can confine substances in the fabric thickness compensators. Films can be attached to the retainer, whereby when the retainer is pulled between the fabric thickness compensators as described above, the retainer can pull the films away from the fabric thickness compensators to expose the substances contained therein. . At such a point, the substances in each of the tissue thickness compensators can interact with each other.

[0001021] Figures 419 to 429 illustrate an embodiment of a retainer that engages an anvil of a surgical device, such as a surgical stapler. The retainer may align a first tissue thickness compensator to the anvil and a second tissue thickness compensator to a staple cartridge. Closing the anvil causes the first tissue thickness compensator to attach to the anvil and the second tissue thickness compensator to attach to the staple cartridge. The retainer may also carry the staple cartridge with a fabric thickness compensator optionally disposed between the retainer and the staple cartridge. Closing the anvil causes the staple cartridge to attach to a channel of the surgical stapler and causes the first tissue thickness compensator to attach to the anvil.

[0001022] Figures 419 to 422 show an embodiment of a retainer 19500. The retainer 19500 includes a handle 19502 through which a surgeon, nurse, technician or other individual can manipulate the retainer 19500. The handle 19502 may include a textured surface, like protruding 19503 portions, for example, which can provide a better gripping surface. The retainer 19500 may include a surface 19504 upon which a fabric thickness compensator may be mounted. The surface 19504 may include one or more projections 19506, where the projections 19506 may engage recesses in the fabric thickness compensator and align the fabric thickness compensator with the surface 19504 of retainer 19500. The recesses in the compensator fabric thickness tabs may be slightly smaller than the 19506 projections so that when engaged in the recesses the 19506 projections can retain the fabric thickness compensator to the surface 19504. The 19506 projections can pass through the holes in the fabric thickness compensator and engaging a slot such as a cutting blade slot 19558 on anvil 19550 shown in Figure 424, thereby aligning the fabric thickness compensator to retainer 19500 and also providing additional alignment of retainer 19500 to anvil 19550 The fabric thickness compensator 19540 may include an adhesive and/or engagement features, described above, on a surface 19542 for attachment. the fabric thickness compensator to a 19550 anvil.

[0001023] As shown in Figure 423a, the staple cartridge 19530 can be secured to the retainer 19500. The staple cartridge 19530 can be secured to the retainer 19500 by the tabs 19510 and 19512 extending from the retainer 19500. The tabs 19512 in the retainer 19500 may engage a slot 19534 in staple cartridge 19530. Loops 19510 of retainer 19500 may encircle the bottom 19532 of staple cartridge 19532. In accordance with the invention, a second fabric thickness compensator may be attached to the cartridge of staples 19530. A second fabric thickness compensator may be attached to a staple platform 19536 of the staple cartridge 19530.

[0001024] As shown in Figures 424 and 425, a retainer assembly 19590 comprising the retainer 19500, a tissue thickness compensator 19540 and a staple cartridge 19530 can slide over the anvil 19550 of a surgical device such as a stapler in the direction of arrow L. Guide tabs 19508 on retainer 19500 can encircle the edges 19552 of anvil 19550 and position retainer assembly 19590 relative to anvil 19550. After retainer assembly 19590 is engaged with anvil 19550 as shown in Figures 426 and 427, the anvil can be closed in the direction of arrow M. Closing the anvil 19550 can position the staple cartridge 19530 in a channel 19560 of the surgical device. Closing the 19550 anvil may cause the 19510 clips extending from the 19500 retainer to engage a ridge 19562 of the 19560 channel in order to securely position the 19530 staple cartridge in the 19560 channel. When the 19550 anvil is opened again in the direction of arrow N, now with reference to Figures 428 and 429, the tissue thickness compensator 19540 can remain attached to the anvil 19550 and separates from the retainer 19500. The retainer 19500 can then be removed from the surgical instrument in the direction of the arrow O (Figures 428 and 429) leaving the staple cartridge 19530 in the channel 19560 of the surgical device and a tissue thickness compensator 19540 attached to the anvil 19550.

[0001025] Figures 430 and 431 show examples of two alternative embodiments of fabric thickness compensators 19570 and 19580, respectively. Figure 430 is a cross-sectional view of a fabric thickness compensator 19570 secured to a retainer 19501, wherein the fabric thickness compensator 19570 may include protrusions 19574 that may contact the edges 19552 of the anvil 19550 and encircle partially an outer surface 19556 of the anvil 19550. The protuberances may catch the anvil 19550 and/or be secured to the anvil 19550 using one or more adhesives. In order to release the 19570 Tissue Thickness Compensator from the 19550 Anvil after the 19570 Compensator has been implanted against a patient's tissue, the 19574 Protrusions can flex outward from the 19550 Anvil thus allowing the 19570 Tissue Thickness Compensator is pushed away from the anvil 19550. Figure 431 is a cross-sectional view of a fabric thickness compensator 19580 attached to the retainer 19501 shown in Figure 430. The fabric thickness compensator 19580 includes a fitting 19584 that can encircle the anvil 19550 to align the fabric thickness compensator 19580 to the anvil 19550 and/or to retain the fabric thickness compensator 19580 to the anvil 19550. The socket 19584 can retain the fabric thickness compensator 19580 to the anvil 19550. anvil 19550 slot 19584, fabric thickness compensator 19580 can be torn in the opposite direction to slot 19584 in perforations 19586, for example. In this way, the insert 19584 can remain on the anvil 19550 while the remainder of the tissue thickness compensator 19580 can remain stapled to the patient tissue.

[0001026] A tissue thickness compensator, such as the 19570 tissue thickness compensator, for example, may include an inner portion comprising a biocompatible substance positioned therein. The biocompatible substance may include an anti-inflammatory, a coagulant and/or an antibiotic, for example. In accordance with the invention, a body, such as a insert, for example, can be inserted into the inner portion of the fabric thickness compensator. For example, the insert can be inserted through an open end of the fabric thickness compensator into a cavity defined therein. The insert can be retained within the cavity of the fabric thickness compensator by means of an interference fit. Steps for mounting the insert to the fabric thickness compensator may include a first step of heating the fabric thickness compensator so that the fabric thickness compensator expands. When the fabric thickness compensator expands, the cavity defined therein can also expand. When the fabric thickness compensator is in an expanded state, according to a second step, the insert can be inserted into the cavity. Then, as the fabric thickness compensator cools, according to a third step, the cavity can shrink into the insert and retain the insert in place in the cavity.

[0001027] Figures 432 to 444 illustrate an embodiment of a retainer comprising a separate insertion tool. The insertion tool can be used to insert a set into a surgical instrument such as a surgical stapler for example. The insertion tool may also compress a staple cartridge and one or more tissue thickness compensators of the retainer assembly into position on the surgical instrument. Referring to Figures 432 and 433, a retainer 19600 may include a first plate 19620 and a second plate 19622. The first plate 19620 and the second plate 19622 may be connected by a hinge 19612. The hinge 19612 may position the first plate 19620 in an angle with respect to the second plate 19622 and also allow the first plate 19620 to rotate with respect to the second plate 19622 around the hinge 19612.

[0001028] The first plate 19620 may include an outward facing surface 19604 and an inward facing surface 19606. Similarly, the second plate 19622 may include an outward facing surface 19610 and an inward facing surface 19608. inward facing 19606 of first plate 19620 may include a cam protrusion 19614. Similarly, the inward facing surface 19608 of second plate 19622 may include a cam protrusion 19616. Referring to Figures 439 to 444, the outward facing surface 19604 of the first plate may include a fabric thickness compensator positioned thereon. The outward facing surface 19601 of the second plate 19622 may also include a fabric thickness compensator positioned thereon. Fabric Thickness Compensators may be attached to external surfaces 19604 and 19610 using adhesives, latching features and/or other suitable attachment means such as, for example, retaining members 12295 described above with respect to Figures 318 to 322 Retainer 19600 can include tabs 19618 extending from second plate 19622 that can be configured to engage a staple cartridge 19690, as shown in Figures 439 and 441 to 444.

[0001029] Now referring to Figures 434 to 438, an insertion tool 19630 may include a first end 19632 and a second end 19634. The first end 19632 may be large enough to be grasped by a surgeon, nurse and/or technician , for example. Second end 19634 defines a cavity 19640, wherein the cavity may include a cam 19648 positioned therein. A first cam side 19648 may include a first shoulder 19642, a second shoulder 19644 and a first anti-kidge 19646 positioned therebetween. A second side of cam 19648 may include a third shoulder 19643, a fourth shoulder 19645 and a second anti-rebound 19647 positioned therebetween. For example, the bosses and anti-kicks can be arranged in a mirrored fashion. In other words, the first shoulder 19642 may be arranged on the first side of cam 19648 directly opposite the third shoulder 19643 on the second side of cam 19648. Similarly, the second shoulder 19644 may be arranged on the first side of cam 19648 directly in opposed to the fourth shoulder 19645 on the second side of cam 19648. Additionally, the first anti-kickback 19464 may be arranged on the first side of cam 19648 directly opposite the second anti-kidney 19647 on the second side of cam 19648.

[0001030] In use, the second end 19634 of the insertion tool 19630 is placed between the first plate 19620 and the second plate 19622 of the retainer 19600 so that the cam protrusion 19614 on the first plate 19620 engages with the anti-kickback 19646 and the protrusion cam 19616 on the second plate 19622 engages with anti-kickback 19647, for example. As shown in Figures 441 and 442, an insertion assembly 19700, which includes the retainer 19600, the insertion tool 19630, one or more tissue thickness compensators, and the staple cartridge 19690, can be inserted into a surgical instrument. The surgical instrument, such as a surgical stapler, may include a channel 19740, which is configured to receive the staple cartridge 19690, and an anvil 19720. Insertion assembly 19700 may be inserted into the surgical instrument in the direction of arrow P ( Figure 442) to lock the staple cartridge 19690 in the channel 19740. In such a position, cams 19614 and 19616 can be aligned with the anti-kickbacks 19646 and 19647, respectively.

[0001031] After the staple cartridge 19690 is locked into channel 19740, as shown in Figure 443, the insertion tool 19600 can continue to be moved in the direction of arrow Q relative to the surgical instrument. Further movement of insertion tool 19600 in the direction of arrow Q may align first shoulder 19642 to first cam protrusion 19614 and third shoulder 19634 to second cam protrusion 19616. Such alignment may cause retainer plates 19620 and 19622 rotate away from each other around hinge 19612 in the direction of arrow R (Figure 443). Under such circumstances, retainer plate 19620 and fabric thickness compensator 19670 can move towards anvil 19720 and retainer plate 19622 can move towards and contact anvil 19720. Optionally, as As a result of the above, the tissue thickness compensator 19670 can be seated on the anvil 19720. After the tissue thickness compensator 19670 is attached to the anvil 19720, the insertion tool 19630 can be retracted or moved in the direction of the arrow S (shown in Figure 444). Movement of insertion tool 19630 in the direction of arrow S may cause cam protrusions 19614 and 19616 to disengage from first cam 19642 and third cam 19643, respectively, and become realigned with first anti cam 19646 and second anti-rebound 19647, respectively. Second boss 19642 and fourth boss 19645 can be adjacent to cam bosses 19614 and 19616 respectively and can prevent insertion tool 19630 from completely separating from retainer 19600. With cam bosses 19614 and 19616 realigned to anti-bosses 19646 and 19647, the first plate 19620 can rotate at least partially towards the second plate 19622 around the hinge 19612 and away from the anvil 19720. The retainer 19600 can also be separated from the channel 19740 and then removed in the direction of the arrow S, leaving the fabric thickness compensator 19670 attached to the anvil 19720, for example.

[0001032] As described here, a retainer assembly can be used to install one or more tissue thickness compensators on an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument. A retainer set can install layers plus tissue thickness compensators on a surgical instrument. The layers may include an absorbable material and/or a biocompatible material, for example.

[0001033] Referring to Figure 501, an end actuator 12 may be configured to receive an end actuator insert 25002. The end actuator 12 may comprise a lower jaw 25070 and an anvil 25060 which is configured to pivot in with respect to lower jaw 25070. End actuator insert 25002 may comprise a staple cartridge 25000 that is pivotally connected to an anvil insert 25004. End actuator 12 may be configured to receive the anvil insert 25004. end actuator 25002 so that the staple cartridge 25000 fits into a staple cartridge channel 25072 of the lower jaw 25070, for example, and the anvil insert 25004 contacts the anvil 25060, for example. Lower jaw 25070 may comprise a plurality of gripping members 25074 configured to secure staple cartridge 25000 to staple cartridge channel 25072. Anvil insert 25004 may comprise at least one retaining protrusion configured to engage at least one retaining groove in anvil 25060. Anvil insert 25004 can be configured to pivot correspondingly toward staple cartridge 25000 when anvil 25060 pivots toward lower jaw 25070, as described in more detail in this document.

[0001034] Still referring to Figure 501, the end actuator insert 25002 may additionally comprise a retainer 25010. The retainer 25010 may securely engage with at least one of the staple cartridge 25000 and the anvil insert 25004. The retainer 25010 may comprise at least one gripping clip 25012 that can engage, engage, engage, grip, and/or engage the staple cartridge 25000. As shown in Figure 501, retainer 25010 may comprise two gripper clips 25012 in each longitudinal side thereof, for example. For example, the gripper clips 25012 can be configured to clip over a portion of the staple cartridge 25000, for example. In accordance with the invention, a fabric thickness compensator may be retained in position with respect to the end actuator insert 25002 by the retainer 25010. For example, a fabric thickness compensator may be positioned between the retainer 25010 and the retainer 25010. 25000 staple cartridge.

[0001035] Optionally, when an operator inserts the end actuator insert 25002 into the end actuator 12, the retainer 25010 can provide a solid or substantially solid element for the operator to grip. Furthermore, retainer 25010 can prevent premature deformation of a fabric thickness compensator that is confined by retainer 25010, for example. Retainer 25010 can be removed from end actuator 12 prior to using end actuator 12 to cut and/or clamp fabric. Alternatively, retainer 25010 may remain positioned on end actuator 12. For example, retainer 25010 may be transected by cutting element 25052 (Figure 536) as staples are fired from the cavities of staples 25002 (Figure 536) in the cartridge. of clamps 25000. Retainer 25010 may comprise a polymeric composition, such as a bioabsorbable, biocompatible elastomeric polymer, for example. Retainer 25010 may additionally comprise a bioabsorbable polymer such as, for example, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, gelatin, collagen, and/or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example. Retainer 25010 can comprise at least one therapeutic agent such as a drug or pharmaceutically active agent.

[0001036] Referring to Figure 502, an end actuator 26012 may comprise an anvil 26060 and a lower jaw 26070. In accordance with the invention, a fabric compensator 26020 may be releasably secured to the anvil 26060, to the lower jaw 26070 and/or anvil 26060 and lower jaw 26070. For example, a first fabric compensator 26020 may be releasably attached to a staple cartridge 26000 in the lower jaw 26070 and a second fabric compensator 26022 may be releasably attached to anvil 26060. The first and second fabric compensators 26020, 26022 may be deformable and/or resilient, similar to at least one fabric thickness compensator described herein. For example, the first and second tissue compensators 26020, 26022 may comprise a polymeric composition such as a bioabsorbable, biocompatible elastomeric polymer, for example. The first and second tissue buffers 26020, 26022 may additionally comprise a bioabsorbable polymer such as, for example, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, gelatin, collagen and/or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example. The first and second tissue compensators 26020, 26022 may comprise at least one therapeutic agent such as a drug or pharmaceutically active agent.

[0001037] The tissue compensator 26020, 26022 may comprise a firm or substantially firm point 26024, 26026. For example, a first point 26024 can be positioned at the distal end of the first tissue compensator 26020 and a second point 26026 can be positioned on the distal end of the second fabric tab 26022. Tips 26024, 26026 can prevent or limit premature deformation of fabric tabs 26020, 26022. For example, tips 26024, 26026 can protect fabric tabs 26020, 26022 when fabric tabs 26020, 26022 tissue 26020, 26022 are moved through a trocar and/or maneuvered around a patient's tissue, for example. Similarly, with reference to Figure 503, the end actuator 12 may comprise a first fabric compensator 25020 releasably secured to the staple cartridge 25000 in the lower jaw 25070 and a second fabric compensator 25022 releasably attached to the anvil 25060 In accordance with the invention, a tip 25026 may be positioned at the distal end of the second tissue compensator 25022. The tip 25026 may be positioned adjacent a deformable and/or resilient portion of the tissue compensator 25022. The tip 25026 may extend over and/or around a portion of the fabric compensator 25022 such that the tip 25026 protects the distal end and an intermediate portion of the fabric compensator 25022.

[0001038] Referring to Figures 504 to 531, a sleeve 27010 can be configured to engage the anvil 25060 of the actuator end 12 of a surgical instrument, for example. Sleeve 27010 may comprise an extended portion 27040 (Figures 505 to 508), a tip 27080 (Figures 515 to 518) and a compensator 27120 (Figures 509 to 511). The 27010 sleeve can be configured to release a 27020 compensator when a 25052 translation trigger bar (Figure 525) approaches the distal end of the end actuator 12. The 27020 compensator can be deformable and/or resilient, similar to hair. least one fabric thickness compensator described herein. For example, the buffer 27020 may comprise a polymeric composition, such as a bioabsorbable, biocompatible elastomeric polymer, for example. The buffer 27020 may additionally comprise a bioabsorbable polymer such as, for example, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, gelatin, collagen and/or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example. The buffer 27020 may comprise at least one therapeutic agent such as a drug or pharmaceutically active agent. Referring particularly to Figure 504, the pin portion 27040 can be positioned on and/or around an outer surface 25061 of the anvil 25060. The tip 27080 of the sleeve 27010 can be positioned on and/or around a distal portion of the anvil 27010. anvil 25060. The compensator 27020 can be positioned on and/or around an inner surface of the anvil 25060.

[0001039] Still referring to Fig. 504, the pinned portion 27040 may comprise at least one pin 27042a. Optionally, as shown in Figures 505 to 508, the pinned portion 27040 may comprise a first pin 27042a and a second pin 27042b. Pins 27042a, 27042b may be symmetrical or substantially symmetrical, for example. The first pin 27042a may be asymmetrical with respect to the second pin 27042b. The first and/or second pins 27042a, 27042b may taper at the distal end thereof. For example, each pin 27042a, 27042b can comprise a tapered end 27048. Referring particularly to Figure 507, the pinned portion 27040 can be bypassed, for example. Referring again to Figure 504, the contour of the pin portion 27040 may correspond or substantially correspond to an contour of the outer surface 25061 of the anvil 25060, for example. First, with reference to Figures 507 and 508, the pin portion 27040 may also comprise at least one fastener 27044a extending from the first pin 27042a. A first fastener 27044a can be positioned on a first side of the pin portion 27040 and a second fastener 27044b can be positioned on a second side of the pin portion 27040. Fasteners 27044a, 27044b can be positioned at or near the proximal end of the pin portion 27044a. with pin 27040, for example. Fasteners 27044a, 27044b may be positioned at or near the distal end of the pin portion 27040, such as along the first and/or second pins 27042a, 27042b, for example. Fasteners 27044a, 27044b may extend along a substantial length of peg portion 27040 and/or along a shorter length of peg portion 27040. A plurality of fasteners 27044a, 27044b may be positioned along each side lengthwise of the pinned portion, for example. Referring particularly to Figure 508, the first fastener 27044a may comprise a first fastener extension 27046a and/or the second fastener 27044b may comprise a second fastener extension 27046b. The first fastener extension 27046a can protrude from at least a portion of the fastener 27044a and the second fastener extension 27046b can protrude from at least a portion of the fastener 27044b, for example. In addition, the first cleat extension 27046a and the second cleat extension 27046b can each be configured to engage a gap 27128 (Figure 510) on the tab 27020, as described in more detail herein.

[0001040] Referring now to Figure 530, the tab 27020 for the sleeve 27010 may comprise a longitudinal protrusion 27024 and an edge 27026 on each longitudinal side of the tab 27020. The tab 27020 may be positioned adjacent an inner surface 25063 of the anvil 25060 Additionally, when sleeve 27010 is positioned on anvil 25060, longitudinal protrusion 27024 may be substantially aligned and/or positioned within a longitudinal slot 25062 on anvil 25060. Edges 27026 of compensator 27020 may wrap at least partially around the anvil 25060 towards the outer surface 25061 thereof. First, with reference to Figures 509 to 511, a compensator 27120 for a sleeve 27110 may comprise a body 27122 having a longitudinal bulge 27124 that extends along at least a portion of the body 27122. The longitudinal bulge 27124 may define a longitudinal path along the midline of body 27122, for example. Longitudinal protrusion 27124 may be received by longitudinal slot 25062 (Figure 530) on anvil 25060 when sleeve 27110 is positioned on anvil 25060. Referring particularly to Figure 511, longitudinal protuberance 27124 may comprise a rounded projection. For example, the cross section of the longitudinal bulge 27124 may form an arc and/or a partial ring. Alternatively, the longitudinal protrusion 27124 may comprise an angled and/or staggered projection. Compensator 27120 may additionally comprise an edge 27126, which may be straight, angled, grooved, wavy, and/or zigzag patterned, for example. Edge 27126 may comprise slots 27128 which may be configured to receive cleat extensions 27046a, 27046b (Figure 508) when assembled sleeve 27110 is positioned on anvil 25060. Fastener extensions 27046a, 27046b may fit through slot 27128 to engaging with anvil 25060 such that fastener extensions 27046a, 27046b help secure sleeve 27110 to anvil 25060, for example.

[0001041] First, with reference to Figures 512 to 514, a compensator 27220 for a sleeve 27210 may comprise a body 27222 comprising a longitudinal protuberance 27224 extending along at least a portion of the body 27222. Similar to the above, longitudinal protrusion 27224 may be received by longitudinal slit 25062 (Figure 531) on anvil 25060 when sleeve 27210 is positioned on anvil 25060. Referring particularly to Figure 514, longitudinal protuberance 27224 may comprise a angled projection so that the cross section of the bulge 70224 forms a substantially rectangular shape. Trim 27220 may further comprise an edge 27226, which may be straight, angled, grooved, wavy and/or zigzag patterned, for example. Edge 27226 may comprise slots 27228 which may be configured to receive lug extensions 27046a, 27046b (Figure 508) when assembled sleeve 27210 is positioned on anvil 25060. Fastener extensions 27046a, 27046b may fit through slots 27228 and engaging with anvil 25060 such that fastener extensions 27046a, 27046b help secure sleeve 27210 to anvil 25060, for example. Trim 27220 may additionally comprise a plurality of ribs 27229 which laterally traverse the body 27222 of trim tab 27220. The ribs 27229 may support body 27222 of trim tab 27220 when sleeve 27210 is positioned on anvil 25060 and/or when trim tab 27220 enters contact with the tissue.

[0001042] Referring to Figures 515 to 519, the tip 27080 of the sleeve 27010 may comprise an alignment ridge 27082 which may be substantially aligned with the longitudinal slot 25062 (Figure 530) on the anvil 25060. When the alignment ridge 27082 is aligned to the longitudinal slot 25062 and when the sleeve 27010 is positioned on the anvil 25060, the tip 27082 may at least partially surround a distal portion of the pinned portion 27040 of the sleeve 27010. For example, the tapered end 27048 of each pin 27042a, 27042b may be positioned on point 27080 when sleeve 27010 is positioned on anvil 25060. As described in more detail in this document, point 27080 may flex pins 27042a, 27042b closer together and/or downwards when pinned portion 27042 is engaged with point 27080 In addition, as illustrated in Figure 519, when the tapered ends 27048 of the pin portion 27040 are positioned at the point 27080, the fasteners Fins 27044a, 27044b on pin portion 27040 may engage edges 27026 of compensator 27020, for example. As a result of such engagement, the compensator 27010 can be attached to the anvil 25060.

[0001043] Referring to Figures 520 to 524, when point 27080 is engaged with pin portion 27040 of sleeve 27010, compensator 27020 can be attached to anvil 25060. Point 27080 can remain engaged with pin portion 27040 as per the bar trigger 25050 translates along a portion of longitudinal slot 25062 on anvil 25060. Now with reference to Figures 524 to 529, when cutting element 25052 on trigger bar 25050 and/or any other suitable portion of trigger bar 25050, as the retaining flange 25054, for example, approaches the distal end of the anvil 25060, the trigger bar 25050 may disengage tip 27080 from the pin portion 27040. The trigger bar 25050 may, for example, contact with the tip 27080 and push the tip 27080 off the anvil 25060 so that the tip 27080 disconnects from the pinned portion 27040 of the sleeve 27010. Now referring to Figure 531, when the point 27080 disengages from the pinned portion 27 040, the first and second pins 27042a, 27042b can be configured to flex away from the anvil 25060. For example, when the pinned portion 27070 is engaged with the spike 27080, the pins 27042a, 27042b can be flexed closer together and /or down towards anvil 25060 and held in such position by nose 27080. Pins 27042a, 27042b may be retained under a spring load by nose 27080 so that pins 27042a, 27042b seek to regain a neutral configuration as tip 27080 is disengaged from pins 27042a, 27042b. Alternatively, pins 27042a, 27042b may be sufficiently deformable that pins 27042a, 27042b can be deformed or flared outward by firing bar 25050 once prong 27080 has disengaged therefrom. When pins 27042a, 27042b move away from anvil 25060, fasteners 27044a, 27044b along a longitudinal side of each pin 27042a, 27042b may disengage from tab 27020, which may allow tab 27020 to be released from anvil 25060.

[0001044] Referring to Figures 532 to 538, the end actuator 12 of a surgical instrument, for example, may be configured to receive an end actuator insert 28010. The end actuator insert 28010 may comprise a compensator body 28012 and at least one tab 28014a, 28014b. End actuator insert 28010 may comprise a proximal loop 28014b at the proximal end of trim body 28012 and a distal loop 28014a at the distal end of trim body 28012, for example. Referring particularly to Figure 535, the distal clip 28014a may be secured to the anvil 25060 of the end actuator 12 on or near the distal end of the anvil 25060. For example, the distal clip 28014a may be substantially aligned and/or partially positioned within from the longitudinal slot 25062 of the anvil 25060. Referring to Figure 536, the proximal clip 28014b can be secured to a staple cartridge 25000 in the lower jaw 25070 of the end actuator 12 (Figure 537). The proximal clip 28014b may be secured to the staple cartridge 25000 on or near the proximal end of the staple cartridge 25000. For example, the proximal clip 28014b may be substantially aligned and/or positioned within a longitudinal slot 25004 in the staple cartridge. 25000

[0001045] Now referring to Figures 537 and 538, the end actuator insert 28010 can be inserted into the end actuator 12 of a surgical instrument. Optionally, at least a portion of the end actuator insert 28010, such as the compensator body 28012, the distal lugs 28014a and/or the proximal lug 28014b, may be deformable and/or resilient, for example. When the end actuator insert 28010 is inserted into the end actuator 12, the distal and/or proximal lugs 28014a, 28014b may bend or flex. When the cleats 28014a, 28014b are flexed, for example, the cleats 28014a, 28014b may seek to return to their initial undeformed configuration and may generate a corresponding bending or restoring force, for example. Optionally, when the end actuator insert 28010 is positioned within the end actuator 12, the end actuator insert 28010 may apply a spring load to the end actuator 12. End 28010 may be solid or substantially solid so that an operator can grip insert 28010 when the operator is inserting end actuator insert 28010 and staple cartridge 25000 into end actuator 12.

[0001046] End actuator insert 28010 may be removed from end actuator 12 prior to cutting and/or clamping operations on end actuator 12. Alternatively, end actuator insert 28010 may remain positioned in the end actuator 12 during cutting and/or firing operations. For example, end actuator insert 28010 may be transected by cutting element 25052 as staples are fired from its staple cavities 25002 (Figure 536) in staple cartridge 25000. End 28010 may comprise a fabric thickness compensating material, similar to at least one of the fabric thickness compensators described herein. For example, the end actuator insert 28010 may comprise a polymeric composition, such as a bioabsorbable, biocompatible elastomeric polymer, for example. End actuator insert 28010 may additionally comprise a bioabsorbable polymer such as, for example, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, gelatin, collagen, and/or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example. End actuator insert 28010 may comprise at least one therapeutic agent such as a drug or pharmaceutically active agent.

[0001047] Referring to Figures 539 to 544, a tissue thickness compensator 29020 can be positioned on the end actuator 12 of a surgical instrument. Fabric thickness compensator 29020 may be substantially similar to at least one of the fabric thickness compensators described herein. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 29020 may be sufficiently deformable and resilient so that the deformation of the fabric thickness compensator 29020 generates a bending or restoring force. Referring particularly to Figure 540, a static load can attract the fabric thickness compensator 29020 to the anvil 25060 of the end actuator 12 so that the static load holds the fabric thickness compensator 29020 to the anvil 25060. be neutralized so that the anvil 25060 releases the tissue thickness compensator 29020. Additionally or alternatively, now referring to Figure 541, the tissue thickness compensator 29020 may be secured to the anvil 25060 by means of at least one suction element 29022. For example, a plurality of microsuction elements 29022 on a surface of fabric thickness compensator 29020 may releasably secure fabric thickness compensator 29020 to anvil 25060. Additionally or alternatively, referring to Figure 542, 29024 hook-and-loop fasteners can fasten the 29020 Fabric Thickness Compensator to the 25060 Anvil. For example, a super A fabric thickness compensator surface 29020 may comprise a plurality of hook-shaped fasteners 29024a and an anvil surface 25060 may comprise a plurality of loop-shaped fasteners 29024b, for example. Hook-shaped fasteners 29024a may engage with loop-shaped fasteners 29024b so that fabric thickness compensator 29020 is releasably secured to anvil 25060.

[0001048] Additionally or alternatively, now referring to Figure 543, the fabric thickness compensator 29020 may be attached to the anvil 25060 by means of a strap 29026. The strap 29026 may comprise an elastomeric polymer and/or may be tied or rolled around anvil 25060. When strip 29026 is removed from anvil 25060, fabric thickness compensator 29020 may be released from anvil 25060. To facilitate removal of strip 29026, strip 29026 may be extended and/or cut, for example . In accordance with the invention, a plurality of straps 29026 may secure fabric thickness compensator 29020 to anvil 25060. Alternatively or additionally, now referring to Figure 544, fabric thickness compensator 29020 may be attached to anvil 25060 by means of of a socket 29028 positioned at the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 29020. The socket 29028 may be configured to receive the distal end of the anvil 25060 therein, for example. An alignment lug 29029 on fabric thickness compensator 29020 can be aligned and/or positioned within longitudinal slot 25062 on anvil 25060. For example, alignment lug 29029 can slide into longitudinal slot 25062 as per the thickness compensator of fabric 29020 is positioned over and/or is removed from the anvil 25060.

[0001049] Referring to Figures 545 to 547, a tissue thickness compensator 30020 can be positioned on the anvil 25060 of the actuator end 12 of the surgical instrument. Fabric thickness compensator 30020 may comprise a body 30022 and a pocket 30024. A compensator material 30026 may be retained between the body 30022 and the pocket 30024, for example. The 30026 buffer material may comprise a bioabsorbable polymer such as, for example, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, gelatin, collagen, and/or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example. Additionally or alternatively, the buffer material 30026 may comprise at least one therapeutic agent such as a medicament or pharmaceutically active agent. Fabric thickness compensator 30020 may be deformable and/or resilient, similar to at least one fabric thickness compensator described herein. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 30020 may comprise a polymeric composition such as a bioabsorbable, biocompatible elastomeric polymer, for example. The tissue thickness compensator 30020 may additionally comprise a bioabsorbable polymer such as, for example, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, gelatin, collagen, and/or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example.

[0001050] Referring particularly to Figure 546, the body 30022 of the fabric thickness compensator 30020 may comprise an alignment element 30028 which can be received within the longitudinal slot 25062 of the anvil 25060 when the fabric thickness compensator 30020 is secured to the anvil 25060. The body 30022 may comprise a stepped thickness so that the geometry of the body 30022 substantially matches the geometry of the anvil 25060. Additionally, the body 30022 may comprise longitudinal flanges 30029. For example, a longitudinal flange 30029 may extend to the along each longitudinal side of the body 30022 of the fabric thickness compensator 30020, for example. The longitudinal flanges 30029 can wrap at least partially around the anvil 25060 to secure the fabric thickness compensator 30020 to the anvil 25060. Additionally, the longitudinal flanges 30029 can be resilient enough so that the longitudinal flanges 30029 can flex to accommodate and/or engage anvil 25060, for example. The longitudinal flanges 30029 may exert a pinching force on the anvil 25060 when the flanges 30029 engage the anvil 25060. The pocket 30024 may comprise an indentation 30025. When the fabric thickness compensator 30020 is attached to the anvil 25060, the indentation 30025 may be substantially aligned with longitudinal slot 25062 in anvil 25060, for example. Fabric thickness compensator 30020 may be thinner at indentation 30025 so that translation of cutting element 25052 (Figure 536) separates fabric thickness compensator 30020 where it is thinner.

[0001051] Now referring to Figures 548 and 549, a fabric thickness compensator 30120 may comprise a body 30122 which is configured to retain a compensating material 30026 therein. The fabric thickness compensator 30120 may comprise an alignment element 30128, an indentation 30125 and/or longitudinal flanges 30129. The fabric thickness compensator 30120 may also comprise a latch 30124 which can be moved between an open position and a closed position. When the latch 30124 is in the closed position, as shown in Figure 548, the trim material 30026 can be enclosed within the body 30122 of the fabric thickness compensator 30120 and when the latch 30124 is in the open position, as shown in Figure 549 , the compensating material 30026 may escape from the body 30122. Similar to at least one of the fabric thickness compensators described herein, the fabric thickness compensator 30120 may be deformable and/or resilient. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 30120 may comprise a polymeric composition, such as a bioabsorbable, biocompatible elastomeric polymer, for example. The 30120 tissue thickness compensator may additionally comprise a bioabsorbable polymer such as, for example, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, gelatin, collagen, and/or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example. Due to the resilience of the fabric thickness compensator 30120, at least a portion of the body 30122 can be flexed to move the latch 30124 between the open position and the closed position. The body 30122 of the tissue thickness compensator 30120 may remain attached to the anvil when the anvil is removed from the surgical site. For example, body 30122 may be configured to tear away from any clip that may have captured body 30122 therein.

[0001052] Referring to Figure 550, a fabric thickness compensator 30220 may comprise a body 30222 and a pocket 30224. The compensator material 30026 may be retained between the body 30222 and the pocket 30224, for example. Fabric thickness compensator 30220 may comprise an alignment element, an indentation and/or longitudinal flanges 30229. Additionally, at least one longitudinal flange 30229 may comprise a groove, or slot, 30228 which may be configured to receive a tab 30225 extending from the pocket 30224 of the fabric thickness compensator 30220. In such a case, the engagement of the groove 30228 and the tab 30225 can connect the body 30222 and the pocket 30224. Additionally, in such a case, the connection between the groove 30028 and tab 30025 may confine and/or retain the trim material 30026 within the fabric thickness compensator 30220. Now referring to Figure 551, a pocket 30324 of a fabric thickness compensator 30320 may comprise an anchor 30325 extending up from the same. Additionally, fabric thickness compensator 30320 may comprise a body 30322 having an inlet 30328. Anchor 30325 can extend from pocket 30324 to engage inlet 30328 on body 30322. In such an arrangement, pocket 30324 and body 30222 can confine the 30026 offset material to each other. The fabric thickness compensator 30320 may additionally comprise one or more flanges 30229 which may be mounted on the anvil to retain the body 30322 to the anvil.

[0001053] Now referring to Figure 552, a fabric thickness compensator 30420 may comprise a body 30422 and a pocket 30424. The compensation material 30026 may be retained between the body 30422 and the pocket 30424 of the fabric thickness compensator 30420 Body 30422 may comprise hole 30428 and pocket 30424 may comprise anchor 30425. Anchor 30425 may extend from pocket 30424 and through hole 30428 of body 30422, for example. Anchor 30425 may engage anvil 25060 when fabric thickness compensator 30420 is attached to anvil 25060, for example. Anchor 30525 may be sufficiently deformable and resilient so that anchor 30425 flexes when it engages anvil 25060. Additionally, flexed anchor 30425 may apply a pinching force to anvil 25060 to secure or assist in gripping the anvil 25060. fabric thickness 30420 to anvil 25060. Alternatively, an anchor may not extend completely through a hole in the compensator body. Referring to Figure 553, an anchor 30525 in a pocket 30524 of a 30520 fabric thickness compensator may engage a hole 30528 in a body 30522 of the fabric thickness compensator 30520. Anchor 30525 may engage the hole 30528 to secure pocket 30524 to body 30522. For example, hole 30528 may comprise a necked portion extending into a socket. Anchor 30525 may comprise a gripping edge, which may pass through the necked portion and engage the socket to secure anchor 20525 in hole 30528. Fabric thickness compensator 30520 may also comprise an alignment element, an indentation and/or an indentation. or 30529 longitudinal flanges, for example.

[0001054] Referring to Figures 554 to 556, a tissue thickness compensator 31020 can be configured to engage an anvil 31060 of an end actuator 31012 of a surgical instrument. Fabric thickness compensator 31020 may comprise an outer film 31022, an inner film 31024 and a compensating material 31026 positioned therebetween. Fabric thickness compensator 31020 may be deformable and/or resilient, similar to at least one of the fabric thickness compensators described herein. For example, the 31026 offset material may comprise a polymeric composition, such as a bioabsorbable, biocompatible elastomeric polymer, for example. The tissue thickness compensator 31020 may additionally comprise a bioabsorbable polymer such as, for example, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, gelatin, collagen, and/or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example. Tissue thickness compensator 31020 may comprise at least one therapeutic agent such as a drug or pharmaceutically active agent. The compensating material 31206 of the tissue thickness compensator 31020 may comprise a therapeutic agent.

[0001055] Inner film 31024 may be positioned adjacent to staple forming pockets 31066 on anvil 31060, for example. Referring particularly to Figure 554, the inner film 31024 may comprise a staggered geometry such that the geometry of the inner film 31024 substantially corresponds to the geometry of the anvil 31060. The inner film 31024 may further comprise an alignment ridge 31028, which may be substantially aligned and/or parallel to a longitudinal slot 31062 in anvil 31060, for example. As described in more detail in this document, the inner film 31024 may comprise an inner flange 31025 extending from each longitudinal side of the inner film 31024 and terminating in a latch 31027. The outer film 31022 may comprise a body 31021 and at least an outer flange 31023, for example. Optionally, an outer flange 31023 can extend from each longitudinal side of the body 31021, for example. The outer flange 31023 can be secured to the inner flange 31025 so that the offset material 31026 is retained between the outer film 31022 and the inner film 31024.

[0001056] Referring particularly to Figure 556, the anvil 31060 may comprise an outer surface 31061 and at least one groove 31064 along at least a portion of the outer surface 31061. In accordance with the invention, a latch 31027 on the inner flange 31025 of inner film 31024 can be positioned within a groove 31064. Referring to Figure 555, for example, fabric thickness compensator 31020 can slide around anvil 31060. Grooves 31064 in anvil 31060 can extend to the end distal of the anvil 31060. In such cases, the latches 31027 of the tissue thickness compensator 31020 can slide into the grooves 31064 and along a length of the tissue thickness compensator 31020.

[0001057] Now referring to Figures 557 and 558, a fabric thickness compensator 31120 may comprise a compensation material 31026 and at least one connector 31124. Each connector 31124 may extend around the compensation material 31026 and may terminate in a 31127 latch on opposite ends thereof. Locks 31127 may be positioned in grooves 31064 of anvil 31060 to secure fabric thickness compensator 31120 to anvil 31060. grooves 31164 on anvil 31060 may extend to the distal end of anvil 31060. In such cases, locks 31127 of connectors 31124 may slide into grooves 31064. Alternatively, connectors 31224 may be resilient so that they can flex or snap-fit around anvil 31060. In use, connectors 31224 may retain 31026 offset material in the place until the compensation material 31026 separates from the anvil 31060. In certain circumstances, the connectors 31224 may remain attached to the anvil 31060 and may be removed from the surgical site with the anvil. In other circumstances, the 31224 connectors may separate from the 31060 anvil and may be deployed with the 31026 offset material.

[0001058] Referring to Figures 559 to 565, a fabric thickness compensator 32020 may comprise a body portion 32022, at least one longitudinal flange 32024 and at least one pocket 32026. The fabric thickness compensator 31020 may be deformable and /or resilient, similar to at least one of the fabric thickness compensators described herein. For example, the 31026 offset material may comprise a polymeric composition such as a bioabsorbable, biocompatible elastomeric polymer, for example. The tissue thickness compensator 31020 may additionally comprise a bioabsorbable polymer such as, for example, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, gelatin, collagen, and/or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), for example. Longitudinal flange 32024 may extend along each longitudinal side of body portion 32022. Referring particularly to Figure 562, longitudinal flanges 32024 of fabric thickness compensator 32020 may be configured to engage anvil 25060. For example, fabric thickness compensator 32020 may slide over anvil 25060 and longitudinal flanges 32024 and may wrap at least partially around a portion of anvil 25060. In such cases, flanges 32024 may hold the compensator of fabric thickness 32020 to anvil 25060, for example. Optionally, when the fabric thickness compensator 32020 is attached to the anvil, the body portion 32022 of the fabric thickness compensator 32020 may overlap the staple forming pockets 25066 on the inner surface of the anvil 25060.

[0001059] In addition to the above, a plurality of pockets 32026 may laterally traverse the body portion 32022. Referring particularly to Figure 563, the plurality of pockets 32026 may comprise at least one therapeutic agent such as a drug or pharmaceutically active agent . In accordance with the invention, a plurality of first pockets 32026a may comprise a first therapeutic agent or combination thereof and a plurality of second pockets 32026b may comprise a second therapeutic agent or combination thereof. First pockets 32026a and second pockets 32026b may be positioned alternately along body portion 32022, for example. Additionally, when the first therapeutic agent is released from the first pocket 32026a and the second therapeutic agent is released from the second pocket 32026b, the first and second therapeutic agents can be configured to react with each other. Referring to Figure 565, pockets 32026 can release therapeutic agent(s) retained therein when cutting element 25052 on firing bar 25050 translates along longitudinal slot 25062 on anvil 25060 , for example.

[0001060] Now referring to Figure 566, an end actuator of a surgical stapling instrument may comprise an anvil 32560 and a staple cartridge 32500 comprising a tissue thickness compensator 32520. Similar to the above, the cartridge of staples 32500 may comprise a plurality of staples 32530 contained at least partially therein that are ejectable therefrom to capture the fabric thickness compensator 32520 therein. Also similar to the above, staples 32530 may penetrate fabric thickness compensator 32520 and contact staple forming pockets 32562 defined in anvil 32560. Now referring to Figure 568, anvil 32560 may further comprise a layer 32570 attached thereto which may be configured to retain a fabric thickness compensator 32580 to the anvil 32560. For example, layer 32570 may comprise a loadable layer which may be configured to retain and/or generate an electrostatic charge and attract the 32580 fabric thickness compensator for the same. More specifically, the active or passively actuated Van der Waals molecular force, for example, can hold the 32580 tissue thickness compensator to the 32570 layer. The 32570 chargeable layer can be in electrical communication with a surgical stapling instrument cable that may comprise a control configured to selectively couple the 32570 chargeable layer to a power source and, as a result, allow an electrostatic charge to be selectively generated within the 32570 chargeable layer. For example, the 32570 chargeable layer may comprise conductive electrodes incorporated into a polymer, for example. In either case, the statically charged layer 32570 can attract oppositely charged particles in the fabric thickness compensator 32580 and retain the fabric thickness compensator 32580 to the anvil. Referring now to Fig. 567, the chargeable layer 32570 may comprise a grid, or grid, of conductors 32571 that are in electrical communication with each other. For example, the conductors can be positioned and arranged so that they surround the staple forming pockets 32562 defined in the anvil 32560. In such cases, the staples 32530 can be ejected from the staple cartridge 32500 and then deformed by the anvil. 32560 without capturing the 32571 conductors in them. Under various circumstances, the chargeable layer 32570 may be disconnected from the power supply after the clamps 32530 have been engaged with the fabric thickness compensator 32580 so that the electrostatic charge on the layer 32570 can dissipate. Under other circumstances, the loadable layer 32570 may be decoupled from the power supply before the 32530 clamps are fired. In either case, as the electrostatic charge dissipates, the 32560 anvil can be opened again and the 32570 layer can be moved away from the 32580 fabric thickness compensator. The electrostatic charge may need to dissipate completely before the 32570 layer can be separated from the fabric thickness compensator 32580 while, alternatively, the layer 32570 may be separated from the fabric thickness compensator 32580 before the electrostatic charge on the layer 32570 has been completely dissipated. As a result of the above, fabric thickness compensator 32580 can be attached to anvil 32560 without the use of a chemical adhesive.

[0001061] In addition to the above, layer 32570 can also provide feedback capability for the handle of the surgical stapling instrument. For example, layer 32570 may be pressure sensitive and may be configured to sense pinch pressure applied to it by anvil 32560, for example.

[0001062] In addition to the above, a tissue thickness compensator may be comprised of a biocompatible material. The biocompatible material, such as a foam, may comprise tackifiers, surfactants, fillers, crosslinkers, pigments, dyes, antioxidants and other stabilizers and/or combinations thereof to provide the desired properties of the material. A biocompatible foam may comprise a surfactant. The surfactant can be applied to the surface of the material and/or dispersed in the material. Without being bound by any particular theory, the surfactant applied to the biocompatible material can reduce the surface tension of fluids in contact with the material. For example, the surfactant can reduce the surface tension of the water in contact with the material in order to accelerate the penetration of water into the material. Water can act as a catalyst. The surfactant can increase the hydrophilic capacity of the material.

[0001063] The surfactant may comprise an anionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant and/or a non-ionic surfactant. Examples of surfactants include, but are not limited to, polyacrylic acid, metallose, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, propyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, polyoxyethylene cetyl ether, polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene octyl ether, polyoxyethylene phenyl ether , polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, dialkylphenoxy poly(ethyleneoxy)ethanol and polyoxamers and combinations thereof. The surfactant may comprise a copolymer of polyethylene glycol and polypropylene glycol. The surfactant may comprise a phospholipid surfactant. The phospholipid surfactant may provide antibacterial stabilizing properties and/or disperse other materials in the biocompatible material.

[0001064] The tissue thickness compensator may comprise at least one drug. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise one or more natural materials, non-synthetic materials and/or synthetic materials described herein. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a biocompatible foam comprising gelatin, collagen, hyaluronic acid, oxidized regenerated cellulose, polyglycolic acid, polycaprolactone, polylactic acid, polydioxanone, polyhydroxyalkanoate, polyglecaprone and combinations thereof. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise a film comprising the at least one drug. The fabric thickness compensator may comprise a biodegradable film comprising the at least one drug. The medicament may comprise a liquid, a gel and/or a powder. Medicaments may comprise anti-cancer agents, for example cisplatin, mitomycin and/or adriamycin.

[0001065] The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a biodegradable material to provide elution or controlled release of the at least one drug as the biodegradable material degrades. Biodegradable material can degrade, decompose or lose its structural integrity when it comes into contact with an activator, for example an activator fluid. The activating fluid may comprise saline or any other electrolyte solution, for example. The biodegradable material may come into contact with the activating fluid through conventional techniques, including, but not limited to, spraying, dipping and/or brushing. In use, for example, a surgeon may immerse an end actuator and/or staple cartridge comprising the tissue thickness compensator comprising the at least one drug in an activating fluid comprising a saline solution such as sodium chloride. , calcium chloride and/or potassium chloride. The tissue thickness compensator can release the drug as the tissue thickness compensator degrades. Elution or release of drug from the tissue thickness compensator can be characterized by a rapid initial elution or release rate and a slower elution or sustained release rate.

[0001066] According to the invention, a tissue thickness compensator, for example, may be comprised of a biocompatible material which may comprise an oxidizing agent. The oxidizing agent may be an organic peroxide and/or an inorganic peroxide. Examples of oxidizing agents may include, but are not limited to, hydrogen peroxide, urea peroxide, calcium peroxide and magnesium peroxide, and sodium percarbonate. The oxidizing agent may comprise peroxygen-based oxidizing agents and hypoalite-based oxidizing agents, for example, hydrogen peroxide, hypochlorous acid, hypochlorites, hypocodes and percarbonates. The oxidizing agent may comprise alkali metal chlorites, hypochlorites and perborates, for example sodium chlorite, sodium hypochlorite and sodium perborate. The oxidizing agent may comprise vanadate. The oxidizing agent may comprise ascorbic acid. The oxidizing agent may comprise an active oxygen generator. In accordance with the invention, a fabric scaffold may comprise biocompatible material which comprises an oxidizing agent.

[0001067] The biocompatible material may comprise a liquid, a gel and/or a powder. The oxidizing agent may comprise microparticles and/or nanoparticles, for example. For example, the oxidizing agent can be ground into microparticles and/or nanoparticles. The oxidizing agent can be incorporated into the biocompatible material by suspending the oxidizing agent in a polymer solution. The oxidizing agent can be incorporated into the biocompatible material during the lyophilization process. After lyophilization, the oxidizing agent can be attached to the cell walls of the biocompatible material to interact with the tissue upon contact with it. The oxidizing agent may not be chemically bonded to the biocompatible material. A dry percarbonate powder can be incorporated into a biocompatible foam to provide a prolonged biological effect through the slow release of oxygen. A dry powder of percarbonate can be incorporated into a polymer fiber in a non-woven structure to provide a prolonged biological effect through the slow release of oxygen. The biocompatible material may comprise an oxidizing agent and a medicament, for example doxycycline and ascorbic acid.

[0001068] The biocompatible material may comprise a rapid release oxidizing agent and/or a slower sustained release oxidizing agent. The elution or release of the oxidizing agent from the biocompatible material can be characterized by a rapid initial elution or release rate and a slower elution or prolonged release rate. The oxidizing agent can generate oxygen when the oxidizing agent comes into contact with body fluid, eg water. Examples of bodily fluids may include, but are not limited to, blood, plasma, peritoneal fluid, cerebrospinal fluid, urine, lymphatic fluid, synovial fluid, vitreous fluid, saliva, gastrointestinal luminal contents, and/or bile. Without being bound by any particular theory, the oxidizing agent can reduce cell death, improve tissue viability and/or maintain the mechanical strength of tissue that can be damaged during cutting and/or stapling.

[0001069] The biocompatible material may comprise at least one microparticle and/or a nanoparticle. The biocompatible material may comprise one or more of the natural materials, non-synthetic materials and synthetic materials described herein. The biocompatible material may comprise particles having an average diameter of about 10 nm to about 100 nm and/or about 10 µm to about 100 µm, for example 45 to 50 nm and/or 45 to 50 µm. The biocompatible material may comprise biocompatible foam which comprises at least one microparticle and/or nanoparticle incorporated therein. The microparticle and/or nanoparticle may not be chemically bonded to the biocompatible material. The microparticle and/or the nanoparticle can provide controlled drug release. the microparticle and/or the nanoparticle may comprise at least one drug. The microparticle and/or nanoparticle may comprise a hemostatic agent, an antimicrobial agent and/or an oxidizing agent, for example. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a biocompatible foam comprising a hemostatic agent comprising oxidized regenerated cellulose, an antimicrobial agent comprising doxycycline and/or gentamicin, and/or an oxidizing agent comprising a percarbant. The microparticle and/or nanoparticle can provide controlled drug release for up to three days, for example.

[0001070] The microparticle and/or the nanoparticle can be incorporated into the biocompatible material during a manufacturing process. For example, a biocompatible polymer, for example a PGA/PCL, may be contacted with a solvent, for example dioxane to form a mixture. The biocompatible polymer can be ground to form particles. The dry particles, with or without ORC particles, can be contacted with the mixture to form a suspension. The suspension can be lyophilized to form a biocompatible foam comprising PGA/PCL which has dry particles and/or ORC particles incorporated therein.

[0001071] The fabric thickness compensators or layers disclosed herein may be comprised of an absorbable polymer, for example. A fabric thickness compensator may be comprised of foam, film, fibrous fabric, fibrous non-woven PGA, PGA/PCL (poly(glycolic acid-co-caprolactone)), PLA/PCL (poly(lactic acid-co-polycaprolactone) ), PLLA/PCL, PGA/TMC (poly(glycolic acid-trimethylene co-carbonate)), PDS, PEPBO or other absorbable polyurethane, polyester, polycarbonate, polyorthoesters, polyanhydrides, polyesteramides and/or polyoxaesters, for example. According to the invention, a tissue thickness compensator can be comprised of PGA/PLA (poly(glycolic acid-co-lactic acid)) and/or PDS/PLA (poly(p-dioxanone-co-lactic acid)) , for example. According to the invention, a fabric thickness compensator may be comprised of an organic material, for example. A tissue thickness compensator can be comprised of carboxymethyl cellulose, sodium alginate, cross-linked hyaluronic acid and/or oxidized regenerated cellulose, for example. In accordance with the invention, a fabric thickness compensator may comprise a durometer in the ranges 3-7 Shore A (30-50 Shore OO) with a maximum hardness of 15 Shore A (65 Shore OO), for example. A fabric thickness compensator may be subjected to 40% compression under a load of 13 N (3 lbf), 60% compression under a load of 27 N (6 lbf), and/or 80% compression under a load of of 89 N (20 lbf), for example. One or more gases, such as air, nitrogen, carbon dioxide and/or oxygen, for example, may be bubbled through and/or contained within the fabric thickness compensator. A fabric thickness compensator may comprise microspheres therein that comprise between approximately 50% and approximately 75% of the hardness of material comprising the fabric thickness compensator.

[0001072] According to the invention, a tissue thickness compensator may comprise hyaluronic acid, nutrients, fibrin, thrombin, platelet-rich plasma, sulfasalazine (Azulfidine® - binding of 5ASA+Sulfapyridine diazo)) - prodrug - bacterial colonic (Azoreductase), mesalamine (5ASA with different prodrug configurations for delayed release), asacol® (5ASA + coated Eu- dragit-S - pH > 7 (coating dissolution)), Pentasa® (5ASA + ethylcellulose coated - pH/time dependent slow release), Mesasal® (5ASA + coated Eudragit-L - pH > 6), Olsalazine (5ASA + 5ASA - colonic bacterial (Azoreductase)), Balsalazide (5ASA + 4Aminobenzoyl-B-alanine ) - colonic bacterial (Azoreductase)), granulated mesalamine, Lialda (delay and SR formulation of mesalamine), HMPL-004 (herbal blend that can inhibit the activation of TNF-alpha, interleukin-1 beta and nuclear-kappa B), CCX282-B (oral chemokine receptor antagonist that interferes with drug trafficking) T lymphocytes in the intestinal mucosa), Rifaximin (non-absorbable broad-spectrum antibiotic), infliximab, murine chimeric (monoclonal antibody directed against TNF-alpha-approved for the reduction of signs/symptoms and maintenance of clinical remission in adult patients - pediatric patients with fistula-producing and moderate/severe luminal Crohn's disease who had an inadequate response to conventional therapy), adalimumab, Total Human IgG1 (anti-TNF-alpha monoclonal antibody - approved for the reduction of signs/symptoms of disease Crohn's disease and for the induction and maintenance of clinical remission in adult patients with moderately/severely active Crohn's disease who have inadequately responded to conventional therapies or who have become infliximab intolerant), Certolizumab pegoll, humanized anti-TNF' FAB (antibody fragment monoclonal linked to polyethylene glycol - approved for the reduction of signs/symptoms of Crohn's disease and for the induction and maintenance of a response in adult patients with moderate/severe disease with inadequate response to conventional therapies), Natalizumab, first non-TNF-alpha inhibitor (approved biological compound for Crohn's disease), humanized monoclonal IgG4 antibody (targeted against alpha-4 integrin - FDA approved for induction and maintenance of clinical response and remission in patients with moderate/severe disease with evidence of inflammation and who have had an inadequate response or are unable to tolerate conventional therapies against Crohn's disease and TNF-alpha inhibitors), concomitant immunomodulators given potentially with infliximab, azathioprine 6-Mercaptopurine (purine synthesis inhibitor - pro-drug), methotrexate (binds the enzyme dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) which participates in the synthesis of tetrahydrofolate, inhibits all purine synthesis), antihypertensive therapy allopurinol and thioprine, PPI, H2 for acid suppression to protect the healing line, C-Diff - Flagyl, Vancomycin (faecal translocation treatment; probiotics; repopulation of normal endoluminal flora), and/or Rifaximin (treatment of excessive bacterial proliferation (notably, hepatic encephalopathy); not absorbed in the GI tract with action on intraluminal bacteria), for example.

[0001073] As described herein, a fabric thickness compensator can compensate for variations in the thickness of fabric that is captured in staples ejected from a staple cartridge and/or contained in a row of staples, for example. In other words, certain staples in a staple line can capture thick pieces of fabric, while other staples in the staple line can capture thin pieces of fabric. Under such circumstances, the fabric thickness compensator can assume different heights or thicknesses on the staples and apply a compressive force to the tissue captured by the staples regardless of whether the captured tissue is thick or thin. In accordance with the invention, a fabric thickness compensator can compensate for variations in fabric hardness. For example, certain staples in a staple line can capture highly compressible portions of tissue, while other staples in the staple line can capture portions of tissue that are less compressible. Under such circumstances, the fabric thickness compensator may be configured to assume a lower height on staples that have captured tissue that has a lower compressibility or higher hardness, and correspondingly a greater height on staples that have captured tissue. that has a higher compressibility or lower hardness, for example. In any event, a fabric thickness compensator, regardless of whether it compensates for variations in fabric thickness and/or variations in fabric hardness, for example, may be called a 'fabric compensator' and/or 'compensator', for example.

[0001074] The devices described here may be designed to be discarded after a single use, or they may be designed to be used multiple times. In either case, however, the device may be refurbished for reuse after at least one use. Overhaul may include any combination of the steps of disassembling the device, followed by cleaning or replacing particular parts, and subsequent reassembly. In particular, the device may be dismantled, and any number of particular parts or parts of the device may be selectively exchanged or removed, in any combination. After cleaning and/or replacing particular parts, the device can be reassembled for subsequent use in a refurbishment facility or by a surgical team immediately prior to a surgical procedure. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that refurbishing a device can use a variety of techniques for disassembly, cleaning/replacement, and reassembly. The use of such techniques, and the resulting refurbished device, are all within the scope of this application.

[0001075] Preferably, the invention described herein will be processed prior to surgery. First, a new or used instrument is obtained and, if necessary, cleaned. The instrument can then be sterilized. In a sterilization technique, the instrument is placed in a closed and sealed container, such as a plastic or TYVEK bag. The container and instrument are then placed in the field of radiation that can penetrate the container, such as gamma radiation, X-rays, or high-energy electrons. Radiation kills bacteria on the instrument and container. The sterilized instrument can then be stored in a sterile container. The sterile container keeps the instrument sterile until it is opened in the medical facility.

[0001076] Any patent, publication or other descriptive material, in whole or in part, which is incorporated by reference into the present invention is incorporated by the present invention only to the extent that the materials incorporated do not conflict with definitions , statements or other descriptive material presented in this description. Accordingly, and to the extent necessary, the description as explicitly set forth herein supersedes any conflicting material incorporated herein by reference. Any material, or portion thereof, which is incorporated by reference in the present invention, but which conflicts with existing definitions, statements, or other descriptive materials set forth herein, will be incorporated herein only to the extent that no conflict will arise between the incorporated material and the existing description material.

[0001077] While this invention has been described as having exemplary designs, the present invention may be further modified within the spirit and scope of the description. This application is therefore intended to cover any variations, uses, or adaptations of the invention using its general principles. Additionally, this application is intended to cover deviations from the present disclosure that may occur with known or customary practice in the art to which this invention relates.

Claims (8)

1. Compensator (24220) attachable to an anvil (22060) of a clamping instrument, the anvil (22060) including a forming surface, and the compensator (24220) comprising: a clamping layer (24226) configured to be fixed to the anvil (22060); a frame (24222) attached to the anchor layer (24226), the frame (24222) comprising: a plurality of frame layers (24227) composed of a biocompatible material; and a plurality of cavities (24223), wherein the layers (24227) and cavities (24223) define a matrix favorable to tissue and cell ingrowth, characterized in that the plurality of framework layers (24227) comprise a first layer and a second layer, wherein a first drug is absorbed within the first layer and a second drug is absorbed within the second layer, and wherein the first drug is different from the second drug. 2. Compensator (24220), according to claim 1, characterized in that each frame layer (24227) is comprised of a weft of fibers. 3. Compensator (24220) according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the first layer comprises a first fiber pattern and the second layer comprises a second fiber pattern, and wherein the first fiber pattern is different from the second fiber pattern. 4. Compensator (24220) according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that the first layer comprises fibers oriented in a first direction, wherein the second layer comprises fibers oriented in a second direction, and where the first direction is oblique to the second direction. 5. Compensator (24220) according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that the first layer is composed of a first material and the second layer is composed of a second material, and wherein the first material is different from the second material. Compensator (24220) according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that the frame (24222) comprises an outer surface, and wherein each cavity (24223) comprises an opening in the outer surface. 7. Compensator (24220), according to any one of claims 1 to 6, characterized in that: the frame (24222) is a structural matrix; the backbone layers (24227) are matrix layers composed of the bioabsorbable material; wells (24223) are wells; and wherein the structural matrix is defined by the matrix layers and the wells. 8. A stapling assembly for use with a clamping instrument, the stapling assembly comprising: an anvil (22060) comprising a forming surface, characterized in that it further comprises the compensator (24220) as defined in any one of claims 1 at 7, wherein the anchor layer (24226) is attached to the anvil (22060).

Images